+

Dialog SW 9.xx
Service Manual
E n g l i s h
Edition 1 -2010

M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx SM EN 1-2010

Dialog+ SW 9.xx Service Manual 1/2010 I

Contact your Local

B. Braun Representative
for Service Support

B. Braun Avitum AG 34209 Melsungen

Germany
Tel. No.: +49 5661 713500 (Günter Nissen)
E-Mail: [email protected]

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_TOC_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx Service Manual 1/2010 II

Valid for the following machine type:

For Software ≥ 9.xx

Dialog+: from serial no. 100000

Dialog+ HDF-Online: from serial no. 150000

Registration Number:

S e rvi ce Manu al s w i th a re gi s tr a ti on num be r a re inc lud ed in th e u p da te s erv ic e!

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_TOC_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx Service Manual 1/2010 III
Copyright This document is the property of B. Braun Avitum AG with all rights reserved.
Commissioning and Service Only trained personnel must service the Dialog+, i.e. repair, maintenance, software
installation, firmware update, retrofitting and commissioning of the Dialog+.
Servicing must only be performed with proper tools, calibration equipment and be in
accordance with the most recent revision of this service manual/technical information,
which must be clearly and thoroughly understood.
Prevent Electrical Shock Hazard Switch off the Dialog+ and disconnect unit from mains if you have to open the
machine for servicing. Do not touch any exposed wiring or conductive surfaces while
the Dialog+ is opened. The voltages present when electrical power is connected to the
Dialog+ can cause serious injury or death.
ESD Information Pay attention to ESD information, because electronic components are sensitive to
electrostatic discharges.
High Voltage If a battery option is present in the machine:
! in TFT Monitor High voltage can be present at the backlight inverter board BIB in the TFT monitor,
even if the machine has been disconnected from mains. Pull out the battery
compartment in the base platform and switch off the battery voltage before opening
the machine.
Protective Conductor in TFT Housing If the TFT housing had to be opened during a service job, the tight seat of the
protective conductors in the TFT housing must be checked.
TSM Service Program Only activate the TSM service program for service activities. It is prohibited to connect
a patient to the Dialog+ and to run a therapy if the TSM service program is activated
in the Dialog+. If the TSM service program is activated the complete alarm system is
disabled. The TSM service program is started in the service mode: digital board, service
switch S1, position 2.
Software The software is installed in the software mode: digital board, service switch S1,
position 3.
Therapy Mode After completion of all procedures switch back to the therapy mode: digital board,
service switch S1, position 0.
Calibration Only perform a calibration after the Dialog+ has reached working temperature and the
machine was disinfected and decalcified. Save the calibration data (CFC) before you
exit the TSM service program: TSM Main Menu, File Operations, Save Calibration Data.
Tubing Tubing must be replaced only by the same tubing type/length and identical installation
manner.
Make sure that the tubings in the machine are not kinked or twisted after servicing
(e.g. if sub-racks are pulled out and inserted again). The tubing must not touch
moving/rotating components (e.g. motors of gear pumps).
Wiring Wiring must be replaced only by the same cable type/length and identical installation
manner. The cables must not touch moving/rotating components (e.g. motors of gear
pumps).
Prevent Chemical Burns and Scalding During servicing on running machines: prevent chemical burns and scalding of the skin
due to the penetration of disinfectant or hot liquid.
Contaminated Machines Protective gear should be worn in case of servicing of assumed contaminated
machines.
Cover in Rear Door Servicing of mechanical assembly groups (components in contact with fluid): the cover
for the switch mode power supply microcontroller SMPS-MC in the rear door must be
assembled during servicing because it serves as a spray protection.
O-Rings Always check o-rings from disassembled groups/components and replace if necessary.
Figures The displayed figures can differ slightly from the machines on site, due to different
hardware statuses.
Fuses If fuses are replaced they must exactly match the type and rating specified by the
manufacturer in the spare parts list/technical information. Where applicable: fuses
must be approved by UL/CSA.
Spare Parts Only use original spare parts manufactured and sold by B. Braun Avitum AG.
Disposal and Taking Back Dispose spare parts (e.g. boards or batteries) according to local disposal guidelines or
of Spare Parts send back to B. Braun Avitum AG free of charge (see chapter 7).
System Configuration The system configuration saved on a diskette must be downloaded to an other Dialog+
machine only if:
• the hardware matches and
• the identical software version number is present.
Function Check Check the respective function of the assembly group/component after servicing. A
complete function check must be performed after every service, according to the
operating manual.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_TOC_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx Service Manual 1/2010 IV

Table of Contents Page

1. Installation and Commissioning 1-1

2. Technical System Description 2-1

3. Repair Instructions 3-1

4. TSM Service Program 4-1

5. Technical Safety Inspection with Preventive Maintenance 5-1

6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 6-1

7. Spare Parts List 7-1

8. Appendix 8-1

8.1 ESD/EMC Information 8-2

8.1.1 Electrostatic Discharge ESD 8-2

8.1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 8-4

8.2 Technical Information -

8.3 Assembly Instructions -

8.4 Field Service Information -

8.5 Instruction Leaflets -

9. Edition/Updates Service Manual 9-1

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_TOC_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx Service Manual 1/2010 V

Conventions

Symbol Description

Attention
The symbol gives information, which are safety relevant for
the Dialog+ and must be observed.

Information
The symbol gives additional information, which should be
observed.

Tips
The symbol gives additional hints, which can be helpful.

Handling
The symbol gives information for a handling at or in the
machine, i.e. during a calibration, disassembly or assembly.

Calibration
The symbol appears for necessary calibration measures.

Calibration Equipment/Tools
The symbol gives remarks for necessary calibration
equipment/tools, i.e. during a calibration, disassembly or
assembly.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_TOC_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx Service Manual 1/2010 VI

Service Manual The edition of this service manual is for the maintenance and repair of the
Dialog+ machine with a software ≥ 9.01. The service manual is subject to
amendments.
Service Training A service training is essential to meet the B. Braun standard operating
procedures for qualified service and support.
The user of this documentation should only use this documentation in
combination with a participation in a B. Braun service training.
The user of this documentation should have the following qualifications and
prerequisites:
1. Mechanics, digital/analogue techniques, optoelectronics, measurement and
PC techniques.
2. Participation in a B. Braun service training to accomplish qualified
maintenance, repair and service support.
3. Availability of approved and calibrated test equipment and tools given in
this service manual.
Contact your local B. Braun representative or dealer for detailed information
concerning training courses.
B. Braun Avitum AG
34209 Melsungen, Germany
Tel.: +49 5661 712718
Fax.: +49 5661 752718
E-Mail: [email protected]
Technical Safety Inspection Perform regular technical safety inspections as described in chapter 5 of this
service manual to ensure the safety of the machine.
Instructions for Use An instructions for use can be ordered at your local B. Braun representative or
dealer.
ESD/EMC Information Please observe the ESD/EMC information (see appendix for additional
information):
• ESD: electrostatic discharge
• EMC: electromagnetic compatibility
Spare Parts Only original spare parts manufactured and sold by B. Braun are applicable.
Please provide part number and description respectively when ordering any
spare parts. Please order your spare parts at your local B. Braun representative
or dealer.
B. Braun Avitum AG
34209 Melsungen, Germany
Tel. No.: +49 5661 713662
E-Mail: [email protected]
[email protected]
The main assembly groups are defined according to the spare parts list. The
main assembly groups are especially:
• All pcb's (printed circuit boards)
• Pumps
• DF block
• Ultrafiltration
• Blood leak detector
• Safety air detector
• Heater
Tamper or repairs in these assembly groups are not permissible (due to
calibration, ESD, multi-layer pcb's and the application of SMT (SMT = surface
mounted technology).
Calibration Service All calibration devices must be approved and registered with an identification
number. The calibration equipment is subject to the B. Braun calibration service
and must be checked and recalibrated in regular intervals, to meet the B. Braun
standard operating procedures SOPs. Only approved and registered calibration
equipment must be applied for servicing.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_TOC_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 1. Commissioning 1/2010 1-1

Copyright This document is the property of B. Braun Avitum AG with all rights reserved.
Commissioning and Service Only trained personnel must service the Dialog+, i.e. repair, maintenance, software installation, firmware
update, retrofitting and commissioning of the Dialog+.
Servicing must only be performed with proper tools, calibration equipment and be in accordance with the
most recent revision of this service manual/technical information, which must be clearly and thoroughly
understood.
Prevent Electrical Shock Hazard Switch off the Dialog+ and disconnect unit from mains if you have to open the machine for servicing.
Do not touch any exposed wiring or conductive surfaces while the Dialog+ is opened. The voltages present
when electrical power is connected to the Dialog+ can cause serious injury or death.
ESD Information Pay attention to ESD information, because electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
High Voltage If a battery option is present in the machine:
in TFT Monitor High voltage can be present at the backlight inverter board BIB in the TFT monitor, even if the machine has
! been disconnected from mains. Pull out the battery compartment in the base platform and switch off the
battery voltage (remove fuse) before opening the machine.
Protective Conductor in TFT Housing If the TFT housing had to be opened during a service job, the tight seat of the protective conductors in the
TFT housing must be checked.
TSM Service Program Only activate the TSM service program for service activities. It is prohibited to connect a patient to the
Dialog+ and to run a therapy if the TSM service program is activated in the Dialog+. If the TSM service
program is activated the complete alarm system is disabled. The TSM service program is started in the service
mode: digital board, service switch S1, position 2.
Software The software is installed in the software mode: digital board, service switch S1, position 3.
Therapy Mode After completion of all procedures switch back to the therapy mode: digital board, service switch S1,
position 0.
Calibration Only perform a calibration after the Dialog+ has reached working temperature, and the machine was
disinfected and decalcified. You should save the calibration data to the hard disk drive before you exit the
TSM service program: TSM Main Menu, File Operations, Save Calibration Data.
Prevent Chemical Burns and Scalding During servicing on running machines: prevent chemical burns and scalding of the skin due to the
penetration of disinfectant or hot liquid.
Contaminated Machines Protective gear should be worn in case of servicing of assumed contaminated machines.
Cover in Rear Door Servicing of mechanical assembly groups (components in contact with fluid): the cover in the rear door must
be assembled during servicing because it serves as a spray protection for the SMPS-MC.
Tubing Tubing must be replaced only by the same tubing type/length and identical installation manner.
Make sure that the tubings in the machine are not kinked or twisted after servicing (e.g. if sub-racks are
pulled out and inserted again). The tubing must not touch moving/rotating components (e.g. motors of gear
pumps).
Wiring Wiring must be replaced only by the same cable type/length and identical installation manner. The cables
must not touch moving/rotating components (e.g. motors of gear pumps).
Fuses If fuses are replaced they must exactly match the type and rating specified by the manufacturer in the spare
parts list/technical information. Where applicable: fuses must be approved by UL/CSA.
Spare Parts Only use original spare parts manufactured and sold by B. Braun Avitum AG.
Instructions for Use Please pay attention to the information in the instructions for use
Check Machine Check completeness of machine and transport damages after unpacking.
Commissioning Do not start machine if a safe operation is not guaranteed.
Electrical Installation The electrical installation must correspond with national regulations for initial operation of the unit (e.g. IEC
publications). The machine must not be operated in hazardous locations or rooms. The potential equalisation
must be in accordance with national requirements (e.g. IEC publications)
Mains Voltage Supply The mains voltage supply must correspond with the mains voltage on the unit type plate!
Ambient Temperature Before the Dialog+ is switched on the machine must have room temperature (see instructions for use,
chapter 15).
Water Installation The installation must be in accordance with national regulations e.g. DVGW work sheet W503 for
haemodialysis equipment and VDE 0753 (rules of application for haemodialysis equipment).
A pipe disconnector is not necessary if a water softener or water softener with built-in reverse osmosis
system is installed. A nonreturn valve and a bleed pipe are adequate. Please see DVGW work sheet W 503,
section 4.4 and VDE 0753 part 4 (Rules of application for haemodialysis equipment).
Water Quality Only water of the highest quality should be applied. Please consider the following, especially for bicarbonate
dialysis:
• Inlet water shall be free of Mg++ and Ca++.
Central Hot Cleaning System If the machine is connected to a central hot cleaning system a high temperature tubing must be used for the
water inlet.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 1. Commissioning 1/2010 1-2

Legend

1. Type Plate

2. Canister Holder

3. Potential Equalisation Bolt

4. Main Cord

5. Central Concentrate Supply Option

1 6. Tubing Connection Water Inlet
• PVC tubing 10 x 3 mm (red)
(fasten with two single ear clamps 19.5)
• Tubing length: approx. 3 m

6.1 Tubing Connection Water Inlet for Osmosis Device

with Hot Disinfection of the Loop Line
• Silicone tubing 8 x 3.2 mm (high temperature tubing, red)
(fasten with two single ear clamps 19.5)

7. Tubing Connection Dialysate Outlet

• PVC tubing 10 x 3 mm (black)
(fasten with a single ear clamp 19.5 and a tubing clamp 12-
20 mm)
2 • Tubing length: approx. 3 m
• Drain height: max. 80 cm
3
8. Emergency Power Supply/Battery Option
4
5
6
7
8

Fig.: Dialog+ Rear View

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 1. Commissioning 1/2010 1-3

Table of Contents Page

1.1 Commissioning Check List 1-4
1.1.1 Measurement Circuits for the Measurement of the Electrical 1-6
Safety According to EN 62353/60601-1

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 1. Commissioning 1/2010 1-4

1.1 Commissioning Check List

For Dialog+ SW 9.xx The commissioning (putting into service) shall be performed and documented before the machine
is handed over to the responsible organisation (user), according to the specified check list, with
reference to the service manual and instructions for use.

REF {Type/Typ}:................................................. SN {Serien-No./Nr.}: ................................................

Year of Purchase: ....................... Responsible Organisation (User): .....................................................

.........................................................................................................................................................................

Operating Hours: .................................... h Inventory No.: ..................................................................

SW Version: ...........................................

Manufacturer: B. Braun Avitum AG

34209 Melsungen, Germany
Check List OK
Note: Text in { } brackets is information for the execution of the check list!

1. Visual Inspection ‰

1.1 {Machine: clean/complete; no damages/moisture influences or loose assemblies; no moveable parts touching tubings or wires; casters are moveable;
type plate legible}
1.2 {Check tight seat and damages of mains supply (power supply cord, strain relief), potential equalisation cable, staff call/data lines (if present) and
connectors}

2. Protective Earth Resistance According to EN 62353

2.1 Protective Earth Resistance:
< 0.3 [Ω] {note highest value}: ................................................ [Ω] ‰
{(Machine incl. power supply cord. Move the power supply cord during the check. Thus possible loose connections can be detected. Data lines and
potential equalisation cable must not be connected during the check of the of the protective earth resistance (see figure 1)}
{Measurement points:}
{Exterior: Potential equalisation bolt, rinsing bridge (dialyser inlet and outlet)}
{Interior: Heater body (top), rear door (top left corner), frame (rear), housing cover (top left), front door (top left)}
{Monitor: Monitor (one of the screws in the front panel/housing}

3. Install Machine ‰

3.1 {Connect water inlet to the metal tubing connector and fasten with single ear clamp.
Connect dialysate outlet to plastic tubing connector and fasten with tubing clamp.}

3.2 {Connect central supply for concentrate (central supply option) and deaerate tubings}

3.3 {Assemble holder for disinfectant (if option present)}

3.4 {Assemble dialyser holder}

3.5 {Assemble filter holder. Insert DF filter (option)}

3.6 {Assemble DF filter/HDF filter (if option present)}

4. Function Inspection
{Pay attention to the filling procedure of the machine to prevent dry run of the heater!}

4.1 Switch on machine, fill and rinse: - {Switch machine in Test 1.10 Degassing and Heating menu and fill with water until ‰
water flows out of the dialysate outlet. Then rinse in disinfection (approx. 5 minutes).}

4.2 Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement ABPM Option present no ‰ yes ‰ ‰

4.2.1 ABPM Option: - Measurement on a test person is plausible ‰

4.3 Customer Specific System Setting: - {Switch machine in TSM Service Program: Execute Treatment Support (calibrate PE offset for ‰
altitudes > 1000 m}

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 1. Commissioning 1/2010 1-5

Check List OK
Note: Text in { } brackets is information for the execution of the check list! SN {Serien-No./Nr.}............................................

5. Setting into Service According to Instructions for Use with Electrical Safety Check According to
EN 62353/EN 60601-1
5.1 Applied Accessories/Disposables: - Applied line system:
Name: ......................................................................................................................................................................................

5.2 Switch on machine: - Self-test passed {and 15 minutes therapy with UF safety check} ‰

- Ultrafiltration comparison measurement 15 minutes with UF rate 500 ml/h: ......................... [ml] ‰
(125 ml UF volume ±15 ml)

5.3 Temperature: - Comparison measurement {at dialyser coupling}, at 37 oC (-1.5; +0.5): ......................... [oC] ‰

5.4 Conductivity: - Comparison measurement {at dialyser coupling}, e.g. 14.3 mS/cm (±0.2): ................. [mS/cm] ‰

5.5 Equipment Leakage Current:

{All water connections and data lines must be connected during the check of the equipment leakage current (see figure 2)}
≤ 0.5 [mA] - During heat-up phase {change mains polarity and note highest value}: ....................... [mA] ‰

5.6 Patient Leakage Current:

{All water connections and data lines must be connected during the check of the patient leakage current (see figure 3)}

< 10 [µA] AC - Under normal conditions {at dialyser coupling}, conductivity at 13 – 15 mS/cm: ........................ [µA] ‰

5.7 Safety Air Detector (SAD): - Test alarm function (visual/audible) passed ‰

5.8 Disinfection: - Start ‰

Applied Measurement Equipment:

Electrical Safety: ........................................................................................ * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Conductivity: ............................................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Temperature: ............................................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Pressure: ....................................................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Balance: ........................................................................................................ * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Pressure Manometer: ............................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Other Measurement Device: ................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

......................................................................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

* If applicable, please enter the type and identification number of the equipment used.

Comments:

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Next Inspection Date: ............................................................................................................................................................

The commissioning was performed and the Name Service Technician: Name of Company:
machine was hand over to the responsible ...................................................................................
organisation (user).
................................................................................... .................................................................
Date/Signature

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 1. Commissioning 1/2010 1-6

1.1.1 Measurement Circuits for Measurement of Electrical Safety

According to IEC 62353/60601-1
Protective earth (ground)

L, N Supply mains terminals PE Protective earth terminal

MP Mains part AP Applied part

Measuring device M Residual current meter with frequency

MD response as MD

Resistance measurement equipment

Part of enclosure not protectively earthed Connection to accessible conductive parts

Table 1: Legend of Abbreviations and Symbols

Protective Earth Resistance

MP AP
L Test current: ≥ 200 mA
The test current must be measured in both
N directions.
PE

Fig. 1: Protective Earth Resistance

M Equipment Leakage Current:

L(N) MP AP
• Differential Measurement
L

N
N(L)

PE
Fig. 2: Equipment Leakage Current

Patient Leakage Current

L MP AP

N
PE

MD
Fig. 3: Patient Leakage Current

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2-1

Table of Contents Page

General Information 2-4

2.1 Overview Sub-Racks 2-5
2.1.1 Legend Overview Sub-Racks 2-5
2.2 Top Level Sub-Rack 2-6
2.2.1 Legend Top Level Sub-Rack 2-6
2.3 Basic Board BB 2-7
2.3.1 Legend Basic Board 2-7
2.4 Power Board Valves PBV 2-8
2.4.1 Legend Power Board Valves 2-8
2.5 Power Board Motors PBM 2-9
2.5.1 Legend Power Board Motors 2-9
2.6 Digital Board DB 2-10
2.6.1 Legend Digital Board 2-10
2.7 Analog Board AB 2-11
2.7.1 Legend Analog Board 2-11
2.8 HDF Online Board HOB 2-12
2.8.1 Legend HDF Online Board 2-12
2.9 UF Sub-Rack 2-13
2.9.1 Legend UF Sub-Rack 2-13
2.10 UF Sub-Rack HDF Online 2-14
2.10.1 Legend UF Sub-Rack HDF Online 2-14
2.11 DF Sub-Rack 2-15
2.11.1 Legend DF Sub-Rack 2-15
2.12 Water Sub-Rack 2-16
2.12.1 Legend Water Sub-Rack 2-16
2.13 Rinsing Bridge 2-17
2.13.1 Legend Rinsing Bridge 2-17
2.14 Rear Door 2-18
2.14.1 Legend Rear Door 2-18
2.15 Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC 2-19
2.15.1 Legend Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller 2-19
2.16 TFT Monitor 2-20
2.16.1 Legend TFT Monitor 2-20
2.17 Front Door 2-21
2.17.1 Legend Front Door 2-21

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2-2

2.18 Level Regulation Module 2-22

2.18.1 Legend Level Regulation Module 2-22
2.18.2 Flow Diagram Level Regulation Module 2-23
2.19 Flow Diagrams 2-24
2.19.1 Dialog+ 2-24
2.19.2 Dialog+ with BIC Option and DF Filter Option 2-25
2.19.3 Dialog+ HDF Online 2-26
2.19.4 Legend Flow Diagram 2-27
2.20 Description Flow Diagram 2-29
2.20.1 Water Inlet Section with Water Block 2-29
2.20.2 Degassing Circuit with Temperature System 2-30
2.20.3 Dialysate Processing 2-31
2.20.4 Central Bicarbonate and Concentrate Supply (Option) 2-32
2.20.5 BIC Cartridge Holder (Option) 2-32
2.20.6 Balance Chamber System 2-33
2.20.7 Working Principle Balance Chamber System 2-33
2.20.8 Ultrafiltration and Rinsing Bridge 2-35
2.20.9 Chemical Thermal Disinfection Program 2-36
2.21 Block Diagram 2-38
2.21.1 Legend Block Diagram 2-39
2.22 Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC 2-42
2.22.1 Block Diagram SMPS-MC 2-42
2.22.2 System Integration SMPS-MC 2-43
2.22.3 Component Layout SMPS-MC 2-44
2.22.4 Wiring Diagram SMPS-MC with Battery Option 2-45
2.22.5 Description SMPS-MC 2-46
2.22.6 Fuses 2-48
2.22.7 Signals 2-49
2.22.8 Internal Signals 2-49

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2-4

General Information
Operation is accomplished via a touch screen (TFT monitor). Two
microprocessor systems control and monitor the machine.
The hardware concept consists of the following systems:
• Top Level System
• Low Level System
Top Level System The top level system consists of the following components:
• Communication module
• Top level controller TLC (motherboard)
• Compact flash card CFC
• Options
The communication between the user and the machine is performed via the
top level.
Example data exchange to communication module:
• Entry via input mask of the touch screen or keyboard
• Output via the output mask of the TFT monitor
Example data exchange to low level:
• Transmitting and receiving data from/to low level controller and supervisor
on the digital board DB (LLD)
Low Level System The low level system consists of the following components:
• Digital board DB (LLD)
• Analog board AB (LLA)
• Power board motors PBM
• Power board valves PBV
The low level controls and monitors all functions.
Data exchange to top level controller (motherboard):
• Transmitting and receiving data from/to low level supervisor
• Transmitting and receiving data from/to low level controller

Data exchange between low level controller to supervisor:

• Transmitting and receiving messages, data and commands
All sensor data are sent separately, via two serial bus systems, to the supervisor
and controller via the analog board to the digital board. The actuators, motors
and valves are driven via the power board valves PBV and power board motors
PBM.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2-3

For Software ≥ 9.xx

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2-5

2.1 Overview Sub-Racks

1
4 1 4 1

Fig. : Overview Sub-Racks Rear View Dialog+

2.1.1 Legend Overview Sub-Racks

1 Top Level Sub-Rack 3 DF Sub-Rack

2 UF Sub-Rack 4 Water Sub-Rack

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2-6

2.2 Top Level Sub-Rack

1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9

Motherboard

USB: JP2
Service
SW Power Board S1
Valves

Digital Board
JP1
USB:
SW
Power Board Motors
Basic Board Analog Board
HDF Online Board

Fig. : Top Level Sub-Rack

2.2.1 Legend Top Level Sub-Rack

1 USB Port:
Service (FSU)/Software Installation TLC
2 LX800 Motherboard
3 Temperature Switch TS (closes at 50 ± 3 oC, opens at 35 ± 6 oC)
4 Basis Board BB
5 Power Board Valves PBV
6 Digital Board DB (LLD):
USB Port: Software Installation LLC/LLS; Service-Switch S1; Jumper JP1/JP2
7 HDF Online Board HOB
8 Power Board Motor PBM
9 Analog Board AB (LLA)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2-7

2.3 Basic Board BB

P47
P2 P1 P9 P20
P3 P48
P4

P26 P8 P16

P13
P10 P59 P11 P15 P5
1

1
1
P21 P22
P57 P60
P17 P24

P25
P23 P14
1
P54 P12
P18 P19
P49 P27
P50 P58

P51 P6 P33 P34

P42
P36
P31
P32
1
P40 P41

P39 P45 P38 P7 P30 P29 P28 P35 P37 P44

Fig. : Basic Board

2.3.1 Legend Basic Board
P1 Degassing Pump EP P27 Membrane Position Sensors Balance Chamber MSBK
P2 Venous Blood Pump BPV P28 Temperature Sensor Dialysate TSD
P3 Arterial Blood Pump BPA P29 Temperature Sensor Heater Inlet TSHE
P4 Outlet Flow Pump FPA P30 Degassing Temperature Sensor TSE
P5 Safety Air Detector SAD P31 Level Sensor Upline Tank NSVB
P6 Heparin Pump HP (HEP) P32 Blood Leak Detector BL
P7 Air Separator Level Sensor LAFS P33/P34 Digital Board DB
P8 BIC Pump BICP P35 Temperature Sensor BIC TSBIC
P9 Concentrate Pump KP P36 Temperature Sensor Dialyser Inlet TSDE
P10 All Valves (+ Option BIC) VALVES P37 Temperature Sensor Dialysate Supervisor TSD-S
P11 Level Regulation LR P38 Pressure Sensor Dialysate Outlet PDA
P12 DIABUS P39 Blood Side Pressure Sensor PBLOOD
P13 HDF Online Board HOB P40/P41 Analog Board AB (LLA)
P14 Front Panel Board FPB P42 END Conductivity Sensor (Controller/Supervisor) ENDLF+S
P15 Valves Balance Chamber VCH P44 BIC Conductivity Sensor BICLF
P16 UF Pump UFP P45 Pressure Sensor Degassing PE
P17 Power Supply 1 PS1 P47 Speed/Rotation Direction Venous Blood Pump DZ/DR BPV
P18 Not Applicable P48 Speed/Rotation Direction Arterial Blood Pump DZ/DR BPA
P19 Not Applicable P49 BIC and Concentrate Sensors for Suction Rods BIC-K
P20 Inlet Flow Pump FPE P50 Rinsing Bridge Sensors SBS
P21/P22 Power Board Valves PBV P51 BIC Cartridge Holder Sensor BKUS
P23 Staff Call PERS-R P54 Power Supply 2 PS2
P24 Control SMPS-MS (NT) P57 Power Supply Bedside Link BSL-PWR
P25 Power Board Motors PBM P58/P60 Power Supply Hall Sensors
P26 Disinfection Valve VD

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2-8

2.4 Power Board Valves PBV

P1 P2

U3

U4

U6

U9

U13

U18

U23

Fig. : Power Board Valves

2.4.1 Legend Power Board Valves
P1 Valves: P2 Valves:
Inlet Upline Tank Valve VVBE Valve Balance Chamber VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2, VEBK1/2, VABK1/2
Degassing Inlet Valve VEB Valves Level Module VBT, VPV, VPE, VPU, VPD, VPA
Air Separator Valve Luftabscheider VLA
Dialyser Inlet Valve VDE
Dialyser Outlet Valve VDA
Bypass Valve VBP
Option BIC Cartridge Valves VBICP, VBKS, VBKO, VVB
Disinfection Valve VD
Circulation Valve VZ
Venous Tubing Clamp SAKV
Arterial Tubing Clamp SAKA

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2-9

2.5 Power Board Motors PBM

P1

U10
U2 U4 U6

C19

U13 U9

C26

U12

U19
C38

Fig. : Power Board Motors

2.5.1 Legend Power Board Motors
P1 BIC Piston Pump BICP
Concentrate Piston Pump KP
UF Piston Pump UFP
Level Regulation Pump (Diaphragm Pump) LRP (PPR)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 10

2.6 Digital Board DB

P1 P2

Controller Supervisor
U7

P4
P5
L33
U28
U30
P6
FPGA
U33 U27
U35 U36

U39
P7
U45
U46
U55 U43
U56
U53

D13
JP2
JP1 S1

D24
D25
D26
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20

D22
D23

D27

D28
D29
D30

D32
D33
D34
D35
D21

D31
P11 P13 P14

D13
JP2
D27
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20

D22
D23

D28
D29
D30

D32
D33
D34
D35
D21

D24
D25
D26

D31
JP1
01234567 01234567
CWP Controller Supervisor SWP
Fig. : Digital Board DB (LLD) with Controller and Supervisor
2.6.1 Legend Digital Board
Calibration Data Jumper JP1:
All calibration data are stored on the digital board. The Default: Controller Write Protect CWP (for controller firmware)
calibration data must be stored additionally on the compact flash
Controller LEDs D13 – D20:
card CFC.
Status 0 – 7 for installation of LLC software
12 Bit AD Converter
FPGA LEDs V7 – V9:V9 always ON
Both supervisor and controller have a 12 bit AD converter with a
Voltages for FPGA (U30) and periphery
range of 0 to 4095. (FPGA: Field Programmable Gate Array – configurable logical circuit)
P4/P5/P6/P7/P13/P14: not applicable LED V10
V10: flashes permanently
P11 USB Type A for SW installation with USB stick Cycle time, system is running

Supervisor Sensors: Supervisor LEDs V11 – V18:

V18
BICPOS, KPPOS, UFPOS Status 0 – 7 for installation of LLS software
LED V5
V5: always ON after loading
Controller/Supervisor Sensors:
The content of the memory (U45) is loaded to FPGA (U30) during
BKUS, SBS1, SBS2, BPS_IMP, BPA_DIR, BPV_IMP, BPV_DIR
switch-on. The therapy program and the service program is stored
Pumps: in the RAM (U45).
BPA, BPV, EP, FPA, FPE
Jumper JP2:
Controller Sensors: Default: Supervisor Write Protect SWP (for supervisor firmware)
NSVB, BICSS, KSS, MSBK1/2, RDV, SAD, BPADS, BPVDS,
S1 Service Switch:
BL (Controller/Supervisor Sensor Analog Board)
Position 0: Therapy Mode
Position 2: TSM Service Program Mode
Position 3: Software Installation/Update Mode

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 11

2.7 Analog Board AB

P1 P2

U21

U28
U29

U32
U33

U39 U38
U35 U36 U37

U40 U42 U44 U45

U43

U41
U47 U48 U49
U46

U50

Fig. : Analog Board AB (LLA)

2.7.1 Legend Analog Board
P1/P2
Controller Sensors:
PBS, TSHE, TSE, TSBIC, TSD, TSDE, BICLF, ENDLF, PE, LAFS
Supervisor Sensors:
TSD-S, ENDLF-S
Controller/Supervisor Sensors:
BL, PBE, PA, PV, PDA

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 12

2.8 HDF Online Board HOB

P1

U2

U5

P4

Fig. : HDF Online Board

2.8.1 Legend HDF Online Board
P1: Sensors: PSABFS, PSAUS, PSPOSS, FEHDFS, FEDFFS P4: Valves VBE, VDFF, VSAA, VSAE, VSB

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 13

2.9 UF Sub-Rack

MSBKB1/2
VDEBK1 VDA
VLA
VEBK1
LA
VABK2 VBP DDE
VDEBK2
VABK1
MSBK2
VDABK2
RVFPA
VEBK2

DDE LA VABK1 VDEBK2

MSBKB1/2
RVFPA VLA
VABK2
VBP
VDEBK1

VEBK1
VDABK1

VDA

Fig. : UF Sub-Rack
2.9.1 Legend UF Sub-Rack
Balance Chamber BK1/2 Outlet Balance Chamber Valve VABK2
Bypass Valve VBP Outlet Dialyser Balance Chamber Valve VDABK1
Throttle Dialyser Inlet DDE Outlet Dialyser Balance Chamber Valve VDABK2
Air Separator LA Inlet Dialyser Balance Chamber Valve VDEBK1
Membrane Position Sensor Balance Chamber Board MSBKB1/2 Inlet Dialyser Balance Chamber Valve VDEBK2
Membrane Position Sensor Balance Chamber MSBK1/2 Inlet Balance Chamber Valve VEBK1
Non-Return Valve Outlet Flow Pump RVFPA Inlet Balance Chamber Valve VEBK2
Outlet Balance Chamber Valve VABK1 Air Separator Valve VLA

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 14

2.10 UF Sub-Rack HDF Online

VBE

MSBKB1/2
HFB VEBK2
VSB VLA
VDEBK1
VEBK1
LA
VABK2 VBP DDE
VDEBK2
VDABK2 VABK1
MSBK2

RVFPA
VDA
VSAE
VSAA

VSAE
VSAA
DDE LA VABK1 VDEBK2

MSBKB1/2
RVFPA VLA
HFB VABK2
VBP VDEBK1
VBE

VEBK1
VDABK1

VDA VSB

Fig. : UF Sub-Rack HDF Online

2.10.1 Legend UF Sub-Rack HDF Online
Balance Chamber BK1/2 Outlet Dialyser Balance Chamber Valve VDABK1/2
Bypass Valve VBP Inlet Dialyser Balance Chamber Valve VDEBK1/2
Throttle Dialyser Inlet DDE Inlet Balance Chamber Valve VEBK1/2
Hydrophobic Vent Filter HFB Air Separator Valve VLA
Air Separator LA mponents for HDF Online:
Additional Components
Membrane Position Sensor Balance Chamber Board MSBKB1/2 Substitute Bypass Valve VSB
Membrane Position Sensor Balance Chamber MSBK1/2 Substitute Connection Outlet Valve VSAA
Non-Return Valve Outlet Flow Pump RVFPA Substitute Connection Inlet Valve VSAE
Outlet Balance Chamber Valve VABK1/2 Filter Vent Valve VBE

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 15

2.11 DF Sub-Rack

A BICLF
RVB
BICP
RVK UFP
ENDLF TSDS KP

FPE
FPA

RVFPE

RFUFP

KP

UFP
BICP

A
ENDLF
RVK
BICLF
RVB

TSBIC

FPE FPA
TSD

Fig. : DF Sub-Rack

2.11.1 Legend DF Sub-Rack

BIC Pump BICP Non-Return Valve Flow Pump Inlet RVFPE
Degassing Pressure Sensor PE Non-Return Valve Concentrate RVK
END Conductivity/Supervisor ENDLF/ENDLF-S Non-Return Valve UF Pump RFUFP
Outlet Flow Pump FPA (Motor Cover A) Bicarbonate Temperature Sensor TSBIC
Inlet Flow Pump FPE (Motor Cover A) Dialysate Temperature Sensor TSD
Concentrate Pump KP Dialysate Supervisor Temperature Sensor TSD-S
Bicarbonate Conductivity Sensor BICLF UF Pump UFP
Bicarbonate Non-Return Valve RVB

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 16

2.12 Water Sub-Rack

NSVB
WT
H
WAB

A
VEB

EP RVDA

NSVB H
WT
A DBK
WA-Block VBKS VBKO

VZ VEB VBICP VVB

VVBE EP
VZ VEB

DMV PE
PE

Fig. : Water Sub-Rack Fig. : Water Block with Valves for BIC Option
2.12.1 Legend Water Sub-Rack
Water Block WAB (with integrated Degassing Chamber EK,
EK Upline Tank Upline Tank Inlet Valve VVBE
VB and Heat Exchanger WT)
WT Upline Tank VB
Pressure Reducer DMV
Degassing Pressure Sensor PE
Degassing Chamber EK Additional Components for Option BIC Cartridge:
Degassing Pump EP (Motor Cover A) Throttle BIC Cartridge Holder DBK
Heater H BIC Concentrate Suction Rod Valve VBKS
Degassing Temperature Sensor TSE Top BIC Cartridge Valve VBKS
Heater Temperature Sensor TSH BIC Pump Valve VBICP
Heater Inlet Temperature Sensor TSHE Upline Tank Valve VVB

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 17

2.13 Rinsing Bridge

1 2 3 4 5

VD TSDE
PDA VDE

BL

Fig. : Rinsing Bridge

2.13.1 Legend Rinsing Bridge

1 Disinfection Valve VD 4 Temperature Sensor Dialyser Inlet TSDE
2 Pressure Sensor Dialysate Outlet PDA 5 Blood Leak Detector BL
3 Dialyser Inlet Valve VDE

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 18

2.14 Rear Door

1 2 34

SMPS-MC

Fig. : Rear Door

2.14.1 Legend Rear Door

1. Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC 3. Mains Switch
2. Fan 4. Mains Cord

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 19

2.15 Switch Mode Power Supply

Microcontroller SMPS-MC

P12 H401 F401

H104
+12VD / T3.15A TR5 H401 F401
F1 T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.1: L)
F2 T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.1: L)
F5A 110/120V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.6: HZG1-L)
230V: T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.6: HZG1-L)
H303 F303
- + +5VD / T3.15A TR5 H303 F303
F5B 110/120V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.7: HZG2-L)
H301 F301 230V: T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.7: HZG2-L)
P10 H302 F302
H300
+5VD / T3.15A TR5

+5VD / T5.00A TR5

H301 F301

H300
F6 110/120V: F20A 6.3x32 (X1.5: HZG-N)
230V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.5: HZG-N)
F301 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD1)
H302 F302
H304 F304 F302 T5.0A TR5 (+5VD2)
F303 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD3)
H601
F601 +5VD / T3.15A TR5 H304 F304 F304 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD4)
P4 H602

H402
F602
K3
+24VGB / T3.15A TR5 H601
F601
F401 T3.15A TR5 (+12VD1)
F402 T5.00A TR5 (+12VD2)
F403 T1.25A TR5 (+12VA)
F402 F600 M10.00A 6.3x32 (+24VL)
F600 +24 VGD / T3.15A TR5 H602 F602 F601 T3.15A TR5 (+24VGB)

P5 H403 F403 H600

+12VD / T5.00A TR5

H402
F402
F602 T3.15A TR5 (+24VGD)

F600
XP3.2 GNDAKKU K4 +12VAN / T1.25A TR5 H403 F403
XP3.1 +24VAKKU +24VL / M10.00A TR5 H600
X104
P6
X103
P9 P7 P8 BENNING XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
Netzgerät/Power Supply
NT-Dialog-MC F2
XXXXXXXX
SN/SNo: XXXXXXX Bj/Year: XX/XX
P14 P11 TN /Item-No:XXXXXX.5 Ver/SW: Rev 1.15
F5B F5A F1
Opt.: Art/mode: XX/xx
X101 C115
P2 Eingang/Input Ausgang/Output F6
+ - Art/Kind AC DC
Hz 50-60
V 110/120/230/240
H900 A 5/2,3
C114
+ -

X1.6

X1.7

X1.3
X1.1

X1.2
X1.5

X1.4

X1.8
X903 X100
LH1 LH2 N PE1 L N PE PE

Fig. : Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC

2.15.1 Legend Switch Mode Power Supply

Microcontroller

X1.1 Mains Input L P5 12 V Voltages

X1.2 Mains Input N P7 ABPM Option
X1.3 Mains Input PE P8 DSI Option
X1.4 Heater PE1 P9 Fan, Mains Switch
X1.5 Heater N P10 Motherboard, Front Panel Board
X1.6 Heater LH1 P12 Options
X1.7 Heater LH2 P13 -
X1.8 PE P14 EXT EIN
P2 Power Supply Control from Low Level Digital Board/Basic Board P101 Service Watchdog
XP3 Battery Connection (Screw Terminal) X100 Fan
P4 24 V Voltages
F1/F2 6.25 AT (6.3x32), Mains Input F303/F304 3.15 AT (TR5), +5 VD
F5A/F5B 12 AF (6.3x32), Heater 1800 W (110/120 V) F401 3.15 AT (TR5), +12 VD
6.25 AT (6.3x32), Heater 1800 W (230/240 V) F402 5.00 AT (TR5), +12 VD
F6 20 AF (6.3x32), Heater 1800 W (110/120 V) F403 1.25 AT (TR5), +12 VAN
12 AF (6.3x32), Heater 1800 W (230/240 V) F600 10 AM (6.3x32), +24 VL
F301 3.15 AT (TR5), +5 VD F601/F602 3.15 AT (TR5), +24 VGB
F302 5.00 AT (TR5), +5 VD
Type Plate SMPS-MC
TN/Item-No (Version Number SMPS-MC): e.g. XXXXXX.5 Ver/SW (SW Version): e.g. Rev. 1.15

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 20

2.16 TFT Monitor

Fig. : TFT Monitor

2.16.1 Legend TFT Monitor

Backlight Inverter Board BIB Optical Status Display Board OSDB
Front Panel Board FPB Touch Controller Board TCB
TFT Monitor TFT Touch Screen

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 21

2.17 Front Door

HP HP

PV PA PBS/SN PBE PV PA PBS/SN PBE

SN SN SN SN

PBA PBV PBA PBV

SAD SAD

1
SAKV-SG SAKA SAKV-SG SAKA
2 2
Fig. : Front Door with Double Pump Fig. : Front Door for HDF Online

LRP HP LRP HP

PBE PA PV PBE PA PV
PBS/SN PBS/SN
LRM LRM

PBV PBA PBV PBA

SAD SAD

2 SAKA SAKV-SG
2 1 SAKA SAKV-SG

Fig. : Front Door (Inside) with Double Pump Fig. : Front Door (Inside) for HDF Online
2.17.1 Legend Front Door
Cover for Suction Rods 2 Heparin Pump Compact HP
Arterial Blood Pump BPA Arterial Tubing Clamp SAKA
Venous Blood Pump BPV Venous Tubing Clamp Current Closed SAKV-SG
Pressure Sensor PBE Safety Air Detector SAD/Venous
SAD Red Detector RDV
Pressure Sensor PBS/SN Substitution Port 1
Arterial Pressure Sensor PA Connection for concentrate Suction Rods 2
Venous Pressure Sensor PV

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 22

2.18 Level Regulation Module

P1

HFS P2 P3

HFE VPE V
PD
VPU
VPV V
PBS PA V
BT
PBE HFV
LRP HFP
PV HFA
PA

HFA PA PV PBS PBE

HFV HFS HFE

PIN
POUT
PA PV PBS PBE
PIN
POUT
LRP

Fig. : Level Regulation Module and Level Regulation Pump

2.18.1 Legend Level Regulation Module

There are two level regulation modules with different assemblies, i.e. for machines with a single blood pump and with a
double blood pump.
Inlet Pressure Sensor Valve VPE Arterial Hydrophobic Filter HFA
Down Pressure Sensor Valve VPD Venous Hydrophobic Filter HFV
Up Pressure Sensor Valve VPU Blood Control Pressure Hydrophobic Filter HFS
Blood Control Pressure Sensor Valve VPS (Double Pump) (Double Pump)
Venous Pressure Sensor Valve VPV Inlet Hydrophobic Filter HFE
Arterial Pressure Sensor Valve VPA Pump Hydrophobic Filter (Ceramic Filter) HFP
Blood Side Test Pressure Sensor Valve VBT

Level Regulation Pump LRP

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 23

2.18.2 Flow Diagram Level Regulation Module

Front Door
Outside Inside
PA

1 2 2 1 1 2 PIN
3 3 3
HFA VBT PV VPA VPD

2 1

HFV 3 LRP
PBE VPV
1 2
2 1
3 POUT
3 VPU
HFE VPE
PBS

HFP

HFS

Level Module

PA Chamber PV Chamber PBE Chamber 3/2 Way Solenoid Valve

Fig. : Flow Diagram Level Regulation Module

There are two level regulation modules with different assemblies, i.e. for
machines with a single blood pump and with a double blood pump. The level
regulation module and the level regulation pump LRP are assembled on the
inside of the rear door. The level regulation module and LRP have the following
functions;
• Setting of the level in all blood side chambers (3/2 way solenoid valves VPA,
VPV, VPE, VPU, VPD and diaphragm pump LRP)
• Monitoring of the blood side pressures (pressure sensors PA, PV, PBE and
PBS)
• Test of the blood side pressure sensors in preparation (3/2 way solenoid
valve VBT)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

 2.19
2.19.1

Water Inlet Dialysate Outlet

Dialog+

Water Sub-Rack DF Sub-Rack UF Sub-Rack Rinsing Bridge

DMV
Flow Diagrams
Dialog+ SW 9.xx

VVBE
A V
T
RVFPE DDE TSDE VDE PEV*
Balance Chamber

NSVB
H TSD TSD-S
T
TSE T T T 8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
EK VB WT TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
WAB FBK1 Z.D.
RVB RVK VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1 Dialyser
T A B C D VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2 V.D.
PE TSH BICP KP
A LAFS FVD
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
D MSBK2 FBK2
8
T FPA LA VDA
RVDA BK2
TSHE
Air
2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description

SBS1 SB1
C B VD M
FEP VZ
UFP RVFPA

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd

VEB SKBS SKKS RVUFP
LVD
SBS2 SB2
8 BIC
EP SS KSS

BVA FB FK KVA
BE KE
Central Bicarbonate Central Concentrate
Supply Supply

BE KE

FD
(Unit Rear)
KSB KSK Disinfectant
BIC Concentrate Acid Concentrate

Water Dialysate Flow 2 Blood Venous

1/2010

Bicarbonate Dialysate Disinfectant

Concentrate Air Housing

Dialysate Flow 1 Blood Arterial

2 - 24

B. Braun Avitum AG
 2.19.2

Water Inlet Dialysate Outlet

Water Sub-Rack DF Sub-Rack UF Sub-Rack Rear Door Rinsing Bridge

DMV
Dialog+ SW 9.xx

VVBE
DBK*
RVFPE DDE DF Filter * TSDE A V
Balance Chamber T

NSVB
H TSD TSD-S
T
VDE PEV*
TSE T T T 8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
EK VB WT TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
WAB FBK1 Z.D.
RVB RVK VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1 Dialyser
T A B C D VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2 V.D.
PE TSH BICP KP
A LAFS FVD
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
D VBICP* MSBK2 FBK2
8
Dialog+ with BIC Option and DF Filter Option

T FPA LA VDA
Kt/V-UV* RVDA BK2
TSHE VBKO*
Air
2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description

SBS1 SB1
C B VD M
FEP VZ
UFP RVFPA

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd

VEB VVB* FBIC VBKS SKBS SKKS RVUFP
LVD
SBS2 SB2
8 BIC
EP SS KSS

RVBO* BVA FB FK KVA

BE KE
Central Bicarbonate Central Concentrate
Supply Supply

SPA BE KE

FD
BKUS (Unit Rear)
KSB KSK Disinfectant
RVBU BIC Concentrate Acid Concentrate

Water Dialysate Flow 2 Blood Venous

1/2010

Bicarbonate Dialysate Disinfectant

Concentrate Air Housing

Dialysate Flow 1 Blood Arterial Options

*
2 - 25

B. Braun Avitum AG
 2.19.3

HFB
Water Inlet Dialysate Outlet VBE

VSB VSAE
Water Sub-Rack DF Sub-Rack UF Sub-Rack Rear Door
Front Door

HDF Filter PSAUS

Dialog+ SW 9.xx

DF Filter PSABF
DMV FSU
Dialog+ HDF Online

VSAA
VVBE DDE
Rinsing Bridge
DBK*
RVFPE A V
Balance Chamber TSDE

NSVB
H TSD TSD-S T
T VDFF
VDE PEV*
TSE T T T 8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
EK VB WT TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
WAB FBK1 Z.D.
RVB RVK VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1 Dialyser
T A B C D VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2 V.D.
PE TSH BICP KP
A LAFS FVD
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
D VBICP* MSBK2 FBK2
2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description

8
T FPA LA VDA
Kt/V-UV* RVDA BK2
TSHE VBKO*
Air SBS1 SB1

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd

C B VD M
VZ RVUFP
FEP UFP RVFPA
VEB VVB* FBIC VBKS SKBS SKKS
LVD
SBS2 SB2
8 BIC
EP SS KSS

RVBO* BVA FB FK KVA

BE KE
Central Bicarbonate Central Concentrate
Supply Supply

SPA BE KE

FD
BKUS (Unit Rear)
KSB KSK Disinfectant
RVBU BIC Concentrate Acid Concentrate
1/2010

Water Dialysate Flow 2 Blood Venous

Bicarbonate Dialysate Disinfectant

Concentrate Air Housing

Dialysate Flow 1 Blood Arterial Options

*
2 - 26

B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 27

2.19.4 Legend Flow Diagram

Abbreviation Description

BE Bicarbonate Withdrawal
BICLF Bicarbonate Conductivity
BICP Bicarbonate Pump
BICSS Bicarbonate Rinsing Connection Sensor
BK1 Balance Chamber 1
BK2 Balance Chamber 2
BL Blood Leak Detector
BPA Arterial Blood Pump
BPV Venous Blood Pump
BVA Bicarbonate Supply Connection (Central Supply)
DBK Throttle Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder
DDE Throttle Dialyser Inlet
DMV Pressure Reducer Valve
EK Degassing Chamber
ENDLF END Conductivity
ENDLF-S END Conductivity Supervisor
EP Degassing Pump
FB Filter Bicarbonate
FBIC Filter Bicarbonate Cartridge
FBK1 Filter Balance Chamber 1
FBK2 Filter Balance Chamber 2
FEP Filter Degassing Pump
FK Filter Concentrate
FM Flowmeter
FPA Outlet Flow Pump
FPE Inlet Flow Pump
FVD Filter from Dialysate
H Heater
HP Heparin Syringe Pump
KE Concentrate Withdrawal
KP Concentrate Pump
KSB Bicarbonate Rod
KSK Concentrate Rod
KSS Concentrate Rinsing Connector Sensor
KVA Concentrate Supply Connector (Central Supply)
LA Air Separator
LAFS Air Separator Level Sensors
LVD Light Barrier Disinfection Valve
MSBK1 Membrane Position Sensor Balance Chamber 1
MSBK2 Membrane Position Sensor Balance Chamber 2
NSVB Level Sensor Upline Tank
PA Arterial Pressure Sensor
PBE Pressure Sensor Blood Inlet
PBS Blood Pressure Control Sensor
PDA Pressure Sensor Dialysate Outlet
PE Degassing Pressure Sensor

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 28

PV Venous Pressure Sensor

RDV Venous Red Detector
RVB Throttle Bicarbonate
RVDA Throttle Dialysate Valve
RVFPA Throttle Flow Pump Outlet
RVFPE Throttle Flow Pump Inlet
RVK Throttle Concentrate
RFUFP Throttle Ultrafiltration Pump
SAD Safety Air Detector
SAKA Arterial Tubing Clamp
SAKV-SD Venous Tubing Clamp Currentless Closed
SBS1 Rinsing Bridge Connector Sensor 1
SBS2 Rinsing Bridge Connector Sensor 2
TSBIC Bicarbonate Temperature Sensor
TSD Dialysate Temperature Sensor
TSDE Dialyser Inlet Temperature Sensor
TSD-S Dialysate Temperature Sensor Supervisor
TSE Degassing Temperature Sensor
TSH Thermal Fuse Heater Element
TSHE Heater Inlet Temperature Sensor
UFP Ultrafiltration Pump
VABK1 Outlet Valve Balance Chamber 1
VABK2 Outlet Valve Balance Chamber 2
VB Upline Tank
VBICP Bicarbonate Pump Valve
VBKO Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder Top Valve
VBKS Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder Concentrate Rod Valve
VBP Bypass Valve
V.D. Dialyser Coupling (from Dialysate)
VD Disinfection Valve
VDA Dialyser Outlet Valve
VDABK1 Dialyser Outlet Valve Balance Chamber 1
VDABK2 Dialyser Outlet Valve Balance Chamber 2
VDE Dialyser Inlet Valve
VDEBK1 Dialyser Inlet Valve Balance Chamber 1
VDEBK2 Dialyser Inlet Valve Balance Chamber 2
VEB Degassing Bypass Valve
VEBK1 Inlet Valve Balance Chamber 1
VEBK2 Inlet Valve Balance Chamber 2
VLA Air Separator Valve
VVB Upline Tank Valve
VVBE Upline Tank Inlet Valve
VZ Circulation Valve
WA Water Block
WT Heat Exchanger
Z.D. Dialyser Coupling (to Dialysate)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 29

2.20 Description Flow Diagram

The flow diagram can be divided into six sections:
• Water Inlet Section with Water Block
• Degassing Circuit with Temperature System
• Dialysate Processing
• Balance Chamber
• Ultrafiltration
• Rinsing Bridge
2.20.1 Water Inlet Section with Water
Block
The water inlet section has the following components
• Pressure Reducer Valve DMV
• Upline Tank Inlet Valve V VBE (2/2 way valve)
• Water Block WAB with integrated Upline Tank VB, Level Sensors Water Block
NSVB,
NSVB Heat Exchanger WT,
WT 2 double-stage Heater H, Degassing Chamber EK

Water Inlet Dialysate Outlet

Pressure Reducer Valve DMV
The pressure reducer valve DMV limits the pressure of the
inlet water (e.g. osmosis water) to 0.9 ±0.1 bar.

DMV
VLA Upline Tank Inlet Valve V VBE
RVDA The valve VVBE is time-delayed controlled via the level sensor
NSVB (top) in the upline tank VB.
VB The delay time depends on
VVBE SKBS the dialysate flow.
DBK*
NSVB

Level Sensors Upline Tank NSVB

H
T The level sensors are mounted in the upline tank VB.
TSE TSBIC
NSVB top:
EK VB WT
WAB closed - VVBE is closed
VBICP*
NSVB bottom (monitoring low water level):
T closed (alarm) - Water inlet is disturbed
PE TSH - Heater is switched off
A – Pumps are stopped
D
T Heat Exchanger WT
TSHE VBKO*
The cold inlet water is warmed up via the heat exchanger WT.
Thereby the heat consumption to heat up the water is
reduced.
FEP
VEB VVB*

EP
8 RVBO*
VBKS

Fig. : Water Inlet with Water Block

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 30

2.20.2 Degassing Circuit with

Temperature System
The degassing circuit with temperature system has the following components:
• Degassing Bypass Valve VEB
• Degassing Pressure Sensor PE
• Degassing Chamber EK
• Degassing Pump EP
• Thermal Fuse Heater TSH
• Temperature Sensor Heater Inlet TSHE
• Double-Stage Heater H
• Degassing Temperature Sensor TSE
Degassing Bypass Valve VEB The degassing bypass valve VEB, pressure sensor PE, degassing chamber EK and
Degassing Pressure Sensor PE degassing pump EP produce and measure a negative pressure respectively. The
Degassing Pump EP negative pressure is produced to separate the dissolved gas from the water.
If the degassing bypass valve VEB is closed, the flow path is reduced by means
of a bypass constriction (orifice, throttle principle) in the valve. VEB is opened
during disinfection to avoid this constriction. The desired negative pressure is
gained by controlling the degassing pump EP. The value of the negative
pressure is approx. -500 mmHg and thus always higher than the lower pressure
of the dialysate behind the dialyser. The degassing pump works with constant
speed, which is determined by the dialysate flow, unless the negative pressure
is insufficient. Then the speed of EP is increased.
Heater H The heater H has an integrated thermal fuse TSH as a thermal cut-off. The
Thermal Fuse Heater TSH temperature sensor TSE measures the actual temperature at the outlet of the
Degassing Temperature Sensor TSE heating.
Temperature Control

Water Inlet Dialysate Outlet The required heat output is determined with the temperature
sensors TSE and TSHE.
A detailed description for the double-stage heater control is
described in the paragraph for the switch mode power supply
microcontroller SMPS-MC.
DMV
VLA

RVDA

VVBE SKBS
DBK*
NSVB

H
T
TSE TSBIC
EK VB WT
WAB
VBICP*

T
PE TSH
A
D
T
TSHE VBKO*

FEP
VEB VVB*

EP
8 VBKS
RVBO*
Fig. : Degassing Circuit with Temperature System

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 31

2.20.3 Dialysate Processing

The dialysate processing has the following components:
• Bicarbonate Concentrate Pump BICP
• Bicarbonate Throttle RVB
• Bicarbonate Temperature Sensor TSBIC
• Bicarbonate Conductivity BICLF
• Concentrate Pump KP
• Concentrate Throttle RVK
• END Conductivity ENDLF
• END Conductivity Supervisor ENDLFS
• Dialysate Temperature Sensor TSD
• Dialysate Temperature Sensor Supervisor TSDS
• Inlet Flow Pump FPE
• Inlet Flow Pump Throttle RVFPE
• Dialyser Inlet Temperature Sensor TSDE
The main components of the dialysate preparation are the bicarbonate
concentrate pump BICP and the concentrate pump KP, with the conductivity
cells BICLF and ENDLF and a flow pump FPE. The flow pump FPE delivers the
dialysate. The bicarbonate concentrate, which is added via the bicarbonate
pump BICP, is measured by the conductivity measurement cell BICLF. Thereby
the pump can control the given conductivity set-point value.
The concentrate or acid concentrate addition has the same working principle.
The nonreturn valves RVB and RVK stabilise the dosage of the bicarbonate and
concentrate.
The temperature sensors TSBIC, TSD and TSDE are responsible for:
• the temperature compensation of the conductivity measurement and
• the temperature measurement TSD after the addition of cold concentrate
(second measurement sensor for temperature system) and
• the temperature measurement TSDE directly before the dialysate leaves the
machine and thus for the compensation of the temperature loss.
The conductivity sensor ENDLFS is an independent monitoring unit (supervisor).
The geometry of the ENDLFS sensor is different (but has the same cell constant)
than the ENDLF sensor of the controller. Thereby a deposit on the sensor can be
identified. The temperature compensation is carried out by the temperature
sensor TSDS. The temperature sensor additionally monitors the dialysate flow
temperature for the supervisor. The ENDLFS and TSDS sensors have no influence
on the respective control.
The throttle RVFPE prevents a high pressure build-up and thus a bursting of
tubing if the flow path is blocked behind FPE. If the set pressure is reached
RVFPE is opened and the fluid can circulate.
RVFPE
TSD TSD-S T
DDE TSDE VDE
T T T 8
TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE VDEBK1
RVB RVK

VEBK1 BK1
BICP KP MSBK1

VDEBK2

VEBK2 BK2
MSBK2

Fig. : Dialysate Processing

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 32

2.20.4 Central Bicarbonate and

Concentrate Supply (Option)
A canister or central supply can be selected via the bicarbonate and
concentrate supply connection BVA and KVA.
The flow pump FPE guarantees a continuous control of the desired dialysate
flow into the balance chambers.
The flow rate is determined by the filling time of the balance chamber. The flow
pump FPE is controlled via the predetermined volume of the chamber and a
continuous detection of the position of the membrane.
2.20.5 BIC Cartridge Holder (Option)
DBK Throttle Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder
DBK ensures a constant pressure (approx. 300 mmHg) during the filling of the
bicarbonate cartridge.
VBKO Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder Top Valve
The bicarbonate cartridge is filled to the limit pressure (300 mmHg) after VBKO
opens.
VBKS Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder Concentrate Rod Valve
The bicarbonate cartridge is vented during preparation and in therapy, i.e. VBKO
closes and VBKS opens for a short time. This is repeated in regular intervals
during therapy. VBKS is opened after the end of the therapy to empty the
bicarbonate cartridge.
VBICP Bicarbonate Pump Valve
VBICP opens shortly after the BIC cartridge was filled, to rinse away the initial
bicarbonate. VBICP switches the BIC pump in bypass after the end of the
therapy to empty the bicarbonate cartridge.
VVB Upline Tank Valve
VVB cuts off the main flow after the end of the therapy to empty the
bicarbonate cartridge via FPE (VBICP and VBKS are opened).
RVFPE
TSD TSD-S
DBK*
T T T 8
TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
T RVB RVK
TSE

BICP KP
VBKO* VBICP*

FBIC VBKS

VVB*
RVBO*

BVA FB
BE

SPA
BE
BKUS

RVBU

Fig. : BIC Cartridge Holder (Option)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 33

2.20.6 Balance Chamber System

The balance chamber system has the following components:
• Balance Chamber BK1
• Balance Chamber BK2
• Balance Chamber Dialyser Inlet Valve VDEBK1 and VDEBK2
• Balance Chamber Inlet Valve VEBK1 and VEBK2
• Balance Chamber Membrane Position Sensor MSBK1 and MSBK2
• Balance Chamber Dialyser Outlet Valve VDABK1 and VDABK2
• Balance Chamber Outlet Valve VABK1 and VABK2
The measurement and control of the ultrafiltration rate is accomplished by the
double balance chamber system and the ultrafiltration pump UFP.
Both balance chambers BK1 and BK2 are identical. The chambers have flexible
membranes, which can be moved to both sides. The membranes divide the
chambers into two sub-compartments. The flow direction is defined by the
membranes and the eight solenoid valves. The position of the membranes is
measured by inductive membrane position sensors MSBK1 and MSBK2. The
membrane position sensors (ferrites) are connected to the membranes and each
move in a respective coil MSBK1 and MSBK2.
2.20.7 Working Principle Balance
Chamber System
Phase 1: The balance chamber BK1 is filled with dialysate at the beginning of phase 1.
The membrane is in right position. The valves VDEBK1 and VDABK1 are opened.
The balance chamber BK1 is filled by the outlet flow pump FPA with used
dialysate, via valve VDABK1. Simultaneously the fresh dialysate is removed from
the balance chamber BK1 via valve VDEBK1. Phase 1 is completed and the
membrane is in left position (see figure).
The balance chamber BK2 is filled with fresh dialysate during this period. The
used dialysate from the previous phase 2 is drained (see description phase 2).

DDE VDE

8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1

VBP
FPE
VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1

VDEBK2 VABK2 VLA

LAFS
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
MSBK2 FBK2
8
FPA LA VDA
BK2

VZ UFP open
RVFPA
closed
Fig. : Phase 1 Balance Chamber

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 34

Phase 2: After phase 1 is completed there is an automatic switch to the filled balance
chamber BK2 to obtain a constant flow in the dialyser. The complete cycle is
repeated in phase 2, i.e. valves VDEBK2 and VDABK2 are opened. The balance
chamber BK2 is filled via valve VDABK2. Simultaneously the dialysate is drained
from the balance chamber BK2 via valve VDEBK2. Phase 2 is completed and the
membrane is in left position (see figure).
Simultaneously the balance chamber BK1 is filled with fresh dialysate.
Therefore valve VEBK1 is opened. Valve VABK1 is also opened, to initiate the
flow path for the used dialysate to the drain. The membrane moves to the right
position.
The outlet fluid volume is equal to the returned fluid volume, due to the closed
balance chamber system
The fluid volume removed from the closed system via the ultrafiltration pump
UFP is replaced from the blood in the dialyser and equals the precise
ultrafiltration volume.
The system is initialised in preparation, i.e. the membrane sensors are
automatically calibrated and the speed of the flow pumps FPE and FPA are
determined. Thus a synchronisation of the membranes is guaranteed, and the
pump speeds for the desired flow are determined.

DDE VDE

8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1

VBP
FPE
VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1

VDEBK2 VABK2 VLA

LAFS
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
MSBK2 FBK2
8
FPA LA VDA
BK2

VZ UFP open
RVFPA
closed
Fig. : Phase 2 Balance Chamber

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 35

2.20.8 Ultrafiltration and Rinsing Bridge

The main flow path and bypass have the following components:
• Dialyser Inlet Throttle DDE
• Dialyser Inlet Valve VDE
• Dialyser Outlet Valve VDA
• Bypass Valve VBP
• Outlet Flow Pump FPA
The flow path for the main flow and bypass are determined by the valves VDE,
VDA and VBP. The built up flow from the flow pump FPA is stabilised by the
throttle DDE. Valves VDE and VBP are closed for sequential therapy
(ultrafiltration without dialysate fluid flow). The ultrafiltrate removal is carried
out by the ultrafiltration pump UFP.
Further components are:
• Red sensitive blood leak detector BL
• Pressure sensor PDA which monitors the dialysate pressure (also used to
calculate TMP)
• Air separator LA with built in level sensors LAFS and air separator valve VLA
• Throttle RVDA functions as a resistance to stabilise the flow of FPE
The throttle RVFPA prevents a high pressure build-up and thus a bursting of
tubing if the flow path is blocked behind FPA. If the set pressure is reached
RVFPA is opened and the fluid can circulate.
Detection of Air in Air Separator LA If air is detected in the air separator LA by the air separator level sensors LAFS,
the balance chamber switches to free flow:
• VEBK1 and VDEBK2 opened
• VABK1/2 and VDABK1/2 closed
VLA is opened and air is removed with positive pressure from LA. VLA is closed
once air is not detected anymore by LAFS. The balance chamber is switched to
normal operation.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 36

2.20.9 Chemical Thermal Disinfection Program

Phase 1 The position of the couplings is checked by the sensors BICSS, KSS, SBS1 and
SBS2. The machine starts to rinse as soon as the disinfection menu is entered.
After the disinfection type is selected the machine will rinse for 3 minutes and
preheat the system to 45 oC. During this phase all pumps (EP, FPE, FPA, BICP,
KP, UFP) run and the valves are switched so that any residual concentrate is
rinsed from the complete hydraulic circuit.
Phase 2 The air separator LA is filled with water via VLA. The upline tank VB is emptied,
until the bottom NSVB is on, which switches off the heater H (VVBE is closed).

DMV

VVBE
A V
T
RVFPE TSDE VDE PEV*
DDE
NSVB

H TSD TSD-S
T
TSE T T T 8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
EK VB WT TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
WAB FBK1 Z.D.
RVB RVK VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1
T A B C D VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2 V.D.
PE TSH BICP KP
A LAFS FVD
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
D MSBK2 FBK2
8
T FPA LA VDA
RVDA BK2
TSHE
SBS1 SB1
C B VD M
FEP VZ
UFP RVFPA
VEB SKBS SKKS RVUFP
LVD
SBS2 SB2
EP
8 BIC
SS KSS

BVA FB FK KVA
BE KE

BE KE

FD

KSB KSK

Fig. : Phase 2

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 37

Phase 3 With UFP running, a negative pressure of –100 mmHg is created at PDA. When
this pressure is reached VD opens. The disinfectant is sucked into the hydraulic
system by the UFP via the dialyser connectors. The circulation valve VZ is open
and fluid flows into the upline tank of the water block WAB, because the
throttle RVDA acts as a forward resistance. As soon as the correct volume is
reached, the upline tank VB is filled up with fresh water (VVBE is controlled by
NSVB).

DMV

VVBE
A V
T
RVFPE TSDE VDE PEV*
DDE
NSVB

H TSD TSD-S
T
TSE T T T 8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
EK VB WT TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
WAB FBK1 Z.D.
RVB RVK VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1
T A B C D VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2 V.D.
PE TSH BICP KP
A LAFS FVD
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
D MSBK2 FBK2
8
T FPA LA VDA
RVDA BK2
TSHE
SBS1 SB1
C B VD M
FEP VZ
UFP RVFPA
VEB SKBS SKKS RVUFP
LVD
SBS2 SB2
EP
8 BIC
SS KSS

BVA FB FK KVA
BE KE

BE KE

FD

KSB KSK
Fig. : Phase 3

Phase 4 The machine starts to recirculate the fluid, heating the system up to the desired
temperature (e.g. 83 oC). Once this temperature is reached and a desired
conductivity is reached (e.g. 2.2 mS/cm) the disinfection timer starts.
Phase 5 The machine recirculates the fluid, monitoring the temperature and
conductivity until the disinfection time is reached. There is no flow of fluid to
the drain during suction, heat-up and circulation. Then the machine starts with
the VBICP test. The machine checks whether VVB and VBICP open and close
properly. During the first step of this test VVB and VBICP are closed. With FPE
and FPA still running this causes a negative pressure at PDA. VBICP then opens,
causing a rapid increase in pressure at PDA.
Phase 6 The machine then starts to rinse with VZ closed until the rinsing time is
reached, and the temperature has decreased below 40 oC and conductivity is
below 0.1 mS/cm. Then the machine gives a message that asks the user to
confirm that the machine is free of disinfectant and the disinfection is
completed.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 38

2.21 Block Diagram

Communication
Backlight Inverter
Board BIB
Touch Screen LC Display
Touch Controller Optical Status Optical Status
Display Board Display Board
Board TCB OSDB OSDB

Front Panel Board

+ -
START
STOP
FPB

COM4 LCD Port Parallel Speaker USB1 Service USB Stick

Port
USB2 Top Level
ABPM * COM3
TLC USB3
Top Level Controller USB Card Reader*
(Motherboard) 4-8 Kt/V-UV*
BSL *
COM1 DCI* Crit-Line*
DCI * IDE Compact Flash
COM2 Card
Ethernet

DIABUS
SUPBUS
Serial BUS
Sensors

AB
Controller
BICPOS NSVB TSHE

Sensors
SUP

KPPOS BICSS TSE

KSS PBS Analog
Low Level

Controller
UFPOS TSBIC

Sensors
BKUS* MSBK1 Board TSD
Controller

(LLA)
Basic Board
Controller/SUP

Sensors

SBS1 MSBK2 TSDE

RDV
Sensors
SBS2 BICLF
Sensors

SUP

BPA_IMP SAD ENDLF

BPA_DIR BPADS TSD-S PE
BPV_IMP BPVDS ENDLF-S LAFS
BPV_DIR
BPA
BPV
BLD PBE
EP
Controller/SUP PA
FPA Sensors PV
FPE PDA

HP
VVBE VDEBK1
PBM VEB VDEBK2 Heparin Pump LS
BICP VLA VDABK1 Compact KRALO
KP
Power
VDE PBV VDABK2
KOLB
Board VDA VEBK1
UFP Motors VSAA
VBP VEBK2
LRP VVB* Power Board VABK1
HOB VBE
VDFF
VBICP* Valves VABK2
* HDF VSAE
VBKS* VBT
VBKO* VPV
Online VSB
VD VPE
Board PSAUS
PSABFS
VZ VPU
FEDFFS
VPD
FEHDFS
VPA

SAKV SAKA

Mains Switch
Mains
Voltage
SMPS-MC
* Battery
Switch Mode Power Supply
Microcontroller * Options
Fig. : Block Diagram

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 39

2.21.1 Legend Block Diagram

Digital Board DB
BPA Arterial Blood Pump
BPV Venous Blood Pump
EP Degassing Pump
FPA Outlet Flow Pump
FPE Inlet Flow Pump

Supervisor
BICPOS Bicarbonate Pump Position Sensor
KPPOS Concentrate Pump Position Sensor
UPPOS UF Pump Position Sensor

Controller/Supervisor
BKUS Bottom Bicarbonate Cartridge Sensor
SBS1 Rinsing Bridge Connector Sensor 1
SBS2 Rinsing Bridge Connector Sensor 2
BPA_IMP Arterial Blood Pump Motor Hall Sensor
BPA_DIR Arterial Blood Pump Direction
BPV_IMP Venous Blood Pump Motor Hall Sensor
BPV_DIR Venous Blood Pump Direction

Controller
NSVB Level Sensor Upline Tank
BICSS Bicarbonate Rinsing Connection Sensor
KSS Concentrate Rinsing Connector Sensor
MSBK1 Membrane Position Sensor Balance Chamber 1
MSBK2 Membrane Position Sensor Balance Chamber 2
RDV Venous Red Detector
SAD Safety Air Detector
BPADS Arterial Blood Pump Cover Switch
BPVDS Venous Blood Pump Cover Switch

Analog Board AB
Controller
PBS Pressure Single Needle
TSHE Heater Inlet Temperature Sensor
TSE Degassing Temperature Sensor
TSBIC Bicarbonate Temperature Sensor
TSD Dialysate Temperature Sensor
TSDE Dialyser Inlet Temperature Sensor
BICLF Bicarbonate Conductivity
ENDLF END Conductivity
PE Degassing Pressure Sensor
LAFS Air Separator Level Sensors

Supervisor
TSD-S Dialysate Temperature Sensor Supervisor
ENDLF-S END Conductivity Supervisor

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 40

Controller/Supervisor
BLD Blood Leak Detector
PBE Pressure Sensor
PA Arterial Pressure Sensor
PV Venous Pressure Sensor
PDA Pressure Sensor Dialysate Outlet

Power Board Motors PBM

BICP Bicarbonate Pump
KP Concentrate Pump
UFP Ultrafiltration Pump
LRP Level Regulation Pump

Power Board Valves PBV

VVBE Upline Tank Inlet Valve
VEB Degassing Bypass Valve
VLA Air Separator Valve
VDE Dialyser Inlet Valve
VDA Dialyser Outlet Valve
VBP Bypass Valve
VVB Upline Tank Valve
VBICP BIC Pump Valve
VBKS BIC Concentrate Suction Rod Valve
VBKO Top BIC Cartridge Valve
VD Disinfection Valve
VZ Circulation Valve
VDEBK1 Dialyser Inlet Valve Balance Chamber 1
VDEBK2 Dialyser Inlet Valve Balance Chamber 2
VDABK1 Dialyser Outlet Valve Balance Chamber 1
VDABK2 Dialyser Outlet Valve Balance Chamber 2
VEBK1 Inlet Valve Balance Chamber 1
VEBK2 Inlet Valve Balance Chamber 2
VABK1 Outlet Valve Balance Chamber 1
VABK2 Outlet Valve Balance Chamber 2
VBT Blood Side Test Pressure Sensor Valve
VPV Venous Pressure Sensor Valve
VPE Inlet Pressure Sensor Valve
VPU Up Pressure Sensor Valve
VPD Down Pressure Sensor Valve
VPA Arterial Pressure Sensor Valve
SAKV Venous Tubing Clamp
SAKA Arterial Tubing Clamp

Heparin Pump Compact

HP Heparin Pump Compact
LS Light Barrier Speed Monitoring
KRALO Interlocking Sensor
KOLB Syringe Plunger Sensor

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 41

HDF Online Board HOB

VSAA Substitution Connection Outlet Valve (drain)
VBE Filter Vent Valve
VDFF DF Filter Valve
VSAE Substitution Connection Inlet Valve
VSB Substitution Bypass Valve
PSAUS Port Substitution Outlet Sensor
PSABFS Port Substitution Drain Sensor
FEDFFS DF Filter Detection Sensor
FEHDFS HD Filter Detection Sensor

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

 2.22
2.22.1

F1
T6.25A
L Filter Power DC K4
Mains (EMC) Factor
Dialog+ SW 9.xx

Correction
N PFC
F2 DC K3
T6.25A
PE
Block Diagram SMPS-MC

PE

F5B
LH2 0V +5VD
Double- F_bat
Stage F5A F5A/F5B
Heater LH1 T6.25A (230V) Battery 24V
F12A (110V) 20..30Vdc +5VD
(Option)
F6
N1 F12A (230V) +5VD
F20A (110V) I_bat
F6
PE1 Forward Converter +5VD
2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description

0V
+12VD
Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC

GND

Fig. : Block Diagram Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd

0V
+12VD
Primary Side Secondary Side 0V
+12VA
0V
-12VD
0V -12VA
F301
- Ext. - P14
1 F302
Microcontroller -
Signals F303
- Motherboard
20 F304
- ABPM - P7
- DSI - P8
1/2010

Hardware
Watchdog
Buzzer
2 - 42

B. Braun Avitum AG
 2.22.2

Battery
TFT Display

Voltage Differential
BIB Signal Adapter
LVDS Low

Fig. : System Integration

Backlight F
Inverter TCB
Dialog+ SW 9.xx

Board Touch Controller Board

TLC Battery Option
Top Level Controller
(Motherboard)

FPB
Front Panel Board
System Integration SMPS-MC

Charge LED

Fan Mains Switch

2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description

L
Power
Primary Side Secondary Side P3 P9 +5VD
N Mains Input
24V +12VD
PE

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd

Central Earth -12VD
PE
+12VAN
X1 SMPS-MC -12VAN
N1 24VL
LH1 Heater Switch Mode Power Supply T1 Power Hardware 24 V Control 24VGB
LH2 Micro- Watchdog 24VGD
PE1
Microcontroller Controller

T4 Aux. Voltage
3 x 152 oC
Thermal Fuses Messages Output
2 x 1F
5V
B24OK
D24OK
Buzzer Control for Battery, Buzzer, Clock
/PERSR_N
/AKKU_OK
Heater Uamax U Control PFail Watchdog PF

900 W
900 W
1/2010

PGD
P2 X101 P2 P2 +5VG

Heater Control Input Servie Jumper Machine Monitoring

H_DIN
H_DCLK
/H_PROG
DGND
/B24OFF
DGND

AKAL
AKAL_S
/REM
D24OFF
AKKU_EN
WD_S
2 - 43

B. Braun Avitum AG
 2.22.3

F1 T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.1: L)

Options F2 T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.2: N)
P12 H401 F401 F5A 110/120V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.6: HZG1-L)

Fig. : Layout SMPS-MC

H104 230V: T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.6: HZG1-L)
H303 F303
- + F5B 110/120V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.7: HZG2-L)
Dialog+ SW 9.xx

Voltages 230V: T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.7: HZG2-L)

Motherboard H301 F301 F6 110/120V: F20A 6.3x32 (X1.5: HZG-N)
H300 230V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.5: HZG-N)
H302 F302 C19
P10 F301 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD1) : P6
F302 T5.0A TR5 (+5VD2) : P5
H304 F304
F303 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD3) : P10
Voltages H601 F304 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD4) : P8
Component Layout SMPS-MC

F601
+24 VL F401 T3.15A TR5 (+12VD1) : P5
+24 VGB H602
K3 F402 T5.00A TR5 (+12VD2) : P5
P4 F602
+24 VGD F403 T1.25A TR5 (+12VA) : P5 C18
H402 F600 M10.00A 6.3x32 (+24VL) : P4
F402
F601 T3.15A TR5 (+24VGB) : P4
Voltages F600 F602 T3.15A TR5 (+24VGD) : P4
H403 F403 H600
+5 VD2
+12 VD1/2 P5
+12 VA X101 Service Jumper
2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description

XP3.2 K4 X103 /EN_EXT

Battery GNDAKKU
X104 Charge Current Battery Option
XP3.1 +24VAKKU (left:100%/default: right:50%)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd

Charge Current X104
Battery
Mains Switch/Fan
X103 P6 P7 P8
/EN_EXT P9
Option ABPM F2
Option DSI
EXT_ON F5B F5A
P14 P11 LED H900 Operating Status F1
Signals X101 C115
P2 LED off Microcontroller does not work F6
Power Supply Control + -
from Low Level to LED flashes Microcontroller has detected
Digital Board D900 H900 with 5 .. 10 Hz an error
(Controller/ C114 LED flashes with Microcontroller works correctly
Supervisor) + - approx. 2 Hz
1/2010

X1.6
X1.7
X1.3

X1.1
X1.2

X1.5
X1.4
X1.8

X903 X100

Service LED Operating Goldcap Fan LH1 LH2 N1 PE1 L N PE PE

Jumper Status 1F Capacitor
2 - 44

B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 45

2.22.4 Wiring Diagram SMPS-MC with Battery

Option

TFT Display

J1 J1
(right) (left)

J3 J5
J1 J7 Charge LED
J9

P12 H401 F401

H104
H303 F303
- +
H301 F301

P10 H302 F302

H300

H304 F304

Battery P4
H601

H602
F601

F602
K3 Switch Mode Power Supply
2 x 12V H402
F402

P5 H403 F403
F600
H600 Microcontroller
-=blue
+=brown
XP3.2

XP3.1

P6
GNDAKKU
+24VAKKU
K4
SMPS-MC
X104

P9 P7 P8
Pin 1/2 X103 F2
Charge LED F5B F5A
P14 P11 F1
X101 C115 F6
P2 + -
H900
C114
+ -
X1.6

X1.7

X1.5

X1.4

X1.1

X1.2

X1.3

X1.8

X903 X100

Fig. : Wiring Diagram SMPS-MC with Battery Option

Battery 2 x 12 V, 7 Ah
Fuse for Battery 10 AT (5x20), breaking capacity 1500 A, 150 Vdc
Jumper X104 Charge Current for Batteries
Default: 50 % (right position)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 46

2.22.5 Description SMPS-MC

The switch mode power supply microcontroller SMPS-MC is used in Dialog+
machines with software ≥ 9.xx.
Basic Components SMPS-MC • Mains input, filter (EMC)
• Bridge rectifier
• PFC converter
• DC/DC converter
• Transformer
• 24 VL output (protected via F 600)
• 24 VGB output (switched via K3, protected via F601)
• 24 VGD output (switched via K4, protected via F602)
• DC/DC converter 24 V/+5 V (protected via F301/F302/F303/F304)
• DC/DC converter 24 V/+12 V (protected via F401/F402/F403)
• DC/DC converter 24 V/-12 V (electronically protected and via soldered fuse
F500)
• Heater power circuit triac V29/V30
• Microcontroller (D900) for monitoring and heater control
• Signal interface P2
• Power connectors to the system components P4 ... P12
• Battery screw terminal to 24 V P3
SMPS-MC The SMPS-MC (Switch Mode Power Supply MicroController) is assembled in
the rear door. The primary triggered switch mode power supply generates the
following voltages on the secondary side: +5 V (5 V = 5.2 V); ±12 V and 24 V
(24 V = 21.5 ... 29.07 V). The primary side has a wide range input for
120/230/240 V ± 10 %.
The SMPS-MC is not backwards compatible to the switch mode power supply
SMPS.
Battery Option The battery option is available in the machine ex works and can also be
retrofitted. The blood side functions in therapy can be maintained with a
battery supply (option) in case of a power failure. The charging circuit is
integrated in the SMPS-MC and includes a deep discharge protection.
Mains Voltage 120/230/240 V ± 10 %, 50/60 Hz
Mains Switch ON/OFF If the Dialog+ is switched off via the Automatic Switch-Off function in therapy,
the machine is in standby mode, e.g. the Dialog+ can be switched on and off
via the disinfection program.
The Dialog+ is only disconnected from mains if the mains plug is pulled out of
the mains receptacle.
Switch-off in Therapy
The buzzer is activated three times if the Dialog+ is switched off in therapy.
Mains Failure
The Dialog+ (with SMPS-MC) can be switched off and on again in battery
operation approx. 16 min after mains failure.
Voltages +5 VC Controller power supply
+5 VD: Digital
+5 VG: buffered (generated from +12 VH)
+12 VH: Aux. voltage
±12 VAN: Analog
±12 VD: Digital
+24 VGB: Switched blood side
+24 VGD: Switched dialysate side
+24 VL: Power (uncontrolled)
GNDAN: GND analog
GNDD: GND digital
GNDH: GND aux. voltage
GNDL: GND power

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 47

Double-Stage Heater and The SMPS-MC controls the double-stage heater H1/H2 (2 x 900 W). The first
Microcontroller heater circuit (heater H1, 900 W) is driven in 2 % steps. The second heater H2
H1 H2 is switched with max. power (900 W) if 50% of H1 is reached. H1 is then
% 1800W % 900W 900W controlled with half-wave-shapes, generated by the microcontroller D900 from
80% the SMPS-MC.
80 80
Example:
60 60 Set value of LLC = 40 % (based on 1800 W)
OFF
LLC 40% • H1 = 80 % (based on 900 W)
40 40
• H2 = switched off permanently
20 20 Set value of LLC = 60 % (based on 1800 W)
• H1 = 20 % (based on 900 W)
720W = 720W • H2 = switched on permanently
H1 H2 The microcontroller converts the predefined heater power from LLC into bit
% 1800W % 900W 900W patterns (1 bit corresponds to a mains voltage half cycle) to control both
heaters.
80 80

60
LLC 60% 60

40 40

20 20
20%

1080W = 180W + 900W

(>900W: H2 = ON)
Hardware Watchdog The hardware watchdog HW-WD switches the SMPS-MC in a safe condition if
(see also LED H900) the microcontroller fails, i.e. the buzzer is activated, the heater and both
voltages +24VGB/+24 VGD are switched off. The staff call is activated if
present.
LED H900 Operating Status 3 Modes:
LED off : Microcontroller is not working
LED flashes with 5 ... 10 Hz: Microcontroller has detected an error
LED flashes with approx. 2 Hz: Microcontroller is working correctly
24 V Outputs The 24 V of the main converter supplies the following circuits:
• 24 VL via fuse F600
• 24 VGB via fuse F601 and relay K3
• 24 VGD via fuse F602 and Relay K4
Battery Management The SMPS-MC has a battery management, with the following components:
• Screw terminal XP3.1 (+) and XP3.2 (-) for batteries
• Protection against incorrect polarity
• Electronic connection
• Deep discharge protection TES
• Charging current regulator
• Battery full detection
• Shut-down circuit for the battery test
• Enable signal AKKU_EN
All output voltages are maintained during a power failure if the signal
AKKU_EN was set prior to the power failure. The secondary auxiliary voltage is
also present. The battery is charged if mains voltage is present. The charging is
performed via a body diode even without AKKU_EN. A comparator protects the
battery from deep discharge by disconnecting the battery source from the
circuit at a voltage < 22 V ±0.5 V via a MOSFETT switch.
+5 V Voltage The 5 V DC/DC converter generates the 5 V voltage from the 24 V. The
overvoltage protection circuit (crowbar) is triggered at 5.75 V ± 250 mV. A reset
of the overvoltage protection circuit is possible only by switching the machine
off and on again. The soldered fuse F300 disconnects the 24 V in case of a short
circuit in the DC/DC converter.
+12 V Voltage A DC/DC converter generates the –12 V voltage from the 24 V. The soldered
fuse F500 disconnects the 24 V in case of a short circuit in the DC/DC
converter.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 48

2.22.6 Fuses
Rated Fuse Value Connector
Fuse Voltage
Fuse Type
L 6.25 A X1.1
F1 (Mains Input) (6.3 x 32)
N 6.25 A X1.2
F2 (Mains Input) (6.3 x 32)
L 12 A (110/120 V) X1.6
F5A 6.25 A (230 V)
(Heater 1, 900 W) (6.3 x 32)
L 12 A (110/120 V) X1.7
F5B 6.25 A (230 V)
(Heater 2, 900 W) (6.3 x 32)
N 20 A (110/120 V) X1.5
F6 12 A (230 V)
(Heater) (6.3 x 32)
P4/1
P4/4
P6/1
F301 +5 VD1 3.15 A (TR5)
P11/1
P12/1
P14/6
F302 +5 VD2 5 A (TR5) P5/10
P10/1
F303 +5 VD3 3.15 A (TR5) P10/4
P10/7
P7/1
F304 +5 VD4 3.15 A (TR5)
P8/1
F401 +12 VD1 3.15 A (TR5) P12/2
X100/1
P5/4
P7/4
P8/4
F402 +12 VD2 5 A (TR5) P9/5
P9/6
P10/10
P10/14
P11/2
P4/7
P5/1
F403 +12 VD3 1.25 A (TR5) P7/7
P8/7
P12/4
P4/10
P4/13
F600 +24 VL 10 A (6.3 x 32)
P5/8
P12/10
P4/11
P4/14
F601 +24 VGB 3.15 A (TR5)
P5/7
P12/13
P4/12
F602 +24 VGD 3.15 A (TR5) P4/15
P12/14

Note: Soldered fuses (e.g. F300 or F500) must not be changed if they are
defective, i.e. the complete SMPS-MC must be exchanged.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 2 . T e c h n i c a l System Description 1/2010 2 - 49

2.22.7 Signals
AKAL Audible alarm (LLC)
AKAL_S Audible alarm (LLS)
AKKU_EN Enable battery operation (possible in therapy mode only)
AKKU_LADEN Signal for external LED (on front panel board) – charging of battery
/AKKU_OK Load status of the battery
B24OFF +24 VGB ON/OFF (LLS)
B24OK +24VGB OK
D24OFF +24 VGD ON/OFF (LLS)
D24OK +24VGD OK
/DIR_ON Jumper X101 – is used to switch on the power supply without using the /REM
signal and deactivates the alarms. (The watchdog signal for the function of the
heater (H_DIN) is still required to drive the heater.)
/EXT_ON The machine can be switched on with this signal (see menu 1.26 Battery
Option: external ON).
EXT_STATE Status for external switch-on possibility (e.g. central disinfection),
simultaneously input and output; the signal is looped through (connector P14/3
= input).
H_DCLK Clock signal for heater data from LLC. The H_DCLK Signal is an open-collector
signal and is generated by the LLC. The H_DCLK Signal is used to send the data
at H_DIN to the microcontroller.
0, 1 Data clock
H_DIN The H_DIN signal is an open-collector signal, is generated by the LLC and sent
to the microcontroller (data to control the heater).
0 Half wave of mains voltage: heater switched off
1 Half wave of mains voltage: heater switched on
/H_PROG Programming mode for heater data. The /H_PROG signal is an open-collector
signal and is generated by the LLC.
0 Programming mode
1 No programming mode
/MSWITCH Mains switch
PERSR_N Staff call from SMPS-MC
PF Power fail (power failure)
/REM Remote signal of LLC (clock on digital board)
WD_S Watchdog LLS

2.22.8 Internal Signals

/PF Power fail for the power supply monitoring
Watchdog A watchdog is integrated to prevent a permanent unintentional drive of the
heater in case of an LLC reset. The watchdog is retriggered by the LLC with
< 2 s. The H_DIN signal is used for triggering. The watchdog prevents a drive of
the heater for t = 10 s after the switch-on of the switch mode power supply.
The watchdog has no safety function and is therefore not tested before the
therapy starts.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 2_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3-1

Table of Contents Page

3. Self Test SW 9.xx 3-5

3.1 Microprocessor Unit MPU Test from Controller/Supervisor 3-5

3.2 Status Self Test in Service Overview 3-6

3.2.1 Set-Up Low Level Controller LLC Test Codes 3-7
3.2.2 Set-Up Low Level Supervisor LLS Test Codes 3-7
3.2.3 Example LLC/LLS Test Codes for Blood Leak Detector 3-8
3.2.4 Overview Test Codes 3-8

3.3 Self Tests in Preparation SW 9.XX Switch Mode Power 3-9

Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC
3.3.1 Service Mode (DIR_ON) 3-9
3.3.2 Battery 3-9
3.3.3 EEPROM 3-10
3.3.4 Buzzer Test via LLS 3-10
3.3.5 Alarm System 3-11
3.3.6 Monitoring of Analog Voltage ±12 V 3-12
3.3.7 Blood Leak Detector 3-12
3.3.8 DFS Pressure Test (Table) 3-13
3.3.8.1 DFS Pressure Test 3-16
3.3.8.2 Membrane Movement/Pressure Build-up VDABK 3-17
3.3.8.3 Pressure Reduction VDABK with UFP 3-18
3.3.8.4 VBP Test 3-19
3.3.8.5 VDE/VDA Test 3-20
3.3.8.6 Pressure Build-up VDABK 3-21
3.3.8.7 Pressure Reduction Membrane Test with UFP 3-22
3.3.8.8 Membrane Test 3-23
3.3.8.9 Pressure Build-up VABK 3-24
3.3.8.10 Membrane Movement to Inlet Side 3-25
3.3.8.11 Pressure Reduction VABK with UFP 3-26
3.3.8.12 VEBK Test 3-27
3.3.8.13 Pressure Reduction 3-28
3.3.9 Integrity Test HDF Online 3-29
3.3.10 UF Pump 3-31
3.3.11 Conductivity 3-32

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3-2

3.3.12 Temperature TSD 3-32

3.3.13 SAD Level Test 3-33
3.3.14 SAD Counter Test 3-33
3.3.15 Equality Test for Blood Side Pressure Sensors 3-34
3.3.16 Pressure Test Substitution Line S-Online HDF Online 3-35
3.3.17 Blood Side Pressure Retention Test 3-36
3.3.18 Disinfection Valve VD 3-37

3.4 LX800 Motherboard 3-38

3.4.1 IDE Interface LX800 Motherboard 3-39
3.4.2 COM Ports LX800 Motherboard 3-39
3.4.3 USB Ports LX800 Motherboard 3-39
3.4.4 Detection/Boot Sequence from Bootable USB Sticks 3-40
3.4.5 BIOS Settings for LX800 Motherboard 3-41
3.4.5.1 Standard CMOS Features 3-42
3.4.5.2 Advanced BIOS Features 3-42
3.4.5.3 Advanced Chipset Features 3-42
3.4.5.4 Integrated Peripherals 3-43
3.4.5.5 Power Management Setup 3-43
3.4.5.6 PnP/PCI Configuration 3-43
3.4.5.7 PC Health Status 3-44
3.4.5.8 Change Parameters in CMOS Setup 3-44

3.5 Installation Software 9.xx 3-46

3.5.1 Document Customer Specific Default Values 3-46
3.5.2 Installation Software LLC 9.xx and LLS 9.xx with USB Stick 3-47
3.5.3 Installation Software TLC 9.xx with USB Stick 3-49
3.5.4 Boot Machine /Check Version Number 3-53
3.5.5 Select Options 3-53
3.5.6 Enter Customer Specific Default Values 3-53
3.5.7 Enter Specific Parameters 3-54
3.5.8 Self Test 3-55
3.5.9 Test Run 3-55

3.6 Field Service Utilities FSU 3-56

3.6.1 FSU Directories and Subdirectories 3-56
3.6.2 Start Field Service Utility FSU 3-57
3.6.3 Set-Up FSU Main Menu 3-58

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3-3

3.6.3.1 Hardware Keys for FSU 3-59

3.6.4 Set System Version Number 3-60
3.6.5 Set Working Time Counter (WTC) 3-61
3.6.6 Kill Masterboot Record 3-62
3.6.7 Write Utilities 3-64
3.6.7.1 Write Languages 3-64
3.6.7.2 Write Calibration Data 3-66
3.6.7.3 Write System Configuration 3-69
3.6.7.4 Undo Last Written 3-72
3.6.8 USB Stick Self Test 3-73
3.6.9 Card Reader Read/Write Utilities 3-74
3.6.9.1 Select Menu of Card Reader Commands 3-74
3.6.9.2 Read Card Image 3-75
3.6.9.3 Write Card Image 3-76
3.6.9.4 Read Patient Diskette 3-77
3.6.9.5 Write Patient Diskette to Card 3-78
3.6.9.6 Read Patient Card 3-79
3.6.9.7 Write Patient Card 3-80
3.6.9.8 Remove All Patient Data 3-81
3.6.10 Read/Get Error Utilities 3-83
3.6.10.1 Read System Configuration 3-83
3.6.10.2 Read Calibration Data 3-85
3.6.10.3 Read All Trends 3-87
3.6.10.4 Read Screenshots 3-89
3.6.10.5 Get Error (ErrorDisk) 3-91
3.6.11 FSU Handling of Errors 3-93
3.6.12 Examination of Results 3-93
3.6.13 Troubleshooting USB Stick 3-94
3.6.13.1 Field Service Utility Menu with Failed CRC Check 3-94

3.7 Default Table for SW 9.xx 3-95

3.8 Measures after Repair 3-103

3.8.1 Repair Matrix 3-103
3.8.2 Tests and Measures to be Executed 3-104
3.8.2.1 Install Software 3-104
3.8.2.2 Check System Configuration, Production Report and Set if 3-104
Necessary

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3-4

3.8.2.3 Self Test 3-105

3.8.2.4 Conductivity Test Run, Temperature Comparison 3-105
Measurement
3.8.2.5 Test Run UF Comparison Measurement 3-105
3.8.2.6 Test Run 3-105
3.8.2.7 Electrical Safety Check 3-106
3.8.2.8 Perform Disinfection after Repair 3-106
3.8.2.9 Document the Executed Activities 3-106
3.8.3 Execution Protocol 3-107

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3-5

3. Self Test SW 9.xx

3.1 Microprocessor Unit MPU Test from
Controller/Supervisor

The microprocessor unit MPU of the controller and supervisor are checked. The
function of the internal MPU registers, flags and stacks is tested.
MPU Test Supervisor The MPU test is performed in therapy mode and service mode after switch-on
prior to the RAM and ROM test.
MPU Test Controller The MPU test is performed during the boot phase after the RAM and ROM test.
The operating system is not active in this phase.
Register Test The following tests are performed:
• Read-write capability of the registers
• Cross-talk between the single bits
• Address ability of the registers
• Crosstalk between single words
Flag Test Set and Reset Capability
The test checks whether the flag can be set and reset correctly according to
defined conditions.
Query Capability
The test checks whether the correctly set flags can also be evaluated correctly .
Stack Test The function of the stack is tested by storing and reloading/reading a test
pattern.
Reactions in Case of an Error
of the MPU Test
Controller
If an error is detected during the MPU test the TLC
terminates the start procedure – therapy can not
be started. The error message is displayed in the
TSM service program:
• Bit 7, BIOS init. error
• Bit 8, Error in MPU test

Supervisor
If an error is detected during the MPU test the
following alarms are displayed:
In Therapy – Therapy Selection:
• Hardware error RAM/ROM (SUP)
In TSM Service Program:
• Error in MPU test

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3-6

3.2. Status Self Test in Service

Overview

Display LLC/LLS Test Codes The test codes for the self test are displayed by LLC and LLS in the Status Self
in Status Self Test Test on the first page of the service overview (in therapy).

Water Tank Balance Chamber Ultrafiltration Blood Side (Pressure)

VVBE: OPENED/CLOSED MSBK1: XXXXX UFP: XX rpm PA: XXX mmHg
NSVB: HIGH/LOW MSBK2: XXXXX UFP_S: XX rpm PA_S: XXX mmHg
Degassing VEBK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED PDA: XXX mmHg PBE: XXX mmHg
EP: XXXX rpm VABK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED PDA_S: XXX mmHg PV: XXX mmHg
VEB: OPEN/CLOSED VDEBK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED TMP: XXX mmHg PV_S: XXX mmHg
PE: XXX mmHg VDABK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED BIC Cartridge Holder PBS: XXX mmHg
TSE: XX.X oC VEBK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED BKUS: OPEN/CLOSED PBS_S: XXX mmHg
TSHE: XX.X oC VABK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED BKUS_S: OPEN/CLOSED Blood Pumps
VDEBK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED VVB: OPEN/CLOSED BPA: XXXX rpm
Heater VDABK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED VBICP: OPEN/CLOSED BPA_S: XXXX rpm
HEATER: XX.X %
Flow (Dialysate Fluid) VBKO: OPEN/CLOSED BPV: XXXX rpm
Air Separator FPE: XXXX rpm VBKS: OPEN/CLOSED BPV_S: XXXX rpm
LAFSO: NO AIR/AIR
LAFSU: NO AIR/AIR
FPA: XXXX rpm Valves Online Tubing Clamps
FMD: XXX ml/min VBE: OPEN/CLOSED SAKA: OPEN/CLOSED
VLA: OPEN/CLOSED FMD_S XXX ml/min VBE_S: OPEN/CLOSED SAKV: OPEN/CLOSED
Temperature Valves (Bypass) VDFF: OPEN/CLOSED SAKV_S: OPEN/CLOSED
TSE: XX.X oC VBP: OPEN/CLOSED VDFF_S: OPEN/CLOSED
TSBIC: XX.X oC Air Detector
VBP_S: OPEN/CLOSED VSB: OPEN/CLOSED
TSD: XX.X oC SAD: NO AIR/AIR
VDE: OPEN/CLOSED VSB_S: OPEN/CLOSED
TSD_S: XX.X oC SAD_S: NO AIR/AIR
VDE_S: OPEN/CLOSED VSAA: OPEN/CLOSED
TSDE: XX.X oC SAD TIME_S: OK
VDA: OPEN/CLOSED VSAA_S: OPEN/CLOSED
SAD REF_S: XXXX mV
Conductivity VDA_S: OPEN/CLOSED VSAE: OPEN/CLOSED
SAD VOL: XXXX µl
BICLF: X.X mS/cm V a l v e s ( Disinfection) VSAE_S: OPEN/CLOSED
SAD VOL_S: XXXX µl
ENDLF: XX.X mS/cm VZ: OPEN/CLOSED Pump Online Heparin
ENDLF_S: XX.X mS/cm VD OPEN/CLOSED OPS: XXXX rpm
BICP: XX rpm HP: STOP
VD_S OPEN/CLOSED OPS_S: XXXX rpm
BICP_S: XX rpm POSITION: XX.XX mm
BIC-Ratio: XX.X
Blood Leak Subst. Flow (Online) Status Self Test
BL: X.XX ‰ FMS: XXX ml/min
BIC-Ratio_S: XX.X LLC: XXXXX
BL_S: X.XX ‰ FMS_S: XXX ml/min
KP: XX rpm LLS: XXXXX
KP_S: XX rpm
END-Ratio: XX.X
END-Ratio_S: XX.X

LLC/S & TLC Alarm Window LLC Message Window

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3-7

3.2.1 Set-Up Low Level Controller

LLC Test Codes

Format of LLC Test Codes: T T S S x:

TT LLC test code to LLS
SS Performed test step
x Number of performed repeats
0 ≤ x < repeats until error message
Examples
11102 Third blood leak detector test: send signal to blood leak detector task
33701 Second BS pressure test terminated, because during autopriming, e.g. an LF
error occurred.
37991 VD test passed after the second time.
LLC Test Codes Before the
Individual Tests
T T 00 x Start test.
T T 01 x Error: timeout (10 s) at "Before Test Start Wait for Test Code 0 from LLS".
T T 02 x Test check prerequisites (if present, see respective tests).
T T 03 x Error: Check timeout test prerequisites (if present, timeout time see respective
tests).
T T 04 x Wait for LLS test code from LLS.
T T 05 x Error: timeout (10 s) at "Before Test Start Wait for LLS Test Code from LLS".
Test Codes of the Individual Tests Range 10x .... 99x
Not all test codes are displayed sequentially, due to the implementation.
A higher test code always includes all the finalised subcodes with lower
priority.
In case of an error: The subcode always includes the subphase where the error
occurred.
3.2.2 Set-Up Low Level Supervisor LLS
Test Codes
The test code is displayed as a numerical value ≥ 10000. If the value is < 9000,
this is the required rinsing volume for the HDFO filter rinsing in ml. If the value
is > 9000 and < 10000, the last three digits display the required HDFO filter
rinsing volume in ml through the valves VSAA and VSAE (VSB is closed).

Format of LLS Test Codes: T T S S S:

(Value ≥ 10000) TT LLS test code to LLC
SSS Performed test step
Example:
11104 Blood leak detector test: measure level for red and green

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3-8

3.2.3 Example LLC/LLS Test Codes

for Blood Leak Detector
LLC Test Code:
11 ( T T ) : Blood leak detector test
10 ( S S ) : Send signal to blood leak task
11102 2 (x): Third repetition (x = 0, 1, 2)
11004 LLS Test Code:
11 ( T T ) : Blood leak detector test
004 ( S S ) : Measure level for red and green

LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 1102x Prerequisites for Test:
Upline tank must be filled
Timeout 2 min
2. Test code = 11 to LLS Test code = 11 back to LLC
3. 1110x EV_TESTE_BLUTLECK_EIN to BlutleckTaskID Test initialisation (VGD ON) 11000 –
Single measurement of green, 11003
Single measurement of red, 11004
then comparison of: red ≥ green + 0.2 V
no timeout
4. Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 11005 –
5. 1120x Wait for D24OFF (timeout 30 s) 11011
6. VGD ON 11012
7. 1130x Wait for D24ON (timeout 30 s)
8. 1199x Completed

3.2.4 Overview Test Codes

0 0 No tests
1 1 Blood leak detector
1 2 DFS pressure test
1 5 Integrity test HDF online (only for Dialog+ HDF online)
1 6 Alarm system
1 7 Monitoring of analog voltage ± 12 V
2 0 UF pump
2 1 End conductivity
2 2 Temperature TSD
2 5 SMPS-MC EEPROM
2 6 SMPS-MC service mode
2 7 SMPS-MC battery
2 8 SMPS-MC buzzer
3 0 SAD: Level test
3 1 SAD: Counter test
3 2 Pressure sensors blood side: Equality test for blood side pressure sensors
3 3 Pressure sensors blood side: Blood side pressure test
3 7 Disinfection Valve VD
4 0 Pressure test substitution line S-Online HDF online

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3-9

3.3 Self Test in Preparation SW 9.xx Switch Mode

Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC

3.3.1 Service Mode (DIR_ON)

Configuration Switch mode power supply microcontroller SMPS-MC with and without battery
Test Code 26
1
Repeats Until Error Message
ID Error Message 1152: Power supply service mode - no therapy
Reaction to the Test Result in Preparation Error: X101 connected (/DIR_ON = 0)
• therapy not possible because alarms deactivated, information text
OK: X101 open (/DIR_ON = 1)
• Therapy possible
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. Prerequisites for Test: none
2. Test code = 26 to LLS Test code = 26 back to LLC
3. 2610x Switch-off of VGD and VGB 26001

4. Wait for D24OFF and B24OFF

(Timeout 15 s)
5. Set set point for heater to self test code #110
6. 2620x Wait for feedback of test result via BIOS (timeout 15 s)
7. 2630x Set set point of heater to 0
8. 2699x Completed VGD ON
VGB ON

3.3.2 Battery
Configuration Switch mode power supply microcontroller SMPS-MC with and without battery
Test Code 27
3
Repeats Until Error Message
ID Error Message 1150: Selftest error SMPS battery test
Reaction to the Test Result in Preparation Error: Battery not present or not loaded
• Information text and therapy possible
OK: Battery present and loaded
• Therapy possible
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. Prerequisites for Test: none
2. Test code = 27 to LLS Test code = 27 back to LLC
3. 2710x Switch-off of VGD and VGB 27001

4. Wait for D24OFF and B24OFF

(Timeout 15 s)
5. Set set point for heater to self test code #112
6. 2720x Wait for feedback of test result via BIOS (timeout 15 s)
7. 2730x Set set point of heater to 0
8. 2799x Completed VGD ON
VGB ON

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 10

3.3.3 EEPROM
Configuration Switch mode power supply microcontroller SMPS-MC with and without battery
Test Code 25
1
Repeats Until Error Message
ID Error Message 1154: SMPS-EEPROM defective
Reaction to the Test Result in Preparation Test is not performed at present
• Answer from SMPS-MC is OK because the EEPROM is not used at present
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. Prerequisites for Test:
2. Test code = 25 to LLS Test code = 25 back to LLC
3. 2510x Switch-off of VGD and VGB 25001

4. Wait for D24OFF and B24OFF

(Timeout 15 s)
5. Set set point for heater to self test code #113
6. 2520x Wait for feedback of test result via BIOS (timeout 15 s)
7. 2530x Set set point of heater to 0
8. 2599x Completed VGD ON
VGB ON

3.3.4 Buzzer Test via LLS

Configuration Switch mode power supply microcontroller SMPS-MC with and without battery
Test Code 28
3
Repeats Until Error Message
ID Error Message 1145: Self test error SMPS buzzer test
Reaction to the Test Result in Preparation Error: buzzer defective
• Information text and therapy possible
OK:
• Therapy possible
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. Prerequisites for Test: none
2. Test code = 10 to LLS Test code = 10 back to LLC
3. 2810x Switch-off of VGD and VGB 28001

4. Wait for D24OFF and B24OFF

(Timeout 15 s)
5. Set set point for heater to self test code #115
6. Activate buzzer after approx. 1 s for 250 ms 28003
7. 2820x Wait for feedback of test result via BIOS (timeout 15 s)
8. 2830x Set set point of heater to 0
9. 2899x Completed VGD ON
VGB ON

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 11

3.3.5 Alarm System

Test Code 16
Repeats Until Error Message 1
ID Error Message 1167: Sound + LED test failed
Actions after Error None (test is repeated immediately)
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
Code LLC LLS Code
1. Prerequisites for Test:
No alarm activation
2. Test code = 16 to LLS Test code = 16 back to LLC
3. 1610x OSD LED OFF, Sound OFF Start condition for the test: 16001
1. „OSD-LED OFF“ detected
No alarm activation 2. „Sound OFF“ detected

Timeout 60 s Activation of the red OSD LED 16002

Wait for feedback of the activation and switch-off of 16003

the LED

Wait for LED off 16004

4. Acknowledge with switch-off of the power supply 16005 –
trigger, i.e. switch-off of VGD and VGB 16010
5. 1620x Wait for D24OFF and B24OFF (timeout 60 s since start
of code 100)
6. Trigger ON 16011
7. 1630x Wait for D24ON and B24ON (timeout 10 s)
8. 1630x D24ON and B24ON: Condition for the test: 16021
Alarm activation LLC/TLC 1. „OSD LED red left and right ON“ detected
2. „Sound ON“ detected
Activation test alarm with sound and OSD LED red (ID
1002)
9. Acknowledge with switch-off VGD 16022 –
16027
10. 1640x Wait for D24OFF (timeout 60 s since start of code 200)
11. VGD ON 16028
12. 1650x Wait for D24ON (timeout 10 s)
13. 1699 Completed

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 12

3.3.6 Monitoring of Analog Voltage ±12 V

Objective Check the monitoring of the analog voltage ±12 V.
Test Code 17
Repeats Until Error Message 1
ID Error Message 1155: ±12 V not passed
Actions after Error None (test is repeated immediately)
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. Prerequisites for Test:
± 12V voltage in limit range
2. Test code = 17 to LLS Test code = 17 back to LLC
3. No test activation 17001 –
17003
4. 1710x Failure of voltage check
Timeout 15 s
5. Delete test activation for voltage 1: 17011 –
TEST1 set low 17013
6. 1720x Voltage check OK
Timeout 15 s
7. Test activation for voltage 2: 17021 –
TEST2n set low 17023
8. 1730x Failure of voltage check
Timeout 15 s
9. Delete test activation for voltage 2: 17031
TEST2n set high
10. 1740x Voltage check OK
Timeout 15 s
11. 1799 Completed

3.3.7 Blood Leak Detector

Objective The switch function between the LEDs and the PWM drive of the LEDs is tested.
Test Code 11
Repeats Until Error Message 3
ID Error Message 1156: Blood leak test not OK
Actions after Error Rinse, repeat all tests
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 1102x Prerequisites for Test:
Upline tank must be filled
Timeout 2 min
2. Test code = 11 to LLS Test code = 11 back to LLC
3. 1110x EV_TESTE_BLUTLECK_EIN to BlutleckTaskID Test initialisation (VGD ON) 11000 –
Single measurement of green, 11003
Single measurement of red, 11004
then comparison of: red ≥ green + 0.2 V
no timeout
4. Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 11005 –
5. 1120x Wait for D24OFF (timeout 30 s) 11011
6. VGD ON 11012
7. 1130x Wait for D24ON (timeout 30 s)
8. 1199x Completed

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 13

3.3.8 DFS Pressure Test (Table)

Objective Pressure test of the balance system and function test of the valves, drive of UFP for
function test of speed detection.
Test Code 12
Repeats until error message 1
ID Error Message 1157: DF pressure test will be repeated
Actions after error Rinse, repeat all tests.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. Prerequisites for Test:
Upline tank must be filled
2. Test code = 12 to LLS Test code = 12 back to LLC
1. 1220x Membrane Movement VDABK Wait until VLA is detected as opened 12000
FPE = 1500 ml⋅/min 12019
FPA = 20 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------- opened
VDABK1/2 ----------------------------- closed
VBP, VDA, VDE ------------------------ opened
VLA ---------------------- (5 s to vent) opened
Final Condition:
No further drop of the values for the balance
chamber sensors or timeout 60 s
2. 1221x Pressure build-up VDABK Wait until VLA is detected as closed 12020
FPE = 1500 ml⋅/min
FPA = 20 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 ------------opened
VDABK1/2------------------------------ closed
VDE, VDA, VBP ------------------------ opened
Final Condition:
PDA ≥ +425 mmHg for 1 s or timeout 60 s
3. 1230x Pressure reduction UFP 12021
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 100 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2 -----------------------opened
VDABK1/2, VDEBK1/2 ------------------- closed
VDE, VBP ----------------------------- opened
VDA ----------------------------------- closed
PDA ≤ +380 mmHg or timeout 60 s
4. 1235x VBP test Start condition for the test (2,5 s): 12021 –
FPE = 800 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 12026
FPA = 100 ml⋅/min 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
Valve Status: 3. 300 mmHg < PDA < +450 mmHg
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2, VDEBK1/2 ------------opened 12027 –
VDABK1/2------------------------------ closed Test 5 s, 12036
VDE, VBP ------------------------------ closed max. deviation ∆PDA < 25 mmHg, 12037
VDA ---------------------------------- opened
Test timeout 30 s or wait for inversion of Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT 12038
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS
5. 1240x VDE/VDA test Start condition for the test (2,5 s): 12061 –
FPE = 800 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 12066
FPA = 100 ml/min 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
Valve Status: 3. 300 mmHg < PDA < +450 mmHg
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------- opened 12067 –
VDABK1/2 ----------------------------- closed Test 5 s, 12076
VBP ---------------------------------- opened max. deviation ∆PDA < 25 mmHg, 12077
VDA, VDE ------------------------------ closed
Test timeout 60 s or wait for inversion of Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT 12078
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 14

6. 1245x Pressure build-up VDABK 12101

FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 100 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------- opened
VDABK1/2 ----------------------------- closed
VBP, VDA, VDE ------------------------ opened
PDA ≥ +425mmHg for 1 s or timeout 60 s
7. 1250x Pressure reduction with UFP 12101
FPE = 800 ml/min
FPA = 20 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ------------------- opened
VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 -------------------- closed
VBP, VDE ----------------------------- opened
VDA ----------------------------------- closed
PDA ≤ +380 mmHg or timeout 60 s
8. 1255x Membrane test Start condition for the test (10 s): 12101 –
FPE = 800 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 12121
FPA = 20 ml/min 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
Valve Status: 3. +300 mmHg < PDA < +450 mmHg
VEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ------------------- opened 12122 –
VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 -------------------- closed Test 10 s, 12131
VBP, VDE, VDA ------------------------ opened max. deviation ∆PDA < 25 mmHg, 12132
Test timeout 60 s or wait for inversion of
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT 12133
9. 1260x Pressure build-up VABK 12151
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 500 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 -------- opened
VABK1/2 ------------------------------ closed
VBP, VDA, VDE ------------------------ opened
PDA ≥ +425 mmHg for 1 s or timeout 60 s
10. 1265x Membrane movement 12151
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 1500 ml⋅/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------------------- closed
VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ----------------- opened
VBP, VDA, VDE ------------------------ opened
Test timeout 60 s or no increase of the values of
the membrane position sensors
11. 1270x Pressure reduction with UFP 12151
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 500 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------------------- closed
VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ----------------- opened
VBP, VDE ----------------------------- opened
VDA ----------------------------------- closed
PDA ≤ +380 mmHg or timeout 60 s

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 15

12. 1275x VEBK test Start condition for the test (5 s): 12151 –
FPE = 800 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 12161
FPA = 500 ml/min 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
Valve Status: 3. +300 mmHg < PDA < +450 mmHg
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------------------- closed 12162 –
VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ----------------- opened Test 10 s, 12181
VBP, VDE, VDA ------------------------ opened max. deviation ∆PDA < 25 mmHg, 12182
Test timeout 60 s or wait for inversion of
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT 12183
13. 1280x Pressure reduction 12000
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 500 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2 ------------------- opened
VABK1/2, VDABK1/2------------------- opened
VBP, VDA, VDE ------------------------ opened

Timeout 60 s
14. 1299 Completed

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 16

3.3.8.1 DFS Pressure Test

General Comments The closing function of VLA is tested implicitly together with all
tests that generate an overpressure at PDA, because the
overpressure is not built up and not maintained when VLA is open.
Therefore an explicit test of VLA is not required. DFS pressure test:
• A controlled membrane movement is performed to the outlet
side prior to the phase Pressure build-up VDABK.
• The FPE and FPA pumps are set to 1500 ml/min in phases with
membrane movement. Thus a fast movement of the membrane
is achieved.
• UFP is activated during the pressure build-up phase and thus
tested.
• The evaluation of the pressure changes in a test interval is
performed via the pressure at the end of the test interval. (The
pressure difference to the minimum and maximum sensor
value is created in the test interval.)
• VLA is opened for 5 s at the beginning of the test to ensure
that the air separator is completely filled with water.
Simultaneously the function for the monitoring of the current
is checked.
• UFP is started during the pressure build-up phase.
• The acknowledgement of the single test steps in the DFS
pressure test is performed via a bit in the internal
communication (between LLS and LLC).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 17

3.3.8.2 Membrane Movement/Pressure

Build-up VDABK

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram Membrane Movement/Pressure Build-up VDABK
The speed for FPE and FPA are slowly set in increments of 200 min-1 to a
maximum flow of 1500 ml/min and 10 ml/min respectively. The membrane
movement with the resulting pressure build-up is terminated after no further
drop of the values for the balance chamber sensors is detected. The membrane
is moved to the outlet.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 1220x Membrane movement VDABK Wait until VLA is detected as opened 12000
FPE = 1500 ml/min 12019
FPA = 20 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 ------------opened
VDABK1/2------------------------------ closed
VDE, VDA, VBP ------------------------ opened
VLA ---------------------- open to vent for 5 s
Final Condition:
No further drop of the values for the balance
chamber sensors or timeout 60 s
2. 1221x Pressure build-up VDABK Wait until VLA is detected as closed 12020
FPE = 1500 ml⋅/min
FPA = 20 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 ------------opened
VDABK1/2------------------------------ closed
VDE, VDA, VBP ------------------------ opened
Final Condition:
PDA ≥ +425 mmHg for 1 s or timeout 60 s

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 18

3.3.8.3 Pressure Reduction VDABK

with UFP

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram Pressure Reduction VDABK with UFP
The pressure at PDA is reduced built-up to ≤ 380 mmHg with the UF pump
after the dialyser test circuit is closed. The UF pump is driven with 3000 ml/h.
VDA is closed during this pressure reduction. Thus the UF pump strokes are
damped via the extended flow path and no interferences are generated at PDA.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
3. 1230x Pressure reduction UFP 12021
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 100 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2 -----------------------opened
VDABK1/2, VDEBK1/2 ------------------- closed
VDE, VBP ----------------------------- opened
VDA ----------------------------------- closed
Final Condition:
PDA ≤ +380 mmHg or timeout 60 s

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 19

3.3.8.4 VBP Test

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram VBP Test
A pressure drop indicates a leakage at any component, e.g. rinse bridge,
dialyser, UF pump, o-ring etc..

Test VDE/VBP A leakage of the valves leads to a pressure increase at PDA.

Test VDABK A leakage of the valve leads to a pressure increase at PDA.
Timeout 30 s
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
4. 1235x VBP test Start condition for the test (2.5 s): 12021 –
FPE = 800 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 12026
FPA = 100 ml/min 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
Valve Status: 3. 300 mmHg < PDA < +450 mmHg
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2, VDEBK1/2 ------------opened
VDABK1/2------------------------------ closed Test 5 s, 12027 –
VDE, VBP ------------------------------ closed max. deviation ∆PDA < 25 mmHg, 12036
VDA ---------------------------------- opened 12037
Final Condition:
Test timeout 30 s or wait for inversion of Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT 12038
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 20

3.3.8.5 VDE/VDA Test

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram VDE/VDA Test
Test VDE/VDA A leakage of the valves leads to a pressure increase at PDA.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
5. 1240x VDE/VDA test Start condition for the test (2.5 s): 12061 –
FPE = 800 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 12066
FPA = 100 ml/min 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
Valve Status: 3. 300 mmHg < PDA < +450 mmHg
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------- opened
VDABK1/2 ----------------------------- closed Test 5 s, 12067 –
VBP ---------------------------------- opened max. deviation ∆PDA < 25 mmHg, 12076
VDA, VDE ------------------------------ closed 12077
Final Condition:
Test timeout 60 s or wait for inversion of Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT 12078
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 21

3.3.8.6 Pressure Build-up VDABK

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram Pressure Build-up VDABK
If PDA < 425 mmHg: The speed for FPE and FPA is slowly set in increments of
200 min-1 in 250 ms to a maximum flow of 500 ml/min and 100 ml/min
respectively.
The pressure build-up is completed if PDA is ≥ 425 mmHg for more than 1 s.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
6. 1245x Pressure build-up VDABK 12101
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 100 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------- opened
VDABK1/2 ----------------------------- closed
VBP, VDA, VDE ------------------------ opened
Final Condition:
PDA ≥ +425 mmHg for 1 s or timeout 60 s

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 22

3.3.8.7 Pressure Reduction Membrane

Test with UFP

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram Pressure Reduction Membrane Test with UFP
The pressure at PDA is decreased to ≤ 380 mmHg with the UF pump after the
dialyser test circuit is closed. The UF pump is driven with 3000 ml/h. VDA is
closed during this pressure reduction. Thus the UF pump strokes are damped via
the extended flow path and no interferences are generated at PDA.
During this pressure reduction the speeds for the following test are set to: FPE
for a flow of 800 ml/min and FPA for 20 ml/min. Thus the membrane is pressed
to the outlet side.
Timeout: 60 s
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
7. 1250x Pressure reduction with UFP 12101
FPE = 800 ml/min
FPA = 20 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ------------------- opened
VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 -------------------- closed
VBP, VDE ----------------------------- opened
VDA ----------------------------------- closed
Final Condition:
PDA ≤ +380 mmHg or timeout 60 s

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 23

3.3.8.8 Membrane Test

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram Membrane Test
Test Membrane The membrane is loaded with a pressure of 1.3 bar due to the high speed of FPE
with a flow of 800 ml/min. A leakage would cause a pressure increase at PDA.
FPA runs with a slow speed during this test to prevent a back pressure.
Test VDEBK A leakage of the valve leads to a pressure increase at PDA.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
8. 1255x Membrane test Start condition for the test (10 s): 12101 –
FPE = 800 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 12121
FPA = 20 ml/min 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
Valve Status: 3. +300 mmHg < PDA < +450 mmHg
VEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ------------------- opened
VDEBK1/2, VABK1/2 -------------------- closed Test 10 s, 12122 –
VBP, VDE, VDA ------------------------ opened max. deviation ∆PDA < 25 mmHg, 12131
Final Condition: 12132
Test timeout 60 s or wait for inversion of Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT 12133
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 24

3.3.8.9 Pressure Build-up VABK

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram Pressure Build-up VABK
If PDA < 425 mmHg: the speed for FPE and FPA is slowly set in increments of
200 min-1 to a maximum flow of 500 ml/min and 100 ml/min respectively.
The pressure build-up is completed if PDA is ≥ 425 mmHg for more than 1 s.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
9. 1260x Pressure build-up VABK 12151
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 500 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 -------- opened
VABK1/2 ------------------------------ closed
VBP, VDA, VDE ------------------------ opened
Final Condition:
PDA ≥ +425 mmHg for 1 s or timeout 60 s

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 25

3.3.8.10 Membrane Movement to Inlet

Side

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram Membrane Movement to Inlet Side
The FPA pump is driven with 1500 ml/min and moves the membrane to the
inlet side. Thus an overpressure is built up at the valves VABK1/2 for the next
test step. If the membrane is not in end position: Only the pressure of the
throttle DDE is built-up prior to the valves, due to the volume shift.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
10. 1265x Membrane movement 12151
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 1500 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------------------- closed
VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ----------------- opened
VBP, VDA, VDE ------------------------ opened
Final Condition:
Test timeout 60 s or no increase of the values of
the membrane position sensors

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 26

3.3.8.11 Pressure Reduction VABK with

UFP

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram Pressure Reduction VABK with UFP

The pressure at PDA is reduced to ≤ 380 mmHg with the UF pump. The UF
pump is driven with 3000 ml/h. VDA is closed during this pressure reduction.
Thus the UF pump strokes are damped via the extended flow path and no
interferences are generated at PDA. The valve VZ is opened so that the high
pre-pressure at RVDA can be reduced to the outlet side and that a sufficient
pressure gradient is present at VABK and UFP for the next test.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
11. 1270x Pressure reduction with UFP 12151
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 500 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------------------- closed
VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ----------------- opened
VBP, VDE ----------------------------- opened
VDA ----------------------------------- closed
VZ ----------------------------------- opened
Final Condition:
PDA ≤ +380 mmHg or timeout 60 s

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 27

3.3.8.12 VEBK Test

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram VEBK Test
Test VEBK1/2 VEBK is charged by the maximum delivery pressure from FPE (set at RVFPE). A
leakage of the valves leads to a pressure increase at PDA.
Test VABK1/2 VABK is charged by the maximum delivery pressure from FPA (set at RVFPA). A
leakage of the valves leads to a pressure increase at PDA.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
12. 1275x VEBK test Start condition for the test (5 s): 12151 –
FPE = 800 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 12161
FPA = 500 ml/min 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
Valve Status: 3. +300 mmHg < PDA < +450 mmHg
VEBK1/2, VABK1/2 --------------------- closed
VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ----------------- opened Test 10 s, 12162 –
VBP, VDE, VDA ------------------------ opened max. deviation ∆PDA < 25 mmHg, 12181
12182
Final Condition:
Test timeout 60 s or wait for inversion of Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT 12183
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 28

3.3.8.13 Pressure Reduction

VDE
VBP

VDEBK VDABK FPA VDA PDA

open
UFP offen
FPE VEBK VABK

closed
RVDA geschlossen
Fig. : Flow Diagram Pressure Reduction
A pressure level is set at PDA between –200 mmHg and +200 mmHg by
opening all valves and driving the pumps accordingly.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
13. 1280x VEBK test 12000
FPE = 500 ml/min
FPA = 500 ml/min
Valve Status:
VEBK1/2, VDEBK1/2 ------------------- opened
VABK1/2, VDABK1/2------------------- opened
VBP, VDA, VDE ------------------------ opened

Timeout 60 s

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 29

3.3.9 Integrity Test HDF Online

Simultaneous pressure build-up of DF
filter and HDF filter
Objective Detection of safety relevant ruptures, pressure test of the substitution system in the
machine, pressure test of VBE/VSAE/VSAA.
Air can not pass the semipermeable filter membrane at negative pressure of > -500
mmHg. To detect ruptures: One side of the filter is filled with air; On the other side a
negative pressure < -270 mmHg is built up. If the pressure drop is < 20 mmHg in 3 min,
safety relevant ruptures are not present. The final opening of VBP must be detected by
LLS via PDA. Thus it is guaranteed that the filters were filled with air and VBE was
opened.
Test code 15
Repeats until error message 1
ID error message 1151: HDF online filter test failed!
Actions after error Rinse, repeat all tests
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 1502x Prerequisites for Test:
Upline tank must be filled,
PSAUS, PSABF and BPV cover must be closed.
Timeout 2 min
2. Test code = 15 to LLS Test code = 15 back to LLC
3. 1510x Pressure Reduction for VBE Test with FPA:
Pressure reduction with FPA until PDA < -300
mmHg
Valve Status:
VDEBK1/2, VEBK1/2 -------------------- closed
VDABK1/2, VABK1/2------------------- opened
VBE, VDFF, VDE, VSB-------------------- closed
VBP, VDA, VSAE, VSAA----------------- opened
Timeout 1 min
4. 1515x VBE Pressure Test Start condition for the test (5 s): 15001 –
Valve Status: 4. Correct valve position 15010
VDEBK1/2, VEBK1/2 -------------------- closed 5. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
VDABK1/2, VABK1/2-------------------- closed 6. -450 mmHg < PDA < -150 mmHg
VBE, VDFF, VDE, VSB-------------------- closed
VBP, VDA, VSAE, VSAA----------------- opened Test 10 s, 15011
max. deviation ∆PDA < 50 mmHg,
Test timeout 1 min or wait for switch-off VGD PDA < -100 mmHg,
from LLS Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 15012 –
15018
5. 1520x Pressure Reduction for VSAE Test with UFP:
Pressure reduction with UFP until PDA < -300
mmHg
Valve Status:
VDEBK1/2, VEBK1/2 ------------------- opened
VDABK1/2, VABK1/2-------------------- closed
VBE, VDFF, VDE, VSB, VBP, VSAE--------- closed
VDA, VSAA---------------------------- opened
Timeout 1 min
6. 1525x VSAE Pressure Test and OSP Test Start condition for the test (5 s): 15021 –
FPE = 1000 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 15030
Valve Status: 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
VDEBK1/2, VEBK1/2 ------------------- opened 3. PDA < -150 mmHg
VDABK1/2, VABK1/2-------------------- closed
VBE, VDFF, VDE, VSB, VBP, VSAE--------- closed Test 10 s, 15031,
VDA, VSAA---------------------------- opened max. deviation ∆PDA < 50 mmHg, 15032
PDA < -100 mmHg,
Test timeout 1 min or wait for switch-off VGD Test delivery rate OSP at 200 ±15 ml/min 15033
from LLS Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 15034 –
15039

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 30

7. 1530x Pressure Reduction for VSAA Test with UFP:

Pressure reduction with UFP until PDA < –300
mmHg
Valve Status:
VDEBK1/2, VEBK1/2 ------------------- opened
VDABK1/2, VABK1/2-------------------- closed
VBE, VDFF, VDE, VSB, VBP, VSAA -------- closed
VDA, VSAE ---------------------------- opened
Timeout 1 min
8. 1535x VSAA Pressure Test Start condition for the test (5 s): 15041 –
FPE = 1000 ml/min 1. Correct valve position 15050
Valve Status: 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
VDEBK1/2, VEBK1/2 ------------------- opened 3. PDA < -150 mmHg
VDABK1/2, VABK1/2-------------------- closed
VBE, VDFF, VDE, VSB, VBP, VSAA -------- closed Test 10 s, 15051
VDA, VSAE ---------------------------- opened max. deviation ∆PDA < 50 mmHg,
PDA < -100 mmHg,
Test timeout 1 min or wait for switch-off VGD Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 15052 –
from LLS 15058
9. 1540x Pressure Equalisation for 60 s
Valve Status:
VDEBK1/2, VEBK1/2 ------------------- opened
VDABK1/2, VABK1/2-------------------- closed
VBE, VDE ------------------------------ closed
VDFF, VBP, VSB, VDA, VSAE, VSAA ------ opened
10. 1545x Filter Pressure Reduction with FPA:
Pressure reduction with FPA until PDA < –300
mmHg more than 4 s
Opened VBE at PDA < –150 mmHg more than 2 s
Close VBE at PDA > –150 mmHg
Valve Status:
VDEBK1/2 ----------------------------- closed
VDABK1/2, VABK1/2------------------- opened
VDE, VBP, VSAA ------------------------ closed
VDFF, VSB, VDA ----------------------- opened
Timeout 3 min
11. 1550x Wait 1 s
12. 1555x Filter Pressure Reduction with UFP:
Control negative pressure with UFP (–320 mmHg)
PDA < -150 mmHg: VBE opened
PDA > -10 mmHg: VBE closed
Valve Status:
VDEBK1/2 ----------------------------- closed
VDABK1/2 ----------------------------- closed
VDE, VBP, VSAA ------------------------ closed
VDFF, VSB, VDA ----------------------- opened
Timeout 3 min
13. 1560x Filter Pressure Test Start condition for the test (5 s): 15101 –
Valve Status: 1. Correct valve position 15110
VDEBK1/2 ----------------------------- closed 2. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
VDABK1/2 ----------------------------- closed 3. VBE opened
VDE, VBP, VSAA ------------------------ closed 4. PDA < -250 mmHg
VDFF, VSB, VDA, VBE ------------------ opened
Test 10 s, 15111
Test timeout 1 min or wait for switch-off VGD max. deviation ∆PDA < 50 mmHg,
from LLS PDA < -200 mmHg,
Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 15112 –
15118

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 31

14. 1565x Opened VBP to acknowledge that air is really in Test Condition: 15120
the filter. 1. Correct valve position
Test timeout 1 min or wait for switch-off VGD 2. VBP, VBE opened
from LLS 3. UFP stopped (UF rate < 500 ml/h)
4. PDA > -100 mmHg
Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 15121 -
15127
15. 1580x (Error) PSAUS and/or PSABF not closed
16. 1599x Completed

The pressure reduction in the filters is first performed with FPA. The speed is
controlled to build up a negative pressure of approx. -290 mmHg at PDA. If the
pressure at PDA is < -300 mmHg the UF pump is switched on to reduce the
pressure, and the balance chamber valves VDABK1/2 are closed.

Pressure reduction with FPA

PDA > -300 mmHg 100 ml/min ≤ FPA ≤ 1000 ml/min

Pressure reduction with UF pump

PDA > -300 mmHg UF rate = 3000 ml/h
PDA > -320 mmHg UF rate = 1000 ml/h
3.3.10 UF Pump
Objective The function of the speed detection is tested.
Test code 20
Repeats until error message 1
ID error message 1158: UF pump test will be repeated
Actions after error Repeat DFS pressure test and if necessary integrity test HDF online.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 2002x Prerequisites for Test:
Upline tank must be filled
Timeout 2 min
2. Test code = 20 to LLS Test code = 20 back to LLC
3. 2010x Set timeout timer Test initialisation 20000 –
20004
4. Since the start of the DFS pressure test more 20005
than 3 revolutions have been detected
5. Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 20006 –
20011
6. 2020x Wait for D24OFF (timeout 10 s)
7. VGD ON 20012
8. 2030x Wait for D24ON (timeout 10 s)
9. 2099x Completed

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 32

3.3.11 Conductivity
Objective The function of the END-LF sensors is tested.
Test code 21
Repeats until error message 1
ID error message 1159: Conductivity test not OK
Actions after error Rinse, repeat all tests.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. Test Prerequisites - None:
2. Test code = 21 to LLS Test code = 21 back to LLC
3. 2110x Test initialisation 21000 –
21004
4. Evaluation of the LF value test 21005
After passing the DFS pressure test ENDLF-S
must reach the following value:
- ENDLF-S > ENDLF-SDFS-Pressure Test + 5 mS/cm
- ENDLF-S ≥ 11.4 mS/cm
- ENDLF-S ≤ 17.85 mS/cm
5. Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 21066 –
21011
6. 2120x Wait for D24OFF (timeout 10 s)
7. VGD ON 21012
8. 2130x Wait for D24ON (timeout 10 s)
9. 2199x Completed
ENDLF-SDFS-Pressure Test is stored at the beginning of the DFS pressure tests

3.3.12 Temperature TSD

Objective The function of the TSD sensors is tested.
Test code 22
Repeats until error message 1
ID error message 1160: Temperature test not OK
Actions after error Rinse, repeat all tests.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 2202x Prerequisites for Test:
If test temperature was not yet reached:
- Set warning 1102
- Wait for max. 3 min to reach the test
temperature
Test temperature reached or wait time exceeded:
- Delete warning 1102
- Perform test.
2. Test code = 22 to LLS Test code = 22 back to LLC
3. 2210x If test temperature (>41 °C) was not yet reached: Test initialisation 22000 –
Test not passed otherwise: timeout - set timer 22004
4. After the start of the preparation: TSD-S must 22005
exceed 41 °C and be < 50 °C.
The heater is switched off at TSD-S > 41 °C
5. Acknowledge with switch-off of VGD 22006 –
22011
6. 2220x Wait for D24OFF (timeout 10 s)
7. VGD ON 22012
8. 2230x Wait for D24ON (timeout 10 s)
9. 2299x Completed

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 33

3.3.13 SAD Level Test

The level test measures the test threshold, which LLC generates to drive the SAD with a
permanent test pulse. This is compared with the calibrated test threshold ± 50 mV. If the
measured test threshold is in this limit LLS switches off the +24 V for 3 s. This is detected by
LLC as "test passed".
Test code 30
Repeats until error message 3
ID error message 1161: SAD (Ref.) test not OK
Actions after error Return to window: Repeat blood line self test with key.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 3002x Test Prerequisites:
Blood side must not be stopped by TLC or LLC.
If stopped: Message 1140 is displayed.
No timeout.
2. Test code = 30 to LLS Test code = 30 back to LLC
3. 3010x Set wait timer Test initialisation 30000
4. 3020x After 3 s signal EV_DAUERTEST_SAD_EIN send to
BIOS-SAD-Task
5. If deviation SAD-Ref ≤ 50 mV then carry on 30001
6. If deviation SAD-Ref ≤ 50 mV then acknowledge with 30002
switch-off VGB
7. Acknowledge with switch-off VGB 30003 -
30008
8. 3030x Wait for B24OFF (timeout 10 s)
If B24OFF signal EV_DAUERTEST_SAD_AUS send to
BIOS-SAD-Task
9. VGB ON 30009
10. 3040x Wait for B24ON (timeout 10 s)
11. 3099x Completed

3.3.14 SAD Counter Test

The counter test measures the time base of the counter for the TIMECONTR signal. LLC
triggers and a low pulse of 1666 µs is generated at the TIMECONTR signal, which is measured
by LLS. If this pulse is in the range of 1666 µs ±30 µs LLS switches off the +24 VB for 3 s. This
is detected by LLC as "test passed".
Test code 31
Repeats until error message 3
ID error message 1162: SAD (Freq.) test not OK
Actions after error Return to window: Repeat blood line self test with key.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 3102x Prerequisites for Test:
Blood side must not be stopped by TLC or LLC.
If stopped: Message 1140 is displayed.
No timeout.
2. Test code = 31 to LLS Test code = 31 back to LLC
3. 3110x Send signal EV_COUNTER_TEST_SAD to BIOS-SAD- Test initialisation 31000
Task
4. If measurement of TIMECONTR pulse length 1629 µs ≤ 31001
t ≤ 1689 µs, then acknowledge with switch-off VGB
5. Acknowledge with switch-off VGB 31002 –
31007
6. 3120x Wait for B24OFF (timeout 10 s)
7. VGB ON 31008
8. 3130x Wait for B24ON (timeout 10 s)
9. 3199x Completed

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 34

3.3.15 Equality Test for Blood Side

Pressure Sensors
The pressure sensors are connected together via the filled tubing system with bag and
thus have the same pressure level. Additionally the feedback of the level regulation
valves, the level regulation pump LRP (PPR) and the SAKA are checked.
Objective Test the equality of pressure sensors with opened tubing system.
Test code 32
Repeats until error message 3
ID error message 1163: Blood side pressure sensor test not OK
Actions after error Return to window: Repeat blood line self test with key.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 3202x Prerequisites for Test:
a) Blood side must not be stopped by TLC or LLC.
If stopped: Message 1140 is displayed.
No timeout.
b) If BS is not stopped HDFonline task must enable
the start of the tests. A delay occurs only with
autopriming (set pressure).
Timeout 2 min
2. Test code = 32 to LLS Test code = 32 back to LLC
3. 3210x LLC activates VBT, VPA, VPV, VPU and SAKA Test initialisation 32000
VPU must be activated to prevent a pressure
equalisation to the environment and that the levels in
the chambers do not change.
VPE remains closed to prevent a pressure equalisation
if PBE is not connected.
4. 3220x Check of current detection for VBT, VPA, VPV, VPE, 32001
VPD, SAKA and PPR
Test timeout 60 s and wait for inversion of
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT
5. 3230x LLC deactivates VBT, VPA, VPV, SAKA
and activates VPE
6. 3240x Check of current detection for VBT, VPA, VPV, VPE, 32020
VPD, SAKA and PPR
Test timeout 60 s and wait for inversion of
LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT
7. 3250x LLC deactivates VBE and VPU
VPD is activated
PPR is activated with the PWM PPRLOW (PWM for line
with small chamber, setting in TSM)
8. Initialise mean value storage for PA, PV, PBS and PBE Check of current detection for VBT, VPA, VPV, VPE, VPD 32002
and PPR
9. 3260x Wait for inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS Save values from PA, PV, PBS, PBE and compare the 32004
(timeout 15 s) pressure sensor PA, PV, PBE and PBS (if present):
Evaluate every 250 ms continuous mean value from
the 4 values of PA, PV, PBS and PBE.
10. |PV – PA| must be ≤ 20 mmHg. 32005
|PV – PBE| must be ≤ 20 mmHg or |PBE| < 10 mmHg.
11. |PV – PBS| must be ≤ 20 mmHg or |PBS| < 10 mmHg. 32006
12. Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT 32010
13. Detected inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT
Calculate mean value storage of PA, PV, PBS and PBE
14. 3260x (Error) received B24ON - mean value of PA and PV
deviate more than ±40 mmHg.
15. (Error) the test prerequisites from HDFonline-Task are
not given during one of the test steps (e.g.
autopriming, HDF filter rinsing required after LF error).
16. Completed
Close VPD

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 35

3.3.16 Pressure Test Substitution Line

S-Online HDF Online
If the substitution line s-online is connected at the beginning of the blood side
self test and the filling of the tubing system is performed by the machine
(autopriming): LLC performs a pressure test of the port connectors and the lines
between the port and OSP. This tubing is connected with the pressure sensor
PA via the arterial tubing adapter. The test is performed with positive pressure.
The build-up is performed in the DFS system with FPE/FPA via a pressure drop
at the throttle DDE and an opened VSAE. The pressure test is performed for s-
online after the equality test of the pressure sensors in the blood side test
block.
If autopriming is not performed s-online can not be tested. As an information
LLS generates an alarm Leakage Check S-Online after the initial start of OSP in
therapy. This information is generated even if the autopriming of the s-online
test was not performed by LLC.
If the s-online is not connected during the pressure test this is not detected
and a message to check the line is not generated after connection and the start
of online.
Test code 40
Repeats until error message 1
ID error message 1166: Self test substitution line failed
Actions after error Return to window: Repeat blood line self test with key.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 4002x Prerequisites for Test:
Blood side must not be stopped by TLC or LLC.
If stopped: Message 1140 is displayed.
No timeout.
2. Test code = 40 to LLS Test code = 40 back to LLC
3. 4010x Opened VSAE Test initialisation 40000
4. 4020x Pressure build-up with FPE/FPA in chamber flow
through mode via DDE until PA > 270 mmHg
(no pressure control for pressure sensor PA!)
Valve Status:
VDFF, VDE, VDA, VSB, VSAA ------------------closed
VBP, VSAE ---------------------------------opened
Timeout 20 s
5. S-online Pressure Test Start condition for the test (for 5 s): 40001 –
Valve Status: 1. Correct valve position (VSAE closed) 40010
VSAE closed, BPA and OSP stopped 2. PA > 250 mmHg
3- PA < 500 mmHg

6. Test 10 s, 40011
Averaging MeanPA,
Determine MinPA and MaxPA
Check –500 mmHg < PA < 500 mmHg,
max. deviation ∆PA < 50 mmHg,
-450 mmHg < PA < 450 mmHg,
7. Check: 40012
- MaxPA - MeanPA < 50 mmHg,
- MeanPA - MinPA < 50 mmHg

Acknowledge with switch-off VGB 40013 –

40018
8. 4020x Wait for B24OFF (timeout 30 s)
9. VGB ON 40019
10. 4030x Wait for B24ON (timeout 15 s)
11. 4070x (Error) the test prerequisites from HDFonline task are
not given during one of the test steps (e.g.
autopriming, HDF filter rinsing required after LF error).
12. 4099x Completed

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 36

3.3.17 Blood Side Pressure Retention

Test
Objective Pressure test of tubing system and control of the dynamics of the pressure sensors.
Test code 33
Repeats until error message 3
ID error message 1169: Blood side leakage test not OK
Actions after error Return to window: Repeat blood line self test with key.
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. 3302x Prerequisites for Test:
a) Blood side must not be stopped by TLC or LLC.
If stopped: Message 1140 is displayed.
No timeout.
b) If BS is not stopped HDFonline task must enable
the start of the tests. A delay occurs only with
autopriming (set pressure).
Timeout 2 min
2. Test code = 33 to LLS Test code = 33 back to LLC
3. 3300x Stop BPA Test initialisation 33000
4. 3310x Set BPA with ramp to delivery rate 200 ml/min, Test SAKV opened 33001
opened SAKV
Timeout 90 s since subcode 100
5. Test of BPA delivery rate at 185 ml/min < BPA < 215 33013
ml/min
Acknowledge by closing SAKV and saving PV
6. Test of BPA motor speed
33014
(Note: the motor pulses are used for alarm evaluation
when detecting standstill.)
7. 3330x Wait for PV > +400 mmHg for 500 ms during the Wait for PV > 390 mmHg 33015-
running of BPA. no timeout 33023
Pressure reached:
- Stop BPA, close SAKV, open VBT
- Initialise mean value storage for PA, PV, PBS and
PBE
Timeout 90 s since the start of subcode 100
8. 3340x Evaluate every 250 ms continuous mean value from Opened SAKV 33024-
the 4 values of PA, PV, PBS and PBE. 33025
Evaluate after 2.5 s mean values of PBS and PBE:
PBE connected, if
PBE mean value is min. 100 mmHg higher (from BS
pressure test) than PBE mean value (from BS equality
test of pressure sensors) and PBE and PV mean value
deviate less than ± 40 mmHg (from BS equality test).
PBS connected, if
PBS mean value is min. 100 mmHg higher (from BS
pressure test) than PBS mean value (from BS equality
test of pressure sensors) and PBS and PV mean value
deviate less than ± 40 mmHg (from BS equality test).
|PA - PV| ≤ 20 mmHg
9. PBE present, if: 33026
PBE ≥ PBE +100 mmHg from test 32, step 4
PBS present, if:
PBS ≥ PBE +100 mmHg from test 32, step 4
Terminate if PBS not present for SNCO
PV ≥ PV + 100 mmHg from test 32 step 20
10. Test SAKV closed, save PV 33027
11. Test 10 s 33028 -
PV pressure drop < 20 mmHg and PV > 150 mmHg 33038
and |PA - PV| ≤ 20 mmHg
otherwise return to 54
Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT
3340x Wait for inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS
12. (Timeout 35 s since start of subcode 400)
13. Close VBT Test VBT closed 33039
14. |PA - PV| ≥ 200 mmHg 33040
Acknowledge with inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT
15. 3350x Wait for inversion of LLS_SELFTESTBIT from LLS

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 37
(Timeout 10 s since start of subcode 400)
16. 3360x (Error) the test prerequisites from HDF online task are
not given during one of the test steps (e.g.
autopriming, HDF filter rinsing required after LF error).
17. 3370x (Error) during start up of BPA (subcode 200), PV >
+400 mmHg
18. 3399x Completed 33041

3.3.18 Disinfection Valve VD

Objective Function test of the detection of the actual value for LLS.
The disinfection valve VD is opened shortly (t < 3 s) by LLC during the test. The opening
must be detected by LLS.
The test is performed in Preparation if the dialyser couplings are not connected to the
rinsing bridge anymore and the blood side pressure retention test was passed. If the test
is not passed therapy is not possible.
Test code 37
Repeats until error message 3
ID error message 1165: Self test VD failed
Actions after error None (repeat test until passed).
LLC Test LLC Test Steps LLS Test Steps LLS Test
Code Code
1. Prerequisites for Test: None
2. Test code = 37 to LLS Test code = 37 back to LLC
3. 3710x Opened VD Test initialisation 37000
4. Start condition for the test:
1. BS pressure retention test is passed (test code 33) 37001
5. Detection valve opened 37002
6. 3720x Close VD after 750 ms
7. Detection valve closed. The detected opening is 37003 –
acknowledged by the switch-off of VGB. 37009
8. 3730x Wait for B24OFF (timeout 7.5 s)
9. VGB ON 37010
10. 3730x Wait for B24ON (timeout 5 s)
11. 3780x (Error) at start of test one or both couplings connected
to rinsing bridge.
12. 3799x Completed

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 38

3.4 LX800 Motherboard

The Dialog+ (software 9.xx) uses the LX800 motherboard. A compact flash card CFC is
connected to the motherboard. The BIOS is described in paragraph 3.3.5.

LVDS
(connector only, LVDS
adapter integrated on
LX800)

Power

JCFSET1
Setting CFC JLVDSPWR TFT Power
3.3 V: BoeHydis/Samsung
6 5 2 4 6
4 3
2 1
1 3 5
9
5 V: Philips
2 4 6 7
JWP Write Protect Black
Enable write protect 5
3
3 1
2 1 3 5

Speaker(connector with-
out code Pin)
Disable write protect
JBAT CMOS
Normal CMOS
2 1
1 2

9 Black
Clear CMOS 7
Battery 5
(3 V) 3
2
3 1

USB8 USB7 USB6 USB5 USB4 HDD Hard Disk Drive

FDD Floppy Disk Drive
USB2
USB1

USB1 Service
SW/FSU

PS/2 COM2 COM3 VGA COM4 LPT COM1 USB3

(DIABUS) (ABPM) (Touch Screen) (FPB) Type A
red

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 39

3.4.1 IDE Interface LX800 Motherboard

The compact flash card CFC A is assembled on the rear
side of the LX800 motherboard. The assignment of the
IDE interface is listed in the table. The BIOS settings are
in paragraph 3.4.5.

LX800 Assignment IDE Interface

IDE
Compact Flash Card CFC X

Fig.: LX800 Motherboard, Rear Side

3.4.2 COM Ports LX800 Motherboard

The assignment of the COM ports is listed in the table.
Diabus The assignment of the Diabus is shown additionally (left
figure). The BIOS settings are in paragraph 3.4.5.

LX800 Assignment COM Ports

COM2 COM3 COM4
COM2 COM3 COM4
DIABUS X
ABPM X
COM2 Touch Screen X

Fig.: COM Ports

3.4.3 USB Ports LX800 Motherboard

The assignment of the USB ports is listed in the table. The
USB ports 4 to 8 are freely selectable. The BIOS settings
are in paragraph 3.4.5.

USB8 USB7 USB6 USB5 USB4 USB1 LX800 Assignment USB Ports
USB1 USB2 USB3 USB4-8
USB Service SW/FSU X
Card Reader X
DSI (CritLine) X
Adimea (Kt/V-UV) X

Fig.: USB Ports

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 40

3.4.4 Detection/Boot Sequence from

Bootable USB Sticks
Use only USB sticks supplied by B. Braun as tool for the installation of the
software.

Dialog+ machines detect automatically connected bootable USB sticks. This is

indicated by the red Installation text in start screen.
The following may occur during the installation of the TLC software:
• a bootable USB stick is not detected or
• a bootable USB stick is detected, but it is not booted from the USB stick.
If the installation of the software can not be performed from the USB stick, the
B BRAUN logo is displayed in both cases on the start screen.
• switch the machine off and on again
• if necessary check boot sequence in the BIOS

Fig.: Start Screen during Installation of Software with

Installation Logo

Fig.: Start Screen during Installation of Software with

B BRAUN Logo

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 41

3.4.5 BIOS Settings for LX800 Motherboard

BIOS Menu The LX800 motherboard is delivered with a special default setting - Dialog+
with software ≥ 9.xx and CFC.
These settings are displayed in the following BIOS lists.

Phoenix - AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility

! Standard CMOS Features Load Fail-Safe Defaults

Never select these
! Advanced BIOS Features Load Optimized Defaults parameters, because this
will cause a malfunction
! Advanced Chipset Features Set Supervisor Password of the motherboard.

! Integrated Peripherals Set User Password

! Power Management Setup Save & Exit Setup
! PnP/PCI Configuration Exit Without Saving
! PC Health Staus

Esc : Quit !"# $ : Select Item

F10 : Save & Exit Setup

Time, Date, Hard Disk Type . . .

Fig.: Phoenix – AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility (Example)

BIOS Version Number

Phoenix . AwardBIOS v6.00PG, ............ The BIOS version number can be displayed as follows:
Copyright ( C ) ................ 1. Connect PC keyboard to motherboard.
BBM-LX800 BIOS REV.1.04 (2008/08/08).............. 2. Switch on machine.
3. Press the TAB key when the B BRAUN logo is displayed.
Main Processor..........
......... 4. Press the Pause/Break key to stop the boot routine. The BIOS
......... version is displayed, e.g. BIOS Revision 1.04.

Pause
Break

Tab

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 42

3.4.5.1 Standard CMOS Features Dialog+ SW 9.xx

CFC/CR
Compact Flash Card/Card-Reader
(Default Setting)
Date (mm:dd:yy) Sun, mm:dd:yy
Time (hh:mm:ss) hh:mm:ss
IDE Primary Master [xxx xxx]
IDE HDD Auto-Detection [Press Enter]
IDE Primary Master [Auto]
Access Mode [Auto]
Capacity -
Cylinder -
Head -
Precomp -
Landing Zone -
Sector -
IDE Primary Slave [None]
Drive A [None]
Drive B [None]
Video [EGA/VGA]
Halt On [All, But Disk/Key]
Base Memory 640K
Extended Memory 252672K
Total Memory 253440K

3.4.5.2 Advanced BIOS Features

Virus Warning [Disabled]
CPU Internal Cache [Enabled]
First Boot Device [USB-HDD]
Second Boot Device [HDD-0]
Third Boot Device [Disabled]
Boot Other Drive [Disabled]
Swap Floppy Drive [Disabled]
Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled]
Boot Up NumLock Seek [On]
Gate A20 Option [Fast]
Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled]
x Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) 6
x Typematic Delay (Msec) 250
Security Option [Setup]
OS Select For DRAM > 64MB [Non-OS2]
Full Screen LOGO Show [Enabled]
Small Logo(EPA) Show [Disabled]
Onboard Lan Boot ROM [Disabled]

3.4.5.3 Advanced Chipset Features

CPU Frequency [Auto]
x Memory Frequency [Auto]
CAS Latency [Auto]
Video Memory Size [8 M]
Output Display [Panel & CRT]
Flat Panel Configuration [Panel Enter]
Resolution [1024 x 768]
Refresh Rate [60 Hz]
HSYNC Polarity [Normal High]
VSYNC Polarity Active [Normal High]
SHFCLK Active Period [Free Running]
LP Active Period [Free Running]
Onboard Audio [Disabled]
Onboard USB1.1 [Enabled]
Onboard USB2,0 [Enabled]
Onboard DIE [Enabled]
Memory Hole At 15M-16M [Disabled]

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 43

3.4.5.4 Integrated Peripherals Dialog+ SW 9.xx

CFC/CR
Compact Flash Card/Card-Reader
(Default Setting)
Master Drive PIO Mode [Auto]
Slave Drive PIO Mode [Auto]
IDE Primary Master UDMA [Auto]
IDE Primary Slave UDMA [Auto]
IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled]
IDE HDD Block Mode [Enabled]
Onboard FDC Controller [Enabled]
Onboard Serial Port 1 [3F8/IRQ4]
Onboard Serial Port 2 [2F8/IRQ3]
UART Mode Select [Normal]
x RxD, TxD Active Hi, Lo
x IR Transmission Delay Enabled
x UR2 Duplex Mode Half
x Use IR Pins IR-Rx2Tx2
Onboard Parallel Port [378/IRQ7]
Parallel Port Mode [SPP]
x EPP Mode Select EPP1.7
x ECP Mode Use DMA 3
Watch Dog Timer Select [Disabled]
Onboard Serial Port 3 [3E8]
Serial Port 3 Use IRQ [IRQ9]
Onboard Serial Port 4 [2E8]
Serial Port 4 Use IRQ [IRQ5]

3.4.5.5 Power Management Setup

x ACPI Function [Disabled]
Power Management [Disabled]
** PM Timers **
x Standby Mode Disabled
x Suspend Mode Disabled
HDD Power Down [Disabled]
MODEM Use IRQ [N/A]
PME Event Function [Disabled]
Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN [Instant-Off]
Power-On by Alarm [Disabled]
x Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm 0
IRQ Wakrup Events [Press Enter]
IRQ1 (KeyBoard) [OFF]
IRQ3 (COM 2) [OFF]
IRQ4 (COM 1) [OFF]
IRQ5 (LPT 2) [OFF]
IRQ6 (Floppy Disk) [OFF]
IRQ7 (LPT 1) [OFF]
IRQ8 (RTC Alarm) [OFF]
IRQ9 (IRQ2 Redir) [OFF]
IRQ10 (Reserved) [OFF]
IRQ11 (Reserverd) [OFF]
IRQ12 (PS/2 Mouse) [OFF]
IRQ13 (Coprocessor) [OFF]
IRQ14 (Hard Disk) [OFF]
IRQ15 (Reserved) [OFF]

3.4.5.6 PnP/PCI Configuration

PNP OS Installed [No]
Init Display First [PCI Slot]
Reset Configuration Data [Disabled]
Resources Controlled By [Auto(ESCD)]
x IRQ Resources Press Enter
x Memory Resources Press Enter
PCI/VGA Palette Snoop [Disabled]

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 44

3.4.5.7 PC Health Status Dialog+ SW 9.xx

CFC/CR
Compact Flash Card/Card-Reader
(Default Setting)
o
CPU Temp 50 C
Vcore 1.26V
Vmem 2.60V
+3.3 V 3.39V
+5 V 5.13V
Load Fail-Safe Defaults
Load Optimized Defaults
Set Supervisor Password
Set User Password
Save Exit Setup
Exit Without Saving

3.4.5.8 Change Parameters in CMOS Setup

Phoenix - AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility The LX800 motherboard is delivered ex works with
a special default setting for a Dialog+ machine
with a CFC.
! Standard CMOS Features Load Fail-Safe Defaults If necessary, the BIOS setup must be adapted to
the specific hardware present in a Dialog+ or
! Advanced BIOS Features Load Optimized Defaults
Dialog Advanced machine. The example shows a
! Advanced Chipset Features Set Supervisor Password general approach to change a parameter in the
BIOS according to the BIOS setup table for the
! Integrated Peripherals Set User Password LX800 motherboard.
! Power Management Setup Save & Exit Setup Example:
Change parameter in Standard CMOS Features
! PnP/PCI Configuration Exit Without Saving
for Dialog+ with HDD (CFC)
! PC Health Staus
The example shows how the IDE Primary Master
parameter is changed from None to Auto for a
Esc : Quit !"# $ : Select Item
F10 : Save & Exit Setup Dialog+ with a hard disk drive (CFC) (see
paragraph 3.4.5.1 Standard CMOS Features).
Time, Date, Hard Disk Type . . .

Phoenix - AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility 1. Connect PC keyboard (with PS2 connector) to
Standard CMOS Features LX800 motherboard.
Date (mm:dd:yy) Mon, Mar
Sep 29 2010 Item Help 2. Switch on Dialog+ and press the Delete/Del
Time (hh:mm:ss) 10 : 58 : 29 key to enter the BIOS (when keyboard status
Menu Level LEDs shortly light up).
! IDE Primary Master [ None ]
! IDE Primary Slave [ None ] 3. Press Enter key to go to the Standard CMOS
Change the day, month, Features menu.
Drive A [1.44M, 3.5 in.]
year and century
Drive B [ None ] 4. Move down to IDE Primary Master with the
Arrow key.
Video [EGA/VGA]
Halt On [All . But Disk/Key]

Base Menory 640K

Extended Memory 252672K
Total Memory 253440K

!"#$:Move Enter:Select +/-/PU/PD:Value F10:Save Esc:Exit F1:General Help

F5: Previous Values F6: Fail-Safe Defaults F7: Optimied Dafaults

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 45

5. Press Enter key to open IDE Primary Master

Phoenix - AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility
Standard CMOS Features
window.
6. Move down to Auto with the Arrow key.
IDE HDD Auto-Detection [Press Enter] Item Help
7. Press Enter key to accept. The IDE Primary
IDE Primary Master [ Auto
Auto ] Master window closes.
Menu Level
Access Mode [ Auto ]
8. Check the Auto setting in the Access Mode.
Capacity IDE Primary Master Access Mode
None .... [ ] CHS .... [ ]
Cylinder
Head Auto .... [!] LBA .... [ ]
Precomp Manual . . . . [ ] Large .... [ ]
Landing Zone !":Move ENTER:Accept ESC:Abort Auto .... [!]
Sector
!":Move ENTER:Accept ESC:Abort

!"#$:Move Enter:Select +/-/PU/PD:Value F10:Save Esc:Exit F1:General Help

F5: Previous Values F6: Fail-Safe Defaults F7: Optimied Dafaults

Phoenix - AwardBIOS CMOS Setup Utility Save and Exit BIOS

9. Press ESC key to go back to the CMOS Setup
Utility menu.
! Standard CMOS Features Load Fail-Safe Defaults
Note: In general you can use the ESC key to
! Advanced BIOS Features Load Optimized Defaults
go back to the previous menu.
! Advanced Chipset Features Set Supervisor Password
10. Select Save & Exit Setup menu with the
! Integrated Peripherals Set User Password Arrow keys.
! Power Management Setup Save &
Save & Exit
Exit Setup
Setup 11. Save changes and exit the BIOS CMOS Setup
! PnP/PCI Configuration Exit Without Saving with Enter key.
SAVE to CMOS and EXIT (Y/N)? Y The changes in the Standard CMOS Features
! PC Health Staus
menu are saved to the BIOS CMOS.
Esc : Quit !"# $ : Select Item
F10 : Save & Exit Setup
Save Data to CMOS

ESC Delete

Enter Arrow Keys Delete

Key Key

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 46

3.5 Installation Software 9.xx

USB Stick for Treatment Support Settings
The system configuration saved on a USB stick (FSU utility) must only be
downloaded to an other Dialog+ machine (with software ≥ 9.xx) after a
software update if:
• the hardware matches and
• the machine has the identical software version number.
Activation of the Treatment The settings are only activated after the Dialog+ is switched off and on
Support Settings again. Check the settings after the Dialog+ was switched on again.

Service switch The software is installed in the software update mode: digital board,
service switch S1, position 3.
After software installation: turn service switch S1 to TSM service program
mode (position 2)
After completion of all procedures turn back service switch S1 to therapy
mode (position 0).
Default Table The default values for the parameters depend on the machine status (see
Dialog+ default table for SW 9.xx for a detailed overview).
Software Update The customer specific default values of the machine must be documented
in the default table prior to the installation of a new software. These
values must be entered again after installation.

3.5.1 Document Customer Specific

Default Values

Power-Board
Motors
HDF Online Board
Supervisor
Write Protect
(SWP)
Motherboard
Power Board Valves
JP2
S1
USB1
JP1
Digital Board Service Switch:
USB Port: 0: Therapy
- Service (FSU) 2: TSM
- Installation SW TLC
P11 3: SW Installation

Controller
Basic Board Write Protect
Analog Board (CWP)
USB Port:
Installation SW LLC/LLS

Fig. : Top Level Sub-Rack, Digital Board with Service Switch S1, USB Port P11 and Jumpers JP1/JP2

Enter the customer specific default values of the machine in the default table:
1. Open rear door.
2. Switch to TSM service program mode (on digital board DB, service switch
S1 position 2).
3. Switch on Dialog+.
4. Document default values in default table.
5. Switch off Dialog+.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 47

3.5.2 Installation Software LLC 9.xx

and LLS 9.xx with USB Stick
The USB stick with the TLC/LLC/LLS software is required for the installation of
the software LLC 9.xx and LLS 9.xx.
• Bootable USB stick with the TLC/LLC/LLS software

P1 P2

U7

P4
P5
L33
U28
U30
P6
FPGA
U33 U27
U35 U36

U39
P7
U45
U46
U55 U43
U56
U53

D13
JP2
JP1 S1

D24
D25
D26
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20

D22
D23

D27

D28
D29
D30

D32
D33
D34
D35
D21

D31
P11 P13 P14
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20

D22
D23
D21

D28
D29
D30

D34
D35
D32
D33
D31
01234567 01234567
Controller Supervisor
JP1 JP2
CWP SWP
Default for Jumper
Default for Jumper
Fig. : Digital Board
P11 USB Type A for Installation of LLC/LLS SW with USB Stick Controller LEDs 0 to 7 (D16 – D23):
Status 0 – 7 for Installation of LLC Software
S1 Service Switch:
Jumper JP1 CWP:
Position 0: Therapy Mode Controller Write Protect
Position 2: TSM Service Program Mode
Position 3: Software Installation/Update Mode Supervisor LEDs 0 to 7 (D28 – D35):
Status 0 – 7 for Installation of LLS Software
Jumper JP2 SWP:
Supervisor Write Protect

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 48

6. Connect USB stick A to USB port B (P11) on digital

board C.
7. Turn service switch S1 to position 3 – SW installation.
8. Switch on machine.

P11 C 9. The USB stick is detected.

B S1
A

P1 P2 10. The LLC and LLS software is installed automatically.

Both LLC/LLS LEDs show the installation progress:
U7
LED 0: Is off if firmware is not updated
LED 1: Respective software is updated
P4
P5 LED 2: Checksum and configuration files are loaded
L33
U28
U30
LED 3: USB stick consistency is verified
P6

U35 U36
U33 U27
FPGA LED 4: Binary files are loaded
U39
P7
LED 5: Binary images are verified
U55 U56
U43
U46
U45
LED 6: Flash ROMs are programmed/under verification
U53

11. A successful software installation is indicated by:

V5

JP2
JP1 S1
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20

V7
V8
V9

V17
V18
V12
V13
V14
V15
V16
V10

V11

P11 P13 P14 - LEDs 7: flashing

- short beep from the SMPS-MC
- LED 0 : on (only if firmware is updated)
- LEDs 1 to 6: on
12. Switch off machine.
01234567 01234 56 7 13. Remove USB stick A from the USB port B on the digital
Controller Supervisor board C.

Setting for Jumpers JP1 and JP2

Firmware Update not Possible (Protected) The firmware for the controller and supervisor is protected by
the jumpers JP1 and JP2. The position for both jumpers are

JP1 JP2
set to CWP/SWP (controller/supervisor write protect). The
jumpers must be in this position to protect the LLC and LLS
firmware.

CWP SWP
Firmware Update Possible (Enabled) The installation of the firmware is normally not required
during the installation of LLC and LLS.

JP1 JP2
If the firmware has to be installed additionally, it will be
indicated in the installation instructions. JP1 and JP2 have to
be set to this position (Default CWE and SWE:
SWE controller/supervisor write enabled). Set the jumpers back to
the CWP/SWP setting after installation.
CWE

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 49

3.5.3 Installation Software TLC 9.xx

with USB Stick
The USB stick with the TLC/LLC/LLS software is required for the installation of
the software TLC 9.xx.
If the TLC software has to be installed only:
• Open rear door.
• Switch to TSM service program mode (on digital board DB, service switch
S1 position 2).
• Proceed with point 14.
• Bootable USB stick with the TLC/LLC/LLS software

14. Open front door.

15. Connect USB stick A to USB port B on the TLC sub-rack C.
16. Switch on machine.

B
C
A

Fig.: Front View TLC Sub-Rack

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 50

USB Stick Detected

The system detects the bootable USB stick and
boots from the USB stick (indicated by the red
Installation text in the start screen).

USB Stick not Detected

The system does not detect the bootable USB stick
(indicated by the green B BRAUN logo in the
start screen). If necessary disconnect the USB stick
and reconnect.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 51

17. Follow the software installation for TLC according to the information on the monitor:

➠ Use hardware keys only: , or

[AQ] (Alarm Acknowledgement) = NO =

[EQ] (Enter) = YES =

➠ Do not connect and use a PC keyboard for the installation of the software.

*** You are about to install the Dialog/TLC V9.xx software. ***
If you want to CONTINUE the Installation,
LEAVE the installation USB stick in the socket,
press Y or y and <CR> if keyboard is used
otherwise
press the EQ hardware key!
If you want to SKIP the TLC installation
press N or n and <CR> on keyboard or any other hardware key!

[EQ] Press to confirm and proceed with the installation of the TLC software.

[AQ] Press if you want to terminate the installation of the software.

LX800 Motherboard *** Dialog V9.xx /TLC V9.xx installation ***

Installation/setup of the Dialog/TLC runtime system.
Does the machine have:
LX800 (NIBP: COM3=IRQ9 ECG: COM4=IRQ5) motherboard?
If YES, press Y or y and <CR> if keyboard is used
otherwise
press the EQ hardware key!
If NO, press N or n and <CR> on keyboard or any other hardware key!

[EQ] Press to select the LX800 motherboard.

Selected motherboard: LX800 (NIBP: COM3=IRQ9 ECG: COM4=IRQ5)

Are you sure ?

If YES, press Y or y and <CR> if keyboard is used
otherwise
press the EQ hardware key!
If NO, press N or n and <CR> on keyboard or any other hardware key!

[EQ] Press to confirm the selected LX800 motherboard.

Compact Flash Card CFC Does the machine have:

CF-Card_Swissbit-SFCF1024H3BKZSA_I-MO-513_SID_1.00GB (h=16 s=63) harddisk?
If YES, press Y or y and <CR> if keyboard is used
otherwise
press the EQ hardware key!
If NO, press N or n and <CR> on keyboard or any other hardware key!

[EQ] Press to select the CFC.

Selected harddisk: CF-Card_Swissbit-SFCF1024H3BKZSA_I-MO-513_SID_1.00GB (h=16

s=63)

Are you sure ?

If YES, press Y or y and <CR> if keyboard is used
otherwise
press the EQ hardware key!
If NO, press N or n and <CR> on keyboard or any other hardware key!

[EQ] Press to confirm the selected CFC.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 52

The following menu appears after the motherboard and the memory type were selected.

*** WARNING ! ***

If you have any important files, SAVE them before the installation!
TRENDS of previous treatments will be lost too, save them before
the installation if they are needed in the future!
If you want to CONTINUE the Installation
press Y or y and <CR> if keyboard is used
otherwise
press the EQ hardware key!
If you want to CANCEL the installation, press N or n and <CR>
on keyboard or any other hardware key!

[EQ] Press to confirm and proceed with the installation of the software.

[AQ] Press if you want to terminate the installation of the software.

....
End of Dialog/TLC SW INSTALLATION.
The Dialog/TLC SW INSTALLATION has been completed.
The Dialog/TLC uses......................
.......................

Don't forget to set the operation mode switch to TSM mode (2) and check

in TSM all subsystems' version number.

Switch the power OFF and REMOVE the USB stick before starting the Dialog...

The TLC software was installed successfully.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 53

18. Switch off the machine after the successful installation

of the TLC software.
19. Remove USB stick.
20. Turn service switch S1 (on digital board C) to position 2
C - TSM.

S1

3.5.4 Boot Machine /Check Version

Number
21. Switch on machine.
22. Check whether machine boots correctly.
23. Open menu Production Report, Version Number and check the version
numbers.
3.5.5 Select Options
All available options in TSM service program (Production Report and Low
Level Options) must be selected again and saved with the OK button after
the software installation.
Low Level Options 24. Select and activate all present options in the Low Level Options with the

button. Thus, the data is saved when quitting the menu.

Production Report 25. If necessary enter the serial number (see type plate SN) in the Production
Report menu.
26. Select and activate all present options in the Production Report with the

button. Thus, the data is saved when quitting the menu.

3.5.6 Enter Customer Specific Default
Values
The customer specific default values of the machine must be entered after the
software installation.
27. Enter customer default values from default table and save

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 54

3.5.7 Enter Specific Parameters

The specific parameters must be entered again in the TSM service program
and saved with the OK button after the software installation.

28. Enter the tube constants in menu Calibration 2.13 Flow of BPA and BPV
Pump, 2.13.1 Tube Constants of BPA and BPV.
BPA: 12306 [µl/head rotation]
BPV: 12306 [µl/head rotation]
29. Enter the stroke value in menu Calibration 2.15 HDF Online Substitution
Pump OSP.
OSP: 8300 [µl/head rotation]
30. Enter the absolute low limit for PA in menu Calibration 2.12 PV Alarm
Window, PA Low Limit and save with the calibration button (see default
table).
31. Select the limit for the blood leak detector in menu Calibration 2.7 Blood
Leak Detector, BL Limit (standard limit or AAMI limit).
32. Save in menu File Operation, Save Calibration Data after entering all
constants and calibration data.

Pay attention to the LLC and LLS status windows when saving the
calibration data. The bit sequence 0 1 0 must be identical in the LLC and
LLS status windows during the saving procedure. The calibration data is
saved only after the bit sequence 0 1 0 (see figure).
0
If an error occurs select corresponding window: error message is displayed
(eliminate cause of trouble).
010
0

FSU USB-Stick for Treatment Support Settings

The system configuration saved on a USB stick (FSU utility) must only be
downloaded to an other Dialog+ SW 9.xx machine after a software update
if:
• the hardware matches and
• the machine has the identical software version number.

33. Set system configuration (customer specific values) or if available use the
FSU USB stick with the system configuration.
34. Save settings.
35. Switch off machine.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 55

3.5.8 Self Test

1. Turn service switch S1 to position 0 - Therapy.
2. Start machine (fully equipped) in dialysis mode.
3. Insert line system – see instructions for use.
4. The machine must run without errors up to the message Connect Patient.

3.5.9 Test Run

5. Assemble the blood lines, perform preparation (insert heparin syringe and
select 2 ml/h and use BIC cartridge if present).
6. Perform self test – according to instructions for use.

7. Press the icon to switch to therapy mode (connect patient). This

icon is enabled after all self tests were performed successfully.
8. Insert the arterial and venous lines in the graduated cylinder.
9. Set the blood pump so that no blood side alarms are activated.
10. Start dialysis.
11. Check alarm function of SAD.
(The ABPM function (if present) can be checked without a test run of the
machine in preparation mode, without the concentrate pump.)
12. Terminate dialysis.
13. Perform disinfection/decalcification.
14. Remove blood lines, filter and heparin syringe.
15. Switch off Dialog+.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 56

3.6 Field Service Utilities FSU

General The FSU utility can be used in any mode. Exception: if the
Dialog+ was switched off during therapy or end of
therapy and was switched on again within 15 minutes.
Most of the utilities have the following features:
• messages are displayed during execution
• an End of <utility name> message is displayed after
completion of a utility

3.6.1 FSU Directories and Subdirectories

BlueCat and DISKTYPE Directories

The BlueCat and DISKTYPE directories are used by the
system operation of the FSU program only. Do not
use, modify or delete these directories.
USER Directory
The USER directory is required for service technicians
only. All user specific data/files from and to the
Dialog+ machines are written and read to/from this
directory (subdirectories).

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) The field service utilities has the following directory
structure (see left figure).
BlueCat
DISKTYPE
USER
04_Write_Languages
05_Write_Calibration_Data
06_Write_System_Configuration
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette
09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card
09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card
09_Card_06_Write_Patient_Card
10_Read_System_Configuration
11_Read_Calibration_Data
12_Read_All_Trends
13_Read_Screenshots
14_Get_Error

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 57

3.6.2 Start Field Service Utility FSU

TSM Service Mode The service switch S1 on the digital board can be in position 0, 2 or 3.
Therapy Mode Turn back the service switch S1 to therapy mode (position 0) after
terminating the field service utilities.
Check of Initial Directories After switch-on the presence of the initial directories are checked. If one
of these directories are not found (e.g. because they were accidentally
deleted), an error window is displayed and the USB stick can not be used
(use your backup copy).
Backup Copy of FSU Copy the BlueCat, DISKTYPE and USER directory from the USB stick to a
USB Stick Directories PC as a backup copy in case directories can not be found (e.g. because
they were deleted by mistake).
Self Test CRC The FSU program stops automatically in case of a self test error. The FSU
is terminated. The corrupted USB stick must be exchanged before you
continue with the FSU program.
Prevent Corruption of USB Stick Do not disconnect the USB stick if the FSU menu is still active. Exit the
FSU menu with the AQ /BP hardware keys before you disconnect the
USB stick.

P l e a se w a i t. . . . When the Dialog+ is switched on and the start window

is displayed a self test is performed (a few seconds) for
Checking USB stick consistency...
the USB stick.
1. Connect the USB stick to the USB port on the TLC
sub-rack.
2. Switch on the Dialog+ in TSM service mode.
3. Wait for the consistency check of the FSU USB
stick.

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

The main menu of the FSU is displayed. The following
CRC = XXXX - OK information is displayed in the header:
01. Set System Version Number
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
• Field service utilities Vn.nn” (n.nn is the version
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk) number)
• Set number of master (SetMST)
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) • CRC value with CRC status (CRC = XXXX – OK), i.e.
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) CRC is OK
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
Hardware Keys
08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands BP : moves the cursor up

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick) BP : moves the cursor down
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick) AQ : exits the FSU menu
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute EQ : executes a selected utility
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ, then follow the instructions on the screen!

4. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the

utility.

5. Press the AQ to exit the FSU program.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 58

3.6.3 Set-Up FSU Main Menu

When the Dialog+ is switched on and the start window is displayed the self test
for the USB stick is performed (a few seconds). In the start screen the Field
Service Utilities menu appears after the CRC check (see header CRC=XXXX –
OK).

There are standard utilities in the main menu: set, write and read. A sub-menu
can be selected for the card reader with the utilities: read and write.

Main Menu Field Service Utilities

1. Connect the USB stick (with the FSU) to
the USB port on the TLC sub-rack.
2. Switch on Dialog+.

Sub-Menu Card Reader

The following sub-menu appears if 09 Select
Menu of Card Commands is selected in the
Field Service Utilities main menu.

1. Press the BP hardware key and move

the cursor down to 09 Select Menu of
Card Commands in the main menu.

2. Press the EQ hardware key to

execute the utility.

3. Press the BP hardware key and move

the cursor down to select a utility.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 59

3.6.3.1 Hardware Keys for FSU

Use the hardware keys on the front panel of the TFT monitor to
navigate through the FSU main menu/sub-menu. The general
functions of the hardware keys are (may differ slightly in sub-
menus):

Dialog+ + -
start
stop

Press the BP hardware key to move the cursor up.

Press the BP stop hardware key to select the next digit (e.g.
stop
during the setting of the working time counter).

Press the BP hardware key to move the cursor down.

Press the AQ hardware key to exit the FSU menu or to skip

back to the previous menu.

Press the EQ hardware key to execute a selected utility.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 60

3.6.4 Set System Version Number

The System Version Number for the Dialog+ can be set with this utility. The
utility is typically used after updating the LLC software, because the TLC
software can not be accessed during the installation of the LLC. There is no file
exchange between the USB stick and Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC).

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press EQ to execute the utility.
01. Set System Version Number
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC) 2. Press AQ to exit the FSU menu.
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)

04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ, then follow the instructions on the screen!

Dialog+ System Version Number Setting

An input screen opens to set the new System Version
------------------------------------- Number with the following hardware keys:

BP : decrements the current digit

If you want to set the System Version Number create the new value with the HW-keys.

If not, exit with the AQ key. BP : increments the current digit

BP stop
: selects the next digit (from right to left)
New value for System Version Number: n.nn

AQ : cancels the operation, system version

BP-: decrement digit BPstart: next digit BP+: increment digit AQ: cancel EQ: accept number is not changed

EQ : sets the new system version number value

3. Set the new system version number with the BP

, BP and BP stop
hardware keys.
Note: (n.nn = the version number)

4. Press EQ to accept the entered value.

The main menu is displayed after a few seconds.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 61

3.6.5 Set Working Time Counter (WTC)

The Working Time Counter for the Dialog+ can be set with this utility. The
utility is typically used after replacing a hard disk drive (CFC). There is no file
exchange between the USB stick and Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC). In case of
acceptance the new value is written to the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) (TLC
WTC files).

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press BP and move the cursor down to select
01. Set System Version Number the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press EQ to execute the utility.
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

Dialog+ Working Time Setting

An input screen opens to set the new Working Time
---------------------------- Counter (WTC) value with the following hardware keys:

BP : decrements the current digit

If you want to set the WTC create the new value with the HW-keys.

If not, exit with the AQ key. BP : increments the current digit

BP stop
: selects the next digit (from right to left)
New value for Working Time Counter: 00000

AQ : cancels the operation, WTC is not changed

BP-: decrement digit BPstart: next digit BP+: increment digit AQ: cancel EQ: accept
EQ : sets the new WTC value

3. Set the new working time counter with the BP ,

BP and BP stop
hardware keys.

4. Press EQ to accept the entered value.

The main menu is displayed after a few seconds.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 62

3.6.6 Kill Masterboot Record

The Undo Last Written utility can not be used for restoring.

The utility deletes the contents of the masterboot record (first sector filled with
0x00) of the hard disk drive (CFC) of the Dialog+. This utility is typically used
after replacing a hard disk drive (CFC) against a not empty CFC.

All data on the hard disk drive (CFC) is lost.

Do not switch off the machine immediately after using the Kill Masterboot
Record utility. You must wait for the synchronisation between the
operating system and CFC (until the main menu appears).

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press BP and move the cursor down to select
01. Set System Version Number the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press EQ to execute the utility.
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

An input screen opens to confirm a deletion of the MBR
CRC = XXXX - OK of the Masterboot Record with the following hardware
keys:
Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
AQ : exit from the utility

This command destroys ALL DATA on the hard disk of Dialog+.

EQ : renewed query for confirmation

Press EQ if you are sure.

Are you sure?
3. Press AQ if you do not want to delete the
masterboot record.

AQ: no EQ: yes

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 63

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

A second input screen opens to delete the MBR of the
CRC = XXXX - OK Masterboot Record with the following hardware keys:

BP : NO, does not delete the MBR and the

Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
operation is cancelled

After execution of this command the Dialog+ must be re-installed. BP : YES, deletes the MBR of the Dialog+ hard
disk drive (CFC) (after second confirmation)

Are you REALLY sure? 4. Press BP if you are really sure. This will delete
the masterboot record.

5. Press BP to cancel the operation.

BP-: no BP+: yes

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 64

3.6.7 Write Utilities

The group of write utilities writes data files from the FSU USB stick to the
Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC). The following parameters can be written to the
Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC):
• Write Languages
• Write Calibration Data
• Write System Configuration
• Undo Last Written

3.6.7.1 Write Languages

The utility writes languages from the USB stick to the hard disk drive (CFC) of
the Dialog+ machine.
Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) If language files are not on the FSU USB stick
BlueCat Languages have to be copied to the USB stick because by default the language
directory is empty. Language files must be copied to the USER subdirectories of
DISKTYPE the USB stick from your PC.
USER
Note: Do not mix up the places for the treatment language (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
04_Write_Languages and the TSM language (0, 1).
treatment Write Treatment Language or TSM Language
0 1. Connect the FSU USB stick to your PC.
1 2. Copy the required language files from the PC to the following directories:
2
Treatment Language
3 USB:\USER\04_Write_Languages\treatment\X\language.id
4 USB:\USER\04_Write_Languages\treatment\X\language.tar.gz

5 TSM Language
USB:\USER\04_Write_Languages\TSM\X\language.id
TSM USB:\USER\04_Write_Languages\TSM\X\language.tar.gz
0
1
Note: The language files (language.id and language.tar.gz) are the
outputs of the Windows Language Development Tool LDT.
Example Spanish Language ID
The following information is included in the language.id file (open with
text editor):
Spanish: Spanish Language
Treat: Treatment Language
%M %02d, %04y:
Spanish: Spanish Language
034.07.17: 034 (country code),
07.17 (Dialog SW version number)
The last write procedure can be undone with the 07 Undo Last Written
utility. The Dialog+ can be switched off and on again between the write
procedure and using the 07 Undo Last Written utility.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 65

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press BP and move the cursor down to select
01. Set System Version Number the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press EQ to execute the utility.
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

An input screen can open with the following
CRC = XXXX - OK information (see left figure), i.e. no languages were
found on the USB stick because the language
subdirectories are empty. Languages must be copied to
Write Languages (USB Stick - > Dialog+ Hard Disk)
the USB stick before you can write languages to the
Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC). Use the following
No source is found... hardware key:

3. Press AQ to go back to the main menu.

AQ: back to main menu

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

Languages must be downloaded to the USB stick before
CRC = XXXX - OK they can be written to the Dialog+ hard disk drive
(CFC). An input screen opens to Write Languages (e.g.
Italian) to the hard disk drive (CFC) with the following
Write Languages (USB Stick - > Dialog+ Hard Disk)
hardware keys:

TREATMENT language: Italian – TREAT – 039-07-15 BP stop

: if pressed before pressing the EQ HW key,
the selected Treatment Language is set after
copying as the active language
Pressing BPStart will select this language for TREATMENT

Are you sure to install this language to Dialog+? AQ : exit from the utility

EQ : starts the execution of the language copying

BPStart: select language for TREATMENT AQ: no EQ: yes

After successfully copying the language to the CFC the

version numbers of all languages available on the
Dialog+ are displayed. The language selected for
treatment is also marked.

4. Press EQ to continue.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 66

3.6.7.2 Write Calibration Data

The utility writes the Calibration Data from the USB stick to the hard disk drive
(CFC) of the Dialog+ machine.
Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) If calibration data are not on the FSU USB stick

BlueCat The calibration data must be read to the USB stick with the 11
Read Calibration Data utility, because by default the directory is
DISKTYPE empty.

USER Write Calibration Data

USB:\USER\05_Write_Calibration_Data\DEFAULT\calib.dat.xxu
04_Write_Languages
Note: The Calibration Data file can be copied back to the
05_Write_Calibration_Data Dialog+ machine only, if the serial number and main
version number, saved in the Calibration Data file, are
DEFAULT equal with the serial number and main version number
reported by the Dialog+ machine.

Write and Read Calibration Data

Write (download) the calibration data from the FSU USB stick to the same
Dialog+ machine only.
The calibration data should be saved to the hard disk drive (CFC) in the TSM
service program: TSM Main Menu, File Operations, Save Calibration Data.
You should read (download) the calibration data from the respective
Dialog+ to the USB stick before you start servicing the machine with the
Read Calibration Data utility in the FSU menu.
The last write procedure can be undone with the 07 Undo Last Written
utility.

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press BP and move the cursor down to select
01. Set System Version Number the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press EQ to execute the utility.
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 67

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

The utility searches for sources. An input screen can
CRC = XXXX - OK open with the following information (see left figure),
i.e. no sources were found on the USB stick because the
calibration data subdirectories are empty. Calibration
Write Calibration Data (USB Stick - > Dialog+ Hard Disk)
data must be read to the USB stick before you can
write calibration data to the Dialog+ hard disk drive
No source is found... (CFC).

3. Press AQ to go back to the previous menu.

4. Use the Read Calibration Data utility to read the
calibration data from the Dialog+ hard disk drive
(CFC) to the USB stick.

AQ: back to previous menu

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

An input screen opens to Write Calibration Data to the
CRC = XXXX - OK hard disk drive (CFC) with the following hardware keys:

AQ : No, calibration data are not written to

Write Calibration Data (USB Stick - > Dialog+ Hard Disk)
Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC), exit to main
menu

EQ : Yes, calibration data are written to Dialog+

Writing Calibration Data to Dialog+ from: Ser-No./SYSver=90832/VX_XX
hard disk drive (CFC)
Are you sure?

AQ: no EQ: yes

Ser-No./SYSver=90832/VX_XX
The utility compares the serial number (Ser-No.) and the system version number
(SYSver) stored in the calibration data file with the serial number and the
system version number from the Dialog+. The calibration data file can be
written only if they match.
Example
Ser-No.= 90832
SYSver = V8_20

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 68

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) The utility searches for input in the 05_Write_Calibration_Data, DEFAULT
BlueCat subdirectory and in the results of the previously performed 11. Read Calibration
Data utility. If no file was found the following message is displayed:
DISKTYPE
No source…
USER
If there are files (e.g. read from other Dialog+ machines) but there are no
04_Write_Languages
matching files, the following message is displayed:
05_Write_Calibration_Data No selectable source is found…
DEFAULT
and the existing serial number/system version number pairs are displayed with
the following message:
(not selectable)
If there is one matching file the following message is displayed:
Are you sure?
If there are more matching files (for the calibration data this is only possible if
you read the calibration data with the 11. Read Calibration Data utility and
copy the result file manually to the 05_Write_Calibration_Data, DEFAULT
subdirectory): all existing serial number/system version number pairs are
displayed (DEFAULT is displayed instead of the serial number if the subdirectory
contains a calib.dat.xxu file). The user can select from the matching pairs only.
The pairs that do not match are displayed with the following message:
(not selectable)

5. Press EQ if you are sure. This will write the calibration data from the
USB stick to the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 69

3.6.7.3 Write System Configuration

The utility writes the System Configuration from the USB stick to the hard disk
drive (CFC) of the Dialog+ machine. The system configuration must be read to
the USB stick with the 10 Read System Configuration utility, because by default
the directory is empty.
System Configuration
The system configuration saved on the FSU USB stick must be downloaded
to an other Dialog+ machine only if:
• the hardware matches and
• the identical TLC software version number is present.
The last write procedure can be undone with the 07 Undo Last Written
utility.
USB Stick with Treatment Support Settings
Old treatment support settings must not be downloaded via a USB stick after a
software update. If necessary download the new treatment support setting
after an update.
Activation of the Treatment Support Settings
The settings are only activated after the Dialog+ is switched off and on again.
Check the settings after the Dialog+ was switched on again.
Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) If system configuration is not on the FSU USB stick
BlueCat The system configuration must be read to the USB stick with the
10 Read System Configuration utility, because by default the
DISKTYPE directory is empty.
USER Write System Configuration
04_Write_Languages USB:\USER\06_Write_System_Configuration\DEFAULT\config.xxu

05_Write_Calibration_Data Note: The System Configuration file can be copied back to the
Dialog+ machine only, if the TLC version number, saved in
06_Write_System_Configuration the System Configuration file, is equal with the TLC
DEFAULT version number reported by the Dialog+ machine.

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
01. Set System Version Number down to select the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) utility.
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 70

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

The utility searches for sources. An input screen can
CRC = XXXX - OK open with the following information (see left figure),
i.e. no sources were found on the USB stick because the
system configuration data subdirectories are empty.
Write System Configuration (USB Stick - > Dialog+ Hard Disk)
System configuration data must be stored to the USB
stick before you can write system configuration data to
No source is found... the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC).

3. Press AQ to go back to the previous menu.

4. Use the Read System Configuration utility to read
the system configuration data from the Dialog+
hard disk drive (CFC) to the USB stick.

AQ: back to previous menu

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

An input screen opens to Write System Configuration to
CRC = XXXX - OK the hard disk drive (CFC) with the following hardware
keys:
Write System Configuration (USB Stick - > Dialog+ Hard Disk)
AQ : No, system configuration file is not written
to Dialog+, exit from the utility

EQ Yes, system configuration file is written to

Writing System Configuration to Dialog+ from: TLCver=90832/VX_XX
Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC)
Are you sure?

AQ: no EQ: yes

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 71

TLCver=90832/VX_XX
The utility compares the top level controller version number (TLCver) stored in
the system configuration file with the top level controller version number from
the Dialog+. The system configuration file can be written only if they match.
Example
TLCver = V8_20 (top level controller version number)
Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) The utility searches for input in the 06_Write_System_ Configuration, DEFAULT
BlueCat subdirectory and in the results of the previously performed 10. Read System
DISKTYPE Configuration utility. If no file was found the following message is displayed:
No source…
USER
04_Write_Languages If there are files (e.g. read from other Dialog+ machines) but there are no
05_Write_Calibration_Data matching files the following message is displayed:
06_Write_System_Configuration No selectable source is found…
DEFAULT and the existing serial number/top level controller version number pairs are
displayed with the following message:
(not selectable)
If there is one matching file the following message is displayed:
Are you sure?
If there are more matching files (for the system configuration this is only
possible if you read the system configuration data with the 10. Read System
Configuration utility and copy the result file manually to the
06_Write_System_Configuration, DEFAULT subdirectory): all existing serial
number/top level controller version number pairs are displayed (DEFAULT is
displayed instead of the serial number if the subdirectory contains a config.xxu
file). The user can select from the matching pairs only.
The pairs that do not match are displayed with the following message:
(not selectable)

5. Press EQ if you are sure. This will write the system configuration data
from the USB stick to the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 72

3.6.7.4 Undo Last Written

The content of the directory (directories) of the last write procedure is saved on
the USB stick together with the serial number of the respective Dialog+
machine. The last write procedure can be undone (restored) with the Undo Last
Written utility for the following write procedures:
• Write Languages
• Write Calibration Data
• Write System Configuration

The Undo Last Written utility should be used immediately after a writing
utility was performed by accident.
If the Undo Last Written utility is used after a Write Calibration Data or
Write System Configuration: check and match not only the serial number
but also the corresponding system version number or TLC version number.
If a Write… utility is executed two times in a row the last (saved) and the
current status are identical, i.e. in case you would use the Undo Last
Written utility now there would be no difference between both versions.
The Undo Last Written utility can be applied only to the result of the last
Write… utility and if the saved and the current serial number of the
Dialog+ match.

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
01. Set System Version Number down to select the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) utility.
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST The Undo Last Written utility will undo the last written
CRC = XXXX - OK
utility. The menu on the left shows an example of the
undo utility for the system configuration.
Undo last written (USB Stick - > Dialog+ Hard Disk)

Writing back System Configuration from USB stick to Dialog+

AQ : No, system configuration file is not undone,
exit from the utility
All ‘System Configuration’ related modifications
made after the last writing will also be lost!
EQ : Yes, system configuration file is undone
Are you sure?
3. Press EQ if you are sure. This will undo the
last written utility from the USB stick to the
Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC).

AQ: no EQ: yes

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 73

3.6.8 USB Stick Self Test

The USB Stick Self Test can be used to check the USB stick. The utility checks
the consistency of the file systems.
Self test OK
In case of successful execution the calculated and the reference CRC are
displayed before returning to the main menu.
Self test failed
In case of any error the Self test failed message is displayed.
Failed Self Test
In case of a self test error the FSU stops automatically. Exit the program
and exchange the damaged USB stick before you proceed with the FSU
program.

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
01. Set System Version Number down to select the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) utility.
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

An input screen opens and the USB Stick Self Test is

performed. The self test menu automatically returns to
Searching for md5sum files...............
MD5SUMS.XXU.Win found........ the main menu after the self test.
MD5SUMS.XXU.Lin found........
MD5SUMS.SPEC.Lin found........

Checking file system integrity........

O.K.

Calculated CRC = XXXX

Reference CRC = XXXX

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 74

3.6.9 Card Reader Read/Write Utilities

The group of read and write utilities for the card reader is used:
• to read data from a card or diskette and to write them to a USB stick
• to read data from a USB stick and to write them to a card
• All card reader utilities are available in a sub-menu.

3.6.9.1 Select Menu of Card Reader

Commands
Select the 09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands to open the sub-menu for
the card reader utilities.

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
01. Set System Version Number down to select the utility:
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk) 09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands.
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) utility.
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 75

3.6.9.2 Read Card Image

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) This utility reads card image from the card as a
compressed scard.img.zip file to the FSU USB stick.
BlueCat Read Card Image
USB:\USER\09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image\{YYYY-
DISKTYPE MM-DD.hh.mm.ss}\scard.img.zip
USER Example:
USB:\USER\09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image\{2007-
04_Write_Languages 08-30.15.34.12}\scard.img.zip
05_Write_Calibration_Data YYYY: Year 2007
MM: 08 month August
06_Write_System_Configuration DD: 30 Thursday
hh: 15 hours
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image mm: 34 minutes
ss: 12 seconds

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000 1. Press the BP hardware key, move cursor down
CRC = XXXX - OK
01. Read Card Image (Card → USB Stick)
and select 09. Select Menu of Card Reader
02. Write Card Image (USB Stick → Card) Commands in the main menu.
03. Read Patient Diskette (Diskette → USB Stick) 2. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
04. Write Patient Diskette to Card (USB Stick → Card)
utility.
05. Read Patient Card (Card → USB Stick) • Yes, card image is written to USB stick
06. Write Patient Card (USB Stick → Card)
07. Remove All Patient Data
3. Press the AQ hardware key to skip to the
BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: back to previous menu EQ:
execute
previous menu.
• No, card image is not written to USB stick

Reading card image - ............

End of Read Card Image

Press the ‘AQ’ key to continue . . .

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 76

3.6.9.3 Write Card Image

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) This utility writes card images from the USB stick as a
compressed scard.img.zip file to the card.
BlueCat If file is not on FSU USB stick
DISKTYPE Copy from the PC the compressed scard.img.zip file
from the card image to the following USER
USER subdirectory:
04_Write_Languages USB:\USER\09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image\DEFAULT\
scard.img.zip
05_Write_Calibration_Data
Note: This utility can not be used to copy the
06_Write_System_Configuration bioLogic RR activation card.
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image The process is aborted with the following
message:
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image ABPS (bioLogic RR) Activation Card Image
DEFAULT can not be written to card.

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000 1. Press the BP hardware key, move cursor down
CRC = XXXX - OK
01. Read Card Image (Card → USB Stick)
and select 09. Select Menu of Card Reader
02. Write Card Image (USB Stick → Card) Commands in the main menu.
03. Read Patient Diskette (Diskette → USB Stick) 2. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
04. Write Patient Diskette to Card (USB Stick → Card)
down to select the utility.
05. Read Patient Card (Card → USB Stick)
06. Write Patient Card (USB Stick → Card) 3. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
07. Remove All Patient Data
utility.
BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: back to previous menu
execute
EQ:
• Yes, card image is written to card

4. Press the AQ hardware key to skip to the

previous menu.
• No, card image is not written to card

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000

CRC = XXXX - OK

Write Card Image (USB stick → Card)

................

E n d o f Write Card Image

Press the ‘AQ’ key to continue . . .

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 77

3.6.9.4 Read Patient Diskette

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) This utility reads patient files from the patient diskette
as a compressed patdisk.zip file to the FSU USB stick.
BlueCat
Read Patient Diskette
DISKTYPE USB:\USER\09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette\
{Patient_Name}\patdisk.zip
USER
Example:
04_Write_Languages USB:\USER\09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette\
Michael_May\patdisk.zip
05_Write_Calibration_Data
Patient_Name: Michael_May
06_Write_System_Configuration
Note: If the patient name is not found on the
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image diskette, the Unknown Patient name is used.
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000 1. Press the BP hardware key, move cursor down
CRC = XXXX - OK
01. Read Card Image (Card → USB Stick)
and select 09. Select Menu of Card Reader
02. Write Card Image (USB Stick → Card) Commands in the main menu.
03. Read Patient Diskette (Diskette → USB Stick) 2. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
04. Write Patient Diskette to Card (USB Stick → Card)
down to select the utility.
05. Read Patient Card (Card → USB Stick)
06. Write Patient Card (USB Stick → Card) 3. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
07. Remove All Patient Data
utility.
BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: back to previous menu
execute
EQ:
• Yes, patient diskette is read to USB stick

4. Press the AQ hardware key to skip to the

previous menu.
• No, patient diskette is not read to USB stick

Remove all patient data from the FSU

Mounting diskette . . .
USB stick after service with the utility 07.
................ Remove All Patient Data. This will delete
all patient data stored on the FSU USB
E n d o f Read Patient Diskette . . .
stick.
Press the ‘AQ’ key to continue . . .

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 78

3.6.9.5 Write Patient Diskette to Card

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) This utility writes the patient files from the USB stick
as a compressed patdisk.zip file to the patient card, i.e.
BlueCat
converts a patient diskette to a patient card.
DISKTYPE
If file is not on FSU USB stick
USER
Copy from the PC the compressed patdisk.zip file from
04_Write_Languages the patient diskette to the following USER
05_Write_Calibration_Data subdirectory:
06_Write_System_Configuration USB:\USER\09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image Card\DEFAULT\patdisk.zip

09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette
09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card
DEFAULT

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000 1. Press the BP hardware key, move cursor down
CRC = XXXX - OK
01. Read Card Image (Card → USB Stick)
and select 09. Select Menu of Card Reader
02. Write Card Image (USB Stick → Card) Commands in the main menu.
03. Read Patient Diskette (Diskette → USB Stick) 2. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
04. Write Patient Diskette to Card (USB Stick → Card)
down to select the utility.
05. Read Patient Card (Card → USB Stick)
06. Write Patient Card (USB Stick → Card) 3. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
07. Remove All Patient Data
utility.
BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: back to previous menu
execute
EQ:
• Yes, USB stick (patient diskette) is written to
patient card
4. Press the AQ hardware key to skip to the
previous menu.
• No, USB stick (patient diskette) is not written to
patient card

Remove all patient data from the FSU

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000
CRC = XXXX - OK USB stick after service with the utility 07.
Remove All Patient Data. This will delete
Write Patient Diskette to Card (USB stick → Card) all patient data stored on the FSU USB
stick.
................

E n d o f Write Patient Diskette to Card . . .

Press the ‘AQ’ key to continue . . .

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 79

3.6.9.6 Read Patient Card

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) This utility reads patient files from the patient card as
a compressed patcard.zip file to the FSU USB stick.
BlueCat
Read Patient Card
DISKTYPE USB:\USER\09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card\{Patient_
USER Name}\patcard.zip
04_Write_Languages Example:
05_Write_Calibration_Data USB:\USER\09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card\Michael_
May\patcard.zip
06_Write_System_Configuration
Patient_Name: Michael_May
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image
Note: If the patient name is not found on the card,
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image the Unknown Patient name is used.
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette
09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card
09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000 1. Press the BP hardware key, move cursor down
CRC = XXXX - OK
01. Read Card Image (Card → USB Stick)
and select 09. Select Menu of Card Reader
02. Write Card Image (USB Stick → Card) Commands in the main menu.
03. Read Patient Diskette (Diskette → USB Stick) 2. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
04. Write Patient Diskette to Card (USB Stick → Card)
down to select the utility.
05. Read Patient Card (Card → USB Stick)
06. Write Patient Card (USB Stick → Card) 3. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
07. Remove All Patient Data
utility.
BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: back to previous menu
execute
EQ:
• Yes, patient card is read to USB stick

4. Press the AQ hardware key to skip to the

previous menu.
• No, patient card is not read to USB stick

Remove all patient data from the FSU

Reading patient card.......
USB stick after service with the utility 07.
................ Remove All Patient Data. This will delete
all patient data stored on the FSU USB
E n d o f Read Patient Card . . .
stick.
Press the ‘AQ’ key to continue . . .

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 80

3.6.9.7 Write Patient Card

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) This utility writes patient files from the USB stick as a
compressed patcard.zip file to the patient card.
BlueCat
If file is not on FSU USB stick
DISKTYPE
Copy on the PC, the compressed patcard.zip from the
USER
patient card file to the following USER subdirectory:
04_Write_Languages
USB:\USER\09_Card_06_Write_Patient_Card\DEFAULT
05_Write_Calibration_Data \patcard.zip
06_Write_System_Configuration
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette
09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card
09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card
09_Card_06_Write_Patient_Card
DEFAULT

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000 1. Press the BP hardware key, move cursor down
CRC = XXXX - OK
01. Read Card Image (Card → USB Stick)
and select 09. Select Menu of Card Reader
02. Write Card Image (USB Stick → Card) Commands in the main menu.
03. Read Patient Diskette (Diskette → USB Stick) 2. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
04. Write Patient Diskette to Card (USB Stick → Card)
down to select the utility.
05. Read Patient Card (Card → USB Stick)
06. Write Patient Card (USB Stick → Card) 3. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
07. Remove All Patient Data
utility.
BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: back to previous menu
execute
EQ:
• Yes, USB stick is written to patient card

4. Press the AQ hardware key to skip to the

previous menu.
• No, USB stick is not written to patient card

Remove all patient data from the FSU

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000
CRC = XXXX - OK USB stick after service with the utility 07.
Remove All Patient Data. This will delete
Write Patient Card (USB stick → Card) all patient data stored on the FSU USB
stick.
................

E n d o f Write Patient Card . . .

Press the ‘AQ’ key to continue . . .

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 81

3.6.9.8 Remove All Patient Data

Remove all patient data from the FSU USB stick after service with the
utility 07. Remove All Patient Data. This will delete all patient data stored
on the FSU USB stick.
The service technician can store patient data on the USB stick by reading them
from patient cards and patient diskettes. Additionally patient data can be
copied manually to the 09_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card, DEFAULT
subdirectory and the 09_Write_Patient_Card, DEFAULT sub-directories. If the
patient data are not required anymore the service technician can remove them
from the USB stick in one step by using the 07 Remove All Patient Data utility.
The utility will remove all the patient data from the FSU USB stick, except the
patient card images.
The utility requires two confirmations.
First confirmation:
Are you sure?

AQ : exit from the utility

EQ : renewed query for confirmation

Second confirmation:
Are you REALLY sure?

BP : exit from the utility

BP : all patient data are deleted from the FSU USB stick.

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000 1. Press EQ to execute the utility.

CRC = XXXX - OK
01. Read Card Image (Card → USB Stick)
02. Write Card Image (USB Stick → Card)
2. Press AQ to skip to the previous menu.

03. Read Patient Diskette (Diskette → USB Stick)

04. Write Patient Diskette to Card (USB Stick → Card)

05. Read Patient Card (Card → USB Stick)

06. Write Patient Card (USB Stick → Card)
07. Remove All Patient Data

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: back to previous menu EQ:
execute

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 82

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - Set000

The Remove All Patient Data utility will delete all
CRC = XXXX - OK patient data from the FSU USB stick

Remove All Patient Data AQ : No, all patient data are not deleted, exit
(USB stick)
from the utility
This command removes ALL PATIENT DATA from the USB stick
EQ : Yes, all patient data are deleted
Are you sure?
3. Press EQ if you are sure. This will delete all
patient data from the FSU USB stick.

AQ: no EQ: yes

USER/09_Card_06_Write_Patient_Card................

USER/09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card................

USER/09_Card_04_Write Patient_Diskette_to_Card................

USER/09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette................

E n d o f Remove All Patient Data . . .

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 83

3.6.10 Read/Get Error Utilities

The group of read utilities reads data files from the Dialog+ hard disk drive
(CFC) and writes them to the FSU USB stick.
3.6.10.1 Read System Configuration
The utility reads the system configuration from Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC)
and writes it to the USB stick. Files from different Dialog+ machines are placed
in different subdirectories on the USB stick. The subdirectory name
USER/10_Read_System_Configuration/ <SERNUM>_<TLC Version>/ is created
from the serial number and the TLC version number of the Dialog+ machine.
<SERNUM>_<TLC Version>
The subdirectory name is created from the serial number <SERNUM> and
the TLC version number of the Dialog+ machine. If the serial number is not
set on the Dialog+ <SERNUM> is equal to ‘-----‘.

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) See the results in the subdirectories with the following path
BlueCat for the System Configuration file config.xxu.

DISKTYPE Read System Configuration

USER USB:\USER\10_Read_System_Configuration\{Serial
04_Write_Languages Number}_{TLC Version}\config.xxu
05_Write_Calibration_Data Example:
06_Write_System_Configuration USB::\USER\10_Read_System_Configuration\23532_V7_90\
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image config.xxu
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image 23532: Serial Number of the Dialog+ machine
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette V7_90: TLC software version
09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card
09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card
09_Card_06_Write_Patient_Card
10_Read_System_Configuration
23532_V7_90

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press BP and move the cursor down to select
01. Set System Version Number the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press EQ to execute the utility.
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 84

An input screen opens and the system configuration is

read from the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) to the USB
................
stick. The Read System Configuration menu
................
automatically returns (a few seconds) to the main
................ menu after End of Read System Configuration... is
................ displayed.

End of Read System Configuration...

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 85

3.6.10.2 Read Calibration Data

The utility reads the calibration data from Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) and
writes it to the USB stick. Files from different Dialog+ machines are placed in
different subdirectories on the USB stick. The subdirectory name
USER/11_Read_Calibration_Data/ <SERNUM>_<Main Version>/ is created
from the serial number and the main version number of the Dialog+ machine.
<SERNUM>
The subdirectory name is created from the serial number <SERNUM> and the
main version number of the Dialog+. If the serial number is not set on the
Dialog+ <SERNUM> is equal to ‘-----‘.

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) See the results in the directories with the following path for
BlueCat the Calibration Data file calib.dat.xxu.

DISKTYPE Read Calibration Data

USER USB:\USER\11_Read_Calibration_Data\{Serial
04_Write_Languages Number}_{Main Version}\calib.dat.xxu
05_Write_Calibration_Data Example:
06_Write_System_Configuration USB:\USER\11_Read_Calibration_Data\23532_V7_59\
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image calib.dat.xxu
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image 23532: Serial Number of the Dialog machine
V7_59: Dialog+ main software version
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette
09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card
09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card
09_Card_06_Write_Patient_Card
10_Read_System_Configuration
11_Read_Calibration_Data
23532_V7_59

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
01. Set System Version Number down to select the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) utility.
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 86

An input screen opens and the calibration data is read

from the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) to the USB stick.
................
The Read Calibration Data menu automatically returns
................
(a few seconds) to the main menu after End of Read
................ Calibration Data... is displayed.
................

End of Read Calibration Data...

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 87

3.6.10.3 Read All Trends

A separate software program is required to analyse the trends, i.e. the

Trend Viewer.

The utility reads all possible backup trend files on the Dialog+ hard disk drive
(CFC) (max. 20 trends) and writes them to the USB stick. Files from different
Dialog+ machines are placed in different subdirectories on the USB stick. The
subdirectory name USER/12_Read_All_Trends/ <SERNUM>/ is created from the
serial number of the Dialog+ machine. Files from the same machine are placed
in different subdirectories where the subdirectory names are created from the
trend creation dates <DATE>.
<SERNUM>
The subdirectory name is created from the serial number <SERNUM> of
the Dialog+. If the serial number is not set on the Dialog+ <SERNUM> is
equal to ‘-----‘.
<DATE>
The subdirectory name is created from a date. Format: YYYY-MM-
DD.hh.mm.
In case of TRENDS: the date is the date of the trend start.

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) See the results in the directories with the following path for the
BlueCat Read All Trends file tbd1.zip.
DISKTYPE Read All Trends
USER USB:\USER\12_Read_All_Trends\{Serial Number}\{YYYY-MM-
04_Write_Languages DD.hh.mm}\tbd1.zip
05_Write_Calibration_Data Example:
06_Write_System_Configuration
USB:\USER\12_Read_All_Trends\{Serial Number}\2007-09-
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image 12.14.25}\tbd1.zip
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image
YYYY: Year 2007
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette MM: 09 month September
09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card D D : 12 Wednesday
09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card hh: 14 hours
mm: 25 minutes
09_Card_06_Write_Patient_Card
10_Read_System_Configuration
11_Read_Calibration_Data
12_Read_All_Trends

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 88

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
01. Set System Version Number down to select the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) utility.
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

An input screen opens and all the trends are read from
the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) to the USB stick. The
TREATM_01: Date yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm [XXX minutes] - creating TBD: OK
................ Read Trends menu automatically returns (a few
................ seconds) to the main menu after End of Read Trends... is
................
................ displayed.
................
................
................
................
................
................
................

End of Read Trends...

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 89

3.6.10.4 Read Screenshots

The utility reads the screenshots from Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) and writes
them to the USB stick. Files from different Dialog+ machines are placed in
different subdirectories on the USB stick. The subdirectory names
/USER/13_Read_Screenshots/ <SERNUM>/<DATE>/ are created from the serial
numbers of the Dialog+ machines. Files from the same machine are placed in
different subdirectories where the subdirectory names are created from the
current date of reading <DATE>.
Create Screenshots A keyboard is required to create screenshots. Connect a keyboard to the
motherboard. Use the ALT + F5 key on the keyboard to take a screenshot.
<SERNUM>
The subdirectory name is created from the serial number <SERNUM> of
the Dialog+. If the serial number is not set on the Dialog+ <SERNUM> is
equal to ‘-----‘.
<DATE>
The subdirectory name is created from a creation date. Format: YYYY-
MM-DD.hh.mm.

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) See the results in the directories with the following path for
BlueCat the Read Screenshots files:

DISKTYPE Read Screenshots

USER USB:\USER\13_Read_Screenshots\{Serial Number}\{YYYY-
04_Write_Languages MM-DD.hh.mm.ss}\{DEFAULT and other directories}
05_Write_Calibration_Data Example:
06_Write_System_Configuration USB:\USER\13_Read_Screenshots\23532\2007-08-
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image 30.15.28.44\{DEFAULT and other directories}
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image 23532: Serial Number of the Dialog machine
YYYY: Year 2007
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette
MM: 08 month August
09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card D D : 30 Thursday
09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card hh: 15 hours
mm: 28 minutes
09_Card_06_Write_Patient_Card ss: 44 seconds
10_Read_System_Configuration
11_Read_Calibration_Data
12_Read_All_Trends
13_Read_Screenshots
23532
2007-08-30.15.28.44
The screenshots are stored in vga*.zip files in the DEFAULT (and/or in other)
subdirectories on the Dialog+. The vga*.zip files copied to USB stick are deleted
from the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) (similarly to the log files) but the
subdirectory structure on the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) is left untouched.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 90

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
01. Set System Version Number down to select the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) utility.
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

An input screen opens and all the screenshots are read

from the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) to the USB stick.
................
The Read Screenshots menu automatically returns (a
................
few seconds) to the main menu after End of Read
................ Screenshots... is displayed.
................

End of Read Screenshots...

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 91

3.6.10.5 Get Error (ErrorDisk)

The error files can only be analysed by qualified personnel of B. Braun

Avitum (e.g. development department) and should be provided only on
special request.

The utility gets error information and log files from Dialog+ hard disk drive
(CFC) and writes them to the USB stick. Files from different Dialog+ machines
are placed in different subdirectories on the USB stick (VFAT partition). The
subdirectory names /USER/14_Get Error/<SERNUM>/<DATE>/ are created from
the serial numbers of the Dialog+ machines and from the current date of
reading <DATE>.
<SERNUM>
The subdirectory name is created from the serial number <SERNUM> of
the Dialog+. If the serial number is not set on the Dialog+ <SERNUM> is
equal to ‘-----‘.
<DATE>
The subdirectory name is created from a date. Format: YYYY-MM-
DD.hh.mm.ss.
In case of ERRDISK: the date is the date of the reading.

Removable Disk (X: - FSU USB Stick) See the results in the directories with the following path:
BlueCat Get Error
DISKTYPE USB:\USER\14_Get_Error\{Serial Number}\{YYYY-MM-
USER DD.hh.mm.ss}\ERR_INFO
04_Write_Languages Example:
05_Write_Calibration_Data USB:\USER\14_Get_Error\23532\2007-08-
06_Write_System_Configuration 30.15.34.12\ERR_INFO
09_Card_01_Read_Card_Image 23532: Serial Number of the Dialog machine
09_Card_02_Write_Card_Image YYYY: Year 2007
MM: 08 month August
09_Card_03_Read_Patient_Diskette
DD: 30 Thursday
09_Card_04_Write_Patient_Diskette_to_Card h h : 15 hours
09_Card_05_Read_Patient_Card mm: 34 minutes
ss: 12 seconds
09_Card_06_Write_Patient_Card ERR_INFO: Error information
10_Read_System_Configuration LOG: Log
11_Read_Calibration_Data
12_Read_All_Trends
13_Read_Screenshots
14_Get_Error
23532
2007-08-30.15.34.12
ERR_INFO
LOG

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 92

Field Service Utilities V2.00 - SetMST

CRC = XXXX - OK 1. Press the BP hardware key and move the cursor
01. Set System Version Number down to select the utility.
02. Set Working Time Counter (WTC)
03. Kill Masterboot Record (Dialog+ Hard Disk)
2. Press the EQ hardware key to execute the
04. Write Languages (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk) utility.
05. Write Calibration Data (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
06. Write System Configuration (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)
07. Undo Last Written (USB Stick → Dialog+ Hard Disk)

08. USB Stick Self Test

09. Select Menu of Card Reader Commands

10. Read System Configuration (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

11. Read Calibration Data (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
12. Read All Trends (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
13. Read Screenshots (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)
14. Get Error (ErrorDisk) (Dialog+ Hard Disk → USB Stick)

BP-: move cursor up BP+: move cursor down AQ: exit – see Important Note EQ: execute
Important Note: To prevent the corruption of USB stick, before removing it,
please press AQ then follow the instructions on the screen!

An input screen opens and all the log files are read
from the Dialog+ hard disk drive (CFC) to the USB stick.
..........
The Get Error (ErrorDisk) menu automatically returns (a
..........
few seconds) to the main menu End of Error Disk... is
.......... displayed.
..........

End of Error Disk...

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 93

3.6.11 FSU Handling of Errors

All utilities have the same error handling procedure:
• In case of an error generally an error message is displayed
• An error or warning message is displayed if an error occurs during the
execution of a utility. To return to the main menu the service technician
should press AQ or EQ according to the instruction on the screen.
• An error message is displayed in red at the bottom of the main menu:
ERROR: Function returned error code = N
N can be a varied number, e.g.:
1: Error during directory creation, file copying, general error
3: Source files are not found
126: Function exists but not executable
127: Function is missing
• The error message refers to the highlighted utility in the menu
• The error message is cleared at the next user input

3.6.12 Examination of Results

Deletion of Subdirectories
The <SERNUM>, <DATE>, <Patient Name> subdirectories and their
contents (including sub-subdirectories) can be deleted without any
problem.
Initial Directories
Do not delete the initial directories (that exist on the USB stick before the
first use). Deletion makes the USB stick unusable. After the next switch-on
a fatal error message is displayed (including the name of the missing
directory). The missing directory must be restored to use the USB stick
again.
Data collected from the Dialog+ and stored on the FSU USB stick can be
examined on a PC with the following features:
• Windows operating system
• USB connection

Examine Data
• connect the USB stick to USB connector of the PC
• wait until Windows detects the USB stick
• open My computer
• the VFAT partition of the XXU stick appears as Removable Disk X:
• open the disk
• the results are in the following subdirectories:
USER/XX_Read.....
USER/14_Get_Error
These files can be copied to any location on the PC (e.g. to use them for local
examination) or can be deleted from the FSU USB stick.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 94

3.6.13 Troubleshooting USB Stick

3.6.13.1 Field Service Utility Menu
with Failed CRC Check

The FSU program stops automatically in case of a self test error. The
corrupted USB stick must be exchanged before you continue with the FSU
program.
The USB stick can be damaged permanently if the procedure to remove the
USB stick is not observed.

The following error message is displayed in case of a

Required CRC = XXXX
self test error.
*** Self=test ERROR – USB stick is not usable *** Exchange the corrupted USB stick before you continue
--- SWITCH OFF the Dialog+ ---
with the FSU program.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 95

3.7 Default Table SW 9.xx

System Configuration
Unit HD HDF Online US Default Modified
Dialysate Side Parameters
Na Concentration/Conductivity Measurement Unit - mS/cm mS/cm mS/cm
Acetate Mode Disabled - NO YES YES
Default Conductivity Mode - BIC BIC BIC
Stand-by Function Available in Preparation - YES YES NO
Stand-by after Self Test/Rinsing - YES YES NO
Maximum Stand-by Time h:min 1:00 1:00 5:00
Selected Acetate - B.BRAUN B.BRAUN B.BRAUN
CONCENTRATE 1 CONCENTRATE 1 CONCENTRATE 1
Selected Bicarbonate - BIC without NaCl BIC without NaCl BIC without NaCl
Selected Acid - B.BRAUN ACID 1 B.BRAUN ACID 1 B.BRAUN ACID 1
Temperature Measurement Unit - °C °C °C
Dialysate Flow ml/min 500 500 600
Dialysate Temperature °C 37.0 37.0 37.0

Settings for Acetate Concentrate Unit

1st to 10th Concentrate Name - B.Braun Concentrate 1 – 10
Conversion Factor mS/cm per mmol/l 0.10500
Default Value mS/cm 14.0

Settings for BIC

1st Bicarbonate without NaCl - BIC without NaCl
Conversion Factor mS/cm per mmol/l 0.0950
Default Value mS/cm 3.0
Acid Selection - B.Braun Acid 1

2nd Bicarbonate with NaCl - BIC with NaCl

Conversion Factor mS/cm per mmol/l 0.0950
Default Value mS/cm 5.8
Acid Selection - B.Braun Acid 2

Setting for Acid -

1st to 20th Concentrate Name - B.Braun Acid 1 – 20
Conversion Factor mS/cm per mmol/l 0.10500
Default Value mS/cm 14.3

Blood Side Parameters -

BS Pressure Test with Equalisation of Pressure - NO NO YES
Default Blood Flow at End of Therapy ml/min 100 100 200
AV Line without Chamber is Possible - NO NO NO
AV Line with PBE Connector - YES YES NO
Min-Max Parameters
Delta PA min. mmHg 70 70 70
Delta PA max. mmHg 70 70 70
Limit Maximum PBE mmHg 700 700 700
Limit Delta PBE mmHg 150 150 600
Limit Maximum TMP mmHg 350 350 500
Limits Low/High TMP - active active active
Low Limit TMP % 40 40 40
High Limit TMP % 40 40 40
Minimum TMP Alarm Window mmHg 20 20 20
Extended TMP Limit Range Button is Displayed in - NO NO NO
Treatment
Select Extended TMP Limit Range - inactive inactive inactive
Arterial Bolus Parameters
Arterial Bolus Volume ml 100 100 100
Arterial Bolus with SAKA Support NO NO NO

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 96

Unit HD HDF Online US Default Modified

Single Needle Parameters
Single Needle Valve
Limit Min. PA mmHg -200 -200 -200
Max. Control Min. PV mmHg 150 150 150
Control Min. PV mmHg 100 100 100
Control Max. PV mmHg 350 350 390
Single-Needle Cross-Over
Control PA mmHg -180 -180 -180
Control PV mmHg 360 360 360
Heparin Parameters
Treatment without Heparin - NO NO NO
Heparin Measurement Unit - ml/h ml/h ml/h
Conversion Factor Heparin (IE/ml) - 1000 1000 1000
Heparin Rate ml/h 3.0 3.0 3.0
Heparin Bolus Volume ml 0.0 0.0 0.0
Therapy Beginning Bolus - NO NO NO
Selected Syringe Type - Omnifix 30 ml Omnifix 30 ml B-D 10 ml
Syringe Table
Heparin Pump Compact Syringe Sizes: 10 ml to 30 ml
Syringe Type Inside Diameter [mm]
Braun OPS 20 ml 19.00
Terumo 20/25 ml 20.10
Terumo 30/35 ml 22.57
B-D (for US) 10 ml 14.43
B-D 20 ml 18.90
B-D 30 ml 21.53
Monoject 20 ml 19.83
Dispomed 30 ml 22.17
Fresenius HS 30 ml 22.20
Omnifix 10 ml 16.05
Omnifix 20 ml 19.80
Omnifix 30 ml 22.00
Unit HD HDF Online US Default Modified
Rinsing Parameters
Priming without Recirculation - NO NO NO
Filling BP Rate ml/min 100 100 100
Filling BP Volume ml 700 700 500
Automatic Rinse Program after Self Tests - YES YES YES
User Message for BS Filled? - YES YES YES
Rinsing Blood Flow ml/min 200 200 200
Rinsing Dialysate Flow ml/min 500 500 600
Rinsing Time by UFP h:min 00:59 00:59 00:10
Rinsing Rate by UFP ml/h 203 203 600
Rinsing Volume by UFP ml 200 200 100
Rinsing Time by BPA or BPV h:min - 00:30 -
Rinsing Rate by BPA or BPV ml/h - 6000 -
Rinsing Volume by BPA or BPV ml - 3000 -
Blood Flow for Connecting Patient ml/min 100 100 100
UF Parameters
Minimal UF Rate ml/h 50 50 50
UF Rate Compensation? - YES YES YES
Max. Value of Upper Limit UF Rate ml/h 3000 3000 3000
Default Value of Upper Limit UF Rate ml/h 2000 2000 2000
UF Volume ml 2000 2000 2000
Therapy Time h:min 04:00 04:00 03:30
Gross UF Rate vs. Blood Flow - inactive inactive inactive
% 40 40 40
Gross UF Rate vs. Blood Flow - active active active
% 30 30 30
UF Profile Editor

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 97

Unit HD HDF Online US Default Modified

HDF/HF Online Parameters
HDF Substitution Flow ml/min - 60 -
HF Substitution Flow ml/min - 100 -
HDF Dialysate Flow for Postdilution ml/min - 600 -
HDF Dialysate Flow for Predilution ml/min - 700 -
HDF/HF Infusion Bolus Volume ml - 100 -
Post-/Predilution Selection - - inactive -
Disinfection Parameters
Disinfection after each Therapy - NO YES NO
Automatic Preparation Start after Disinfection - NO NO NO
Thermal Disinfection - YES NO YES
Chemical Disinfection - YES YES YES
Chemical Disinfection, Short - YES NO NO
Central Thermal Disinfection - NO NO NO
Central Manual Chemical Disinfection - NO NO NO
Central Automatic Chemical Disinfection - NO NO NO
Rinsing - NO NO YES
Automatic Switch-On with Rinsing - No Weekly Schedule - inactive inactive inactive
Switch-On Time h:min 06:30 06:30 06:30
Automatic Switch-On by Weekly Schedule - active active active
Weekly Schedule (see Table)
Start on Sunday - inactive inactive active
Start on Monday - active active inactive
Auto Switch-On without daily confirmation - NO NO NO
Maximum Out of Action Time - inactive inactive active
Days Days 0 0 2
Hours/Minutes h:min 08:00 08:00 00:00
Disinfection Configuration Data Table - Citric Acid 50% Citric Acid 50% Citric Thermal
Central Thermal: Inlet Flow ml/min 250 250 250
Central Thermal: Time h:min 00:30 00:30 00:30
Central Manual Chemical: Inlet Flow ml/min 250 250 250
Central Manual Chemical: Inlet Time h:min 00:05 00:05 00:05
Central Manual Chemical: Rinsing Flow ml/min 800 800 800
Central Manual Chemical: Rinsing Time h:min 00:30 00:30 00:30
Central Automatic Chemical: Inlet Volume ml 260 260 260
Central Automatic Chemical: Switch off for Retention - NO NO NO
without Automatic Switch-On
Central Automatic Chemical: Retention Time h:min 00:20 00:20 00:20
Central Automatic Chemical: Rinsing Flow ml/min 800 800 800
Central Automatic Chemical: Rinsing Time h:min 00:30 00:30 00:30
Rinsing: Inlet Flow ml/min 800 800 800
Rinsing: Time h:min 00:02 00:02 00:02
Filter Parameters
Name - Diacap-Ultra Diacap-Ultra Diacap-Ultra
Therapy Number - 150 150 150
Filter Operation Time h 900 900 900
Dialyser Parameters (Kt/V)
Urea Distribution Volume Formula - Watson Watson Watson
Height Measurement Unit of Watson Formula - cm cm cm
Default Target Kt/V - 1.20 1.20 1.20
Default Setting for Treatment Mode Warning of Kt/V - Warning active Warning active Warning inactive
Target Projected Deviation
Kt/V Table - Manual Input: Setting Clean/Total Blood [%] - YES YES YES
Warning for Saving Kt/V Volume enabled - NO NO NO
Kt/V-UV
Default Target Kt/V - 1.20 1.20 1.20
Kt/V Correction Mode - Single Pool Single Pool Single Pool
Default Setting for Treatment Mode: -
Warning of Kt/V Target-Projected Deviation Warning active Warning active Warning inactive
Warning for Saving Kt/V Table - NO NO NO
Timings
Parameter Setting Window Disappearing Time s 500 500 600
Screen Saver Appearance - NO NO NO
Appearing Time s 600 600 600

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 98

Unit HD HDF Online US Default Modified

Language Selection
English - active active active
German - inactive inactive inactive
Summer Time Setting (enter values accordingly)
Begin of Summer Time D/M/Y dd.mm.yyyyy dd.mm.yyyyy dd.mm.yyyyy
h:min xx:xx xx:xx xx:xx
End of Summer Time D/M/Y dd.mm.yyyyy dd.mm.yyyyy dd.mm.yyyyy
h:min xx:xx xx:xx xx:xx
Time Difference h:min xx:xx xx:xx xx:xx
ABPM
Delete Button for Data - YES YES YES
Auto Start of Cyclic Reading (from Patient Identification - NO NO NO
Media)
ABPM Cyclic Reading Stop at Entering Disinfection - YES YES YES
Taking Over Limits from Patient’s Parameters - YES YES YES
bioLogic RR Comfort
Guide Line Mode - NO NO -
Suggested SYS Lower Limit - NO NO -
bioLogic RR Algorithm ID - 100 100 -
Miscellaneous Parameters
Click Sound - NO NO YES
Warning and Writing (Saving) Patient Parameters - NO NO YES
* Skip Self Tests - NO NO NO
* A skip of the self tests for servicing only!
Automatic Preparation Start - YES YES NO
Data Validation with - Touch Touch Enter Key
UF Profile Editing in Treatment - YES YES NO
Manual Bypass Confirmation Window Enabled - NO NO YES
End of Therapy Sound Duration - 100 % 100 % 100 %
Chopped Alarm Sound - NO NO NO
Suppression of Warning Sounds in Preparation - NO NO NO
Automatic Reinfusion Start at Entering End of Therapy - YES YES NO
DCI
Dianet Address - 1 1 1
Data Set - MPI 0.12 MPI 0.12 MPI 0.12
DBI
Baud Rate kBaud 38.4 38.4 38.4
User Logout Time min 15 - ON 15 - ON 15 – ON
Message Warning Time min 15 - OFF 15 - OFF 15 - OFF
Data Set DBI 1.61 - inactive inactive inactive
DBI 1.72 - inactive inactive inactive
DBI 2.00 - active active active
DBI 2.20 - inactive inactive inactive
DBI 2.21 - inactive inactive inactive
DBI-WAN Interface – Network Name Configuration
Pre-SN String is needed - - - d / YES
SN String is needed - - - - / YES
Post-SN String is needed - - - / NO
Network Name (max. 15 chars.) - - - d-
Preventive Maintenance
Warning for Preventive Maintenance Enabled - NO NO NO
Load Interval - inactive inactive inactive
Elapsed Month - inactive inactive inactive
Setting Elapsed Month months 12 12 12
Elapsed Working Time Counter WTC - inactive inactive inactive
Setting Elapsed WTC hours 4000 4000 4000

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 99

P ro d uc t io n Rep o rt
HD HDF Online US Default Modified
Options
ABPM inactive inactive active
DCI inactive inactive inactive
bioLogic RR inactive inactive inactive
Kt/V inactive inactive inactive
Kt/V UV inactive inactive inactive
Card Reader inactive inactive active
HCT Crit-Line inactive inactive inactive
Low Level Options:
Double Pump 1) 1) 1)
Holder for BIC Cartridge 1) 1) 1)
DF Filter 1) 1) 1)
HDF Online 1) 1) 1)
Battery 1) 1) 1)
Nexadia-BSL (DBI) 1) 1) 1)
WAN-BSL (DBI) 1) 1) 1)
1) Setting depends on the configuration of the machine.
Blo o d Leak Det ec t o r Limit ( 2.7)
HD HDF Online US Default Modified
Standard Limit (0.5 ml/min at Haematocrite HK 0.45) active active inactive
AAMI Limit (0.35 ml/min at Haematocrite HK 0.25) inactive inactive active
P o s itio n Set t ing f o r BICP , K P and U FP ( 2.8.2)
Unit Default US Default Modified
BICP Parking - 180 180
KP Parking - 180 180
UFP Parking - 180 180
UFP Positive Pressure Test - 270 270
UFP Negative Pressure Test - 90 90
BICLF and ENDLF Ratio ( 2.10)
Unit Default US Default Modified
BICLF Ratio - 25 25
ENDLF Ratio - 31 36
BICLF Cart Ratio - 35 35
P V A larm Wind o w , P A Lo w Limit ( 2.12)
Unit Default US Default Modified
PV Alarm Window mmHg 100 100
PV Low Limit Position mmHg 35 35
PV Absolute Low Limit mmHg 20 20
PA Absolute Low Limit mmHg -200 -300
P ump Head Selectio n ( 2.13)
Unit Default US Default Modified
Pump Head 8 x 12 - active active
Pump Head 7 x 10 - inactive inactive
BP A and BP V ( 2.13.1)
Unit Default US Default Modified
BPA µl/Head Revolution 12306 12306
BPV µl/Head Revolution 12306 12306
HDF Online Substitution Pump OSP (2.15)
Unit Default US Default Modified
OSP µl/Head Revolution 8300 8300
Level Reg ulatio n ( 2.16)
Unit Default US Default Modified
LRP (PPR) Slow % 60 60
LRP (PPR) Fast % 100 100

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 100

Weekly Dis infect io n P ro g ram

Time Method Disinfectant Time Method Disinfectant
Monday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Chemical Long Citric Acid 50%
Tuesday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Chemical Long Citric Acid 50%
Wednesday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Chemical Long Citric Acid 50%
Thursday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Chemical Long Citric Acid 50%
Friday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Chemical Long Citric Acid 50%
Saturday
Night - - -
Morning - - -
Sunday
Night - - -
Morning - - -

U S Weekly Dis infect io n P ro g ram

Time Method Disinfectant Time Method Disinfectant
Monday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Rinsing -
Tuesday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Rinsing -
Wednesday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Rinsing -
Thursday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Rinsing -
Friday
Night - - -
Morning 06:30 Rinsing -
Saturday
Night - - -
Morning - - -
Sunday
Night - - -
Morning - - -

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 101

Disinfection Configuration Data

(Standard Machine)
Chemical Disinfection (long or short)
Disinfectant Reaction Time Rinsing Temperature Conductivity
Name Volume Long Short Time min.
o
(max. 20 Characters) ml h:min h:min h:min C mS/cm
Citric Acid 50 % 120 0:15 0:05 0:05 83 2.2
Decalcification with Citric Acid 50 % 120 0:05 0:05 0:05 40 2
* Peracetic acid 1 to < 5 90 0:20 0:20 0:25 40 0.1
* Hydrogen peroxide 1 to < 35
* Acetic acid 1 to < 10
(composition of concentrate [%])
# Tiutol KF 90 0:15 0:05 0:25 60 10,5
* Puristeril 340 90 0:20 0:05 0:25 40 0.1
Doxan 160 0:20 0:05 0:25 40 0.2
Dialox 160 0:20 0:05 0:25 40 0.2
Peresal 110 0:20 0:05 0:25 40 0.1
Citrosteril 120 0:15 0:05 0:20 83 2.0
Maranon H 90 0:20 0:05 0:25 40 10
Diasteril 90 0:15 0:05 0:15 80 0.5
* DF filter: a max. of 150 disinfections can be performed with Citric Acid 50 % or peracetic acid/hydrogen peroxide/acetic acid/Puristeril 340
# DF filter: a max. of 2 disinfections can be performed with Tiutol KF during the service life time (service life, 150 treatments/900 h), i.e.:
- Default: citro-thermal disinfection (thermal disinfection) with citric acid 50% after every treatment
- Option: after 50, 100 and 150 treatments (150 treatment and prior to exchange of filter) with Tiutol KF and then citro-thermal disinfection (after exchange
of filter)

Disinfection Configuration Data

(HDF Online Machine with Diacap Ultra)
Chemical Disinfection (long or short)
Disinfectant Reaction Time Rinsing Temperature Conductivity
Name Volume Long Short Time min.
o
(max. 20 Characters) ml h:min h:min h:min C mS/cm
Citric Acid 50 % 130 0:15 0:15 0:05 83 2.2
* Peracetic acid 1 to < 5 120 0:20 0:20 0:25 40 0.1
* Hydrogen peroxide 1 to < 35
* Acetic acid 1 to < 10
(composition of concentrate [%])
# Tiutol KF 120 0:30 0:30 0:30 60 10.5
* Puristeril 340 120 0:20 0:20 0:25 40 0.1
* DF filter: a max. of 150 disinfections can be performed with Citric Acid 50 % or peracetic acid/hydrogen peroxide/acetic acid/Puristeril 340
# DF filter: a max. of 2 disinfections can be performed with Tiutol KF during the service life time (service life, 150 treatments/900 h), i.e.:
- Default: citro-thermal disinfection (thermal disinfection) with citric acid 50% after every treatment
- Option: after 50, 100 and 150 treatments (150 treatment and prior to exchange of filter) with Tiutol KF and then citro-thermal disinfection (after exchange
of filter)

US Disinfection Configuration Data

Chemical Disinfection (long or short)
Disinfectant Reaction Time Rinsing Temperature Conductivity
Name Volume Long Short Time min.
o
(max. 20 Characters) ml h:min h:min h:min C mS/cm
Citric Thermal 120 00:15 00:05 00:05 83 2.2
Decalcification Short 120 00:05 00:05 00:05 40 2.2
Bleach 90 00:15 00:05 00:25 30 5.0

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 3. Repair Instructions 1/2010 3 - 102

Dialyser Filter Urea Clearance Data for Diacap 

DF1, DF2: Dialysate Flow BF1, BF2, …. BF8: Blood Flow
in ml/min in ml/min
Filter Name DF1 BF1 BF2 BF3 BF4 BF5 BF6
(Default Filter on green) DF2 100 200 300 400 500 600
Type ml/min ml/min
Diacap LOPS 10 500 0 176 217 242 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap LOPS 12 500 0 183 233 261 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap LOPS 15 500 0 189 246 285 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap LOPS 18 500 0 192 253 294 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap LOPS 20 500 0 194 258 302 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap HIPS 10 500 0 180 223 250 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap HIPS 12 500 0 186 238 271 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap HIPS 15 500 0 190 245 288 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap HIPS 18 500 0 192 250 292 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap HIPS 20 500 0 194 253 296 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap HIFlo 18 500 0 0 257 298 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
Diacap HIFlo 23 500 0 0 277 328 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Lo 10 500 0 184 236 276 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Lo 12 500 0 189 249 291 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Lo 15 500 0 194 267 311 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Lo 18 500 0 196 276 322 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Lo 20 500 0 198 281 329 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Lo 23 500 0 199 285 333 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Hi 10 500 0 186 241 290 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Hi 12 500 0 191 255 306 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Hi 15 500 0 197 272 329 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Hi 18 500 0 198 281 341 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Hi 20 500 0 199 287 349 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0
xevonta Hi 23 500 0 199 290 354 0 0
800 0 0 0 0 0 0

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

 Exchanged/Repaired/Assembled Tests and Calibrations to be Executed Tests and Measures to
Components/Groups (see Dialog+ Service Manual, Chapter 4 and 5) be Executed 3.8
3.8.1

5.1
4.9.2.1
3.8.2.3

4.9.4.4
3.8.2.6

4.9.1.1
3.8.2.5
3.8.2.4
3.8.2.2
3.8.2.1

4.9.4.9
4.9.4.8
4.9.4.7
4.9.4.6
4.9.4.5
4.9.4.3
4.9.4.1
4.9.2.8
4.9.2.7
4.9.2.5
4.9.1.8
3.8.2.8
3.8.2.7

4.9.1.3
Self Test

Test Run
Dialog+ SW 9.xx

Install Software

4.9.2.26 1.26 Option Battery

4.9.4.21 Gap SAKA and SAKV

Repair Matrix

Electrical Safety Check

Test 1.5 Tubing Clamps

Touch Screen Calibration

Test 1.8 Coupling Detectors

Buttons, Lamps and Sounds

Calibration Degassing TSE/TSHE

Perform Disinfection after repair
Measures after Repair

4.9.2.13 Test 1.13 Balance Chamber Valves

4.9.4.10 Calibration BICLF and ENDLF Ratio

Test 1.7 Air Sensor SAD, Red Sensor
Test 1.1 Staff Call, Alarms, Power Off

Calibration Blood Leak Detector Type 2

Test Run UF Comparison Measurement

4.9.4.20 Calibration Pressure Reducer Valve DMV

4.9.2.14 Test 1.14 Bypass and Disinfection Valves

Calibration of Flow Rate UFP, BICP and KP

4.9.2.25 Test 1.25 HDF Online Valves and Detectors

4.9.4.13 Calibration Flow Rate of BPA and BPV/OSP

4.9.4.19 Calibration Dialyser Inlet Throttle Valve DDE

4.9.4.17 Calibration Dialysate Nonreturn Valve RVDA

4.9.4.23 Setting Servomotor for Disinfection Valve VD

DBI Test (BSL) or DSI Test (Crit-Line) or DCI Test

4.9.4.16 Calibration Inlet Flow Pump Nonreturn Valve RVFPE

Calibration Safety Air Detector SAD Version Version 3

4.9.4.18 Calibration Outlet Flow Pump Nonreturn Valve RVFPA

4.9.2.23 Test 1.23 BIC Cartridge Valves and Coupling Detectors

Calibration Pressure Sensors of Water Side PE and PDA

Calibration Conductivity Sensors BICLF and ENDLF/ENDLF_S

Calibration Pressure Sensors Blood Side PA, PV, PBE and PBS
Conductivity Test Run, Temperature Comparison Measurement
3. Repair Instructions

Calibration Dialysis Temperature Sensors TSBIC and TSD/TSD_S/TSDE

Check System Configuration, Production Report and Set if Necessary

Inspection Protocol for Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement ABPM

1. Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement: ABPM ◆ ◆ ◆

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd

2. Board, Analog: AB ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
3. Board, Basic: BB ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
4. Board, Digital: DB ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
5. Board, Front Panel: FPB ◆ ◆ ◆
6. Board, HDF Online HOB ◆ ◆ ◆
7. Board, Mother: TLC ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
8. Board, Optical Status Display: OSD ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
9. Board, Power Motors: PBM ◆ ◆ ◆
10. Board, Power Valves: PBV ◆ ◆ ◆
11. Compact Flash Card CFC ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
12. Coupling, Dialyser ◆ ◆
13. Detector, Blood Leak: BL ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
14. Detector, Safety Air: SAD ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
15. Throttle: DBK ◆ ◆ ◆
16. Throttle: DDE ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
17. Valve, Pressure Reducer: DMV ◆ ◆
18. Chamber, Degassing: EK ◆ ◆ ◆
19. Filter: FBK1; FBK2; FBIC; FVD; FB; FK ◆ ◆ ◆
20. Filter, Hydrophobic: HFB ◆ ◆ ◆
21. Heater ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
22. Clamp, Tubing: SAKV; SAKA ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
23. Rods, Concentrate Suction; o-ring ◆ ◆ ◆
24. Manometer Connection; Protection Filter; Tubing ◆ ◆ ◆
25. Membranes, MSBK1/2 (Balance Chamber) ◆ ◆ ◆
26. Monitor (TFT Display) ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
27. Drive Unit, Gear Pump ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
28. Cable, Mains, with Mains Plug ◆ ◆
29. SMPS-MC Components: Relay, Buzzer, Capacitor ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
30. SMPS-MC ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
31. Option ABPM ◆ ◆ ◆
32. Option Adimea (Kt/V-UV) ◆ ◆ ◆
33. Option Battery ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
34. Option Bedside-Link-Modul: BSL ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
35. Option BIC Cartridge Holder ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
36. Option DCI ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
37. Option DF-Filter ◆ ◆ ◆
38. Option DSI (Crit-Line) ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
39. Option Card Reader ◆ ◆ ◆
40. Option Staff Call ◆ ◆ ◆
41. Level Regulation Module ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
42. Pump: BPA; BPV ◆ ◆
43. Pump, Piston: BICP; KP ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
44. Pump, Piston: UFP ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
45. Pump, Heparin ◆ ◆ ◆
46. Pump, Level Regulation: LRP (PPR) ◆ ◆ ◆
47. Pump, Gear: EP; FPA; FPE ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
48. Nonreturn Valve: RVDA ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
49. Nonreturn Valve: RVFPA ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
50. Nonreturn Valve: RVFPE ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
51. Sensor, Pressure: PDA; PE ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
52. Sensor, Conductivity: BICLF; ENDLF ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
53. Sensor, Level, Upline Tank: NSVB ◆ ◆ ◆
54. Sensor, Reed: BKUS ◆ ◆
55. Sensor, Reed: PSAUS; PSABF, FEDFFS, FEDHDFS ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
56. Sensor, Reed SBS1, SBS2 ◆ ◆ ◆
57. Sensor, Temperature: TSBIC; TSD; TSD_S; TSDE ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
58. Sensor, Temperature: TSE; TSHE ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
59. Software, Installation/Update ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
1/2010

60. Rinsing Bridge ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆

61. Touch Screen ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
62. Valve: VEB; VVBE ◆ ◆ ◆
63. Valve: VBE; VDFF; VSB; VSAE; VSAA ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
64. Valve: VBP; VDE; VDA; VZ; VLA ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
65. Valve: VD ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
66. Valve: VDEBK1; VEBK1; VEBK2; VDEBK2; VDABK1; ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
VABK1; VABK2; VDABK2
67. Valve: VVB; VBICP; VBKO; VBKS ,BKUS ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆
3 –103

B. Braun Avitum AG
 SW9.xx 3 . R e p a i r I n s t r u c t i o n s 1/2010 3 - 104

3.8.2 Tests and Measures to be Executed

It is recommended to use the repair matrix, the tests and measures and the
execution protocol after servicing (e.g. repair, SW installation etc.).
All components are numbered alphabetically (from 1 to n) in the column Points
for Exchanged/Repaired Assembly Groups. The respective calibrations, tests and
measures in the matrix are assigned to each component (HW/SW) with a ◆
character. The executed measure can be documented in the execution protocol.

Risk of a patient infection due to a contamination of the manometer

protection filter of the blood line system!
If the manometer protection filter of the blood line system was
contaminated with blood and blood has entered the machine: replace the
internal manometer protection filter, the tubing (between the filter and
the manometer connector) and the manometer connector.
Tubing must be replaced only by the same tubing type/length and identical
installation manner.
Make sure that the tubings in the machine are not kinked or twisted after
servicing (e.g. if sub-racks are pulled out and inserted again). The tubing
must not touch moving/rotating components (e.g. motors of gear pumps).
3.8.2.1 Install Software
1. The software must be installed according to the description in the service
manual.

3.8.2.2 Check System Configuration, Production

Report and Set if Necessary
The FSU USB stick with the system configuration can only be used if the
hardware and software of the machine match.

1A System Configuration
• System Configuration Present
Load the system configuration from the FSU USB stick and check all
settings in the TSM service program.
• Customer Specific System Configuration not Present)
Check system configuration and set system configuration according to
user default.
1B Production Report
• Select and save/activate present options.
1C Calibration Data
• Replacement of CFC
Save calibration data.
• Replacement of Sensors/Detectors
Calibration, save calibration data.
• Replacement of Digital Board
Download calibration data.
• Replacement of Analog Board
Calibration, save calibration data.
1D LLC Calibrations
Check and set ratio, tubing constants BPA/BPV, OSP tubing type,
check/set PA/PV limit values.
1E Working Time Counter
• Set working time counter.
1F Motherboard
Check and set BIOS.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

 SW9.xx 3 . R e p a i r I n s t r u c t i o n s 1/2010 3 - 105

3.8.2.3 Self Test

1. Start machine (fully equipped) in dialysis mode.
2. Insert line system – see instructions for use.
3. The machine must run without errors up to the message Connect Patient.
3.8.2.4 Conductivity Test Run, Temperature
Comparison Measurement
1. Assemble the line system, perform preparation and self test – according to
instructions for use.
2. Loop in a dialysis measurement system in the dialyser line.
3. Set 14.3 mS/cm, 37 oC (or the equivalent temperature in Fahrenheit).
4. Run the machine in main flow and compare the values (pay attention to the
tolerances).
3.8.2.5 Test Run UF Comparison Measurement

Pay attention that the dialyser circuit is free of air.

1. Assemble the line system, perform preparation (insert heparin syringe and
select 2 ml and use BIC cartridge if present).
2. Perform self test – according to instructions for use.

3. Press the icon to switch to therapy mode (connect patient). This icon
is enabled after all self tests were performed successfully.
Simulation of Patient:
4. Fill a 250 ml graduated cylinder with water and document exact value
(weight).
5. Set the UF volume to 125 ml and a therapy time to 00:15 h.
6. Insert the arterial and venous lines in the graduated cylinder.
7. Set the blood pump so that no blood side alarms are activated.
8. Start dialysis.
9. Check the UF volume after a dialysis time to > 0:15 h and compare the
removed volume from the graduated cylinder with the displayed UF volume
at the machine.
(Permissible deviation: 3 % of the UF rate per hour. Example: corresponds to
approx. ±4 ml at 125 ml UF volume after 15 minutes.)
3.8.2.6 Test Run
1. Assemble the line system, perform preparation (insert heparin syringe and
select 2 ml/h and use BIC cartridge if present).
2. Perform self test – according to instructions for use.

3. Press the icon to switch to therapy mode (connect patient). This icon
is enabled after all self tests were performed successfully.
4. Insert the arterial and venous lines in the graduated cylinder.
5. Set the blood pump so that no blood side alarms are activated.
6. Start dialysis.
7. Check alarm function of SAD.
(The ABPM function can be checked without a test run of the machine in
preparation mode.)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

 SW9.xx 3 . R e p a i r I n s t r u c t i o n s 1/2010 3 - 106

3.8.2.7 Electrical Safety Check

1. Electrical safety check according to EN 62353/EN 60601-1:

• Protective earth resistance, equipment leakage current, patient leakage
current.
3.8.2.8 Perform Disinfection after Repair

1. Select disinfection program.

2. Select disinfection type and start disinfection (depends on applied process
and procedure in the dialysis centres, see chapter disinfection in the
instructions for use).
3.8.2.9 Document the Executed Activities

1. The measures were executed correctly. Fill in the execution protocol after
service (e.g. exchange of a component) and after executing all necessary
measures according to the repair matrix.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

 SW9.xx 3 . R e p a i r I n s t r u c t i o n s 1/2010 3 - 107

3.8.3 Execution Protocol

Execution Protocol
Measures According to Repair Matrix Measurement Values/ NA OK
Executed Measures
3.8.2.1 Install Software executed correctly ! !
3.8.2.2 Check System Configuration, Production Report and Set if Necessary executed correctly ! !
3.8.2.3 Self Test executed correctly ! !
3.8.2.4 Conductivity Test Run, Temperature • Conductivity (14.3 ms/cm, ±0.2) ! !
........................................... [mS/cm]
Comparison Measurement:
• Temperature (37 oC, -1.5 +0.5) .................................................... [oC]
3.8.2.5 Test Run UF Comparison Measurement: • 15 min at UF rate 500 ml/h (3% ≈ ±4 ml) .................................................... [ml] ! !
3.8.2.6 Test Run executed correctly ! !
3.8.2.7 Electrical Safety Check: • Protective Earth Resistance < 0.3 [Ω]: ! !
According to: Potential equalization bolt ..................................................... [Ω]
IEC 62353/EN 60601-1/IEC 601-1
Heater body (top) (note highest value)
Rinsing bridge (dialyser inlet and outlet)
Interior: front door (top left corner)
Interior: rear door (top left corner)
Interior: frame (rear)
Interior: housing cover (top left)
Monitor (one of the screws in the housing frame)
• Equipment Leakage Current ≤ 0.5 [mA]: .................................................. [mA]
• Patient Leakage Current < 10 [µA] AC: ................................................... [µA]
3.8.2.8 Perform Disinfection after Repair executed correctly ! !
4. Tests and Calibrations According to Service Manual executed correctly ! !
All text in { } brackets are general notes or execution information!
{4.9.1.1 Buttons, Lamps and Sounds}
{4.9.1.3 Touch Screen Calibration}
{4.9.1.8 DBI Test or DSI Test or DCI Test}
{4.9.2.1 Test 1.1 Staff Call, Alarms, Power Off}
{4.9.2.5 1.5 Tubing Clamps}
{4.9.2.7 Test 1.7 Air Sensor SAD, Red Sensor}
{4.9.2.8 1.8 Coupling Detectors}
{4.9.2.13 1.13 Balance Chamber Valves}
{4.9.2.14 1.14 Bypass and Disinfection Valves}
{4.9.2.19 1.19 Leak Test}
{4.9.2.23 Test 1.23 BIC Cartridge Valves and Coupling Detectors}
{4.9.2.25 1.25 HDF Online Valves and Detectors}
{4.9.2.26 1.26 Option Battery Please use the repair matrix
{4.9.4.1 Calibration Pressure Sensors Blood Side PA, PV, PBE and PBS}
{4.9.4.3 Calibration Pressure Sensors of Water Side PE and PDA}
for the necessary tests and
{4.9.4.4 Calibration Degassing TSE/TSHE} calibrations.
{4.9.4.5 Calibration Dialysis Temperature Sensors TSBIC and TSD/TSD_S/TSDE}
{4.9.4.6 Calibration Conductivity Sensors BICLF and ENDLF/ENDLF_S}
{4.9.4.7 Calibration Blood Leak Detector Type 3}
{4.9.4.8 Calibration of Flow Rate UFP, BICP and KP}
{4.9.4.9 Calibration Safety Air Detector SAD Version 3}
{4.9.4.10 Calibration BICLF and ENDLF Ratio}
{4.9.4.13 Calibration Flow Rate of BPA and BPV/OSP}
{4.9.4.16 Calibration Inlet Flow Pump Nonreturn Valve RVFPE}
{4.9.4.17 Calibration Dialysate Nonreturn Valve RVDA}
{4.9.4.18 Calibration Outlet Flow Pump Nonreturn Valve RVFPA}
{4.9.4.19 Calibration Dialyser Inlet Throttle Valve DDE}
{4.9.4.20 Calibration Pressure Reducer Valve DMV}
{4.9.4.21 Gap SAKA and SAKV}
{4.9.4.23 Setting Servomotor for Disinfection Valve VD}
{5.1 Inspection Protocol for Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement ABPM}

The respective measures were executed correctly after servicing according to the Name Service Technician:
repair matrix. .............................................................................
.............................................................................
Date / Signature

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog SW9xx_sm_Chapter 3_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4-1

Table of Contents Page

4.1 Start TSM Service Program 4-5

4.2 Quit TSM Service Program 4-7

4.3 Structure of TSM Service Program 4-8

4.4 Service Overview in Therapy 4-9

4.4.1 Legend Service Overview in Therapy 4-12

4.5 Service Overview in TSM Service Program 4-15

4.5.1 Legend Service Overview in TSM Service Program 4-16

4.6 File Operations 4-18

4.6.1 Floppy Diskette Operations 4-18
4.6.2 Calibration Data Operations 4-19

4.7 Treatment Support 4-20

4.7.1 System Configuration 4-21

4.7.1.1 Dialysate Side Parameters 4-21
4.7.1.2 Blood Side Parameters 4-25
4.7.1.3 Min-Max Parameters 4-26
4.7.1.4 Arterial Bolus Parameters 4-29
4.7.1.5 Single-Needle Parameters 4-30
4.7.1.6 Heparin Parameters 4-31
4.7.1.7 Rinsing Parameters 4-33
4.7.1.8 UF Parameters 4-35
4.7.1.9 HDF/HF Online Parameters 4-38
4.7.1.10 Disinfection Parameters 4-39
4.7.1.11 Filter Parameters 4-45
4.7.1.12 Dialyser Parameters (Kt/V) 4-46
4.7.1.13 Kt/V-UV Parameters 4-48
4.7.1.14 Timings 4-49
4.7.1.15 Language Selection 4-50
4.7.1.16 Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement ABPM 4-51
4.7.1.17 bioLogic RR® GL Parameters 4-52
4.7.1.18 Summer Time Setting 4-53
4.7.1.19 Miscellaneous Parameters 4-54

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4-2

4.7.1.20 DBI Parameters 4-56

4.7.1.21 Preventive Maintenance 4-57

4.7.2 Trends and Trend Groups 4-59

4.8 Manual Test and Calibration 4-61

4.8.1 Top Level Manual Test and Calibration 4-61

4.8.1.1 Buttons, Lamps and Sounds 4-62
4.8.1.2 Monitor Test 4-63
4.8.1.3 Touch Screen Calibration 4-64
4.8.1.4 Brightness Calibration 4-65
4.8.1.5 Card Reader and Card Check 4-66
4.8.1.6 USB-Port Properties 4-67
4.8.1.7 Supervisor Window Test 4-68
4.8.1.8 File System Check 4-69
4.8.1.9 ABPM Maintenance 4-70
4.8.1.10 DBI Maintenance 4-71
4.8.1.11 Kt/V-UV Sensor Test 4-72
4.8.1.12 Dialog Serial Interface DSI Test 4-73

4.8.2 Low Level Manual Test 4-74

4.8.2.1 Test 1.1 Staff Call, Alarms and Power Off 4-75
4.8.2.2 Test 1.2 Blood Pump Arterial 4-76
4.8.2.3 Test 1.3 Blood Pump Venous 4-77
4.8.2.4 Test 1.4 Heparin Pump 4-78
4.8.2.5 Test 1.5 Tubing Clamps 4-79
4.8.2.6 Test 1.6 Pressure Sensors (Blood Side) 4-80
4.8.2.7 Test 1.7 Air Sensor SAD, Red Sensor 4-81
4.8.2.8 Test 1.8 Coupling Detectors 4-82
4.8.2.9 Test 1.9 Water Inlet, Upline Tank and Flow Pump FPE 4-83
4.8.2.10 Test 1.10 Degassing and Heating 4-84
4.8.2.11 Test 1.11 Dialysis Temperature 4-85
4.8.2.12 Test 1.12 Concentrate Pumps and Conductivity 4-86
4.8.2.13 Test 1.13 Balance Chamber Valves 4-87
4.8.2.14 Test 1.14 Bypass and Disinfection Valves 4-88
4.8.2.15 Test 1.15 Flow Pump FPA, Balance Chamber Sensors and Air 4-89
Separator
4.8.2.16 Test 1.16 Pressure Water Part 4-91
4.8.2.17 Test 1.17 UF Pump 4-92

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4-3

4.8.2.18 Test 1.18 Blood Leak 4-93

4.8.2.19 Test 1.19 Leak Test 4-95
4.8.2.20 Test 1.20 Water Part (Overview) 4-98
4.8.2.21 Test 1.21 Emptying 4-99
4.8.2.22 Test 1.22 HDF 4-100
4.8.2.23 Test 1.23 BIC Cartridge Valves and Coupling Detectors 4-101
4.8.2.24 Test 1.24 HDF Online 4-102
4.8.2.25 Test 1.25 HDF Online Valves and Coupling Detectors 4-103
4.8.2.26 Test 1.26 Option Battery 4-104
4.8.2.27 Test 1.27 DFS Pressure Test of Therapy 4-105
4.8.2.28 Test 1.28 Front Panel Board FPB (LLS) 4-106
4.8.2.29 Test 1.29 Patient Leakage Current 4-107
4.8.2.30 Test 1.30 SMPS-MC Self Tests 4-108
4.8.2.30.1 Self Tests SMPS-MC 4-109
4.8.2.31 Test 1.31 Level Regulation 4-110

4.8.3 Low Level Manual Calibration 4-111

4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information 4-111
4.8.3.2 Select Low Level Manual Calibration 4-114
4.8.3.3 Calibration Pressure Sensors Blood Side PA, PV, PBE and PBS 4-115
4.8.3.4 Heparin Pump 4-118
4.8.3.5 Calibration Degassing Pressure Sensor PE 4-119
4.8.3.5.1 Calibration Degassing Pressure Sensor PE for Machines at 4-123
High Altitudes of >1,000 m
4.8.3.6 Calibration Dialysate Outlet Pressure Sensor PDA 4-124
4.8.3.7 Calibration Degassing Temperature Sensor TSE/Heater Inlet 4-128
Temperature Sensor TSHE
4.8.3.8 Calibration Temperature Sensors TSBIC/TSD/TSD-S and TSDE 4-131
4.8.3.9 Calibration Conductivity Sensors Bicarbonate BICLF and 4-135
END Conductivity ENDLF/ENDLF_S
4.8.3.10 Calibration Blood Leak Detector 4-140
4.8.3.10.1 Blood Leak Detector Limit 4-142
4.8.3.10.2 Check Blood Leak Detector 4-143
4.8.3.10.3 Calibration Blood Leak Detector 4-144
4.8.3.10.3.1 Turbidity Calibration with Water 4-144
4.8.3.10.3.2 Calibration with Reference Solution (Red Dye) 4-144
4.8.3.10.4 Actual Value Check Blood Leak Detector 4-145
4.8.3.10.4.1 Check 0 ‰ Blood Concentration 4-145

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4-4

4.8.3.10.4.2 Check 1 ‰ Blood Concentration 4-145

4.8.3.11 Calibration of Delivery Rate UFP, BICP and KP 4-146
4.8.3.11.1 Calibration BICP and KP Pump 4-146
4.8.3.11.2 Calibration UF Pump with Balance 4-147
4.8.3.11.3 Position Setting for BICP, KP and UFP 4-148
4.8.3.11.4 Stroke Value of BICP, KP and UFP 4-148
4.8.3.12 Calibration Safety Air Detector SAD 4-149
4.8.3.12.1 SAD Test after Calibration 4-150
4.8.3.13 Calibration BICLF and ENDLF Ratio 4-151
4.8.3.14 Calibration Load Cell 4-154
4.8.3.15 Calibration PV Alarm Window, PA Low Limit 4-155
4.8.3.16 Calibration Flow Rate of BPA and BPV/OSP 4-156
4.8.3.17 Infusion Density Substitution Pump 4-157
4.8.3.18 Stroke Value HDF Online Substitution Pump OSP 4-158
4.8.3.19 Level Regulation 4-159
4.8.3.20 Calibration Inlet Flow Pump Nonreturn Valve RVFPE 4-160
4.8.3.21 Calibration Dialysate Nonreturn Valve RVDA 4-162
4.8.3.22 Calibration Outlet Flow Pump Nonreturn Valve RVFPA 4-164
4.8.3.23 Calibration Dialyser Inlet Throttle Valve DDE 4-165
4.8.3.24 Calibration Pressure Reducer Valve DMV 4-167
4.8.3.25 Gap Arterial Tubing Clamp SAKA and Venous Tubing Clamp 4-169
Currentless Closed SAKV-SG
4.8.3.26 Arterial Tubing Clamp SAKA/Venous Tubing Clamp 4-170
Currentless Closed SAKV-SG
4.8.3.27 Setting Servomotor for Disinfection Valve VD 4-171

4.9 Production Report 4-173

4.9.1 Version Number Dialog 4-174

4.9.2 Low Level Options 4-175

4.10 Service Reports 4-176

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4-5

4.1 Start TSM Service Program

TSM Service Program Only activate the TSM service program for
service activities. It is prohibited to connect a
patient to the Dialog+ and to run a therapy if
the TSM service program is activated in the
Dialog+. If the TSM service program is
activated the complete alarm system is
disabled.

Therapy Mode After completion of all procedures switch back

to the therapy mode: digital board, service
switch S1, position 0.

The TSM Main Menu (TSM = Technical Support

and Maintenance) is used for servicing the
machine. The TSM service program (TSM Main
Menu) is started as follows:

1. Switch off machine.

2. Open rear door.
3. On digital board DB: turn service switch S1
from position 0 to position 2.
Service Switch S1:
Position 0 = Therapy
Position 2 = TSM Service Program
Position 3 = Software Installation/Update
4. Switch on machine.
The machine starts in TSM mode.

HDF Online Board

Power Board
Motors
Power Board Valves JP2

Digital Board
JP1 S1
P11

Basic Board
Analog Board

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4-6

The TSM Main Menu is displayed.

The date and time can be set in the TSM Main
Menu.
The following four sub-menus can be selected:
• Treatment Support
• Manual Test and Calibration
• Production Report
• Service Reports

You can set the date and time of the machine by clicking on the field. The first
click opens the Minus/Plus window for the Date; the second click opens the
Minus/Plus window for the Time.
All basic parameters can be set for the therapy mode in the Treatment Support
menu.

All manual tests and calibrations can be performed in the Manual Test and
Calibration menu.

All machine specific data and options are available in the Production Report
menu.

The Operation Mode Report menu can be selected in the Service Report menu.

The total working time of the machine is displayed in the Working Time
Counter window. The total working time is stored on the compact flash card
CFC.

• Activate additional information with the HELP icon.

− Activate HELP icon
− Select a sub-menu via touch screen.
(A window with the help text is opened for the selected key.)
The File Operations menu can be activated with this icon.

The current software/firmware versions are displayed in the Dialog Version

Number menu. This menu can also be selected in the Production Report.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4-7

4.2 Quit TSM Service Program

TSM Service Program Only activate the TSM service program for
service activities. It is prohibited to connect a
patient to the Dialog+ and to run a therapy if
the TSM service program is activated in the
Dialog+. If the TSM service program is
activated the complete alarm system is
disabled.

Therapy Mode After completion of all procedures switch back

to the therapy mode: digital board, service
switch S1, position 0.

The following steps must be taken to quit the

service program and to re-enter the therapy
mode:

1. Switch off machine.

2. On digital board DB: turn service switch S1
from position 2 to position 0 therapy mode.
Service Switch S1:
Position 0 = Therapy
Position 2 = TSM Service Program
Position 3 = Software Installation/Update
3. Close rear door.
4. Switch on machine.
The machine starts in therapy mode.

HDF Online Board

Power Board
Motors
Power Board Valves JP2

Digital Board
JP1 S1
P11

Basic Board
Analog Board

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4-8

4.3 Structure of TSM Service Program

TSM Service Program

Technical Support and Maintenance (SW 9.xx)

File Treatment Manual Test and Production Service

Operations Support Calibration Report Reports

Hard Disk System TL Manual Test and Machine Operation Mode

Read/Write Configuration Calibration Delivery Data Report
Save Calibration Data Dialysate Side Parameters Buttons, Lamps and Sounds
Download Calibration Data Blood Side Parameters Monitor Test
Min-Max Parameters Touch Screen Calibration Version Number
Arterial Bolus Parameters Brightness Dialog
Single Needle Card Reader and Card Check
Heparin Parameters USB Port Properties
Rinsing Parameters Supervisor Window Test
UF Parameters File System Check Option Icons
HDF/HF Online Parameters ABPM Maintenance
Disinfection Parameters DBI Test
Filter Parameters Kt/V-UV Sensor Test
Dialyser Filter Parameters Kt/V DSI Test
ABPM
Kt/V-UV Parameters
Timings bioLogic RR
Langauge Selection Card Reader
ABPM Parameters Low Level DCI
Kt/V
bioLogic RR GL Parameters Manual Test Kt/V-UV (Crit-Line)
Summer Time Setting
Miscellaneous Parameters Test 1.1 Staff Call/Alarms/Power Off HCT (Adimea)
DBI Parameters Test 1.2 Blood Pump Arterial
DCI Parameters Test 1.3 Blood Pump Venous
Preventive Service Test 1.4 Heparin Pump
Test 1.5 Tubing Clamps
Trends and Test 1.6 Pressure Sensors (Blood Side) Low Level Options
Test 1.7 Safety Air Detector, Red Sensor
Trend Groups Test 1.8 Coupling Detectors Double Pump
Test 1.9 Water Intake, Upline Tank and Holder for BIC Cartridge
Flow Pump FPE
Test 1.10 Degassing and Heating DF Filter
Test 1.11 Dialysis Temperature HDF Online
Test 1.12 Concentrate Pumps and Battery
Conductivity Nexadia-BSL (DBI)
Test 1.13 Balance Chamber Valves
Test 1.14 By-Pass and Disinfection Valves WAN-BSL (DBI)
Test 1.15 Flow Pump FPA, Balance Chamber
Sensors and Air Separator
Test 1.16 Pressure Water Part
Test 1.17 UF Pump
Test 1.18 Blood Leak Detector
Test 1.19 Leak Test
Test 1.20 Water Part (Overview)
Test 1.21 Emptying
{Test 1.22 HDF}
Test 1.23 BIC Cartridge Valves and
Coupling Detectors
Test 1.24 HDF Online
Test 1.25 HDF Online Valves and Coupling
Detectors
Test 1.26 Option Battery
Test 1.27 DFS Pressure Test of Therapy
Test 1.28 Front Panel Board FPB (LLS)
Test 1.29 Patient Leakage Current
Test 1.30 SMPS-MC Self Test
Test 1.31 Level Regulation

Low Level Manual

Calibration
Calibration 2.1 Pressure Sensors (Blood Side)
{Calibration 2.2 Heparin Pump}
Calibration 2.3 Pressure Sensors (Water Side)
Calibration 2.4 Degassing Temperature
Calibration 2.5 Dialysis Temperature
Calibration 2.6 Conductivity
Calibration 2.7 Blood Leak Detector
Calibration 2.8 Flow of BICP, KP and UF Pump
Calibration 2.8.1 Stroke Value of BICP, KP and UFP
Calibration 2.8.2 Position Setting for BICP, KP and UFP
Calibration 2.9 Safety Air Detector SAD
Calibration 2.10 BICLF Ratio and ENDLF Ratio
{Calibration 2.11 Load Cell}
Calibration 2.12 PV Alarm Window, PA Low Limit
Calibration 2.13 Flow of BPA and BPV Pump
Calibration 2.13.1 Tube Constants of BPA and BPV
Calibration 2.13.2 Pump Head Selection
{Calibration 2.14 Substitution Pump} {} : not applicable
Calibration 2.15 HDF Online Substitution Pump OSP
Calibration 2.16 Level Regulation Pump LRP

Fig. : TSM Service Program

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4-9

4.4 Service Overview in Therapy

The service overview can be selected in therapy with the Service Key icon. The
second and third page of the service overview can be selected with the service
key icon.

Click the Door icon to jump back to the initial menu.

Water Tank Balance Chamber Ultrafiltration Blood Side (Pressure)

VVBE: OPENED/CLOSED MSBK1: XXXXX UFP: XX rpm PA: XXX mmHg
NSVB: HIGH/LOW MSBK2: XXXXX UFP_S: XX rpm PA_S: XXX mmHg
Degassing VEBK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED PDA: XXX mmHg PBE: XXX mmHg
EP: XXXX rpm VABK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED PDA_S: XXX mmHg PV: XXX mmHg
VEB: OPEN/CLOSED VDEBK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED TMP: XXX mmHg PV_S: XXX mmHg
PE: XXX mmHg VDABK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED BIC Cartridge Holder PBS: XXX mmHg
TSE: XX.X oC VEBK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED BKUS: OPEN/CLOSED PBS_S: XXX mmHg
TSHE: XX.X oC VABK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED BKUS_S: OPEN/CLOSED Blood Pumps
VDEBK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED VVB: OPEN/CLOSED BPA: XXXX rpm
Heater VDABK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED VBICP: OPEN/CLOSED
HEATER: XX.X % BPA_S: XXXX rpm
Flow (Dialysate Fluid) VBKO: OPEN/CLOSED BPV: XXXX rpm
Air Separator FPE: XXXX rpm VBKS: OPEN/CLOSED BPV_S: XXXX rpm
LAFSO: NO AIR/AIR FPA: XXXX rpm Valves Online
LAFSU: NO AIR/AIR
Tubing Clamps
FMD: XXX ml/min VBE: OPEN/CLOSED SAKA: OPEN/CLOSED
VLA: OPEN/CLOSED FMD_S XXX ml/min VBE_S: OPEN/CLOSED SAKV: OPEN/CLOSED
Temperature Valves (Bypass) VDFF: OPEN/CLOSED SAKV_S: OPEN/CLOSED
TSE: XX.X oC VBP: OPEN/CLOSED VDFF_S: OPEN/CLOSED
TSBIC: XX.X oC VSB: OPEN/CLOSED
Air Detector
VBP_S: OPEN/CLOSED SAD: NO AIR/AIR
TSD: XX.X oC VDE: OPEN/CLOSED VSB_S: OPEN/CLOSED
TSD_S: XX.X oC SAD_S: NO AIR/AIR
VDE_S: OPEN/CLOSED VSAA: OPEN/CLOSED
TSDE: XX.X oC SAD TIME_S: OK
VDA: OPEN/CLOSED VSAA_S: OPEN/CLOSED
SAD REF_S: XXXX mV
Conductivity VDA_S: OPEN/CLOSED VSAE: OPEN/CLOSED
SAD VOL: XXXX µl
VSAE_S: OPEN/CLOSED
BICLF: X.X mS/cm V a l v e s ( Disinfection) SAD VOL_S: XXXX µl
ENDLF: XX.X mS/cm VZ: OPEN/CLOSED Pump Online Heparin
ENDLF_S: XX.X mS/cm VD OPEN/CLOSED OPS: XXXX rpm
BICP: XX rpm HP: STOP
VD_S OPEN/CLOSED OPS_S: XXXX rpm
BICP_S: XX rpm POSITION: XX.XX mm
Blood Leak Subst. Flow (Online) Status Self Test
BIC-Ratio: XX.X
BL: X.XX ‰ FMS: XXX ml/min
BIC-Ratio_S: XX.X LLC: XXXXX
BL_S: X.XX ‰ FMS_S: XXX ml/min
KP: XX rpm LLS: XXXXX
KP_S: XX rpm
END-Ratio: XX.X
END-Ratio_S: XX.X

LLC/S & TLC Alarm Window LLC Message Window

Fig.: First Page Service Overview in Therapy

Digit Range for MSBK1/2 in Therapy

Balance Chamber
MSBK1/2
MSBK1: 32134 Min. Value: 10000
MSBK2: 32270 Max. Value: 35000
Differential Range: min. 7500
Malfunctions in the balance chamber can occur if:
• the values are out of limits
• the minimal difference from the detected min. value was not reached

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 10

The second page of the service overview can be selected with the Service Key
icon.

Click the Door icon to jump back to the initial menu.

Dialog - Basic HDF Bag HDF/HF Online Others

UF Volume Substitution Volume HDF/HF Volume SMPS Battery
UF NET: XXX ml SUBST: X ml HDF/HF_V: X.X l Batt. enabled: YES/NO
UF GROSS: XXX ml SUBST_S: X ml HDF/HF_V_S: X.X l Self Test: NOT OK/OK
UF GROSS_S: XXX ml SUBST_WV_S: X ml BOLUS_VOL: X ml bioLogic RR
SUM INF: X ml BOLUS_VOL_S: X ml
Relay ACT INF_S: X ml
Algorithm ID: X
B24V_S: ON/OFF Reed Sensor Algorithm SW: V X.XX
INF LEAK_S X ml
D24V_S: ON/OFF PSAUS: OPEN/CLOSED GL Curves: X
HEATER REL1_S: ON/OFF Weight PSABF: OPEN/CLOSED Crit-Line
HEATER REL2_S: ON/OFF BAG: Xg FDFS: OPEN/CLOSED Patient ID: X
BAG_S: Xg FHDFS: OPEN/CLOSED
Couplings Station ID: X
SBS1: COUPLED/UNCOUPLED
Flow Detector Remaining Filter Time Start Date: XX X.XX, XXXXX
SBS2: COUPLED/UNCOUPLED UF_FLOW: FLOW/NO FLOW DF: XXX h Start Time: XX:XX:XX
BIC_SS: COUPLED/UNCOUPLED Air Detector HDF: XXX h Actual Date: XX X.XX, XXXXX
K_SS: COUPLED/UNCOUPLED Actual Time: XX:XX:XX
SUBAD: AIR/NO AIR Remaining Dialysis HCT Start: X.XX %
Red Sensor DF: XXX Unit ID: X
RDV: NO BLOOD/BLOOD HDF: XXX CL Data error: XXXX
OSD Red LED Level Regulation CL Error Count: X
RIGHT LED_S: ON/OFF Preventive Service
Pump (Level Regulation) Warning Enabled YES/NO
LEFT LED_S: ON/OFF
PPR: START/STOP Date of Last Service NONE
Loudspeaker Valves (Level Regulation) WTC of Last Service NONE
LS PULSE_S: ON/OFF Status of Machine XXX%
VBT_S: OPEN/CLOSED
LS CURRENTS_S: ON/OFF
VPA_S: OPEN/CLOSED WTC
PD Read By VPV_S: OPEN/CLOSED WTC Actual XXXXX h
TLC VER: X.XX VPE_S: OPEN/CLOSED
DBI VER: X.XX.X VPD_S: OPEN/CLOSED
PD Written By
TLC VER:
DBI VER:

LLC ALARM: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 MESSAGE: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
LLS ALARM: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FREE M: XXXX/XXX of XXXXX kB S: XX/XX MB

LLC/S & TLC Alarm Window LLC Message Window

Fig.: Second Page Service Overview in Therapy

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 11

The third page of the service overview can be selected with the Service Key
icon.

Click the Door icon to jump back to the initial menu.

Network Name Patient Card

BSL-WAN: ID: XXXX XXX XXX
Card Status: X
Configuration
Serial No.: XXX Nurse Selection
DBI SW: X.XX.X Enabled: YES/NO
System SW: X.XX
TLC SW: X.XX
Pin Code AT
Actual Language: XXX.XX.XX Nurse Selection: YES/NO
BSL Serial No.: NONE Configuration: YES/NO
BSL FW: NONE Time Setting
Option Selection Server Date: NONE
DBI: DBI-Nexadia Server Time: NONE
BSL: NONE Dialog Date: NONE
Dialog Time: NONE
Baud Rate
Baud Rate (kBaud): XX.X
DBI Status
DBI active/
DBI not active
Network Status
BSL Connection/
BSL no Connection

LLC ALARM: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 MESSAGE: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
LLS ALARM: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 FREE M: XXXX/XXX of XXXXX kB S: XX/XX MB

LLC/S & TLC Alarm Window LLC Message Window

Fig.: Third Page Service Overview in Therapy

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 12

4.4.1 Legend Service Overview in

Therapy
ACT INF_S: Actual infusion supervisor (not applicable)
B24V_S: 24 V cut-off blood side supervisor (HP, BPA, BPV)
BAG: Bag weight (not applicable)
BAG_S: Bag weight supervisor (not applicable)
BIC_SS: Bicarbonate rinsing connector sensor
BICLF: Bicarbonate conductivity
BICP: Bicarbonate pump
BICP_S: Bicarbonate pump supervisor
BIC-RATIO: Bicarbonate ratio
BIC-RATIO_S: Bicarbonate ratio supervisor
BKUS: BIC cartridge holder lower switch
BKUS_S: BIC cartridge holder lower switch supervisor
BL: Blood leak detector
BL_S: Blood leak detector supervisor
BOLUS_VOL: Bolus volume
BOLUS_VOL_S: Bolus volume supervisor
BPA: Arterial blood pump
BPA_S: Arterial blood pump supervisor
BPV: Venous blood pump
BPV_S: Venous blood pump supervisor
DBI VER: DBI version
D24V_S: 24 V cut-off dialysate side supervisor (VDA, VDE)
DF: Remaining time for DF
ENDLF: End conductivity
ENDLF_S: End conductivity supervisor
END-RATIO: End ratio
END-RATIO_S: End ratio supervisor
EP: Degassing pump
F(E)DFS: Filter recognition DF filter sensor
F(E)HDFS: Filter recognition HD filter sensor
FMS: Substitution flow measurement
FMS_S: Substitution flow low measurement supervisor
FPA: Outlet flow pump
FPE: Inlet flow pump
HDF/HF_V: HDF/HF volume
HDF/HF_V_S: HDF/HF volume supervisor
HDF: Remaining time for HDF
HEATER REL1_S: Heater relay 1 supervisor (not applicable)
HEATER REL2_S: Heater relay 2 supervisor (not applicable)
HP: Heparin pump
INF LEAK_S: Infusion leakage supervisor (not applicable)
K_SS: Concentrate rinsing connector sensor
KP: Concentrate pump
KP_S: Concentrate pump supervisor
LAFSO: Top air separator level sensor
LAFSU: Bottom air separator level sensor
LEFT LED_S: Left LED from OSD
LLC: Low level controller
LLS: Low level supervisor
LS CURRENTS_S: Loudspeaker current supervisor
LS PULSE_S: Loudspeaker pulse supervisor
MSBK1: Membrane position sensor balance chamber 1
MSBK2: Membrane position sensor balance chamber 2
NSVB: Level sensors upline tank

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 13
OSP: Online substitution pump
OSP_S: Online substitution pump supervisor
PA: Arterial pressure sensor
PA_S: Arterial pressure sensor supervisor
PBS: Blood control pressure sensor
PBS_S: Blood control pressure sensor supervisor
PDA: Dialysate outlet pressure sensor
PDA_S: Dialysate outlet pressure sensor supervisor
PE: Degassing pressure sensor
POSITION: Drive position
PSABF(S): Substitution port drain sensor
PSAUS(S): Substitution port outlet sensor
PV: Venous pressure sensor
PV_S: Venous pressure sensor supervisor
RDV: Venous red detector
RVE: Degassing control valve
RIGHT LED_S: Right LED from OSD
SAD REF_S: Safety air detector reference voltage supervisor
SAD TIME_S: Safety air detector time control supervisor
SAD: Safety air detector
SAD_S: Safety air detector supervisor
SAKA: Arterial tubing clamp
SAKV(-SG): Venous tubing clamp currentless closed
SAKV(-SG)_S: Venous tubing clamp currentless closed supervisor
SBS1: Rinsing bridge connector sensor 1
SBS2: Rinsing bridge connector sensor 2
SUBAD: Substitution air detector (not applicable)
SUBST: Substitution (not applicable)
SUBST_S: Substitution supervisor (not applicable)
SUBST_WV_S: Substitution weight volume supervisor (not applicable)
SUM INF: Sum infusion (not applicable)
TLC VER: TLC version
TMP: Transmembrane pressure
TSBIC: Bicarbonate temperature sensor
TSD: Dialysate temperature sensor
TSD_S: Dialysate temperature sensor supervisor
TSE: Degassing temperature sensor
TSHE: Heater inlet temperature sensor
TSDE: Dialyser inlet temperature sensor
UF_Flow: Ultrafiltration flow (not applicable)
UFP: Ultrafiltration pump
UFP_S: Ultrafiltration pump supervisor
VABK1_S: Outlet valve balance chamber 1 supervisor
VABK2_S: Outlet valve balance chamber 2 supervisor
VBE: Vent filter valve
VBE_S: Vent filter valve supervisor
VBICP: BIC pump valve
VBKO: BIC cartridge holder top Valve
VBKS: BIC cartridge holder concentrate rod valve
VBP: Bypass valve
VBP_S: Bypass valve supervisor
VD: Disinfection valve supervisor
VDA: Dialyser outlet valve
VDABK1_S: Dialyser outlet valve balance chamber 1 supervisor
VDABK2_S: Dialyser outlet valve balance chamber 2 supervisor
VDA-S: Dialyser outlet valve supervisor
VDE: Dialyser inlet valve
VDEBK1_S: Dialyser inlet valve balance chamber 1 supervisor
VDEBK2_S: Dialyser inlet valve balance chamber 2 supervisor
VDE-S: Dialyser inlet valve supervisor
VDFF: DF filter valve

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 14

VDFF_S: DF filter valve supervisor

VEBK1_S: Inlet valve balance chamber 1 supervisor
VEBK2_S: Inlet valve balance chamber 2 supervisor
VLA: Air separator valve
VSAA: Substitution outlet valve
VSAA_S: Substitution outlet valve supervisor
VSAE: Substitution inlet valve
VSAE_S: Substitution inlet valve supervisor
VSB: Substitution bypass valve
VSB_S: Substitution bypass valve supervisor
VVB: Upline tank valve
VVBE: Upline tank inlet valve
VZ: Circulation valve

Working Time Counter Working time counter (WTC)

bioLogic RR bioLogic RR 0ption

LLC ALARM The low level controller alarms are displayed in a hexadecimal format. The
corresponding bit alarms are shown in the LLC alarm window.

LLS ALARM The low level supervisor alarms are displayed in a hexadecimal format. The
corresponding bit alarms are shown in the LLS alarm window.

LLC MESSAGE The LLC messages are displayed in a hexadecimal format. The corresponding bit
messages are shown in the message window.

FREE MEMORY Free RAM memory (DIMM/SIMM).

LLC/S & TLC Alarm Window • L ow level controller alarm text W i n d o w messages according to the LLC
hex numbers from the LLC alarm window.
• L ow level supervisor alarm text W i n d o w messages according to the LLS
hex numbers from the LLS alarm window.
• Top level controller alarm messages W i n d o w according to the TLC hex
numbers from the TLC alarm window.

LLC Message Window LLC text messages according to the LLC message hex numbers from LLC
message window.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 15

4.5 Service Overview in TSM

Service Program

The service overview can be selected with the key in the TSM service
program.

Required Data to LLC Actual Data from LLC

PUMP VALVE PUMP PRESSURE BALANCE CHAMBER
BICP: X RVE: X BPA: X PA: X MSBK1: XXXXX
BPA: X VVBE: OPEN/CLOSED BPAIMP_S: X PA_S: X MSBK2: XXXXX
BPV: X VABK1: OPEN/CLOSED BPA_FLOW: X PV: X VABK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED
EP: X VDABK1: OPEN/CLOSED BPA_COVER:OPEN/CLOSED PV_S: X VDABK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED
FPA: X VEBK1: OPEN/CLOSED BPV: X PBE: X VEBK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED
FPE: X VDEBK1: OPEN/CLOSED BPVIMP_S: X PBS: X VDEBK1_S: OPEN/CLOSED
KP: X VABK2: OPEN/CLOSED BPV_COVER:OPEN/CLOSED PBS_S: X VABK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED
UFP: X VDABK2: OPEN/CLOSED EP: X PDA: X VDABK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED
VEBK2: OPEN/CLOSED FPE: X PDA_S: X VEBK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED
VDEBK2: OPEN/CLOSED FPA: X PE: X VDEBK2_S: OPEN/CLOSED
HEATER VBP: OPEN/CLOSED UFP_S: X
H: X LEVEL COUPLINGS
VDE: OPEN/CLOSED UFP_FLOW: X.X NSVB: HIGH/LOW BIC_SS:
VDA: OPEN/CLOSED UFP_FLOW_S: X.X OPEN/CLOSED
LAFS: HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW K_SS: OPEN/CLOSED
SAD VD OPEN/CLOSED BICP_S: X
SAD_LEVEL: X VZ: OPEN/CLOSED BICP_FLOW: X.X SBS1: OPEN/CLOSED
T E M P E R A T U R E SBS2: OPEN/CLOSED
VLA: OPEN/CLOSED BICP_FLOW_S: X.X TSE XX.X BKUS
ACTIONS VDFF: OPEN/CLOSED KP_S: X OPEN/CLOSED
TSHE XX.X BKUS_S OPEN/CLOSED
LEAKTEST: ON/OFF VSB: OPEN/CLOSED KP_FLOW: X.X TSBIC XX.X
EMPTYING: ON/OFF VBE OPEN/CLOSED KP_FLOW_S: X.X TSD XX.X C O N D U C T I V I T Y
BL_LAMP_T: ON/OFF VSAE: OPEN/CLOSED HP_POS: X.X TSD_S XX.X BICLF: X.XX
SAD_TEST: ON/OFF VSAA: OPEN/CLOSED HPKOLB: ON/OFF TSDE XX.X ENDLF X.XX
HPKRALLO: OPEN/CLOSED ENDLF_S X.XX
VALVE
VBP_S: OPEN/CLOSED
AUTOMATIC TEST & CALIBRATION BLOOD LEAK VDE_S: OPEN/CLOSED
LF: X.XX PA: XXX BLCON: X.XXX VDA_S: OPEN/CLOSED STATUS
VD_S OPEN/CLOSED RDV: NO BLOOD/BLOOD
TSD: X.X PDA: XXX BLCON_S: X.XXX
VZ_S: OPEN/CLOSED RDV_S NO BLOOD/BLOOD
TSE: X.X
VLA_S: OPEN/CLOSED
WORKING TIME COUNTER SAD VDFF_S: OPEN/CLOSED
WTC: XXXXX SAD_LEVEL: XX VSB_S: OPEN/CLOSED
SAD_LEV_S: X.XXX VBE_S: OPEN/CLOSED POWER
FREE MEMORY (Mb) SAD: AIR/BLOOD VSAE_S: OPEN/CLOSED B24VOFF: ON/OFF
XXXX of XXXXXX kB S: XX/XX MB SAD_S: AIR/BLOOD VSAA_S: OPEN/CLOSED D24VOFF: ON/OFF

LLC STATUS: 00000000 0000000 LLS STATUS: 00000000

Fig.: Service Overview in TSM Service Program

Digit Range for MSBK1/2 in TSM

Balance Chamber
MSBK1/2
MSBK1: 32123 Min. Value: 11000
MSBK2: 32253 Max. Value: 34000
Differential Range: min. 5500
Malfunctions in the balance chamber can occur if:
• the values are out of limits
• the minimal difference from the detected min. value was not reached

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 16

4.5.1 Legend Service Overview in

TSM Service Program
B24VOFF: 24 V cut-off blood side (HP, BPA, BPV)
BIC_SS: Bicarbonate rinsing connector sensor
BICLF: Bicarbonate conductivity
BICP: Bicarbonate pump
BICP_FLOW: Bicarbonate pump flow
BICP_FLOW_S: Bicarbonate pump flow supervisor
BICP_S: Bicarbonate pump supervisor
BKUS: Bottom BIC holder sensor
BKUS_S: Bottom BIC holder sensor supervisor
BL_LAMP_T: Blood leak detector lamp test
BLCON: Blood leak detector
BLCON_S: Blood leak detector supervisor
BPA: Arterial blood pump
BPA_COVER: Arterial blood pump cover
BPA_FLOW: Arterial blood pump flow
BPAIMP_S: Arterial blood pump pulse supervisor
BPV: Venous blood pump
BPV_COVER: Venous blood pump cover
BPVIMP_S: Venous blood pump pulse supervisor
D24VOFF: 24 V cut-off dialysate side (VDA, VDE)
EMPTYING: Emptying
ENDLF: End conductivity
ENDLF_S: End conductivity supervisor
EP: Degassing pump
FPA: Outlet flow pump
FPE: Inlet flow pump
Free Memory: Free RAM memory (DIMM/SIMM)
H: Heater
HP_POS: Heparin pump drive position
HPKOLB: Heparin pump plate sensor
HPKRALLO: Heparin pump claws
K_SS: Concentrate rinsing connector sensor
KP: Concentrate pump
KP_FLOW: Concentrate pump flow
KP_FLOW_S: Concentrate pump flow supervisor
KP_S: Concentrate pump supervisor
LAFS: Air separator level sensors
LEAKTEST: Leakage test
LF: Conductivity sensor
LLC STATUS: Alarm messages low level controller
LLS STATUS: Alarm messages low level supervisor
MSBK1: Membrane position sensor balance chamber 1
MSBK2: Membrane position sensor balance chamber 2
NSVB: Level sensor upline tank
PA: Arterial pressure sensor
PA_S: Arterial pressure sensor supervisor
PBE: Blood inlet pressure sensor
PBS: Blood control pressure sensor
PBS_S: Blood control pressure sensor supervisor
PDA: Dialysate outlet pressure sensor
PDA_S: Dialysate outlet pressure sensor supervisor
PE: Degassing pressure sensor
PV: Venous pressure sensor
PV_S: Venous pressure sensor supervisor
RDV: Venous red detector
RDV_S: Venous red detector supervisor
RVE: Degassing control valve

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 17

SAD: Safety air detector

SAD_LEV_S: Safety air detector supervisor level (voltage)
SAD_LEVEL: Safety air detector level
SAD_S: Safety air detector supervisor
SAD_TEST: Safety air detector test
SBS1: Rinsing bridge connector sensor 1
SBS2: Rinsing bridge connector sensor 2
TSBIC: Bicarbonate temperature sensor
TSD: Dialysate temperature sensor
TSD_S: Dialysate temperature sensor supervisor
TSE: Degassing temperature sensor
TSHE: Heater inlet temperature sensor
TSDE: Dialyser inlet temperature sensor
UFP: Ultrafiltration pump
UFP_FLOW: Ultrafiltration pump flow
UFP_FLOW_S: Ultrafiltration pump flow supervisor
UFP_S: Ultrafiltration pump supervisor
VABK1: Outlet valve balance chamber 1
VABK1_S: Outlet valve balance chamber 1 supervisor
VABK2: Outlet valve balance chamber 2
VABK2_S: Outlet valve balance chamber 2 supervisor
VBE: Filter vent valve
VBE_S: Vent filter valve supervisor
VBP: By-pass valve
VBP_S: By-pass valve supervisor
VD: Disinfection valve
VD_S: Disinfection valve supervisor
VDA: Dialyser outlet valve
VDABK1: Dialyser outlet valve balance chamber 1
VDABK1_S: Dialyser outlet valve balance chamber 1 supervisor
VDABK2: Dialyser outlet valve balance chamber 2
VDABK2_S: Dialyser outlet valve balance chamber 2 supervisor
VDA-S: Dialyser outlet valve supervisor
VDE: Dialyser inlet valve
VDEBK1: Dialyser inlet valve balance chamber 1
VDEBK1_S: Dialyser inlet valve balance chamber 1 supervisor
VDEBK2: Dialyser inlet valve balance chamber 2
VDEBK2_S: Dialyser inlet valve balance chamber 2 supervisor
VDE-S: Dialyser inlet valve supervisor
VDFF: DF filter valve
VDFF_S: DF filter valve supervisor
VEBK1: Inlet valve balance chamber 1
VEBK1_S: Inlet valve balance chamber 1 supervisor
VEBK2: Inlet valve balance chamber 2
VEBK2_S: Inlet valve balance chamber 2 supervisor
VLA: Air separator valve
VLA_S: Air separator valve supervisor
VSAA: Substitution outlet valve
VSAA_S: Substitution outlet valve supervisor
VSAE: Substitution inlet valve
VSAE_S: Substitution inlet valve supervisor
VSB: Substitution bypass valve
VSB_S: Substitution bypass valve supervisor
VVBE: Upline tank inlet valve
VZ: Circulation valve
VZ_S: Circulation valve supervisor
WTC: Working time counter

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 18

4.6 File Operations

The File Operations menu is selected with the File

icon in TSM Main Menu.
The following parameters can be selected:
Floppy Diskette Read/Write/Create
Not applicable.
Hard Disk (Compact Flash Card) Read/Write
• Save Calibration Data
• Down Load Calibration Data

The Field Service Utilities FSU can be used for all relevant service
activities. Details can be found in chapter 2 repair instructions.

4.6.1 Hard Disk Read/Write

Save Calibration Data The calibration data must be saved to the compact flash card CFC (hard disk
drive) by LLC/LLS after every calibration.

Down Load Calibration Data The calibration data can be downloaded from the compact flash card CFC (hard
disk drive) to the exchanged digital board DB.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 19

4.6.2 Dialog Version Number

The Dialog Version Number menu is selected with

the Dialog Version Number window in TSM Main
Menu. The current software/firmware versions are
displayed. This menu can also be selected in the
Production Report.
The following data can be checked:
Component Software Versions
The versions for the installed software/firmware
are displayed.
• Top Level Controller Software TLC SW
• System Configuration
(displays the system configuration version
number for the haemodialysis machine)
• Low Level Controller Software LLC SW
• Low Level Controller Firmware LLC FW
• Low Level Supervisor Software LLS SW
• Low Level Supervisor Firmware LLS FW
• Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement ABPM
(firmware for the ABPM module is displayed)
Language Versions
The installed languages are displayed.
• Treatment
• TSM
Low Level Hardware Versions
The boards are displayed with the respective
hardware versions, e.g. a HDF online machine. The
displayed HW versions depend on the assembled
boards in the machine.
• Basic Board BB
• Analog Board AB
• Power Board Motors BPM
• Power Board Valves BPV
• HDF Online Board HOB
• Digital Board DB

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 20

4.7 Treatment Support

1. Activate the Treatment Support menu with the

Treatment Support key in menu TSM Main
Menu. The following menu is opened.

Two sub-menus can be selected in the Treatment

Support menu.

System Configuration This is a special editor to set the configuration of the treatment mode (e.g.
limits, default values). The new settings are valid after the restart of the
machine.

Trends and Trend Groups There are five trend groups, which can be selected for the treatment program.
Every group has three treatment parameters.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 21

4.7.1 System Configuration

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support.
The following menu is opened.
Scroll the various system configuration points up
or down with the scroll bar. System configuration
points can be selected (additional settings are
activated if specific options are selected).

4.7.1.1 Dialysate Side Parameters

The dialysate fluid parameters can be set in the
Dialysate Side Parameters menu.
1. Activate the Dialysate Side Parameters menu
with the Dialysate Side Parameters icon. The
following menu is opened.
The following parameters can be set:
• Conductivity measurement unit
• Acetate Mode Disabled
• Default Conductivity Mode
• Stand-by Function is Available in Preparation
• Stand-by after Self Test
• Maximum Stand-by Time
• Selected Acetate (only necessary if mmol/l is
selected)
• Selected Bicarbonate/Selected Acid (only
necessary if mmol/l is selected)
• Temperature Measurement unit
• Dialysate Flow
• Dialysate Temperature
Conductivity Measurement Unit
Make sure that the corresponding conversion factor is set and assigned
correctly:
• conversion factor for the conductivity unit mS/cm
• conversion factor for the concentration unit mmol/l.

You can either select conductivity [mS/cm] or sodium concentration [mmol/l]

for the conductivity measurement unit. If sodium concentration [mmol/l] is
selected a corresponding conversion factor must be entered. Activate the ACET
or BIC icon to enter the corresponding conversion factor.
1. Click the mmol/l or mS/cm key to select a measurement unit.
Acetate Mode Disabled The acetate mode can be disabled.
1. Click the YES key to disable the acetate mode.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 22

Default Conductivity Mode The bicarbonate dialysis is the standard factory setting. You can preselect
either acetate or bicarbonate for the standard dialysis operation mode.
1. Click either the Bic or Acet key for the standard setting.
Stand-by Function is Available in The stand-by function is available during preparation.
Preparation
1. Click the NO key to disable the stand-by function in preparation.
Stand-by after Self Test/Rinsing The function is activated after the self test/rinsing.
Maximum Stand-by Time You can set the maximum duration of the stand-by state.

Selected Acetate
There are 10 acetate concentrate names and the
conversion factors for the conversion of
conductivity values for concentrate of sodium
ions.
If necessary the name and the conversion factor
[mS/cm per mmol/l] can be set, for the selected
acetate type.
1. Click the ACET icon to activate the Selected
Acetate menu.

The following menu is opened. You can activate a

concentrate for therapy by pressing a free section
of the window.
2. Click the Concentrate window if necessary to
edit a concentrate name. This name is
displayed in therapy mode.
3. Click the Conversion window if necessary to
change the conversion factor [mS/cm per
mmol/l].
Conversion Factor:
Conductivity mS/cm (Standard Value)
NaCl Concentration mmol/l (Measured Value)
= Conversion Factor

4. Click the Default Value window if necessary to

change the value [mS/cm].

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 23

Selected Bicarbonate/Selected Acid

There are 20 concentrate names and the
conversion factors for the conversion of
conductivity values.
If necessary the name and the conversion factor
[mS/cm per mmol/l] can be set, for the selected
bicarbonate type.
1. Click the BIC icon to activate the menu for:
- BIC without NaCl
- BIC with NaCl.

BIC without NaCl

The current bicarbonate type without NaCl can be
selected:
• Bicarbonate without NaCl (2 - 4 mS/cm)
Activate BIC without NaCl by pressing a free
section of the window.
1. Click the BIC without NaCl window if
necessary to edit the bicarbonate name.
2. Click the Conversion window if necessary to
change the conversion factor [mS/cm per
mmol/l].
3. Click the Default Value window if necessary to
change the value [mS/cm].
4. Click the ACID icon if necessary to edit the
following parameters:
• Acid Concentrate Name
• Conversion Factor [mS/cm per mmol/l]
• Default Value

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 24

BIC with NaCl

Machines with a BIC Cartridge Option

It is prohibited to use (select/activate) a bicarbonate concentrate with
NaCl if the machine has a BIC cartridge holder.
The unit mmol/l (NaCl concentration) must not be used if bicarbonate
concentrate with NaCl is applied.

You can select the current bicarbonate type with

NaCl:
• Bicarbonate with NaCl (4 - 7 mS/cm)
The BIC with NaCl is activated by pressing a free
section of the window.
The current acetate concentrate can be selected.
The name and the conversion factor [mS/cm per
mmol/l] can be entered if necessary for the
different acetate concentrates.
1. Click the BIC with NaCl window if necessary to
edit the bicarbonate name.
2. Click the Conversion window if necessary to
change the conversion factor [mS/cm per
mmol/l].
3. Click the Default Value window if necessary to
change the value [mS/cm].
4. Click the ACID icon if necessary to edit the
following parameters:
• Acid Concentrate Name
• Conversion Factor [mS/cm per mmol/l]
• Default Value
5. Scroll down to the end to set further
parameters.

Temperature Measurement Unit You can set the temperature measurement unit between oC and F.

1. Click the F key to set to Fahrenheit.

Dialysate Flow You can preset the dialysate flow for therapy.

1. Click the ml/min key to set the dialysate flow.

Dialysate Temperature You can set the dialysate temperature for therapy.

1. Click the oC key to set the dialysate temperature.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 25

4.7.1.2 Blood Side Parameters

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. Use the scroll bar until the
following menu appears.

2. Activate the Blood Side Parameters menu with

the Blood Side icon. The following menu is
opened.
The following parameters can be set:
• Blood Side BS Pressure Test with Equalisation
of Pressure
• Default Blood Flow at End of Therapy
• Chamber-free AV Line is Possible
• AV Line with PBE Connector

Blood Side BS Pressure Test with YES

Equalisation of Pressure If the YES key is pressed: The system performs a relief (equalisation) of the
pressure at the end of the blood side BS pressure test via the main flow
(dialyser).
NO
If the NO key is pressed: The system does not perform a relief (equalisation) of
the pressure at the end of the blood side BS pressure test (venous tubing clamp
SAKV opens and some fluid escapes from the venous line, as before).
Default Blood Flow at End of Therapy You can preselect the blood flow which will be preset at the end of a therapy.
1. Click the ml/min key to set the default blood flow at the end of a therapy.
Chamber-free AV Line is Possible YES
The chamber symbols can not be selected in the level regulation menu in
therapy. The selected Chamber-free AV Line appears.
NO
The chamber symbols can be selected in the level regulation menu in therapy.
The selected Chamber-free AV Line does not appear.
AV Line with PBE Connector YES
Activate if AV lines with PBE pressure connection are used.
NO
Do not activate if AV lines without PBE pressure connection are used.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 26

4.7.1.3 Min-Max Parameters

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. Use the scroll bar until the
following menu appears.

2. Activate the Min-Max Parameters menu with

the MIN-Max icon. The following menu is
opened.
The following parameters can be set in the Min-
Max Parameters menu:
• Delta PA min.
• Delta PA max.
• Limit Maximum PBE
• Limit Delta PBE
• Limit Maximum TMP
• Limits Low/High TMP
• Extended TMP Limit Range Key is Displayed in
Treatment
• Select Extended TMP Limit Range

Delta PA min. You can set the lower relative alarm limit for the
PA limit window.
Delta PA max. You can set the upper relative alarm limit for the
PA limit window.

Delta PA
PA max.
max. PA ref
200 mmHg
PA min.

Fig.: Limit Window for PA

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 27

Limit Maximum PBE The maximum limit for the monitoring of PBE in
therapy can be set.
Limit Delta PBE The permissible changes for PBE during therapy
can be set.
Limit Maximum TMP The maximum upper TMP limit for the monitoring
in therapy can be set. This value is always active if
no relative monitoring is active (see description
for Limits Low/High).
Limits Low/High TMP The relative lower and upper limit can be set in %
for TMP monitoring in therapy.
Limit OFF: Monitoring is not performed
(activated)
Limit OFF: Monitoring is performed
(deactivated)
Minimum TMP Alarm Window The limit window is at least as large as predefined
independent of the relative low and high limit.
The default is 20 mmHg and can be changed in
the limits of 20 to 100 mmHg.
3. Use the scroll bar until the following menu
appears.

Extended TMP Limit Range Key is Displayed in Treatment The user can select the extended TMP range.
NO The Extended TMP Limit Range key can not be
selected/enabled (shaded) if NO is selected.
YES The Extended TMP Limit Range key can be
selected/enabled (highlighted) if YES is selected.
Select Extended TMP Limit Range If the key was selected, the extended TMP limit
range can be preselected during the start of the
therapy via the Extended TMP Limit Range.
If the key is not pressed The TMP low limit range is set min. –10 mmHg.
If the key is pressed The TMP limit range is extended to –100 mmHg
(absolute TMP value).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 28

Standard TMP Limit Range

TMP If the Standard TMP Limit Range key is not

[mmHg] pressed:
Top TMP Limit Value • the TMP low limit range is set min. –10
+300 mmHg.
If the normal window limits are reached:
70
60 Relative Limits • a warning message is displayed (in alarm
Current min. TMP Alarm Window
50 window)
TMP 20 mmHg at 40 %:
40 30 - 70 mmHg • a warning tone is activated.
30 • treatment is not interrupted

0 Once the TMP reaches -10 mmHg:

-10 • a warning message is displayed (in alarm
window)
-100
Bottom TMP Limit Value • a warning tone is activated
Example A • an additional information is displayed
• treatment is not interrupted
TMP The absolute limit value is -100 mmHg.
[mmHg]
Top TMP Limit Value Once the absolute TMP value is reached:
+300 • an alarm is activated
• an alarm tone is activated
30 28 • treatment is interrupted
Current min. TMP Alarm Window Relative Limits • machine is switched to bypass
TMP 20 mmHg 20 at 40 %:
12 12 - 28 mmHg In example A the min. TMP alarm window (40 to
10 60 mmHg) is smaller than the relative limits of 30
to 70 mmHg. Thus the relative limits are valid.
0 In example B the min. TMP alarm window (10 to
-10 30 mmHg) is larger than the relative limits of 12
to 28 mmHg. Thus the limits of the min. TMP
-100
Bottom TMP Limit Value alarm window are valid.

Example B

Extended TMP Limit Range

TMP If the Extended TMP Limit Range key is pressed:

[mmHg] • the TMP limit range is extended to –100
Top TMP Limit Value mmHg (absolute TMP limit).
+300
Once this absolute TMP limit is reached:
• an alarm is activated
30 28
Relative Limits • an alarm tone is activated
Current min. TMP Alarm Window
20
TMP 20 mmHg at 40 %: • a warning message is not displayed anymore
12 12 - 28 mmHg • treatment is interrupted
10
• machine is switched to bypass
0

-100
Bottom TMP Limit Value

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 29

4.7.1.4 Arterial Bolus Parameters

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. Use the scroll bar until the
following menu appears.

2. Activate the Arterial Bolus Parameters menu

with the Arterial Bolus icon. The following
menu is opened.
The following parameters can be set in the
Arterial Bolus Parameters menu:
• Arterial Bolus Volume
• Arterial Bolus with SAKA Support

Arterial Bolus Volume The volume for an arterial bolus can be set.
Arterial Bolus with SAKA Support The arterial tubing clamp SAKA can be used to support an arterial bolus in the
Arterial Bolus Parameters menu. Prerequisites are:
• Arterial tubing clamp SAKA present
• An arterial line system with infusion access is present between the SAKA
and blood pump

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 30

4.7.1.5 Single-Needle Parameters

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. Use the scroll bar until the
following menu appears.

2. Activate the Single-Needle Parameters menu

with the Single-Needle icon.
The following parameters can be set:
Single-Needle Valve (Control Pressures)
• (Single-Needle SN Valve) Limit Min PA
• Max Control Min PV
• Control Min PV
• Control Max. PV
Single-Needle Cross-Over (Control Pressures)
• Control PA
• Control PV

Single-Needle Valve (Single-Needle SN Valve) Limit Minimum PA

The minimum limit of the arterial pressure PA can be set for the single-needle
valve mode.
Maximum Control Minimum PV
The maximum lower venous control pressure can be set for the Single-Needle
Valve option. For safety reasons it is necessary to limit the maximum value for
the lower venous control pressure for the SN valve. The maximum setting is
150 mmHg (default setting).
Furthermore the control pressure PV can be set. Thereby the blood pump is
started/stopped and the venous tubing clamp currentless closed SAKV-SG is
opened/closed.
Single-Needle Cross-Over The control pressures for PA and PV can be set for single-needle cross-over.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 31

4.7.1.6 Heparin Parameters

You can set the parameters in the Heparin

Parameters menu and select a syringe type.
1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened.

2. Activate the Heparin Parameters menu with

the Heparin Parameters icon. The following
menu is opened.
The following parameters can be set:
• Treatment without heparin
• Heparin measurement unit
• Conversion factor heparin [IE/ml]
• Heparin rate
• Heparin bolus volume
• Therapy beginning bolus
• Selected syringe

Treatment Without Heparin YES

The treatment is not started with heparin if the YES key is selected, i.e. the
default is set to treatment start without heparin. The heparin pump alarms are
disabled.
NO
The treatment is started with heparin if the NO key is selected, i.e. the default
is set to treatment start with heparin. The heparin pump alarms are enabled.
Heparin Measurement Unit The measurement unit [IE/H] or [ml/h] can be selected for heparin.
Conversion Factor Heparin [IE/ml] You can set the conversion factor ([IE/ML] depending on the mixing ratio, if the
amount of heparin should be displayed in international units (IE). The
conversion factor describes the quantity of IE in 1 ml solution, e.g. 1000 IE
represent in 1 ml solution 1000 IE heparin.
Heparin Rate The heparin rate can be set to [IE/h] or [ml/h], depending on the selected unit.
Heparin Bolus Volume You can select the bolus volume for the heparin bolus.
Therapy Beginning Bolus An automatic bolus can be administered at the beginning of a therapy. The
heparin bolus is performed by the venous red detector RDV.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 32

Selected Syringe The selected syringe type is used in therapy.

Heparin Pump Compact You can set the syringe name and the inner diameter of the syringe.

3. Activate the Selected Syringe menu with the

Selected Syringe icon. The following menu is
opened.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 33

4.7.1.7 Rinsing Parameters

The Rinsing Parameters can be set in the Rinsing

Parameters menu.
1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).

2. Activate the Rinsing Parameters menu with

the Rinsing Parameters icon. The following
menu is displayed.
The following parameters can be set:
• Priming without Recirculation
• Filling BP Rate
• Filling BP Volume
• Automatic Rinse Program after Self Tests
• User Message for BS Filled?
• Rinsing Blood Flow
• Rinsing Dialysate Flow
• Rinsing Time by UFP
• Rinsing Rate by UFP
• Rinsing Volume by UFP
• Blood Flow for Connecting Patient

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 34

Priming without Recirculation If YES is activated

The blood pump stops 120 ml before the required filling volume. The 120 ml is
used for the blood pump self test. A warning message is not activated. Thus a
connection of the disposable for recirculation is not necessary after filling. An
automatic start of the rinsing is prohibited.
Filling BP Rate You can set the BP rate to fill the blood line system (BS) for all rinsing modes.
Filling BP Volume You can set the filling/rinsing volume for the A/V system.
With Rinsing Out of Machine
The filling of the dialyser is started after the filling BP volume is reached (e.g.
500 ml; min. 500 ml/standard 700 ml).
With Bag Rinsing
The blood pump BPA is stopped after the filling BP volume is reached (e.g. 500
ml). This allows the changing from two bags to one bag.
Automatic Rinse Program after Self Tests If YES is Activated
The rinsing is automatically performed directly after the BS self tests.
If NO is Activated
The rinsing must be started manually after the BS self tests.
User Message for BS Filled? If YES is Activated
A user message is displayed after the rinsing of the machine:

The BS system is filled until the key is pressed and the filling BP volume
is completed. Thus the level can be set. Then the dialyser can be turned to fill
the DF side.
If NO is Activated
The filling of the dialyser is automatically started after the Filling BP Volume is
finished.
Rinsing Blood Flow You can set the blood flow for rinsing. After the self tests BPA delivers a
longitudinal flow during rinsing. This depends on the rinsing mode.
Longitudinal rinsing (along the dialyser):
• Blood side inlet/outlet
• Water side inlet/outlet
Cross rinsing (through the dialyser membrane):
• Blood side to water side
Note
Interdependencies when changing parameters:

Change Automatic Adaptation from

Rinsing Time Rate
Rate Rinsing Time
Rinsing Volume Rate
Rinsing Dialysate Flow You can set the dialysate flow for the rinsing of the dialyser in preparation.
Rinsing Time by UFP You can set the rinsing time (for bag rinsing without substitution line (s-
online)). Thus rinsing via the dialyser membrane is possible. After the
termination of the rinsing time, rinsing is performed with min. UF.
Rinsing Rate by UFP You can set the rinsing rate for the UFP to reach the Rinsing Volume by UFP.
The Rinsing Time by UFP is automatically recalculated.
Rinsing Volume by UFP You can set the rinsing volume (via the dialyser membrane) for the Rinsing
Time by UFP. The Rinsing Rate by UFP is automatically recalculated.
Blood Flow for Connecting Patient You can set the blood flow for connecting the patient (in therapy). The blood
pump BPA is started with this rate when the therapy is started.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 35

4.7.1.8 UF Parameters

The dialysate fluid parameters can be set in the UF

Parameters menu.
1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).

2. Activate the UF Parameters menu with the UF

Parameters icon. The following menu is
opened.
The following parameters can be set:
• Minimal UF Rate
• UF Rate Compensation?
• Max. Value of Upper Limit UF Rate
• Default Value of Upper Limit UF Rate
• UF Volume
• Therapy Time
• Gross UF Rate vs. Blood Flow - Alarm Limit
• Gross UF Rate vs. Blood Flow - Warning Limit
• UF Profile Editor

Minimal UF-Rate You can set the minimal UF rate.

UF Rate Compensation? If YES is Activated
If the Minimal UF Rate is active the UF rate is recalculated to reach the
required UF volume.

Max. Value of Upper Limit UF Rate You can set the maximum value of the upper limit for the UF rate.
Default Value of Upper Limit UF Rate You can set the default value of the upper limit for the UF rate.
UF Volume You can set the UF volume.
Therapy Time You can set the therapy time.
Gross UF Rate vs. Blood Flow - You can set and activate an alarm limit, i.e. an alarm (red) is activated if the
Alarm Limit limit is reached. The alarm limit can only be changed if the warning limit was

changed in advance. The alarm can be acknowledged with the key.

Setting Range
The alarm limit can not be set lower than the warning limit (even if the
warning limit is deactivated).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 36

Gross UF Rate vs. Blood Flow - You can set and activate a warning limit, i.e. a warning (yellow) is activated if
Warning Limit the limit is reached.
Setting Range
The alarm limit can not be set lower than the warning limit (even if the
warning limit is deactivated).

There are no limit alarms for HDF machines in predilution.

Alarm Limit/Warning Limit Alarm Limit Warning Limit

deactivated deactivated No alarm/no warning in therapy
deactivated activated Warning in therapy if limit is
exceeded
activated deactivated Alarm in therapy if limit is exceeded
activated activated Alarm and warning in therapy if
limit is exceeded

UF Profile Editor The UF profile can be edited in the UF Profile Editor. Editing can be performed
in the therapy mode and in the TSM service program.
Press the UF Profile Editor icon to open the UF
Profile Editor menu.

CONST (Constant)
If this key is activated all intervals of the profile
are set to 100%.
LIN (Linear)
If this key is activated only the first interval can
be set. A linear adaptation is calculated for the
remaining process.
EXP (Exponential)
If this key is activated only the first interval can
be set. An exponential adaptation is calculated for
the remaining process.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 37

Note If both the LIN and EXP keys are not activated the response of the graph can be
selected individually. If an interval is changed the remaining intervals are
adapted accordingly. The last interval can not be modified, because this setting
is calculated from the previous interval settings.

Current Profile No.

The profile selected with this key is displayed and can be modified. Additionally
to 10 standard profiles 20 further profiles can be activated, displayed and
modified.

Profile No. 0
This is a constant 100% profile.

Profile No. 1 to 9
These profiles are pre-defined.

Profile No. 10
A profile which was edited in therapy and stored to a chip card (card reader
option).

Profile No. 11 to 30
These profiles can be edited in the TSM service program and stored under a
number.

UF Mode HD
The UF process of the activated interval is set to HD with the HD key.

UF Mode Sequential SEQ

The UF process of the activated interval is set to sequential with the SEQ key.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 38

4.7.1.9 HDF/HF Online Parameters

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. Use the scroll bar until the
following menu appears (only HDF online
machines).

2. Activate the HDF/HF Online Parameters menu

with the HDF/HF Online Parameters icon. The
following menu is opened.
The following parameters can be set.
• HDF Substitution Volume
• HF Substitution Volume
• HDF Dialysate Flow for Postdilution
• HDF Dialysate Flow for Predilution
• HDF/HF infusion bolus volume
• Post/Predilution Selection

HDF Substitution Volume The HDF substitution volume can be set.

HF Substitution Volume The HF substitution volume can be set.
HDF Dialysate Flow for Postdilution The HDF dialysate flow for postdilution can be set.
HDF Dialysate Flow for Predilution The HDF dialysate flow for predilution can be set.
HDF/HF Infusion Bolus Volume The HDF/HF infusion bolus volume can be set.
Post/Predilution Selection You can set predilution for a HDF/HF online therapy by activating the
Predilution key.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 39

4.7.1.10 Disinfection Parameters

Disinfection after servicing in TSM

Before disinfection: rinse the machine to remove residual dialysate or
concentrate in the system.

The disinfection parameters can be set in the

Disinfection Parameters menu.
1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).

2. Activate the Disinfection menu with the

Disinfection Parameters icon. The following
menu is displayed.
3. Scroll the menu with the scroll bar.
The following parameters can be set:
• Disinfection after each Therapy
• Automatic Preparation Start after Disinfection
• Thermal Disinfection
• Chemical Disinfection
• Chemical Disinfection, Short
• Central Thermal Disinfection
• Central Manual Chemical Disinfection
• Central Automatic Chemical Disinfection
• Rinsing
• Auto Switch-On with Rinsing (No Weekly
Schedule)
- Switch-On Time
• Auto Switch-On by Weekly Schedule
- Weekly Schedule
- Start on Sunday/Start on Monday
• Auto Switch-On without Daily Confirmation
• Maximum Out of Action Time (Day/Hour/
Minutes)
• Disinfection Configuration Data
Chemical (long), Chemical (short)
• Disinfection Configuration Data
Central Thermal, Central Chemical, Rinsing

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 40

Disinfection after each Therapy If the YES key is activated, a disinfection must be performed after every
therapy.
Automatic Preparation Start YES
after Disinfection After disinfection and rinsing the Preparation and the self tests are started.
NO
After disinfection and rinsing the disinfection method is terminated.
Thermal Disinfection You can enable the thermal disinfection with the YES key in the disinfection
program or disable with the NO key. If you select the NO key the thermal
disinfection icon is not displayed in the disinfection program.
Chemical Disinfection You can enable the chemical disinfection with the YES key in the disinfection
program or disable with the NO key. If you select the NO key the chemical
disinfection icon is not displayed in the disinfection program.
Short Chemical Disinfection You can enable the short chemical disinfection with the YES key in the
disinfection program or disable with the NO key. If you select the NO key the
short chemical disinfection icon is not displayed in the disinfection program.
Central Thermal Disinfection The inlet feed-line and the machine are disinfected with hot water, if the
central facility loop-line is also disinfected with hot water (> 85oC).
Central Chemical Disinfection The inlet feed-lines are disinfected with chemical disinfectants, if the central
facility loop-line is also disinfected with chemical disinfectants.
Rinsing Rinsing of disinfectant residues: e.g. a disinfection was performed in the
evening and the residues are rinsed in the morning.

Auto Switch-On with Rinsing

- No Weekly Schedule
The parameters for the switch-on without a
weekly schedule can be set in the menu Auto
Switch-On with Rinsing - No Weekly Schedule.
The keys for Auto Switch-On with Rinsing - No
Weekly Schedule and Auto Switch-On by Weekly
Schedule are interlocked.
The machine is rinsed after the preselected
switch-on time. The key is only enabled if the
function is selected.
Switch-On Time
The switch-on time can be set (without a weekly
schedule).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 41

Auto Switch-On by Weekly Schedule

The parameters for the switch-on and the weekly
schedule can be set in the menu Auto Switch-On
by Weekly Schedule.
The keys for Auto Switch-On with Rinsing - No
Weekly Schedule and Auto Switch-On by Weekly
Schedule are interlocked.
Start on Sunday/Start on Monday
The table for the weekly schedule can either start
with Sunday or Monday.

Weekly Schedule
The parameters for the weekly schedule can be set
in the Weekly Schedule menu.
The selected disinfection method is performed
according to the preselected Weekday and Time
parameters:
• Monday, Tuesday ....... Sunday
• Night (Moon Symbol), Dialog switches off
after disinfection is completed
• Day (Sun Symbol), Dialog does not switch off
and remains in Rinsing
• Switch-On Time
• Disinfection Method
• Disinfectants
The table can also be modified by the user in the
therapy/disinfection mode.

Auto Switch-On without Daily Confirmation If YES is Activated

No confirmation required for the automatic switch-on at the end of each
disinfection.
If NO is Activated
A confirmation is required for the automatic switch-on at the end of each
disinfection.
Maximum Out of Action Time Limit OFF
The function is activated if the Limit OFF key is not pressed.
The Limit OFF key is activated in the default setting, the parameter keys are
disabled, i.e. parameter values can not be set.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 42

Disinfection Configuration Data

Chemical (long), Chemical (short)
The parameters for the disinfectants are set in the
Disinfection Configuration Data, Chemical (Long),
Chemical (Short) table. The following parameters
are available:
• Disinfectant Name, Type and Volume
• Reaction Time Long/Short
• Rinsing Time
• Operating Temperature
• Minimum Conductivity
Details can be found in Chapter 3 repair
instructions.

Disinfection Configuration Data

Central Thermal, Central Chemical, Rinsing
The parameters for the water inlet system can be
set in the menu Disinfection Configuration Data,
Central Thermal, Central Chemical, Rinsing.
Central Thermal:
• Inlet Flow
• Time
Central Manual Chemical:
• Inlet Flow
• Inlet Time
• Rinsing Flow
• Rinsing Time
Central Automatic Chemical:
• Inlet Volume
• Switch-off for Retention without Automatic
Switch-on
• Retention Time
• Rinsing Flow
• Rinsing Time
Rinsing:
• Inlet Flow
• Time

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 43

Central Automatic Chemical Disinfection

The hypochlorite disinfectant Tiutol KF must be applied (mixing ratio

maximum 65 ml Tiutol KF per litre).
The user is responsible to integrate the dialysis machine in the dialysis
centre’s central water loop system, if the Central Automatic Chemical
Disinfection is used.
The retention time must be ≤ 10 hours if the retention is disabled, i.e. the
Retention Time is set to YES, thus, no Central Automatic Chemical
Disinfection.
This disinfection method can be used for the
disinfection of the water inlet line in dialysis
centres with central water loop systems.
A defined inlet volume (disinfectant) from the
water loop line is sucked in as follows (see dotted
lines in the flow diagram):
• FPA/UFP decrease the water level in the
upline tank VB to the lower level sensor
NSVB
• The upline tank VB (approx. 260 ml inlet
volume) is filled with disinfectant to the
upper level sensor NSVB, due to the water
pressure at VVBE from
• the central water loop system
• Filling is repeated until the preselected
volume is reached
• Retention time (machine is switched off)
• Rinsing via VB, RVE, VLA, LA and FPA to the
outlet
Phase 1
• machine is filled and emptied 5 times, i.e the disinfectant is volume
controlled and sucked in and emptied by the central water loop line
Phase 2
• cyclic rinsing (time controlled -- rinsing time and rinsing flow
Central Water Loop System

Outlet

DMV

VVBE
T
RVFPE DDE TSDE VDE
NSVB

H TSD TSD-S
T
TSE T T T 8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
EK VB WT TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
WAB FBK1
RVB RVK VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1
T A B C D VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2
PE TSH BICP KP
A LAFS
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
D MSBK2 FBK2
8
T
RVDA BK2 FPA LA VDA
TSHE

C B
FEP VZ
UFP RVFPA
VEB RVUFP

EP
8

Fig.: Flow Diagram - Central Automatic Chemical Disinfection of Water Inlet

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 44

Central Automatic Chemical

Inlet Volume
The inlet volume can be selected.
Switch-off for retention without automatic
switch-on
NO – (i.e.: the automatic switch-on of the
machine is performed)
The retention time of the disinfectant in the
machine is according to the preset retention time.
YES – (i.e.: the automatic switch-on of the
machine is not performed)
The retention time of the disinfectant in the
machine depends on the switch-off time and from
the manual switch-on of the machine by the user.

Retention Time
If NO was selected
The retention time is enabled and can be selected.

If YES was selected

The retention time is disabled and can not be
selected. The retention time must be ≤ 10 hours
for manual retention.
Rinsing Flow
The rinsing flow can be selected.
Rinsing Time
The rinsing time can be selected.
Central Chemical
A central chemical mode can be selected for the
automatic switch-on in the weekly schedule.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 45

4.7.1.11 Filter Parameters

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. Use the scroll bar until the
following menu appears.

2. Activate the Filter Parameters menu with the

Filter icon.
The following parameters can be set for HDF
online and DF filters:
• Filter Type, e.g. Diacap-Ultra
• Therapy No. (number of therapies)
• Filter Operation Time [h]

Filter The filter type can be entered, e.g. Diacap-Ultra.

Therapy Number The number of therapies can be set for the DF/HDF filters.
The following messages are displayed before Preparation, after the life-time
data for therapy numbers/filter operation time is expired (one of the first three
lines are selected/displayed depending on the filter/s which is/are expired):
<Check the DF Filter!> or
<Check the HDF Filter!> or
<Check the DF and HDF Filter!> or
<Check the life-time data on the service screen!>
<Do you want to continue with an expired filter?>

The message must be acknowledged with the key.

Filter Operation Time [h] The operating hours can be set for the intended operation time of the DF/HDF
filters. The operating hour counter is active when DF Preparation is active.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 46

4.7.1.12 Dialyser Parameters (Kt/V)

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. Use the scroll bar until the
following menu appears.

2. Activate the Dialyser Parameters (Kt/V) menu

with the Dialyser icon.
The following parameters can be set.
• Default Target Kt/V
• Urea Distribution Volume Formula
• Height Measurement Unit of Watson Formula
• Default Setting for Treatment Mode:
Warning of Kt/V Target Projected Deviation
• Kt/V Table - Manual INPUT:
Setting Clean Blood Volume [%] Enabled
• Warning for Saving Kt/V Table
• Dialyser Filter Urea Clearance Data

If Nexadia-BSL is selected
Only the first parameter point Default Target Kt/V is displayed, but Kt/V is still
active in Nexadia-BSL.
If WAN-BSL is selected
No display, Kt/V is not active in WAN-BSL, i.e. empty screen.

Default Target Kt/V The target value is the Kt/V value at the end of a therapy. The target is set by
the user.
Urea Distribution Volume Formula Kt/V can be calculated with one of two different equations.
Urea Distribution Volume Formula (Basic)
The calculation is according to the following equation:
V (litres) = 0.58 x Dry Weight (kg)
Urea Distribution Volume Formula (Watson)
The calculation is according to the following Watson equation:
Male:
V (litres)=2.447 – 0.09516 x Age (years) + 0.1074 x Height (cm or feet/inch) +
0.3362 x Dry Weight (kg)
Female:
V (litres)=-2.097 + 0.1069 x Height (cm or feet/inch) + 0.2466 x Dry Weight
(kg)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 47

Height Measurement Unit of The unit [cm] or [Feet/Inch] can be selected.

Watson Formula
Default Setting for Treatment Mode: If the calculated Kt/V from the set parameters is smaller than the set target
Warning of Kt/V Target Projected Deviation value a message is activated.
Kt/V Table - Manual INPUT: If YES is Activated
Setting Clean Blood Volume [%] Enabled The ratio can be edited subsequently in therapy for adaptation to the
calculated Kt/V value.
Warning for Saving Kt/V Table A warning message can be enabled for saving the Kt/V table.

Dialyser Filter Urea Clearance Data

The Kt/V is approximately calculated via the
Dialyser Filter Urea Clearance Data for the
selected dialyser (see table, use scroll bar to see
table).
Details can be found in Chapter 3 repair
instructions.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 48

4.7.1.13 Kt/V-UV Parameters

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. Use the scroll bar until the
following menu appears.

2. Activate the Kt/V-UV Parameters menu with

the Kt/V-UV icon.
The following parameters can be set.
• Default Target Kt/V
• Kt/V Correction Mode
• Single Pool / Equilibrated
• Default Setting for Treatment Mode: Warning
of Kt/V Target-Projected Deviation
• Warning for Saving Kt/V Table

Default Target Kt/V The target value is the required Kt/V value at the end of a therapy. The target is
set by the user.
Kt/V Correction Mode For Kt/V-UV, i.e. Adimea option.
Single Pool / Equilibrated The Single Pool parameter or the Equilibrated parameter can be selected
according to the requirements of the physician/customer.
Default Setting for Treatment Mode: If the calculated Kt/V from the set parameters is smaller than the set target
Warning of Kt/V Target-Projected Deviation value, a message is activated.
Warning for Saving Kt/V Table A warning message can be enabled for saving the Kt/V table.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 49

4.7.1.14 Timings

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar):

2. Activate the Timings menu with the Timings

icon. The following menu is displayed.
The following parameters can be set:
• Parameter setting window disappearing time
• Screen saver appearance
• Appearing time

Parameter Setting Window You can set the automatic disappearing time for the Parameter Setting
Disappearing Time Window (lower screen in therapy).
Screen Saver Appearance You can activate a screen saver with the YES key. The actual image on the
screen is then replaced by the screen saver, according to the preset time. The
original image appears in case of an alarm or if the screen is touched. The
following screen savers are activated:
Therapy selection: B.Braun logo, date, time
Preparation: B.Braun logo, time, status line
Therapy and end of therapy: Time cake, remaining time, status line
Disinfection: Time cake, disinfection mode, phase

Appearing Time You can set the appearance time of the Screen Saver.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 50

4.7.1.15 Language Selection

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).

2. Activate the Language Selection menu with

the Language Selection icon.
3. Select the English or German language or an
additional available language.
4. The following menu is displayed (or if available
additional languages).
If English is selected the therapy and TSM
language is English. If German is selected the
therapy and TSM language is German. If an
additional language is selected this language is
used in therapy. The TSM language is English.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 51

4.7.1.16 Automatic Blood Pressure

Measurement ABPM
1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).

2. Activate the ABPM Parameters menu with the

ABPM Parameters icon. The following menu is
opened and displayed.
The following parameters can be set:
• Delete Key Data
• Auto Start of Cyclic Reading (from Patient
Identification Media)
• ABPM Cyclic Reading Stop at Entering
Disinfection
• Taking Over Limits from Patient’s Parameters

Delete Key Data If YES is Activated

In therapy a delete key is displayed in the ABPM menu. The measurement data
can be deleted in the table.
If NO is Deactivated
The measurement data is saved in the table until the end of therapy and can
not be deleted.
Auto Start of Cyclic Reading (from Patient NO
Identification Media) The cyclic blood pressure measurement must always be selected manually.
YES
If the cyclic blood pressure measurement is on the patient chip card, ABPM is
automatically activated at the beginning of a new therapy.

ABPM Cyclic Reading Stop at Entering The cyclic reading of the ABPM is stopped at entering the disinfection.
Disinfection
Taking Over Limits from Patient’s The limit values in therapy, e.g. for systole/diastole can be stored on a patient
Parameters chip card. These limit values are taken over if the patient chip card is read.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 52
®
4.7.1.17 bioLogic RR GL Parameters

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).
2. Activate the bioLogic RR® Comfort menu with
the bioLogic RR® Comfort icon. The following
menu is opened and displayed.

bioLogic RR® GL (GL: Guide-Line)

Note: bioLogic RR GL = bioLogic RR Comfort

The parameters for the bioLogic RR® Comfort can

be set in the System Configuration, bioLogic RR®
Parameters menu, if the option was already
selected and activated in the Production Report
menu.
The following parameters can be set:
• Guide Line Mode
• Suggested SYS (Systolic) Lower Limit
• bioLogic RR Algorithm ID

Guide Line Mode Press YES key to enable the Guide Line (GL) mode of the bioLogic RR® Comfort
option.
If NO is selected the bioLogic RR® Comfort option is used without the guide
line (GL) mode.
Suggested SYS (Systolic) Lower Limit If Guide Line Mode: YES
The suggested systolic lower limit can be selected. The suggested systolic lower
limit can be used in therapy to set the SYS lower limit.
If Guide Line Mode: NO
The suggested systolic lower limit can not be selected (see bottom figure).
bioLogic RR Algorithm ID ID Number 200
The ID number 200 indicates that the Guide Line Mode is enabled and can be
used in therapy.
ID Number 100
The ID number 100 indicates that the Guide Line Mode is not enabled and can
not be used in therapy.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 53

4.7.1.18 Summer Time Setting

1. Activate the System Configuration menu with

the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).

2. Activate the Summer Time Setting menu with

the Summer Time Setting icon. The following
menu is displayed.
The following parameters can be set:
• Begin of summer time
• End of summer time
• Time difference

Begin of Summer Time If necessary you can set the start of the summer time (date and hour).
End of Summer Time If necessary you can set the end of the summer time (date and hour).
Time Difference If necessary you can set the time difference between summer and winter time.
Note: The Time Difference should be set to 00:00 for countries where
daylight saving time is not applicable.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 54

4.7.1.19 Miscellaneous Parameters

Further parameters can be set in the

Miscellaneous Parameters menu.
1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).

2. Activate the Miscellaneous Parameters menu

with the Miscellaneous Parameters icon. The
following menu is displayed.

The following parameters can be set:

• Click Sound
• Warning and Writing (Saving) Patient
Parameters
• Skip Self Tests
• Automatic Preparation Start
• Data Validation with
• UF Profile Editing in Treatment
• Manual Bypass Confirmation Window
• End of Therapy Sound Duration
• Chopped Alarm Sound
• Suppression of Warning Sounds in Preparation
• Automatic Reinfusion Start at Entering End of
Treatment

Click Sound If you activate the YES key a click sound is activated if a key or the touch
screen is pressed.
Warning and Writing (Saving) Patient If you click the YES key you can generate a warning message to save the
Parameters patient data in the following cases:
• The patient data was loaded from the data media
• The therapy was terminated without saving the patient data

Skip Self Tests It is only permitted to activate the Skip Self Test function for servicing.
It is prohibited to run a therapy with a patient if the Skip Self Test
function is activated.
The self test must be passed successfully prior to a therapy.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 55

Automatic Preparation Start Preparation is started after the machine is switched on, if the machine was in
therapy selection mode when switched off.

Data Validation with Data validation with the Key:

The confirmation of the data validation for the UF profiles is performed via the

key.
Data validation with the Touch:
The confirmation of the data validation for the UF profiles is performed via the

key (touch screen) in the menu.

UF Profile Editing in Treatment The editing of the UF profiles can be performed in treatment.
Manual Bypass Confirmation Window The confirmation window for bypass can be enabled with YES. Thus every
bypass switching must be confirmed manually.
End of Therapy Sound Duration The duration of the sound can be reduced at the end of a therapy.

Chopped Alarm Sound Two different alarm tones can be selected.

NO
• Standard continuous alarm sound
YES
• Chopped alarm sound
Suppression of Warning Sounds in Some warning sounds can be suppressed during preparation. See instructions
Preparation for use (chapter 4.3) for details.
Automatic Reinfusion Start at A window is automatically opened at the end of therapy. This window must be
Entering End of Treatment confirmed at the end of the therapy for the reinfusion of the blood.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 56

4.7.1.20 DBI Parameters

DBI parameters can be set in the Dialog Bedside-

Link Interface DBI Parameters menu.
1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).
The DBI menu is present and can be opened if DBI
Nexadia was selected in the Production Report,
Low Level Options. Various DBI parameters can be
selected in the DBI Parameters menu.

Baud Rate (kBaud)

The default for the Baud rate is 38.4 kBaud.

Automatic User Logout Time (min)

An automatic user logout time can be set and
activated. After the automatic logout the user has
to log in again before he is able to confirm any
messages, medications or checklist entries.

Message Warning Time (min)

A message warning time can be set and activated.
Thereby it is possible to inform users of any
unconfirmed messages, medications or checklist
entries, before the end of a therapy.

Note:
The data set must be set according to the
support of the Nexadia software.
Data Set DBI 1.61 (applicable for Nexadia)
Data Set DBI 1.72 (not applicable)
Data Set DBI 2.00 (default)
Data Set DBI 2.20 (not applicable)
Data Set DBI 2.21
The data set DBI 2.21 is required for the extension
of the Nexadia functionality, e.g. support of the
option bioLogic RR Comfort and Adimea; the
mmol/l unit can be used. The Nexadia protocol
must be supported by the host computer.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 57

4.7.1.21 Preventive Maintenance

Preventive maintenance parameters can be set in

the Preventive Maintenance menu.
1. Activate the System Configuration menu with
the System Configuration key in menu
Treatment Support. The following menu is
opened and displayed (scroll with scroll bar).
2. Activate the Preventive Maintenance menu
with the Preventive Maintenance icon. The
following menu is displayed.
You can define an interval for a preventive
maintenance PM. If this feature is selected (YES):
the user is informed about the necessity of a
preventive maintenance. A warning message is
displayed in the transition phase end of
treatment/start of disinfection. The message is
displayed according to the following conditions:
• once if status is ≤ 5 % of set condition
• every time if set condition is expired
The following warning message is displayed:
Preventive Maintenance Recommended
The set preventive maintenance interval is expired.
Please inform your service technician.

One of three modes can be selected to calculate the next preventive

service.
Load-Interval A warning message is enabled under the following defined
conditions:
Elapsed
•
WTC (h)
YES is selected
max.
hours
• the user is never warned in the first 9 month period
)
day
er

• the user is always warned after a 18 month period

4p
s/2

•
nth

the user is warned between a 9 to 18 month period if the

mo

4,000 working time is more than 4,000 hours after the last reset.
(9
use
cal
eti

e
us
oth

ive
hyp

ns

e
us
te
ex

m
diu
me
use Window
low 4,000 hours vs
9 to 18 months

9 18 Elapsed
Months

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 58

Elapsed Months A warning message is enabled if YES is selected and the preselected
period of months is expired.
Note: The manufacturer recommends an annual preventive
maintenance and the replacement of the wear and tear
parts from the preventive maintenance kit.

Elapsed WTC A warning message is enabled if YES is selected and the set working
(Working Time Counter) time is elapsed.

Preventive Maintenance Accomplished Press the Preventive Maintenance Accomplished key and then the
Save icon after the preventive maintenance was performed.
Consequently a new preventive service period is started again after
the machine is switched off and on.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 59

4.7.2 Trends and Trend Groups

Six different trend groups can be selected for the

treatment mode. Three treatment parameters can
be configured individually for each group.
1. Activate the Treatment Support menu with the
Treatment Support key in the TSM Main Menu.
The following menu is opened.
The following settings can be selected:
• Cursor (left and right)
• Time display
• Selection of trend groups

Cursor (left and right) The last treatment results can be displayed. You can shift the time base in one
minute increments with the left or right cursor. The time is displayed in the
Time Display window. A specific time can be selected in the graphics with the
time base. Thus the corresponding events can be displayed.
Time Display You can position the time base on a certain treatment time. The corresponding
events can be displayed.
Selection of Trend Groups You can select the Trend Groups menu. Six different graphic blocks can be
selected. Three treatment parameters for each block can be configured
individually.

2. Activate the Trend and Trend Groups menu with

the Trend and Trend Groups key in the
Treatment Support menu. The following menu
is opened and displayed.
3. Activate the Trend History menu with the Trend
History window.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 60

Six trend groups are available. The trend group

with the red arrow can be selected.
4. Activate the Trend Groups menu with the Trend
Groups icon.

Edit Key
Three treatment parameters can be selected for
one group from a parameter list.
5. Activate the Edit menu with the Edit icon.
6. The treatment parameters in the six trend
groups can be modified.
7. The default parameters can be reset with the
Set Defaults window.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-1-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 61

4.8 Manual Test and Calibration

The menu contains test and calibration functions.
The user can test all basic operations and calibrate
components (e.g. sensors and pumps).
The TSM Main Menu appears after the machine is
switched on.

1. Activate the Manual Test and Calibration

menu with the Manual Test and Calibration
key in the TSM Main Menu. The following
menu is opened.

4.8.1 Top Level Manual Test and Calibration

You can perform functional tests, a touch screen
calibration, and the test of present options in the
Top Level Manual Test and Calibration menu.
1. Activate the TL Manual Test and Calibration
menu with the TL Manual Test and Calibration
key.
• Buttons, Lamps and Sounds
• Monitor Test
• Touch Screen Calibration
• Brightness
• Card Reader and Card Check (Option Card
Reader)
• USB Port Properties
• Supervisor Window Test
• File System Check
• ABPM Maintenance (Option ABPM)
• DBI Maintenance (Option Nexadia-BSL)
• Kt/V-UV Sensor Test (Option Adimea)
• DSI Test (Option Crit-Line)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 62

4.8.1.1 Buttons, Lamps and Sounds

1. Activate the Buttons, Lamps and Sounds menu

with the Buttons, Lamps and Sounds key in the
TL Manual Test and Calibration menu. The
following menu is displayed.
In the Buttons, Lamps and Sounds menu the
following functions can be tested:
• different sounds

stop
• LEDs for / / (on front
panel board FPB)
• LEDs for signal lamps (on optical status display
boards OSDs)

The Click sound can be checked.

The Alarm sound can be checked.

The Chopped Alarm sound can be checked.

The ABPM Alarm sound can be checked.

The Warning sound can be checked.

The Therapy End 100 % sound can be checked.

The Therapy End 50 % sound can be checked.

Check key for blood pump.

stop
Check key/lamp for blood pump.

Check key for blood pump.

Check alarm (confirm) key and lamp (LED).

Check (enter) key and lamp (LED).

Check red LED for signal lamp (on optical status display boards OSD).

Check yellow LED for signal lamp (on optical status display boards OSD).

Check green LED for signal lamp (on optical status display boards OSD).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 63

4.8.1.2 Monitor Test

A table appears with all colours. Every square contains an alphanumerical
character with different character fonts. The brightness and the contrast of the
monitor can be checked with this test image.

1. Activate the Monitor Test menu with the

Monitor Test key in the TL Manual Test and
Calibration menu. The following menu is
displayed.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 64

4.8.1.3 Touch Screen Calibration

The touch screen can be calibrated in the Touch Screen Calibration menu.

The active part of the touch screen is displayed in the figure. Four points are
used (A, B, C and D) for the calibration. The touch area is defined by the
calibration.
Tip on the cross wires to ensure an accurate setting during calibration.

1. Activate the Touch Screen Calibration menu

A B with the Touch Screen Calibration key in the TL
Manual Test and Calibration menu. The
following menu is displayed.
2. Tip the cross wires A in the upper left corner.
The first calibration point is defined.
3. Tip the cross wires B.
The second calibration point is defined.
4. Tip the cross wires C.
The third calibration point is defined.

C
The following message is displayed:
Calibration seems to be correct!
5. Tip the cross wires D to check the calibration.
The following message is displayed if the
calibration was successful:
Calibration OK
The calibration data is stored. The TL Manual
Test and Calibration menu is automatically
displayed again.
6. Switch the Dialog+ off and on again. The new
calibration data are loaded for the touch
screen.
D 7. Check the touch screen.

Download Default Setting

If the touch screen is out of function (e.g. after a faulty calibration) the default
setting for the touch screen can be downloaded.

1. Press the key of the blood pump (on the keyboard membrane of the
TFT housing) three times in the TSM Main Menu.
2. Switch machine off and on again. The old default setting is loaded.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 65

4.8.1.4 Brightness Calibration

Parameters can be set and tests can be performed

in the Brightness and Test Calibration menu.
1. Activate the Brightness menu with the
Brightness key in the TL Manual Test and
Calibration menu. The following menu is
displayed.
If a button was pressed the field remains
highlighted.
If a value is changed the Calibration button must
be pressed to take over the new value.
If a MIN or MAX value was set the minimum
and/or maximum limits for NIGHT/DAY are
adapted.

Brightness Settings
OSD Green Parameter MIN (0%)
(for green LED)
The minimum brightness (digits) for the green LEDs on the optical status
display OSD boards can be set.
MAX (100%)
The maximum brightness (digits) for the green LEDs on the optical status
display OSD boards can be set.
NIGHT
The night brightness (digits) for the green LEDs on the optical status display
OSD boards can be set.
DAY
The day brightness (digits) for the green LEDs on the optical status display
OSD boards can be set.
Backlight Parameter MIN (0%)
The minimum brightness (digits) for the backlight can be set.
MAX (100%)
The maximum brightness (digits) for the backlight can be set.
NIGHT
The night brightness (digits) for the backlight set.
DAY
The day brightness (digits) for the backlight set.
Test OSD Red and Yellow (for Signal Lamps)
The red and yellow LED of the optical status display OSD can be checked,
i.e. switched ON and OFF.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 66

4.8.1.5 Card Reader and Card Check

The card reader and the card can be checked in

the Card Reader and Card Check menu.
The Card Reader and Card Check key is displayed
in this menu if the card reader is present in the
machine and the option was selected/activated in
the Production Report menu.
1. Activate the Card Reader and Card Check
menu with the Card Reader and Card Check
key in the TL Manual Test and Calibration
menu. The following menu is displayed.

Both card reader and chip card can be checked if

a chip card is inserted in the card reader and the
test is started with the OK key. The chip card must
be inserted with the contacts facing upwards.
Note
• Use an empty service chip card (art. no.
7703856) for the test and not a patient chip
card.
• Do not remove the chip card from the card
reader during the test.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 67

4.8.1.6 USB-Port Properties

All devices connected to the motherboard can be

checked in the USB Port Properties menu.
All devices connected to the USB ports of the
motherboard are displayed in a table if the USB
Port Properties key is pressed in the TL Manual
Test and Calibration menu. There are two different
tables depending on the type of motherboard
connected.
1. Activate the USB Port Properties menu with
the USB Port Properties key in the TL Manual
Test and Calibration menu. The following menu
is displayed.

Motherboard on Top Level Sub-Rack

The table displays all USB ports available on the
motherboard with the corresponding USB port
properties.
Port Index
The USB ports (1 through 8) on the motherboard.
• Ports 1 through 3 are internally assigned and
can not be used for options
• Ports 4 through 8 can be chosen freely for
options that are connected to a USB port
Manufacturer
The name of the USB device manufacturer.
Product
The name of the USB device product.
Prefix
The first two characters of the serial number of
the USB device.
Speed
The maximum speed of the USB port.
Status
OK
The connected USB device is in the valid USB
device list.
Not OK
The connected USB device is not in the valid USB
device list.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 68

4.7.1.7 Supervisor Window Test

The position and data of the selected supervisor window is displayed. You can
close the window with the Cancel key.
1. Activate the Supervisor Window Test menu
with the Supervisor Window Test key in the TL
Manual Test and Calibration menu. The
following menu is displayed.
The following supervisor windows can be checked:
• Parameter Check
• Connecting Patient
• Needle Configuration
• Back to Therapy
• SN Level Setting
• Skip Self Tests
• Arterial Bolus
• Check PBS
• Reinfusion
• Limit Change Code
• Back to Therapy Selection
• End of Arterial Bolus
• End of Therapy
• Dialyser Draining
• No Valid DMQS Data
• Start of Disinfection
More Windows ...:
• Multi Window
• UF Volume and Max. UF Rate
• Multi Window MW with Substitution Volume
• Multi Window MW with Single Needle
• Min. Max. Final Conductivity
A parameter check is displayed as an example.
The supervisor window for the Min. Max. Final Conductivity is displayed. You

can either close the supervisor window with the key or select and
acknowledge the single parameters and close the supervisor window with the

key.
2. Activate the Parameter Check window with
the Parameter Check key. The following menu
is displayed.

3. Press the key to close the supervisor

window.

or

Press the key to select and acknowledge

the single parameters and close the supervisor
window.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 69

4.7.1.8 File System Check

Press the key to start the check of the

Dialog file system. This function reads all
executable files and creates a check value. If it
does not equal with the original check value a
warning message is displayed.

1. Activate the Test System Check menu with the

Test System Check key in the TL Manual Test
and Calibration menu. The following menu is
displayed.

2. Press the key of the Hard Disk Check

(for the compact flash card) to test the hard
disk drive.
or

Press the key of the Application SW

Check to test the application software.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 70

4.8.1.9 ABPM Maintenance

1. Activate the ABPM Maintenance menu with

the ABPM Maintenance key in the TL Manual
Test and Calibration menu. The following menu
is displayed.
The ABPM Maintenance menu is used for the
function test of the Dialog automatic blood
pressure measurement ABPM option. The cuff is
replaced by a 500 ml measurement chamber.
The following functions can be tested:
• P Test Pressure Comparison Test
• Test 1 Inflation Time
• Test 2 Air Leakage
See chapter 5 technical safety inspection and
preventive maintenance: inspection protocol for
the automatic blood pressure measurement ABPM
and the execution procedure for the measurement
inspection.

Pressure Comparison Test

The P Test key activates and deactivates the
pressure comparison test of the ABPM. The P Test
is used to compare the pressure value of the
pressure sensor with a reference instrument.
A reference instrument (accuracy ≤ ± 0.5 mmHg)
is required for the comparison test of the pressure
sensor.
Inflation Time [s]
The Test 1 key activates and deactivates the
inflation time. Thus the inflation time of the pump
is tested up to 300 mmHg, i.e.:
• 0 - 250 mmHg
• 0 - 300 mmHg
The measurement chamber is connected to the
ABPM system via the pressure tubing. A pressure
is built up to 300 mmHg.

Air Leakage [mmHg]

The Test 4 key activates and deactivates the air
leakage test (3 minutes). Thus the pneumatic
integrity of the ABPM system is tested.

The measurement chamber is connected to the

ABPM system via the pressure tubing. A pressure
is built up to 300 mmHg and is held for 3 minutes.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 71

4.8.1.10 DBI Maintenance

If the DBI option (for Nexadia/WAN-BSL (Bedside

Link) Network) was selected in the menu
Production Report/Low Level Options the Dialog
Bedside-Link Interface DBI Maintenance button is
displayed.
The RS 232 port (COM1) on the motherboard can
be tested (Sent Data and Received Data) in the
DBI Maintenance menu. A test plug A (art. no.
7703473) is required to perform the DBI test.
1. Connect the test plug A to the RS 232 port
(COM1) on the motherboard.
2. Switch on machine.
3. Open the DBI Maintenance menu with the DBI
Maintenance key in the TL Manual Test and
Calibration menu. The following menu is
displayed.

4. Press the key to start test.

Note: The DBI test can be repeated by

pressing the key. If the DBI test

is repeated the sent data pattern is
different (≠ 1234567890).
Sent Data
The sent data are displayed.
Received Data
The received data are displayed.
Comparison of Data
If the Sent Data and Received Data are identical,
the test was successful.
5. Switch off machine after successful test.
6. Remove the test plug from the RS 232 port.

Pin Assignment RS 232 Test Plug

(Soldering Side)

123 5
A
6789

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 72

4.8.1.11 Kt/V-UV Sensor Test

The Kt/V-UV sensor (option Adimea) can be
checked and tested in the Kt/V-UV Sensor Test
menu.
The Kt/V-UV Sensor Test key is displayed in this
menu if the Kt/V-UV sensor is present in the
machine and the option was selected/activated in
the Production Report menu.
1. Activate the Kt/V-UV Sensor Test menu with
the Kt/V-UV Sensor Test key in the TL Manual
Test and Calibration menu. The following menu
is displayed.

Kt/V-UV Sensor Test

The Kt/V-UV sensor can be tested in the Kt/V-UV
Sensor Test menu.
The machine is prepared for the test after pressing
the Kt/V-UV Sensor Test key. The following test
steps are performed:
• Sensor Init
• TSD Sensor Calibration Check
• Wait for Bal. Chamber Init
• Balance Chamber Init
• Rinsing
• Temperature Check
• Bubble Free Check
• Stopping Dialysate Flow
• Ready for Test
Ready for Test
If the test was successful, Ready for Test is
displayed.
Service Test
Press Service Test to start the test for the UV
sensor. The single test steps are displayed in a
window. The following test steps are performed:
• Checking Acceptance Status
• Cold sensor - <n>*
• System Identification (100%) - <n>*
• System Identification (75%) - <n>*
• Calibration - <n>*
(* number of measurement cycles are indicated
with <n>)
Test OK
Test OK is displayed if the test was successful.
Required Current
The LED requires a certain current for optimal
working conditions. This current is automatically
adapted to the LED. The current is displayed as
digit value together with the corresponding
reserve digits (residual digits). This value must be
≤4000 digits (maximum service life).
Example:
Required current: 1332 (digit)
Reserve: 2668 (digit)
Total digits: 4000

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 73

4.8.1.12 Dialog Serial Interface DSI Test

If the Crit-Line option (HCT) was selected in the
menu Production Report and a DSI was detected
at a USB port of the motherboard, the Dialog
Serial Interface DSI Test button is displayed.
The DSI interface (RS 232) can be tested (Sent
Data and Received Data) in the DSI Test menu. A
test plug A (art. no. 7703473) is required to
perform the DSI test.
Note
The DSI test can be performed correctly only if
a test plug is connected to the DSI interface
(RS 232).
1. Connect test plug A to the RS 232 socket of
the DSI.
2. Switch on machine.
3. Activate the DSI Test menu with the Dialog
Serial Interface DSI key in the TL Manual Test
and Calibration menu. The following menu is
displayed.
Note: The DSI test can be repeated by

pressing the key. If the DBI test

is repeated the sent data pattern is
different (≠ 1234567890).
Test Transmission (TXD-RXD Test)
(Transmit eXchange Data–Received eXchange Data)
The TXD-RXD test can be performed with the OK
key. The sent data and the received data must
match.

4. Press the key to start TXD-RXD Test.

If the Sent Data and Received Data are identical,
the test was successful.

RTS-CTS Test
Pin Assignment RS 232 Test Plug (Request to Send - Clear to Send)
(Soldering Side)
The RTS-CTS test can be performed with the OK

123 5 key. The sent data and the received data must
match.

A 5. Press the key to start RTS-CTS Test.

If the Sent Data and Received Data are identical,
the test was successful.
6789 6. Switch off machine after successful test.
7. Remove the test plug from the DSI interface.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 74

4.8.2 Low Level Manual Test

You can test the function of the low level controller LLC sensors, pumps and
valves. You can select a test menu and check a single (or where applicable
combined) sensor, pump and valve. The components are displayed in graphics
(position and corresponding value is displayed). Additionally you can directly
skip to the Low Level Calibration menu with a Calibration key.

1. Activate the Manual Test and Calibration

menu with the Manual Test and Calibration
key in the TSM Main Menu. The following
menu is displayed.
2. Activate the LL Manual Test menu with the LL
Manual Test key in the Manual Test and
Calibration menu. The following menu is
displayed (if necessary use scroll bar).
The following tests can be selected:
• 1.1 Staff Call, Alarms, Power off
• 1.2 Blood Pump Arterial
• 1.3 Blood Pump Venous
• 1.4 Heparin Pump
• 1.5 Tubing Clamps
• 1.6 Pressure Sensors (Blood Side)
• 1.7 Air Sensor, Red Sensor
• 1.8 Coupling Detectors
• 1.9 Water Intake, Upline Tank and Flow Pump FPE
• 1.10 Degassing and Heating
• 1.11 Dialysis Temperature
• 1.12 Concentrate Pumps and Conductivity
• 1.13 Balance Chamber Valves
• 1.14 Bypass and Disinfection Valves
• 1.15 Flow Pump FPA, Balance Chamber and Air
Separator
• 1.16 Pressure Water Part
• 1.17 UF Pump
• 1.18 Blood Leak
• 1.19 Leak Test
• 1.20 Water Part (Overview)
• 1.21 Emptying
• 1.22 HDF
• 1.23 BIC Cartridge Valve and Coupling Detectors
• 1.24 HDF Online
• 1.25 HDF Online Valves and Coupling Detectors
• 1.26 Option Battery
• 1.27 DFS Pressure Test of Therapy
• 1.28 Front Panel Board FPB (LLS)
• 1.29 Patient Leakage Current
• 1.30 SMPS-MC Self Tests
• 1.31 Level Regulation

Function of the Software Keys and Icons The function of the software keys and icons are as
follows:
Press the HELP key to see the help information of
the menu.

The menu can be closed with the Exit Door key.

If required, the previous menu or the next menu

can be selected with the Previous and Next Arrow
keys.
If required, a corresponding calibration menu can
be selected in certain LL Manual Test menus. The
calibration procedures are described in paragraph
4.8.3 Low Level Manual Calibration.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 75

4.8.2.1 Test 1.1 Staff Call, Alarms, Power Off

1. Activate the Staff Call/Alarms/Power Off menu

with the Staff Call/Alarms/Power Off key in
the LL Manual Test menu. The following menu
is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.
• Staff Call/
• Acoustical Alarm
• Water Side Power OFF
• Blood Side Power OFF
• Remote Power OFF
• +12 VAN Control
• -12 VAN Control

Staff Call/Acoustical Alarm The staff call can be activated with the PRUF/PRUF-S
signal and the acoustical alarm can be switched
separately with the ACAL/ACAL-S signal by the controller
and supervisor.
Water Side Power OFF The low level supervisor can test the power off for the 24
V supply voltage with the D24OFF-S signal for the
dialysate side power off. The feedback to the controller
(ON/OFF) shows whether the voltage was switched.
Blood Side Power OFF The low level supervisor can test the power off for the 24
V supply voltage with the B24OFF-S signal for the blood
side power off. The feedback to the controller (ON/OFF)
shows whether the voltage was switched.
Remote Power OFF The REMOTE signal for the remote power off can be
activated by the controller. The machine is switched off
by the internal real time clock RTC. The machine is
switched on again after the shortest time period (approx.
64 s) has expired. The machine can be switched on
immediately, if the machine is switched off and on again.
±12 VAN Control The digital board has an integrated voltage monitoring
for the analog ±12 VAN from the SMPS-MC. A self test
for the ±12 VAN is performed during preparation. The
±12 VAN voltages are detuned during the test.
Supervisor OFF
±12 VAN for the controller are ON, i.e. voltages are
present.
ON = Voltage OK
+12 VAN Control / Supervisor ON
ON = Test activated
±12 VAN Test:
• +12 VAN > 13 V
• -12 VAN > -11 V
-12 VAN Control / Supervisor ON
ON = Test activated
±12 VAN Test:
• +12 VAN < 11 V
• -12 VAN < -13 V

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 76

4.8.2.2 Test 1.2 Blood Pump Arterial

1. Activate the Blood Pump Arterial menu with

the Blood Pump Arterial key in the LL Manual
Test menu. The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.
• Motor Speed
• Head Speed
• Flow
• Torque
• Cover State

Motor Speed The motor speed is displayed by the controller and supervisor. The direction of
rotation is displayed by a direction of rotation symbol:
Green: Correct direction of rotation

Red: Reverse direction of rotation

Head Speed The head speed is displayed by the supervisor. The direction of rotation for the
roller is displayed by a direction of rotation symbol:
Green: Correct direction of rotation

Red: Reverse direction of rotation

Flow The controller and supervisor display the calculated flow rate, based on the
pump speed and the tube constant.

Torque The motor torque is displayed by the controller.

Cover State If the pump cover is opened the blood pump BPA is stopped. The controller
detects and displays the opened pump cover.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 77

4.8.2.3 Test 1.3 Blood Pump Venous

1. Activate the Blood Pump Venous menu with

the Blood Pump Venous key in the LL Manual
Test menu. The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

Motor Speed The motor speed is displayed by the supervisor. The direction of rotation is
displayed by a direction of rotation symbol:
Green: Correct direction of rotation

Red: Reverse direction of rotation

Head Speed The head speed is displayed by the supervisor. The direction of rotation for the
roller is displayed by a direction of rotation symbol:
Green: Correct direction of rotation

Red: Reverse direction of rotation

Flow The controller and supervisor display the calculated flow rate, based on the
pump speed and the tube constant.
Torque The motor torque is displayed by the controller.
Cover State If the pump cover is opened the blood pump BPV/substitution pump is stopped
immediately. The controller detects and displays the opened pump cover.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 78

4.8.2.4 Test 1.4 Heparin Pump

1. Activate the Heparin Pump menu with the

Heparin Pump key in the LL Manual Test menu.
The following menu is displayed for the
heparin pump Compact.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

HP Position The forward feed distance is displayed in mm (only if the syringe is inserted
and locked). The counter is reset if the lock sensor is opened. The distance is
detected from the signal of the light barrier on the motor axle.
HP Syringe Sensor The sensor for the sensor plate of the syringe detects an inserted syringe.
Lock Sensor Sensor to open the clasp nut.
(The clasp nut is assembled on the drive spindle and limits the max. pressure
load of the heparin pump).
HP Motor State Activates/switches off the heparin pump.
HP Speed Selection between slow and fast forward feed.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 79

4.8.2.5 Test 1.5 Tubing Clamps

1. Activate the Tubing Clamps menu with the

Tubing Clamps key in the LL Manual Test
menu. The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

Tubing Clamps The venous tubing clamp SAKV and arterial tubing clamp SAKA can be closed
SAKV and SAKA and opened. Thereby the switch function and leakage test (pressure - clamp
gap, time) can be tested.
The closed clamp gap is set to 1.4 mm + 0.1 mm.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 80

4.8.2.6 Test 1.6 Pressure Sensors (Blood Side)

1. Activate the Pressure Sensors (Blood Side)

menu with the Pressure Sensors (Blood Side)
key in the LL Manual Test menu. The following
menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can skip directly to the calibration of the sensors by pressing the

key.

Level Regulation Pump LRP (PPR) The pressure for the pressure sensors can be set with the Pressure Negative and
Pressure Positive keys. The pressures are increased or decreased via the level
regulation pump (diaphragm pump).

Pressure Sensors The pressure sensors PA, PV and PBE are displayed.

PBS Value Machine with Single Pump

The value for PBS is 0.
Machine with Double
Double Pump must be activated in Production Report, Low Level Options. A
value for PBS is displayed.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 81

4.8.2.7 Test 1.7 Air Sensor SAD, Red Sensor

1. Activate the Air Sensor, Red Sensor menu with

the Air Sensor, Red Sensor key in the LL
Manual Test menu. The following menu is
displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can skip directly to the calibration of the safety air detector SAD by

pressing the key.

SAD Level The calibration level (example KS = 48) on the SAD is entered for the SAD
(version 2) with a fixed alarm level. The alarm level is automatically set to 15
digits after the calibration value is entered. The test level is calculated by
adding 5 digits to the calibration level (test level = KS + 5 digits). You can find
the detailed description and procedure for the calibration of the SAD version 2
in the menu: LL Manual Calibration, Calibration 2.9 Safety Air Detector SAD.

SAD Trigger OFF The cyclic measurement of the controller can be checked with the SAD
TRIGGER OFF key.
SAD Time Control The cyclic measurement is checked by the controller and must be detected by
the supervisor with the SAD Time Contr.

SAD Test Activate the internal test of the safety air detector SAD with the SAD TEST key
(the switch level is automatically increased). The sensitivity can be changed to
check the switching point.
AIR A tubing filled with air is inserted in the SAD

If the SAD TEST is activated AIR must be detected.

NO AIR A tubing filled with fluid is inserted in the SAD

If the SAD TEST is activated NO AIR must be detected.

RDV The light path is interrupted
NO BLOOD (Controller/Supervisor) changes to BLOOD (Controller/Supervisor).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 82

4.8.2.8 Test 1.8 Coupling Detectors

1. Activate the Coupling Detectors menu with

the Coupling key in the LL Manual Test menu.
The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions of the reed contacts with
the appropriate couplings.

You can check the actual status of the reed sensors.

Detectors
BICSS Bicarbonate rinsing connection sensor.
KSS Concentrate rinsing connector sensor.
SBS1 Rinsing bridge connector sensor (dialyser coupling).
SBS2 Rinsing bridge connector sensor (dialyser coupling).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 83

4.8.2.9 Test 1.9 Water Inlet, Upline Tank and Flow Pump FPE

1. Activate the Water Inlet menu with the Water

Inlet key in the LL Manual Test menu. The
following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

Valve VVBE You can set the flow of the upline tank control valve VVBE. VVBE must
guarantee a flow of ≥ 1200 ml/min at a water inlet pressure of approx. 0.9 bar.
Level Sensor NSVB The level of the upline tank VB is displayed on the screen by the level sensors
(NSVB_O high sensor and NSVB_U low sensor).
Flow Pump FPE If the upline tank is full the valve VVBE is closed automatically. If the flow
pump FPE is activated FPA is also switched on, to allow an unrestricted flow
through the balance chambers.
Emptying The degassing pump PE is permanently switched on to allow a circulation in
both compartments of the upline tank.
VEB is opened. If the emptying is activated to drain the machine the pumps are
switched on for a short period and VVBE closed.
All balance chamber valves are opened and the outlet flow pump FPA works in
main flow with the same speed as the inlet flow pump FPE. The degassing
pump EP runs and the degassing bypass valve VEB is open.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 84

4.8.2.10 Test 1.10 Degassing and Heating

1. Activate the Degassing and Heating menu with

the Degassing and Heating key in the LL
Manual Test menu. The following menu is
displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can skip directly to the calibration of the pressure sensor PE or the

temperature sensor TSHE/TSE by pressing the appropriate or

key. TSHE is calibrated together with TSE.

The components of the degassing and heating circuit can be tested step by
step.
All balance chamber valves are switched so that one half of the balance
chamber is open and the other side closed to position the membrane.
The flow pump FPE and FPA have the same speed and work in main flow. If the
speed of FPE is set the degassing pump EP starts automatically with a higher
speed.
The heater H is stopped if the degassing pump EP < 500 rpm, the degassing
temperature sensor TSE > 89 oC or the upline tank VB is empty.
The degassing pump EP must be able to build up a flow of > 1200 ml/min at a
negative pressure of - 500 mmHg.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 85

4.8.2.11 Test 1.11 Dialysis Temperature

1. Activate the Dialysis Temperature menu with

the Dialysis Temperature key in the LL Manual
Test menu. The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can skip directly to the calibration of the temperature sensors TSBIC, TSD,

TSD-S, TSDE by pressing the key.

The dialysate is heated up with the set heater power H %.
The flow pumps FPE/FPA work with the set speed. The balance chambers are
opened and the machine works in main flow.
The temperature must be controlled by the heater to a stable set-point to test
the temperature sensors.
If you open the circulation valve VZ a closed flow circuit is achieved (via the
upline tank). Increase the speed [rpm] until the flow pump FPE has built up a
flow of 750 ml/min.
The measurement range is as follows:
TSE, TSD, TSBIC: 0 to 100 oC
TSD-S: 30 to 55 oC
TSDE: 30 to 55 oC

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 86

4.8.2.12 Test 1.12 Concentrate Pumps and Conductivity

1. Activate the Concentrate Pumps and

Conductivity menu with the Concentrate
Pumps and Conductivity key in the LL Manual
Test menu. The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can skip directly to the calibration of the conductivity sensors BICLF/ENDLF

by pressing the key.

You can set the pumps BICP/KP, flow pump FPE and the heater power H %.
All balance chamber valves are open and the flow pump FPA works with the
same speed as FPE.
The machine is in main flow. The machine can suck-in concentrate with the
concentrate pumps BICP/KP for the preparation of the conductivity to test the
conductivity sensors BICLF/ENDLF/ENDLF-S.
You can connect a measurement instrument at the dialyser couplings or
between FPE and the balance chamber.
The supervisor displays the head speed BICP-S/KP-S of the concentrate pumps.
Increase the speed [rpm] until the flow pump FPE has built up a flow of 750
ml/min. Thereby the pulsating flow of the pumps have no influence on the
conductivity measurement.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 87

4.8.2.13 Test 1.13 Balance Chamber Valves

1. Activate the Balance Chamber Valves menu

with the Balance Chamber Valves key in the LL
Manual Test menu. The following menu is
displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can activate a single valve or combined setting via the controller. The
actual condition is displayed by the supervisor. The following valves can be
activated:
Valves VDEBK1/2 Dialyser inlet valve 1/2 balance chamber
VEBK1/2 Inlet valve 1/2 balance chamber
VDABK1/2 Dialyser outlet valve 1/2 balance chamber
VABK1/2 Outlet valve 1/2 balance chamber

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 88

4.8.2.14 Test 1.14 Bypass and Disinfection Valves

1. Activate the Bypass and Disinfection Valves

menu with the Bypass and Disinfection Valves
key in the LL Manual Test menu. The following
menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can activate a single valve or combined setting via the controller. The
actual condition is displayed by the supervisor. The following valves can be
activated:
Valves VBP Bypass valve
VDE Dialyser inlet valve
VDA Dialyser outlet valve
VD Disinfection valve
VZ Circulation valve
VLA Air separator valve

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 89

4.8.2.15 Test 1.15 Flow Pump FPA, Balance Chamber Sensors

and Air Separator

1. Activate the Flow Pump FPA, Balance Chamber

Sensors and Air Separator menu with the Flow
Pump FPA, Balance Chamber Sensors and Air
Separator key in the LL Manual Test menu. The
following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

BK BK If the test (initialisation) is started the switching

point of the membrane position sensor balance
chambers MSBK1/2 are detected. If the maximum
stroke of MSBK1/2 is reached the balance
chamber valves are automatically switched (see
figure).

MSBK MSBK

Fig. : Switch Point MSBK1/2

Phase 1
If you set the flow pump FPA the left side of one
of the balance chambers is filled by the flow
FPE pump FPE. Simultaneously the fluid in the right
side of the balance chamber is emptied to the

8 FPA
drain.

8
BK
Drain
Fig. : Filling Cycle Balance Chamber Phase 1

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 90

Phase 2
The right side of the balance chamber is filled
Dialyser with the fluid from the dialyser by the flow pump
FPA. Simultaneously the fresh fluid in the left side
of the balance chamber is delivered into the
dialyser circuit.
FPE The concentrate pump KP is set to a fixed speed

8 FPA
of 20 rpm during this test. Thereby a final
conductivity ENDLF of > 0.5 mS/cm is obtained if
concentrate is connected.

8 This conductivity is required to test the level

sensors in the air separator LA. If the lower level
sensor LAFSU is activated the air separator valve
VLA is opened and the balance chamber valves
BK are switched. Thereby FPE delivers fluid into the
Fig. : Filling Cycle Balance Chamber Phase 2 dialyser circuit. VLA is only closed and switched to
normal operation if the top level sensor LAFSO
detects fluid.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 91

4.8.2.16 Test 1.16 Pressure Water Part

1. Activate the Pressure Water Part menu with

the Pressure Water Part key in the LL Manual
Test menu. The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can skip directly to the calibration of the pressure sensors PE and PDA by

pressing the key.

The degassing pump EP can be set. The degassing bypass valve VEB can be
opened/closed.
The pressure at the degassing pressure sensor PE can be set with the degassing
pump EP and the degassing bypass valve VEB.
The pressure at the outlet dialysate pressure sensor PDA is set manually with a
syringe at the dialyser couplings.

Pressure in mbar The pressure can be displayed in mmHg or in mbar, depending on selection.

Conversion Factor mmHg to mbar

Conversion Factor = 1.3332
Example:
-100 mmHg approx. –133 mbar
–400 mmHg approx. –533 mbar

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 92

4.8.2.17 Test 1.17 UF Pump

1. Activate the UF Pump menu with the UF Pump

key in the LL Manual Test menu. The following
menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can set the speed of the UF pump UFP. The head speed and the calculated
flow are displayed. At the beginning of the test the balance chambers are
initialised. The flow pumps FPE/FPA are activated to reach the inlet pressure
for UFP, set by the value of the throttle DDE.

Flow Detector Not applicable.

Stroke Value UFP The Stroke Value UFP should not be used in a normal case, because UFP must
be calibrated (see LL Manual calibration).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 93

4.8.2.18 Test 1.18 Blood Leak

1. Activate the Blood Leak Detector menu with

the Blood Leak Detector key in the LL Manual
Test menu. The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.
You can check the following functions of the
blood leak detector:
• Red and green LED
• Receiver circuit
• Optical efficiency of the detector block

You can skip directly to the calibration of the blood leak detector by pressing

the key.
Blood Leak Detector The blood leak detector performs an automatic calibration of the zero point
with a reference diode.
The blood leak detector can be checked and calibrated. The rinsing block must
have an even temperature for calibration. If both dialyser couplings are
connected to the rinsing bridge the flow pumps FPA/FPE work in main flow.
If only one coupling is connected FPE is stopped. The test solution can be
drawn in by the second coupling via FPA. The first calibration point must be
performed with clean water from the water treatment system.

A function test and a calibration are performed for the blood leak detector.
If an actual value is out of limits during the function test, the blood leak
detector has to be exchanged.
Check the blood leak detector after a citro-thermal disinfection (LL Manual
Test, Test 1.18 Blood Leak Detector).
Close front and rear door for the function test to prevent light irradiation on
the sensor.
Leakages
Air and micro-bubbles can lead to false measurement values in the
measurement line and can cause fluctuation of the actual value.
If air is visible check the complete system for leaks in menu 1.20 Test Water
Part. After the initialisation phase rinse the blood leak detector approx. 1 min
and then perform a leakage test of the system in menu 1.19 Leak Test.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 94

Check Blood Leak Detector

Exchange the blood leak detector if one of these three values is out of limits.

1. Connect both dialyser couplings to the rinsing bridge.

2. Select menu 1.18 in TSM to perform a function check of the blood leak
detector.
3. Rinse the blood leak detector BL for approx. 1 min at the beginning of the
rinsing time with outlet flow pump FPA (approx. 1400 rpm). Thereby
possible air bubbles in the system are removed.
4. Rinse blood leak detector for approx. 15 to 30 min with FPA, approx. 1000
rpm to warm up the complete system to a temperature of approx. 40 oC.
5. The LED Test is activated with the LED TEST OFF key. The OFF key switches
to the RED key as soon as the key is pressed.
The red LED is tested after 10 s. The controller value for the switched off
red LED must be as follows (the supervisor value is uncritical):
red LED Actual Status Controller
Blood Concentration < 4.00
6. Press the LED TEST RED key to switch to the green LED. The RED key
switches to the GREEN key.
The green LED is tested. The controller value for the switched off green LED
must be as follows (the supervisor value is uncritical):
green LED Actual Status Controller
Blood Concentration > 2.06
7. The actual controller values for the red LED and the green LED must be
divided.
Note: The calculated value of red LED divided by green LED is displayed
briefly after the key LAMP TEST is switched back to OFF.
The calculated value must be in the following limits (to the first decimal
digit/round off):
red LED / green LED
1.15 - 1.44

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 95

4.8.2.19 Test 1.19 Leak Test

1. Activate the Leak Test menu with the Leak Test

key in the LL Manual Test menu. The following
menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can run a leakage test for the balance

chamber system, the bypass valve VBP and the
main flow valves VDE/VDA, the air separator valve
VLA and the UF pump UFP. The leakage test can
be started with a positive or negative pressure.
The flow system must be filled with water prior to
the leakage test (if necessary fill in menu 1.20
Water Part Overview).

Leak Test The following components are tested:

Membrane position sensors: MSBK1/2
Balance chamber valves: VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2, VEBK1/2, VABK1/2
Bypass valve: VBP
Dialyser in/output valves: VDE, VDA
Disinfection valve: VD
Air separator valve: VLA
* Membrane leak proof test: VDEBK/VABK (opened)
VDABK/VEBK/VLA (closed)
(*If Start Pressure Positive was set: An additional membrane leak proof test is performed
after the second test step.)
Start Pressure Positive If the test is activated for the dialysate circuit an automatic leakage test is
performed. The test is started with a positive test pressure and then followed
by a negative test pressure.
If the test is started with a positive test pressure an additional test step is
performed after the second test step. This additional step performs a leak proof
test of the membranes. The valves have the following position during the test:
• VDEBK/VABK: opened
• VDABK/VEBK/VLA: closed
The test pressure is present in the inlet balance chamber during this test. The
membrane seals the outlet of the test circuit. A defective membrane would
cause a pressure drop.
HDF Online
HDF online machines: the two additional test steps 2a and 2b are performed
after the membrane test. Thus the valves VDFF, VSB, VSAE and VSAA and the
substitution port are checked.
Start Pressure Negative If the test is activated for the dialysate circuit an automatic leakage test is
performed. The test is started with a negative test pressure and then followed
by a positive test pressure.

LLC Alarm The leakage test consists of three test steps. If an error occurs an LLC alarm is
activated (LLC Status 00020000).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 96

Test Procedure Positive Test Pressure • A positive pressure is built up with the FPE pump.
• The pump is stopped and the valves closed if the set-point pressure for PDA
= +400 mmHg is reached.
• The PDA reference value is stored after a wait state of 5 s.
• This reference value is compared with the actual value after 30 s.
• If the deviation is < 10 mmHg the next test step is performed.
Test Step 1 VLA, VEBK1/2, VABK1/2---------------- closed
Test Step 2 VLA, VDEBK1/2, VDABK1/2 ------------- closed
Note
Only if start pressure was positive
After the second test step a leak proof test of the membranes is performed. The
valves have the following position:
VDEBK/VABK: ---------------------------- opened
VDABK/VEBK/VLA: ----------------------- closed
Test Step 2a Note
Test step 2a and 2b only for HDF online machines.
VLA Air separator valve: ------------------ closed
VDFF DF filter valve: ---------------------- closed
VSB Substitution bypass valve: ------------ closed
VSAE Substitution connection inlet valve: - closed
Test Step 2b VLA Air separator valve: ------------------ closed
VDFF DF filter valve : --------------------- closed
VSB Substitution bypass valve: ------------ closed
VSAA Substitution connection outlet valve: closed
Test Step 3 VLA, VDE, VDA ------------------------ closed

HFB
VBE
VSB VSAE

PSAUS
HDF Filter

DF Filter PSABF
FSU

VSAA
DDE

A V
TSDE
T
VDFF PEV*
VDE
8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
FPE
FBK1 Z.D.
VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1 Dialyser
VDEBK2 VABK2 VLA
V.D.
LAFS FVD
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
MSBK2 FBK2
8
BK2 FPA LA VDA

Air SBS1 SB1

C B VD M
RVUFP
UFP RVFPA

LVD
SBS2 SB2
Fig.: Excerpt Flow Diagram for HDF Online

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 97

Negative Test Pressure The valve switching is identical with the above description.
Test Steps 1 to 3
• Negative pressure is built up with the UF pump after the third test step.
• The pump is stopped and the valves are closed if the set-point pressure for
PDA = - 400 mmHg is reached.
• The PDA reference value is stored after a wait state of 5 s.
• This reference value is compared with the actual value after 30 s.
• If the deviation is < 10 mmHg the next test step is performed.

Leak Test Heat Exchanger

The following component is tested:
Heat Exchanger: WT
Manual Leakage Test
Heat Exchanger (WT)
a) Rinse the flow circuit with water prior to the leakage test, to prevent air
bubbles in the test area.
b) Close all valves in the Dialog (switch off machine).
c) Connect a manometer and a syringe filled with water to the water outlet.
d) Build up a test pressure 400 mmHg (+ 50 mmHg) with the syringe and
close with tubing clamp.
e) Check pressure drop. The pressure drop must be < 50 mmHg in 30 s.
Leak Test Heat Exchanger (WT)
a) Rinse water circuit to prevent air bubbles.
b) Close the outlet.
c) Activate test.
The FPE builds up a pressure.
d) Check pressure drop. The pressure drop must be < 50 mmHg in 30 s.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 98

4.8.2.20 Test 1.20 Water Part (Overview)

1. Activate the Water Part (Overview) menu with

the Water Part (Overview) key in the LL
Manual Test menu. The following menu is
displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can set the speed for the flow pump FPE/FPA. The heater power H % can
be set in %. The speed of the concentrate pumps BICP/KP can be set manually.
After starting this menu the balance chamber is initialised. Then the flow pump
FPE is set to the same speed as FPA. The balance chamber valves are switched
automatically.
Main Flow The machine can be switched between main flow and bypass for servicing.
Main Flow
Valves VDA/VDE are open (valve symbols are black).
Valve VBP is closed (valve symbol is white).
Bypass
Valves VDA/VDE are closed (valve symbols are white).
Valve VBP is open (valve symbol is black).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 99

4.8.2.21 Test 1.21 Emptying

1. Activate the Emptying menu with the

Emptying key in the LL Manual Test menu. The
following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can drain the system. After the emptying key is activated the drain
procedure is started. The actual value, i.e. the fluid level of the upline tank VB
is displayed by the level sensors NSVB.

Start the Emptying ON at least three times and manually clamp the bypass
(tubing) to ensure a sufficient emptying (for transportation).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 100

4.8.2.22 Test 1.22 HDF

Not applicable.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 101

4.8.2.23 Test 1.23 BIC Cartridge Valves and Coupling Detectors

1. Activate the BIC Cartridge Valves and Coupling

Detectors menu with the BIC Cartridge Valves
and Coupling Detectors key in the LL Manual
Test menu. The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

Valves VVB, VBICP, VBKO, VBKS The valves VVB, VBICP, VBKO and VBKS can be switched either separately or
together.
Detectors BKUS, BKUS_S The status of the reed sensor (OPEN/CLOSED) is displayed.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 102

4.8.2.24 Test 1.24 HDF Online

Exchange Intervals:
The HFB filter must be exchanged on an annual basis.

1. Activate the HDF Online menu with the HDF

Online key in the LL Manual Test menu. The
following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can check the function of the HDF online substitution pump OSP (BPV) and
the additional valves.
Online Substitution Pump The function of the HDF online substitution pump OSP (BPV) can be checked.
OSP (BPV)
Valves The flow path through both filters (DF and HDF) can be set via the valves.
VBE, VDFF, VSB, VSAE, VSAA
Before operation in main flow the DF filter inlet must be vented via VDFF,
because the membranes of the DF filter and HDF filter are impermeable to air.
Valve VBE can only be opened if PDA < -100 mmHg to prevent fluid
penetration.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 103

4.8.2.25 Test 1.25 HDF Online Valves and Coupling Detectors

1. Activate the HDF Online Valves and Coupling

Detectors menu with the HDF Online Valves
and Coupling Detectors key in the LL Manual
Test menu. The following menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can activate and deactivate the HDF online valves.

Valves You can either activate or deactivate a single valve with the Desired Setting
VBE, VDFF, VSB, VSAE, VSAA icon or all valves VBE, VDFF, VSB, VSAE, VSAA with the Common Setting icon.
Thus the feedback from the LLS can be checked.
Detectors PSAUSS (substitution port outlet sensor)
The status of the additional coupling sensor PSAUS can be checked.
PSABFS (substitution port drain sensor)
The status of the additional coupling sensor PSABFS can be checked.
FEDFFS (filter recognition DF filter)
The status of the additional coupling sensor FEDFFS can be checked.
FEHDFS (filter recognition HDF filter)
The status of the additional coupling sensor FEHDFS can be checked.

FEHDFS

PSABFS PSAUS

FEDFFS

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 104

4.8.2.26 Test 1.26 Option Battery

Charge Batteries
To guarantee battery operation the batteries may have to be charged for
several hours if the Dialog was not connected to mains for a longer period.
If the batteries are empty the charge time is > 8 hours to guarantee a
battery running time of at least 20 minutes.

1. Activate the Option (Rechargeable) Battery

menu with the Option (Rechargeable) Battery
key in the LL Manual Test menu. The following
menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.
The enable parameter can be set and the
following parameters can be checked:
Setting
• Akku Enable (battery enable, AKKU_EN signal)
Check
• Power Fail (PF signal)
• Akku OK (battery OK, AKKU_OK signal)
• External State (EXT_STATE signal)

Akku Enable The enable signal is set to ON by the LLC in therapy. Thus indicating to the
(Battery Enable) power supply that the battery operation can be enabled in the case of a power
breakdown. In all other operating modes (with the exception of therapy) the
Akku Enable (battery enable, AKKU_EN signal) is set to OFF, i.e. the machine is
switched off in case of a power breakdown.
1. Battery charged (charge LED off), i.e. Akku OK (battery OK) = ON
2. Set Akku Enable (battery enable) to ON.
3. Disconnect machine from mains with mains plug.
A three-tone signal is activated via the buzzer from the switch mode power
supply to indicate that the machine is running in battery operation.
• Blood pump(s) run(s)
• Monitor is on
• Power Fail = ON
• Akku OK (battery OK) changes from ON to OFF
Power Fail The switch mode power supply sends the signal to the LLC indicating a power
failure.
OFF Mains voltage present (and in the tolerance limits)
ON Mains voltage not present (or out of tolerance limits)
Akku OK ON Battery capacity ≥ required capacity for 20 minutes battery running
(Battery OK) time
OFF Battery capacity < required capacity for 20 minutes battery running
time
External State Indicates if machine was switched on externally.
ON Machine was switched on externally

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 105

4.8.2.27 Test 1.27 DFS Pressure Test of Therapy

1. Activate the DFS Pressure Test of Therapy

menu with the DFS Pressure Test of Therapy
key in the LL Manual Test menu. The following
menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

Start Key You can activate the DFS pressure test with the Start key from the self test in
Preparation.
Stop Key The test run can be terminated with the Stop key. The key jumps back to Start
in case of an error or at the end of the pressure test.
Test Code The test codes for LLC and LLS are displayed for all test phases. In case of an
error the defective components can be determined with the help of the test
description.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 106

4.8.2.28 Test 1.28 Front Panel Board FPB (LLS)

1. Activate the Front Panel Board FPB menu with

the Front Panel Board FPB key in the LL
Manual Test menu. The following menu is
displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

You can check the LEDs and keys on the front

panel board FPB via the supervisor LLS.

Lamp
• OSD Red LED Left/Right
If you press the Lamp key the red LEDs on the OSD
boards are switched on (OFF/ON) and checked
with a feedback from the red LEDs to the
supervisor LLS.

Alarm Sound
• Loudspeaker Frequency
If you press the Alarm Sound key the loudspeaker
is switched on and checked with a feedback
(Loudspeaker Frequency ON) from the loudspeaker
to the supervisor LLS.
If the loudspeaker is not connected the
Loudspeaker Frequency stays OFF.
Test Blood Pump Keys
• Blood Pump – Key

Press the key on the front panel board FPB

and wait for switching (OFF/ON).
• Blood Pump START/STOP Key

stop
Press the key on the front panel board
FPB and wait for switching (OFF/ON).
• Blood Pump + Key

Press the key on the front panel board

FPB and wait for switching (OFF/ON).
Test Alarm Quit/Enter Key
• Alarm Key

Press the key on the front panel board

FPB and wait for switching (OFF/ON).
• Enter Key

Press the key on the front panel board

FPB and wait for switching (OFF/ON).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 107

4.8.2.29 Test 1.29 Patient Leakage Current

1. Activate the Patient Leakage Current menu

with the Patient Leakage Current key in the LL
Manual Test menu. The following menu is
displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.
Patient Leakage Current
You can set all required parameters for the
measurement of the patient leakage current in the
menu. The following parameters and functions are
available:
• Automatic control of the conductivity after
entering the set point value (default: max.
conductivity setting).
• Heater can be switched on and off manually
(automatic switch-off at 60 °C).
• Possibility to switch from Main Flow to Bypass
(default: main flow).
• Set point can be set for the speed of the blood
pump (default 0)
• Display of the conductivity and temperature
• DF flow between 500 – 600 ml/min depending
on pump
Conductivity
The conductivity can be activated for the
measurement of the patient leakage current.
Heater
The heater can be switched on for the
measurement of the patient leakage current. The
heater is controlled with 100 % until it reaches
60 oC and is then switched off.
BPA
The blood pump can be activated additionally if
the measurement is performed with tubing set
(line).
Main Flow
The machine can be switched between main flow
and bypass.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 108

4.8.2.30 Test 1.30 SMPS-MC Self Tests

1. Activate the Test 1.30 SMPS-MC Self Tests

menu with the SMPS-MC Self Tests key in the
Low Level Manual Test menu. The following
menu is displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

The switch mode power supply microcontroller

SMPS-MC can be tested with the self test
functions in this menu.
The relays K3/K4 are deactivated during all self
tests.
The self tests are described in detail on the next
page.
#110 Service Mode (/DIR)
#111 Buzzer
#112 Battery
Note: #112 Battery is performed only if the
battery option is present.
#113 EEPROM
#114 Hardware Watchdog
Note: This window appears if the #Test 114 was
performed. The safety switch-off of the
SMPS-MC must be reset after the test, i.e.
the machine must be disconnected from
mains for > 30 s (disconnect mains plug
from mains receptacle).
#115 Buzzer Test by LLS
Ver/SW
The software version of the SMPS-MC is
displayed.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 109

4.8.2.30.1 Self Tests SMPS-MC

Relays K3/K4 are deactivated during all self tests.

No. Test Description Reaction SMPS-MC Reaction Dialog+
- Flash memory Microcontroller of SMPS- Condition:
MC checks the flash • Machine connected to mains
memory Response:
• Power-On reset + CRC
Condition:
• Mains switch ON
Response:
• Watchdog timer reset + CRC
Error in flash:
• Switch-on not possible, quick flashing of the
operating status LED H900 (5 .. 10 Hz)
110 Service mode Microcontroller of SMPS- Service jumper X101 connected if /DIR_ON = 0 (service jumper
(/DIR_ON) MC checks the operating • TSM mode (alarms deactivated) X101 connected):
mode Service jumper X101 not connected • Therapy is rejected
• Therapy mode (alarms activated) • Error message is generated
111 Buzzer test Microcontroller of the
(the buzzer is SMPS-MC checks the
tested via LLS in function of the buzzer
# 115) (without drive/activation
from LLS)
112 Battery test Check whether battery is OK:
(is performed connected and if • Battery present and charged sufficiently
only if option is connected, check whether not OK: if not OK:
present) battery is charged • Battery not present or not charged sufficiently • Warning is generated
sufficiently • Therapy still possible
113 EEPROM Microcontroller of the
SMPS-MC checks the
EEPROM memory
(EEPROM currently not
used)
114 Hardware In TSM service program Condition:
watchdog WD only • Trigger HW-WD
A simulated microcontroller Response:
failure tests the function of • Buzzer and staff call ON
the hardware watchdog • +24 VGX OFF
(the trigger signals for the • Heater OFF
hardware WD are switched Only a reset of the microcontroller (enable voltage)
off) deactivates the alarm (mains connector must be
disconnected from the mains > 30 s)
If switch-off time < 30 s
Mains plug was connected again without waiting more
than 30 s. LED H900 on SMPS-MC continues to flash
- Remove fuse on battery rack -- LED H900 goes
out.
- Insert again the fuse.
115 Buzzer test via Microcontroller of SMPS- The +24 VGB and +24 VGD are always switched off
LLS MC checks the function of during this test (a communication between LLS and
the buzzer SMPS-MC is not possible without this switch-off)
• LLC informs LLS via DIABUS
• LLC sends #115 to SMPS-MC
• LLS must activate AKAL-S within 5 s
OK:
• Buzzer OK.
not OK: if not OK:
• Buzzer not OK. • Warning is generated
• Therapy still possible

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 110

4.8.2.31 Test 1.31 Level Regulation

1. Activate the Test 1.31 Level Regulation menu
with the Level Regulation key in the Low Level
Manual Test menu. The following menu is
displayed.
2. Check the functions with the appropriate keys.

The valves VPE, VPD, VPU, VPV, VPA, and VBT are
Front Door all assembled on the level regulation module. All
Outside Inside valves can be activated and tested. The
PA manometer connectors must be opened for the
1 2 2 1 1 2 PIN test.
3 3 3
HFA VBT PV VPA VPD
VPD VPA
2 1 VPE VPU VPV VBT
HFV 3 LRP
PBE VPV

2 1
1 2
HFS
3 POUT VPE VP

HFE 3 VPU HFE D

VPU
PBS VPE VPV VP
A VBT
PBE PBS HFV
HFP
LRP HFP
HFS PV HFA
PA
Level Module

PA Chamber PV Chamber PBE Chamber

Actual Status Supervisor LRP (PPR) OFF/ON

The supervisor must detect correctly the current
status of the level regulation pump LRP (PPR).
Desired Setting OFF/ON
The level regulation pump LRP (PPR) can be
switched on and off.
Slow/Fast The desired value for the LRP can be switched
between a Slow and a Fast setting.
Test The delivery of the LRP can be checked with the
Test key. A measurement chamber must be
connected to PV. LRP stops when 500 ml are
reached and the required time for the pressure
build-up is displayed.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-2-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 111

4.8.3 Low Level Manual Calibration

4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information
Specifications for Measurement Instruments
Measurement instruments (e.g. dialysis measurement instrument) used
to calibrate Dialog machines are subject to regular inspections or if
necessary calibration by the respective manufacturer or by a certified
calibration lab.

Pressure For ABPM

• Accuracy ≤ 0.8 mmHg
Pressure For PV, PA, PBS, PBE
• Accuracy ≤ ±1 mmHg
Temperature • Temperature accuracy: ≤ ±0.2 oC
• Temperature resolution minimum 0.1 oC
Conductivity • Temperature coefficient α = 2.10 %/oC (set)
• Reference temperature TRef = 25 oC (set)
• Correct cell constant (set)
• Conductivity accuracy: ≤ ±0.1 mS/cm
• Conductivity resolution 0.01 mS/cm
Balance • Measurement range >200 g, accuracy < 0.5 g
Manometer For PE and PDA:
• Accuracy Class ≤ 0.5
For DMV, RVFPA, RVFPE, DDE and RVDA:
• Accuracy Class ≤ 1.0
Flow Meter 4 % of final value:
• 1.1 l/min, approx. ± 44 ml/min

Hardware Keys
Various keys (software keys and hardware keys) are used during
calibration. The hardware keys (on the front panel board) can be used
via the keyboard membrane (see figure). The function and significance
of the hardware keys are as follows.

Dialog+ + -
start
stop
Adimea
Fig. : Symbols of Hardware Keys on Keyboard Membrane of Monitor

Input values can be decreased in increments with the displayed

hardware key as an alternative to the software key on the touch screen.

Input values can be increased in increments with the displayed

hardware key as an alternative to the software key on the touch screen.

The service overview can be selected in the TSM with the hardware key.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 112

Software Keys and Icons

The software keys and icons are displayed in

the respective menus of the TSM service
program and can be used via the touch screen.
The procedure for calibration of the sensors is
similar in all Low Level Manual Calibration
menus.
Example
Select the menu via the following menus:
• TSM Main Menu
• Manual Test and Calibration
• Low Level Manual Calibration
• Calibration 2.1 Pressure Sensors (Blood Side)

Function of the Software Keys and Icons The function of the software keys and icons are as follows:

Press the HELP key to see the help information of the menu.

A single sensor can be selected for calibration with the Calibration

key. A lower calibration window is opened (see second figure).

A combined sensor calibration can be selected with the Common

Calibration key. A lower calibration window is opened (see second
figure on next page).

If required, the previous calibration menu or the next calibration

menu can be selected with the Previous and Next Arrow keys.

The menu can be closed with the Exit Door key.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 113

The key was selected. A

calibration window is opened (bottom section
of the menu).

Function of the Software Keys und Icons The function of the software keys und icons during calibration are
as follows:
The max. number of calibration points is displayed, e.g. three
calibration points. Click on key: the number of calibration points can
be modified with the -/+ keys. We recommend keeping the
suggested number or increasing only, do not decrease the number.
The actual calibration point is displayed, e.g. first calibration point.

The suggested reference value is displayed for the first calibration

point.
If the reference value key is pressed, an input keypad is displayed.
The value from the measurement instrument can be entered. The
entered value must be in the permissible limits (e.g. –100 to 500
mmHg).
The entered value can be cancelled and the window is closed.
The entered value can be confirmed with the OK key and the
window is closed.

The calibration point with the entered calibration value can be

confirmed and the calibration value is saved. The sensor values must
be checked in therapy mode (service overview) after calibration.
The calibration procedure is completed and the new calibration data
0 are stored in the LLC and LLS.

010 Note: Pay attention to the LLC and LLS status windows. The bit
sequence 0-1-0 must be identical in the LLC and LLS status
windows during the saving procedure. The calibration data is
saved only after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (see figure).
0 Save the calibration data to the compact flash card before exiting
the TSM service program: TSM Main Menu, File Operations, Save
010 Calibration Data.
A calibration procedure can be terminated. The existing calibration
data are maintained in the LLS and LLC.

Conversion Table Voltage/Digits Controller/Supervisor (12 bit)

Voltage 0 to 5 V
Digits 0 to 4095

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 114

4.8.3.2 Select Low Level Manual Calibration

You can calibrate all sensors in the LL Manual
Calibration menu. The number of calibration
points is preset.
Some sensors have the possibility to run a
combined or a single calibration.
The TSM Main Menu is displayed after the
machine is switched on (set service switch S1 to
position 2, on digital board).

1. Activate the Manual Test & Calibration menu

with the Manual Test & Calibration key in the
TSM Main Menu. The following menu is
displayed.

2. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with

the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu. The following menu
is displayed.
The following low level calibrations can be
selected:
• 2.1 Pressure Sensors (Blood Side)
• 2.2 Heparin Pump (not applicable)
• 2.3 Pressure Sensors (Water Side)
• 2.4 Degassing Temperature
• 2.5 Dialysis Temperature
• 2.6 Conductivity
• 2.7 Blood Leak Detector
• 2.8 Flow of BICP, KP and UF
• 2.9 Safety Air Detector SAD
• 2.10 BICLF Ratio and ENDLF Ratio
• 2.11 Load Cell (not applicable)
• 2.12 PV Alarm Window, PA Low Limit
• 2.13 Flow of BPA and BPV Pump
• 2.14 Substitution Pump (not applicable)
• 2.15 HDF Online Substitution Pump OSP
• 2.16 Level Regulation

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 115

4.8.3.3 Calibration Pressure Sensors Blood

Side PA, PV, PBE and PBS

Prior to Calibration • Use calibrated measurement instrument

• Wait until Dialog has reached working temperature
You can calibrate the following pressure sensors of the blood side either
separately or combined:
• PA arterial pressure sensor
• PV venous pressure sensor
• PBE blood inlet pressure sensor
• PBS blood control pressure sensor
After a calibration compare the pressure sensor values in the test menu. The
sensor values are displayed in digits (see conversion table).

mmHg
PV PA PBE PBS
o
C
BPA BPV mS/cm
HP

SAD
RDV

SAKV-SG SAKA

V A
Fig. : Single Needle Version

1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu

with the LL Manual Calibration key in the
Manual Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Pressure Sensors Blood Side
menu by pressing on the line Calibration 2.1
Pressure Sensors Blood Side. The following
menu is displayed.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 116

A common calibration or a single calibration can

be performed for the pressure sensors.
Common Calibration

Press the key for a combined

calibration of the pressure sensors PA, PV, PBE
and PBS. A calibration window is opened if the
key is selected. The common calibration of all
blood pressure sensors is recommended. The menu
shows the Common Calibration.
Single Calibration

Press an individual key for a

single calibration of the pressure sensor PA, PV,
PBE or PBS. A calibration window is opened if the
key is selected.

Press the key to enter a

reference value. A keypad is opened if the key is
selected.
Pay attention to the negative or
positive sign during the enter of the
reference value.

• Pressure measurement instrument (e.g. HDM 99 or equivalent)

• Syringe
• Stopcock system with lines (770203A) or tubing/tubing clamp
3. Connect the pressure measurement instrument, syringe and stopcock
system.
4. Connect the tubing to the respective pressure sensors PA, PV, PBE and/or
PBS (option).

5. Press key.
PA/PV/PBE/PBS Calibration Point 6. Build up a pressure of -100 mmHg (+10 mmHg) with a syringe and clamp
-100 mmHg the tube.

7. Press key.
Wait until digits are stable.
8. Enter the stable value from the pressure measurement instrument as
reference value.

9. Confirm with the key.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 117

PA/PV/PBE/PBS Calibration Point 10. Remove syringe for the 0 mmHg calibration (open to atmosphere).
0 mmHg
Wait until digits are stable.

11. Confirm the reference value 0 mmHg with the key.

PA/PV/PBE/PBS Calibration Point 12. Connect syringe and build up a pressure of +500 mmHg (-10 mmHg) and
+500 mmHg clamp the tube.

13. Press key.

14. Enter the stable value from the pressure measurement instrument as
reference value.
Wait until digits are stable.

15. Confirm with the key.

Note: The calibration data is saved only after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (for
detailed information see 4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information).

16. Confirm and store completed calibration with key.

17. Remove pressure measurement instrument, syringe and tubing.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 118

4.8.3.4 Heparin Pump

Not applicable.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 119

4.8.3.5 Calibration Degassing Pressure Sensor PE

Prior to Calibration • Use calibrated manometer (or pressure measurement instrument)

• Position the manometer at the same level (see A in bottom figure) as the
degassing pressure sensor PE
• Keep the extra tubings as short as possible for calibration
• Wait until Dialog has reached working temperature
You can calibrate the degassing pressure sensor PE. Build up the negative
pressure in the degassing circuit with a syringe.

DMV
VLA

RVDA

VVBE SKBS
NSVB DBK*

H
T
TSE TSBIC
EK VB WT
WAB
VBICP*

A PE
A
TSH
T

VBKO*
T
TSHE
FEP

VEB VVB*

8 EP VBKS
RVBO*
Fig.: Degassing Circuit and PE

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 120

NSVB
H
WT

TSE
WAB

VZ
EP
VZ VEB EP VVBE
VVBE TSHE
FEP

DMV
DMV PE

Fig.: Original Tubing Water Sub-Rack (rear view) Fig.: Original Tubing Water Sub-Rack (front view)

NSVB
H
WT

TSE
WAB

VZ
VZ VEB EP EP
VVBE VVBE
TSHE
FEP

DMV
PE DMV

Fig.: Water Sub-Rack with Loop-In for Manometer at PE and Tubing Fig.: Water Sub-Rack with Tubing Clamp between FEP and EP (front
Clamp at VEB (rear view) view)

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 121

The calibration for the degassing pressure sensor PE is performed with a two
point calibration (-400 mmHg/-533 mbar and –100 mmHg/-133 mbar).
The calibration can be performed either with a manometer or a pressure
measurement instrument. The calibration is described with a manometer. The
measurement unit mmHg or mbar can be selected for calibration.
Conversion Factor mmHg to mbar
Conversion Factor = 1.3332
Example:
-100 mmHg approx. –130 mbar
–400 mmHg approx. –530 mbar
• Manometer or pressure measurement instrument
• Syringe
• Y piece
• Tubing and tubing clamps
1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu
with the LL Manual Calibration key in the
Manual Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Pressure Sensors (Water Side)
menu by pressing on the line Calibration 2.3
Pressure Sensors (Water Side). The following
menu is displayed.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 122

Pay attention to the negative sign during the enter of the reference value.

Prevent offset during calibration

Pay attention that there is no fluid in the tubing to the manometer.
3. Clamp tubing at filter degassing pump FEP inlet.
4. Clamp tubing between degassing bypass valve VEB and degassing
pressure sensor PE and pull off tubing from the degassing pressure sensor
PE.
5. Connect a manometer and a syringe to the PE sensor, using a Y-piece and
extra tubing.
If required.

6. You can set the measurement unit to mbar with the key if you
want to perform a calibration in mbar.
PE Calibration Point -400 mmHg 7. Press Degassing Pressure PE key.
–530 mbar
8. Use a syringe to create a negative pressure of (reading on manometer
display):
• -400 mmHg ±10 mmHg
• -530 mbar ±13 mbar

9. Press key.
10. Enter the stable value from the manometer as reference value.
Wait until digits are stable.

11. Confirm with key.

PE Calibration Point -100 mmHg 12. Use syringe and create a negative pressure of (reading on manometer
–130 mbar display):
• -100 mmHg ±10 mmHg
• -130 mbar ±13 mbar

13. Press key.

14. Enter the stable value from the manometer as reference value.
Wait until digits are stable.

15. Confirm with key.

16. Confirm and store complete calibration procedure with key.

Note: The calibration data is saved only after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (for
detailed information see 4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information).
17. Remove calibration devices.
18. Reconnect tubings.
19. Check function in TSM menu Test 1.16 Pressure Water Part:
• Open degassing bypass valve VEB and set speed of degassing pump
EP to 1,500 rpm
• PE should show a of approx. < -35 mmHg/-50 mbar
• Close VEB and increase speed to 2,100 rpm
• PE should show a value of approx. < -500 mmHg/-670 mbar

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 123

4.8.3.5.1 Calibration Degassing Pressure

Sensor PE for Machines at High
Altitudes of >1,000 m
For calibration point -400 mmHg/-530 mbar
If the Dialog machine is used at high altitudes (>1,000 m above sea level), an
offset of +75 mmHg/+100 mbar per 1000 m must be used for the calibration
of the degassing pressure sensor PE.
Measurement unit mmHg
1,000 m altitude: –325 mmHg (–400 mmHg + 75 mmHg offset = –325 mmHg)
2,000 m altitude: –250 mmHg (–400 mmHg + 150 mmHg offset = –250 mmHg)
3,000 m altitude: –175 mmHg (–400 mmHg + 225 mmHg offset = –175 mmHg)
Measurement unit mbar
1,000 m altitude: –430 mbar (–530 mbar + 100 mbar offset = –430 mbar)
2,000 m altitude: –330 mbar (–530 mbar + 200 mbar offset = –330 mbar)
3,000 m altitude: –230 mbar (–530 mbar + 300 mbar offset = –230 mbar)
Example for Calibration at 1,000 m
Altitude
1. Clamp tubing at filter degassing pump FEP.
2. Clamp tubing between degassing bypass valve VEB and degassing
pressure sensor PE and pull off tubing from the degassing pressure sensor
PE.
3. Connect a manometer and a syringe to the PE sensor, using a Y-piece and
extra tubing.
PE Calibration Point -400 mmHg
–530 mbar 4. Press the Degassing Pressure PE key.
5. Use syringe and create a negative pressure, e.g. at 1,000 m altitude:
• –325 mmHg ±10 mmHg (-400 mmHg plus offset +75 mmHg/1,000 m)
• -430 mbar ±13 mbar (-530 mbar plus offset +100 mbar/1,000 m)

6. Press key.
7. Enter the stable reference value:
• –325 mmHg ±10 mmHg (-400 mmHg plus offset +75 mmHg/1,000 m)
• –430 mbar ±13 mbar (-530 mbar plus offset +100 mbar/1,000 m)
Wait until digits are stable.

8. Confirm with key.

PE Calibration Point 0 mmHg 11. Remove syringe (0 mmHg/0 mbar).
0 mbar
12. Press key.
13. Enter 0 mmHg/0 mbar.
Wait until digits are stable.

14. Confirm with key.

15. Confirm and store complete calibration procedure with key.

Note: The calibration data is saved only after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (for
detailed information see 4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information).
16. Remove calibration devices.
17. Reconnect tubings.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 124

4.8.3.6 Calibration Dialysate Outlet Pressure Sensor PDA

Prior to Calibration • Use calibrated manometer (or pressure measurement instrument)

• Position the manometer at the same level as the dialysate outlet pressure
sensor PDA (see figure, A)
• Keep the extra tubings as short as possible for calibration
• Wait until Dialog has reached working temperature
You can calibrate the dialysate outlet pressure sensor PDA. Build up the
negative or positive pressure in the dialysate circuit with a syringe. Pay
attention to the position of VDA, it must be closed or the tubing must be
clamped manually.

FBK2

DF Filter TSDE
T
A V
WAB
VDE PEV*
VBP

Z.D.
Dialyser
VLA
V.D.
LAFS FVD
FBK2
8
LA
A
FPA VDA
BL PDA
Air SBS1 SB1
VD M
RVFPA

LVD
SBS2 SB2

Fig.: Dialysate Circuit and PDA

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 125

PDA
A

FVD

Fig.: Rinsing Bridge with Loop-In for Manometer/Syringe

VDE

TSDE
VD
PDA

BL

Fig.: Rinsing Bridge with Tubing Clamp between BL and PDA

Pay attention that there is no fluid in the tubing to the manometer. Ensure
that the manometer and connection tubing are at the same level as the
dialysate outlet pressure sensor PDA.
The calibration for the dialysate outlet pressure sensor PDA is performed with a
three point calibration (-400 mmHg/-533 mbar, 0 mmHg/0 mbar and +400
mmHg/+533 mbar).
The calibration can be performed either with a manometer or a pressure
measurement instrument. The calibration is described with a manometer. A
measurement unit mmHg or mbar can be selected for calibration.
Conversion Factor mmHg to mbar
Conversion Factor = 1.3332
Example:
–400 mmHg approx. –530 mbar
0 mmHg 0 mbar
+400 mmHg approx. +530 mbar

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 126

• Manometer or pressure measurement instrument

• Syringe
• Y piece
• Tubing and tubing clamp
1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with
the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Pressure Sensors Water Side menu
by pressing on the line Calibration 2.3 Pressure
Sensors Water Side. The following menu is
displayed.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 127

Pay attention to the negative or positive sign during the enter of the reference
value.
Prevent offset during calibration
Pay attention that there is no fluid in the tubing to the manometer.
3. Disconnect tubing (to filter FVD) from rinsing bridge.
4. Connect manometer and a syringe to the left tubing connector outlet (red
dialyser coupling) on rinsing bridge.
5. Clamp tubing between blood leak detector BL and dialysate outlet
pressure sensor PDA.

6. Set measurement unit to mbar with the key if you want to

perform a calibration in mbar.
PDA Calibration Point -400 mmHg 7. Press Dialysis Pressure PDA key.
–530 mbar

8. Press key and enter a third calibration point.

9. Use a syringe to create a negative pressure of (reading on manometer
display):
• -400 mmHg ±10 mmHg
• -530 mbar ±13 mbar

10. Press key.

11. Enter the stable value from the manometer as reference value.
Wait until digits are stable.

12. Confirm with the key.

PDA Calibration Point 0 mmHg 13. Open syringe to atmosphere for 0 mmHg/0 mbar calibration.
0 mbar

14. Press key.

15. Enter the value “0” from the manometer as reference value.
Wait until digits are stable.

16. Confirm with the key.

PDA Calibration Point +400 mmHg 17. Use the syringe to create a positive pressure of (reading on manometer
+ 530 mbar display):
• +400 mmHg ±10 mmHg
• +530 mbar ±13 mbar

18. Press key.

19. Enter the stable value from the manometer as reference value.
Wait until digits are stable.

20. Confirm with key.

21. Confirm and store complete calibration procedure with key.

Note: The calibration data is saved only after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (for
detailed information see 4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information).
22. Remove calibration devices.
23. Reconnect tubings.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 128

4.8.3.7 Calibration Degassing Temperature Sensor TSE/

Heater Inlet Temperature Sensor TSHE
Prior to Calibration • Position the heater inlet temperature sensor TSHE next to TSE (see figure
redirect heater inlet temperature sensor TSHE, next page)
• Use calibrated measurement instrument
• Wait until Dialog has reached working temperature
The degassing temperature sensor TSE and the heater inlet temperature sensor
TSHE are calibrated together. The following calibration points are used:
TSE / TSHE: 30 °C, 40 °C, 85 °C

Measurement
Instrument
DMV DMV
VLA

RVDA
ml/min
o
VVBE SKBS VVBE C
DBK* DBK*

SKBS
mS/cm
NSVB

NSVB
H H
T T T
TSBIC
EK VB WT
TSE EK VB WT TSHE TSE
WAB
VBICP*
WB
T T
PE TSH PE TSH
A
A
D
D
T
T
TSHE VBKO* VBKO*

TSHE
FEP
FEP
VEB VVB*
EP VEB VVB*
8 EP VBKS
RVBO*
VBKS
. .. 8 RVBO*
Fig.: Temperature Circulation Fig.: Loop-In Point and TSHE in Line with TSE for Calibration

Measurement
Instrument
NSVB
NSVB
WT
WT ml/min
o
H C
H
mS/cm
Measurement
Sensor
KP/BICP KP/BICP DBK
DBK
TSE
TSHE
Keep tubings as short
VEB as possible
VEB WAB TSE
TSHE
WAB
RVDA RVDA

EP FEP EP FEP

Fig.: Original Tubing Water Sub-Rack for TSE/TSHE Fig.: Water Sub-Rack with TSHE in Line with TSE for Calibration

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 129

1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with

the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Degassing Temperature menu by
pressing on the line Calibration 2.4 Degassing
Temperature. The following menu is displayed.

• Temperature measurement instrument (e.g. HDM 99 or equivalent)

• Adapter set (coupling/tubing/dialyser couplings)
3. Position the heater inlet temperature sensor TSHE (on the water sub-rack)
next to TSE (see previous page).
4. Connect the adapter set between the heater inlet temperature sensor
TSHE and water block WAB.
Note: Pay attention to correct flow direction of temperature sensor TSHE.
5. Connect temperature measurement instrument to adapter set.
6. Set degassing pump EP to 1800 rpm.

7. Press TSE/TSHE key.

o
TSE/TSHE Calibration Point 30 C 8. Increase heater power (in %) slowly, until a stable temperature value of
30 oC (±2 oC) is displayed at the temperature measurement instrument.
Wait until temperature is stable, i.e. 0.1 oC for at least 10 s.

9. Press key.
10. Enter the stable value from the temperature measurement instrument as
reference value.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 130

Wait until digits are stable.

11. Confirm with the key.

TSE/TSHE Calibration Point 40 oC 12. Increase heater power (in %) slowly, until a stable temperature value of
40 oC (±2 oC) is displayed at the temperature measurement instrument.
Wait until temperature is stable, i.e. 0.1 oC for at least 10 s.

13. Press key.

14. Enter the stable value from the measurement instrument as reference
value.

15. Confirm with the key.

o
TSE/TSHE Calibration Point 85 C 16. Slowly increase heater power (in %), until a stable temperature value of
85 oC (±2 oC) is displayed at the temperature measurement instrument.
Wait until temperature is stable, i.e. 0.1 oC for at least 10 s.

17. Press key.

18. Enter the stable value from the temperature measurement instrument.

19. Confirm with the key.

20. Confirm and store complete calibration procedure with key.

Note: The calibration data is saved only after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (for
detailed information see 4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information).
21. Set heater power to 0% and rinse briefly with flow pump FPE to cool
down the water (menu 1.9, in Low Level Manual Test) and to prevent
scalding.
22. Stop degassing pump EP and flow pump FPE, and disconnect adapter set.
23. Reassemble the heater inlet temperature sensor TSHE to the original
position (see previous page).
Note: Pay attention to correct flow direction of temperature sensor TSHE.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 131

4.8.3.8 Calibration Temperature Sensors

TSBIC/TSD/TSD-S and TSDE
The conductivity sensors BICLF and ENDLF/ENDLF-S have to be calibrated
after every calibration of the temperature sensors TSBIC/TSD/TSDS/TSDE
(in menu (LL Manual Calibration, Calibration 2.6 Conductivity).

Temperature Measurement Instrument Technical Data:

(e.g. HDM 99 or equivalent) • Temperature accuracy: ≤ ±0.2 oC
• Temperature resolution minimum 0.1 oC
• Use calibrated temperature measurement instrument
Prior to Calibration • Wait until Dialog has reached working temperature
The following calibration points are used:
• Calibration points TSBIC/TSD/TSD-S/TSDE: 30 oC, 38 oC, 50 oC
• Temperature oscillation range: ± 1 digit/0.1 oC (displayed value of Dialog)
over 10 s, i.e. the temperature should be constant over a time period of
10 s to be considered stable.
Measurement of the Temperature and the Conductivity
The measurement sensor for temperature and conductivity of the measurement
instrument is connected between FPE and the inlet to the balance chamber
(see figure).
Measurement of the Flow
Connect the dialyser couplings to a flow sensor.

RVFPE T
DDE VDE
TSBIC TSD TSD-S TSDE
T T T 8
BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE T VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
RVB RVK
TSDE
VEBK1 VDABK1
A B C D FBK1 MSBK1
BICP KP VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2
LAFS
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
MSBK2 FBK2
8
BK2 FPA LA VDA

RVFPA
Fig.: Assemble TSDE from Rinsing Bridge to FBK1 on UF Sub-Rack

Measurement red
Instrument

RVFPE ml/min D
ENDLF-S
TSBIC TSD C o

mS/cm blue
T T T 8
BICLF ENDLF FPE
RVB RVK TSD-S red
TSDE T Measurement
Sensor
BICP KP
blue

FBK1

VEBK1/2
Fig.: Dialysate Preparation with Loop-In Point for TSBIC/TSD/TSD-S and TSDE Calibration

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 132

VEBK1

VDEBK1
VDABK1

VDE
PDA VD
FBK2

TSDE BL
VABK2
VDEBK2

Y1 FBK1
VEBK2

FPE

Fig.: Original Tubing Rinsing Bridge with TSDE Fig.: Original Tubing UF Sub-Rack with FBK1

Measurement
FBK2 Instrument
VDE red

PDA VD ml/min D
o
C blue
mS/cm
FBK1
red Measurement
Sensor
BL
Y1 blue
TSDE
FPE
Fig.: Tubing Rinsing Bridge with Removed TSDE Fig.: UF Sub-Rack with TSDE in Line with TSBIC/TSD/TSD-S (on DF Sub-Rack)
for Calibration

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 133

1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with

the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Dialysis Temperature menu by
pressing on the line Calibration 2.5 Dialysis
Temperature. The following menu is displayed.

• Measurement instrument (e.g. HDM 99 or equivalent)

• Adapter set (coupling, tubing, dialyser couplings)

3. Remove TSDE from rinsing bridge and connect at the outlet of FPE
(tubing going to FBK1).
Note: Pay attention to correct flow direction of temperature sensor TSDE.
4. Connect measurement instrument between TSDE and FBK1.
5. Connect dialyser couplings to flow meter.
6. Increase slowly the speed of FPE, until a flow of 750 ml/min ±50 ml/min
is reached.

7. Press key for a combined calibration of TSBIC,

TSD/TSD-S and TSDE (The circulation valve VZ stays closed).

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 134

Calibration Point 30 oC 8. Increase slowly heater power (in %) until a stable temperature value of 30
o
C ±2 oC is displayed at the temperature measurement instrument.
Note: Pay attention to the maximum fluctuation of ±0.1 °C over 10 s at
the temperature measurement instrument.

9. Press key.
Wait until digits are stable.
10. Enter the stable value from the temperature measurement instrument as
reference value.

11. Confirm with key.

Calibration Point 38 oC 12. Increase slowly heater power until a stable temperature value of 38 °C ±2
°C is displayed at the temperature measurement instrument.
Note: Pay attention to the maximum fluctuation of ±0.1 °C over 10 s at
the temperature measurement instrument.
Write down the value of the heater power, because this value is
required for the calibration of the conductivity.

13. Press key.

Wait until digits are stable.
14. Enter the stable value from the temperature measurement instrument as
reference value.

15. Confirm with key.

Calibration Point 50 Co
16. Increase slowly heater power until a stable temperature value of 50 oC ±2
o
C is displayed at the temperature measurement instrument.
Note: Pay attention to the maximum fluctuation of ±0.1 °C over 10 s at
the temperature measurement instrument.
The flow can be reduced slightly if the heater power (100%) is insufficient for
the last calibration point.

17. Press key.

Wait until digits are stable.
18. Enter the stable value from the temperature measurement instrument as
reference value.

19. Confirm with key.

20. Confirm and save the completed calibration procedure with key.
Note: The calibration data is saved only after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (for
detailed information see 4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information).
21. Reassemble the heater inlet temperature sensor TSDE to the original
position (see previous page).
Note: Pay attention to correct flow direction of temperature sensor TSDE.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 135

4.8.3.9 Calibration Conductivity Sensors Bicarbonate

BICLF and END Conductivity ENDLF/ENDLF-S
If the conductivity sensor BICLF or ENDLF/ENDLF-S is exchanged: the
temperature sensors TSBIC, TSD/TSD-S must be calibrated prior to the
calibration of the conductivity sensors BICLF/ENDLF/ENDLF-S.

Conductivity Measurement Instrument Technical Data:

(e.g. HDM 99 or equivalent) • Temperature coefficient α = 2.10 %/oC (set)
• Reference temperature TRef = 25 oC (set)
• Correct cell constant (set)
• Conductivity accuracy: ≤ ±0.1 mS/cm
• Conductivity resolution 0.01 mS/cm
• Use calibrated measurement instrument
Prior to Calibration of • Perform a chemical disinfection with citric acid 50%
BICLF/ENDLF/ENDLF-S • Wait until Dialog has reached working temperature
• Calibrate temperature sensors TSBIC/TSD/TSD-S
Test and Calibration The applied acid concentrate used as test and calibration solution (if not
Solution for BICLF available use acetate) must be diluted according to the prerequisites with
deionised water. The components of the acid concentrate are listed in table 1.
Table 1 Nominal Composition of Ready for Use Dialysate According to Data on Canister
(1 l Acid Concentrate + 1.225 BIC + 32.775 l Deionised Water)
Component Concentration Max. Oscillation
[mmol/l] Range
Sodium 138 0
Potassium 2 2
Calcium 1.5 0.5
Magnesium 0.5 0.5
Chlorine 109 3
Acetate 3 1
Bicarbonate 32 1

Glucose 0 g/l 1 g/l

Osmolarity 292 mOsm/l 5 mOsm/l
The following B. Braun acid concentrates can be used:
e.g. SW376A, SW163A, SW 196A, SW127A, SW93A, SW102A, SW380A, SW95A, SW139A,
SW381A, SW178A, SW393A, SW195A
If acid concentrates are not available the following B. Braun acetate concentrates can be used as
an alternative:
e.g. SW44 and SW 174
If acid concentrate from B. Braun is not available acid concentrate from a second source can be
used. The composition is listed in table 1.

Composition of Calibration Acid concentrate is diluted with deionised water with a ratio of 1:4 (or 1:4.5
Solution for BICLF with acetate) to calibrate the BICLF sensor, i.e. bicarbonate concentrate is not
used.
Composition of Calibration Solution The undiluted acid concentrate (if not available use acetate) is used to
for ENDLF/ENDLF-S calibrate the ENDLF/ENDLF-S sensors (see table 1).
Calibration Points for The following calibration points are used:
BICLF and ENDLF/ENDLF-S • Calibration points BICLF: 0 mS/cm, 3 mS/cm, 5.8 mS/cm
• Calibration points ENDLF/ENDLF-S: 0 mS/cm, 14.0 mS/cm
• Conductivity calibration point deviation: 0.2 mS/cm
• Conductivity oscillation range: ± 1 digit/0.1 mS/cm (displayed value of
Dialog) over 10 s, i.e. the conductivity should be constant over a time
period of 10 s.
• Reference temperature: 38 oC ±2 oC

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 136

Calibration Temperature Sensors The temperature sensors TSBIC/TSD/TSD-S must be calibrated prior to the
calibration of the conductivity sensors BICLF/ENDLF/ENDLF-S (in menu LL
Manual Calibration, Calibration 2.5 Dialysis Temperature).
Measurement of the Temperature The measurement sensor for temperature and conductivity of the measurement
and the Conductivity instrument is connected between FPE and the inlet to the balance chamber at
FBK1 (see figure).
Measurement of the Flow Connect the dialyser couplings to the flow sensor.

Measurement red
Instrument

RVFPE ml/min D
BICLF ENDLF-S C o
TSBIC TSD
mS/cm blue
T T T 8
RVB RVK ENDLF TSD-S FPE
red
Measurement
Sensor
BICP KP
blue

FBK1

VEBK1/2
Fig.: Dialysate Preparation

VEBK1

VDEBK1
VDABK1
Measurement
FBK2 Instrument
red

ml/min D
FBK2 o
C blue
mS/cm
FBK1
red Measurement
VABK2 Sensor
VDEBK2

FBK1 blue
VEBK2

FPE
FPE
Fig.: Original Tubing UF Sub-Rack with FBK1 Fig.: UF Sub-Rack with Loop-In Point for BICLF, ENDLF and
ENDLF-S Calibration

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 137

1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with

the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Calibration Conductivity menu by
pressing on the line Calibration 2.6
Conductivity. The following menu is displayed.

3. Press the key to calibrate the

conductivity sensors BICLF, ENDLF and ENDLF-
S together.

The following menu is displayed.

Composition of the calibration solution for BICLF:

To calibrate the BICLF sensor deionised water is mixed with the respective
acid concentrate, i.e. real bicarbonate concentrate is not used (see table
1).

There is no cyclic switching of the balance chambers during the conductivity

calibration. Thus a continuous flow is accomplished which is necessary for the
calibration. The following valves are opened VEBK2/VDEBK2 and
VABK1/VDABK1.
Pay attention that air bubbles do not build up in the reference sensor during
calibration.
• Measurement instrument (e.g. HDM 99 or equivalent)
• Calibration solution: diluted and undiluted acid concentrate
• Adapter set (coupling, tubing, dialyser couplings)
4. Connect measurement instrument between FPE and balance chamber.
5. Connect dialyser couplings to flow meter.
6. Increase slowly the speed of FPE, until a flow of 750 ml/min ±50 ml/min
is reached.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 138

BICLF/ENDLF/ENDLF-S Calibration Point 7. Change slowly heater power, until a stable temperature value of 38 oC ±2
o
0 mS/cm C is displayed at the measurement instrument.
Note: Use the heater power value noted during the calibration of
TSBIC/TSD/TSDS/TSDE at temperature of 38 °C.
8. Speed BICP: 0 rpm
Speed KP: 0 rpm

9. Press key.
Wait until digits are stable.
10. Enter the stable value from the measurement instrument as reference
value.

11. Confirm with key.

Note: Do not simply confirm the set value as 0.00 mS/cm but by all
means enter the actual reference value, e.g. 0.01 mS/cm.
Pay attention to the deviation range for the conductivity and the
temperature at the measurement instrument.
A calibration solution with a ratio of approx. 1:4 is necessary for the 3 mS/cm
and 5.8 mS/cm calibration, i.e. 1 l acid concentrate + 4 l RO (reverse osmosis)
water.
If acid concentrate is not available a calibration solution with acetate can be
used. The ratio is approx. 1:4.5, i.e. 1 l acetate + 4.5 l RO (reverse osmosis)
water.
BICLF Calibration Point 3 mS/cm 12. Connect blue suction rod to the diluted acid concentrate (calibration
solution).
Do not change by mistake the suction rods and the pumps BICP/KP.

13. Increase slowly the speed (approx. 110 – 120 rpm) of the bicarbonate
pump BICP, until a stable conductivity value of 3.0 mS/cm ±0.2 mS/cm is
displayed at the measurement instrument.
Note: Pay attention to the deviation range for the conductivity and the
temperature at the measurement instrument.

14. Press key.

Wait until digits are stable.
15. Enter the stable value from the measurement instrument as reference
value.

16. Confirm with key.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 139

BICLF Calibration Point 5.8 mS/cm 17. Increase slowly the speed (approx. 220 - 230 rpm) of the bicarbonate
pump BICP, until a stable conductivity value of 5.8 mS/cm ±0.2 mS/cm is
displayed at the measurement instrument.
Note: Pay attention to the deviation range for the conductivity and the
temperature at the measurement instrument.

18. Press key.

Wait until digits are stable.
19. Enter the stable value from the measurement instrument as reference
value.

20. Confirm with key.

ENDLF Calibration Point 14.0 mS/cm 21. Connect the blue suction rod to the undiluted acid concentrate.
22. Change the speed of the bicarbonate pump BICP (approx. 115 - 120 rpm),
until a stable conductivity value of 14.0 mS/cm ±0.2 mS/cm is displayed
at the measurement instrument.
Note: Pay attention to the deviation range for the conductivity and the
temperature at the measurement instrument.

23. Press key.

Wait until digits are stable.
24. Enter the stable value from the measurement instrument as reference
value.

In LLC Status Window only 25. Confirm with key.

Calibration data out of range 80 Note: Pay attention to the LLC Status window. The calibration data are
only valid if the following digit value is displayed in the LLC Status
window: 0 X X X X X X X (see figure).
0-1-0
If the calibration value for ENDLF is at the limit range the
L L C S TAT U S: 00000000 00000000 calibration data could be invalid. Thus the following digit value is
displayed in the LLC Status window 8 X X X X X X X (see figure).
Repeat calibration procedure.

0-1-0 26. Confirm completed calibration procedure with key (calibration

L L S S TAT U S: 00000000
data are saved).
Note: The calibration data is saved only after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (for
detailed information see 4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information).
27. Stop FPE and BICP and remove measurement instrument.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 140

4.8.3.10 Calibration Blood Leak Detector

You can check and calibrate the blood leak detector BL. The rinsing block must
have an even temperature for the calibration. If both dialyser couplings are
connected to the rinsing bridge the flow pumps FPA/FPE work in main flow. If
only one coupling is connected FPE is stopped. The reference solution can be
drawn in by the red coupling via FPA.

T
TSDE VDE
VBP

VLA

FBK2
LAFS
BL PDA
8
FPA LA VDA FVD

SBS1 SB1 red

VD M

LVD
SBS2 SB2 blue

Fig.: Rinsing Bridge with Blood Leak Detector BL

T
TSDE VDE

VBP

VLA

LAFS
FBK2 BL PDA
8
FPA LA VDA FVD

SBS1 SB1
VD M
blue
LVD
SBS2 SB2 red
Fig.: Rinsing Bridge with Red Coupling Immerged in Reference Solution for BL Calibration

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 141

blue red

FVD

Fig.: Red and Blue Couplings Connected to Rinsing Bridge

blue

FVD

red

Fig.: Rinsing Bridge with Red Coupling Immerged in Reference Solution for BL Calibration
1. You can activate the LL Manual Calibration
menu with the LL Manual Calibration key in
the Manual Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Blood Leak menu by pressing on
the line Calibration 2.7 Blood Leak. The
following menu is displayed.

Close front and rear door for the function test and calibration to prevent light
irradiation on the sensor.
Leakages
Air and micro-bubbles can lead to incorrect measurement values in the
measurement line and can cause fluctuation of the current value.
If air is visible check the complete system for leaks in menu 1.20 Test Water
Part. After the initialisation phase rinse the blood leak detector approx. 1 min
and then perform a leakage test of the system in menu 1.19 Leak Test.
Chemical Disinfection with Citric Acid 50%
A decalcification must be performed before initial calibration.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 142

4.8.3.10.1 Blood Leak Detector Limit

You can select the limit value for the alarm
activation of the blood leak detector in the
Calibration 2.7 Blood Leak Detector, BL Limit
menu.

BL Limit
Standard Limit (0.5 ml/min at haematocrite HK
0.45)
The alarm limit is set to 0.5 ml/min at a
haematocrite of 0.45, i.e. a blood leak detector
alarm is activated if the alarm limit is exceeded.

AAMI Limit (0.35 ml/min at haematocrite HK

0.25)
The alarm limit is set to 0.35 ml/min at a
haematocrite of 0.25 (AAMI standard), i.e. a blood
leak detector alarm is activated if the alarm limit
is exceeded.
Please Note
The same blood leak detector is used for both
settings:
• The calibration procedure is identical, but with
different tolerance ranges
• The test procedure is identical

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 143

4.8.3.10.2 Check Blood Leak Detector

1. Connect both dialyser couplings to the

rinsing bridge.
2. Select menu Test 1.18 Blood Leak in TSM to
perform a function check of the blood leak
detector.
3. Rinse the blood leak detector for approx. 1
min at the beginning of the rinsing time
with flow pump outlet FPA (approx. 1400
rpm). Thereby possible air bubbles in the
system are removed.
4. Rinse blood leak detector for approx. 15 to
30 min with FPA (approx. 1000 rpm) to
warm up the complete system to a
temperature of approx. 40 oC.

Exchange the blood leak detector if one of these three values is out of
limits.

5. The LED test is activated with the LAMP TEST OFF key. The OFF key
switches to the RED key as soon as the key is pressed.
The red LED is tested after 10 s. The controller value for the switched off
red LED must be as follows (the supervisor value is uncritical):
red LED Actual Status Controller
Blood Concentration < 4.00
6. Press the LAMP TEST RED key to switch to the green LED. The RED key
switches to the GREEN key.
The green LED is tested. The controller value for the switched off green
LED must be as follows (the supervisor value is uncritical):
green LED Actual Status Controller
Blood Concentration > 2.06
7. The actual controller values for the red LED and the green LED must be
divided.
Note: The calculated value of red LED divided by green LED is displayed
briefly after the key LAMP TEST is switched back to OFF.
The calculated value must be in the following limits (to the first decimal
digit/round off):
red LED / green LED
1.15 - 1.44

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 144

4.8.3.10.3 Calibration Blood Leak Detector

Close front and rear door for the calibration to prevent light irradiation on the
sensor. Air and micro-bubbles must not be present prior or during the
calibration of the blood leak detector (if necessary rinse, see information
4.8.3.10).
The blood leak detector must be clean.
FPA must be switched off to prevent a flow during the calibration procedure.
The calibration of the blood leak detector type 2 is performed in two steps:
• Turbidity calibration
• Calibration with reference solution
You can skip directly from the test menu to the calibration menu of the blood
leak detector by pressing the key.
The calibration procedure may take some time and requires stable values.
Slight fluctuations due to air bubbles inside the blood leak detector during the
calibration process can lead to an abortion of the calibration.
• Reference solution (red dye, art. no. 7700911)
• Graduated cylinder 2 litre
1. Both dialyser couplings are connected to the rinsing bridge.
2. Prepare 1 ‰ reference solution, i.e.:
Dilute the flask of 2 ml of red dye with 2 litre deionised/RO water. The
water should have at least 30 oC for an accurate calibration. Mix the
reference solution thoroughly.
4.8.3.10.3.1 Turbidity Calibration with
Water

3. Press key. The calibration window is opened.

4. Set FPA slowly to zero.

5. Press the key to activate the first calibration point of the

automatic calibration.
The values must be in the following limits:
Actual Status Actual Status
Controller Supervisor
Blood Concentration [‰] -50 to +50 digits 205 to 230 digits
After the calibration of the first point the second calibration point is
automatically displayed.
4.8.3.10.3.2 Calibration with Reference
Solution (Red Dye)
6. Carefully pull off the red dialyser coupling from the rinse bridge to
prevent any loss of fluid/air-intake and immerge it into the container
with reference solution.
7. Set FPA slowly to 1000 rpm and draw-in approx. 1 l reference solution.
8. Set the FPA slowly to zero. If the displayed actual blood concentration
value of the controller is stable, press the key to
confirm.
The displayed actual blood concentration value must be in the following
limit, to ensure a sufficient resolution:
Actual Status Controller
Blood Concentration [‰] > 200

9. Confirm and store completed calibration procedure with key.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 145

4.8.3.10.4 Actual Value Check Blood

Leak Detector
10. Select menu 1.18 in TSM to check the actual value of the blood leak
detector.

4.8.3.10.4.1 Check 0 ‰ Blood Concentration

11. Connect red dialyser coupling to rinsing bridge.
12. Set FPA slowly to 1000 rpm and rinse.
13. Check blood concentration of the controller and supervisor.
The values for the controller and supervisor must be in the following
limits:
Actual Status Actual Status
Controller Supervisor
Blood Concentration [‰] -0.1 to 0.1 -0.1 to 0.1

4.8.3.10.4.2 Check 1 ‰ Blood Concentration

14. Set FPA slowly to zero.
15. Carefully disconnect red dialyser coupling.
16. Carefully immerge red dialyser coupling into reference solution.
17. Set FPA slowly to 1000 rpm and draw-in remaining reference solution.
18. Set FPA slowly to zero.
19. Check blood concentration of the controller and supervisor.
The blood concentration values for the controller and supervisor must be
in the following limits:
Actual Status Actual Status
Controller Supervisor
Blood Concentration [‰] 0.90 to 1.1 0.90 to 1.1

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 146

4.8.3.11 Calibration of Delivery Rate

UFP, BICP and KP
You can calibrate the ultrafiltration pump UFP, the bicarbonate pump BICP
and the concentrate pump KP. The BICP and KP can be calibrated either with a
volumetric flask/graduated cylinder or a balance. The calibration with a balance
is mandatory for UFP. Prior to calibration the balance chamber initialisation
must be completed. The respective pump runs for approximately 2 minutes
after pressing the key and stops after a certain number of
revolutions are reached.

Fig.: Bicarbonate Pump BICP, Concentrate Pump KP and Ultrafiltration Pump UFP

During the selection of the menu:

• the balance chamber is initialised and
• the UFP is set to a defined initial position
(reed sensor/hall sensor position).
Thus the accuracy during the calibration of UFP is
improved, because UFP runs back to the initial
position at the end of calibration. Thus complete
revolutions are counted.
1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with
the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Flow of BICP, KP and UF Pump
menu by pressing on the line Calibration 2.8
Flow of BICP, KP and UF Pump. The following
menu is displayed.

4.8.3.11.1 Calibration BICP and KP Pump

Prior to calibration the initialisation of the balance chamber must be
completed. The initialisation is completed, if the LLC Status window changes
from 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 to 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .
The system must be free of air for calibration. Thus an accurate calibration is
guaranteed.
• Balance or graduated cylinder
• Tubing clamp
1. Fill graduated cylinder with 200 ml water.
2. Remove respective concentrate suction rod from rinsing chamber and
immerge into graduated cylinder.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 147

3. Press the BICP Pump or KP Pump key again to start a pump

calibration.
The piston pump runs two minutes and stops.

4. Press the key, which appears automatically after 2 minutes.

5. Enter the suction delivery volume (200 ml - residual volume = delivery
volume) as reference value.

6. Press key to confirm.

7. Confirm and store completed calibration procedure with key.

Note: Generally, follow the instruction for UFP calibration if using a
balance.
4.8.3.11.2 Calibration UF Pump with Balance
The accuracy of the UFP calibration is essential for the precise weight
reduction of a patient during dialysis.
• Balance
• Tubing clamp
1. Clamp and remove inlet tubing from UFP. Connect another tubing to the
UFP and immerge tubing into a container with approx. 200 ml
demineralised water.

2. Press the UF Pump key to prime the tubings.

Wait a few seconds to fully prime the tubings.

3. Press again the UF Pump key to stop the UFP.

The UFP will rotate back into its initial position.

4. Press key.
5. Remove the filled tubing carefully from the measuring cylinder, measure
the weight and note value.
6. Replace the tubing carefully in the measuring cylinder.

7. Press the UF Pump key to start the calibration procedure.

The UFP runs approx. two minutes and stops. It will rotate back into its
initial position.
8. After the UF pump has stopped, remove the tubing carefully from the
measuring cylinder, measure the weight and note value.

9. Press key.
10. Enter the calculated delivery volume as reference value.
First measurement – second measurement = delivery volume

11. Press key to confirm.

12. Confirm and store completed calibration procedure with key.

Note: The calibration data is saved only after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (for
detailed information see 4.8.3.1 General Calibration Information).

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 148

4.8.3.11.3 Position Setting for BICP, KP and UFP

The sub-menu 2.8.2 Position Setting for BICP, KP

and UFP can be selected with the Position Setting
key.
The sub-menu 2.8.1 Stroke Value of BICP, KP and
UFP can be selected with the Stroke Value key.

The following settings are required:

BICP Parking: 180 °
KP Parking: 180 °
UFP Parking: 180 °
UFP Positive Pressure Test: 115 °
(used for DFS pressure test)
UFP Negative Pressure Test: 90 °

4.8.3.11.4 Stroke Value of BICP, KP and UFP

The sub-menu 2.8.1 Stroke Value of BICP, KP and

UFP can be selected from the menus 1.17 UF
Pump, or 2.8 Calibration Flow of BICP, KP and UFP.
The stroke values (µl/head rotation) can be
entered directly if the exact values are known for
the bicarbonate pump BICP and the concentrate
pump. The stroke value for the ultrafiltration
pump UFP should not be changed, because it is
determined by the calibration of the pump with a
balance.
It is recommended to calibrate the UFP with the
procedure described (with balance) because the
accuracy of the stroke value might be insufficient
for a proper UF control of the system.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 149

4.8.3.12 Calibration Safety Air Detector SAD

Calibration Level The value for the calibration level is marked on the SAD (example calibration
level KS = 49) and was determined individually for every SAD ex works.
Test Level The test level is the value used to check the function of the SAD in the cyclic
self test. The test level is 5 digits higher than the calibration level:
• Test level TS = Calibration Level KS + 5 Digits
Alarm Level The safety air detector SAD has a fixed alarm level (15 Digits). The alarm level
is displayed after the test level is entered.
1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with
the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Safety Air Detector SAD menu by
pressing on the line Calibration 2.9 Safety Air
Detector SAD. The following menu is displayed.

The value for the calibration level is marked on

the SAD board (example calibration level KS = 49,
see left figure SAD board).

Fig.: Excerpt from SAD Board with KS Label (e.g. KS = 49)

3. Take the value for the calibration level (KS) on
the SAD and enter the value in the Desired
Setting window.

4. Press key and wait until the

key switches back again.
The calibration procedure is completed.

5. Press the key to store the

calibration.
Note: The calibration data is saved only
after the bit sequence 0-1-0 (for
detailed information see 4.8.3.1
General Calibration Information).

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 150

4.8.3.12.1 SAD Test after Calibration

SAD Test AIR must be displayed if the SAD TEST is activated, even if a tubing filled with
fluid is inserted in the SAD.
The displayed result with SAD TEST OFF depends on the tubing inserted in the
SAD:
AIR: must be detected if a tubing filled with air is inserted.
NO AIR: must be detected if a tubing filled with fluid is inserted.
1. Activate the menu Test 1.7 Air Sensor, Red
Sensor in the LL Manual Test menu.

2. Insert a tubing filled with water in the SAD

and close cover.
The following settings must be displayed:
SAD LEVEL: 15 (Desired Setting)
SAD TEST: NO AIR (Controller/Supervisor)
RDV: NO BLOOD (Controller/Supervisor)

3. Press SAD TEST key (Desired

Setting).
The following settings must be displayed:
SAD LEVEL: KS+5 (Desired Setting, see previous
page)
SAD TEST: TEST (Desired Setting)
SAD TEST: AIR (Controller/Supervisor)

4. Press the SAD TEST key (Desired

Setting) to terminate the test.
The following setting must be displayed:
SAD TEST: OFF (Desired Setting)

5. Press the SAD TRIGGER OFF key

(Desired Setting) to activate the SAD
TimeContr.
The following settings must be displayed:
SAD TimeContr.: OFF (Supervisor)
after approx. 1 second:
SAD TimeContr.: ON (Supervisor)

6. Remove the tubing from the SAD.

7. Interrupt the light path in the SAD with a

piece of paper.
The following settings must be displayed:
RDV: NO BLOOD (Controller/Supervisor)
changes to
RDV: BLOOD (Controller/Supervisor)

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 151

4.8.3.13 Calibration BICLF and ENDLF

Ratio
You can set the expected values for the BICLF and ENDLF ratio. Thus the
mixing ratio is monitored to prevent the use of false concentrates.
• BICLF: The mixing ratio between H2O and bicarbonate
• ENDLF: The mixing ratio between H2O and acid
The ratio between bicarbonate, acid/acetate and water is monitored during
dialysis. The mixing ratio is monitored and dialysis with false concentrates can
be prevented.
All concentrates applied by the user must be checked, during commissioning. If
necessary the limit ratio value for bicarbonate and acid/acetate respectively,
must be adapted to each machine to meet the customer specific requirements.
ENDLF Ratio for Acid Concentrate with Ratio 1:44
The ENDLF ratio should be set to 38 if an acid concentrate is used with a ratio
of 1:44.
The acetate dialysis must be disabled, because an acetate dialysis is not
possible with this setting: Treatment Support, System Configuration, Dialysate
Side Parameters, Acetate Mode Disabled (YES).

Fig.: BICLF and ENDLF Conductivity Sensors

1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with

the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the BICLF and ENDLF Ratio menu by
pressing on the line Calibration 2.10 BICLF and
ENDLF Ratio. The following menu is displayed.

The BICLF Cart Ratio is only displayed if the

bicarbonate cartridge holder option is activated in
the Production Report, LLC Options, Holder for BIC
Cartridge.
You can determine the limit of the ENDLF ratio
(measured at the end conductivity sensor ENDLF).

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 152

Ratio Values (Factory Settings)

BICLF Ratio: 25 (ratio water/bicarbonate for canister operation)
ENDLF Ratio: 31 (bicarbonate mode=ratio water/acid)
(acetate mode=ratio water/acetate)
BIC Cart Ratio: 35 (ratio water/bicarbonate for cartridge operation)

Bicarbonate Therapy The ENDLF ratio limit value 31 (factory setting, can be modified) must not be
exceeded. An alarm is activated if this ENDLF ratio limit is exceeded.
Bicarbonate Mode
Upper Limit ENDLF Ratio: <31
Default Value BICLF Ratio: 2 5 ± 7 (canister)
Default Value BICLF Ratio: 3 5 ± 1 0 (cartridge)
Setting Range Setting Range
(ENDLF Ratio 14 mS/cm) (BICLF Ratio 3 mS/cm)
Acid 10 to 50 -

Bicarbonate - 10 to 50 (canister)
25 to 50 (cartridge)
Concentrate Pump KP: Suction Rod (red)
Bicarbonate Pump BICP: Suction Rod (blue)

Acetate Therapy The ENDLF ratio limit value must not fall below 31 (factory setting, can be
modified). An alarm is activated if this ENDLF ratio limit is lower than 31.
Acetate Mode
Lower Limit ENDLF RATIO: >31
Setting Range Setting Range
(ENDLF Ratio 14 mS/cm) (BICLF Ratio 3 mS/cm)
Acetate 10 to 50 -

Concentrate Pump KP: Suction Rod (red)

BICP: is deactivated in acetate mode
The BICLF Ratio and ENDLF ratio limits can be modified in the given limits.
These limits were determined and set to meet the general requirements. The
Dialog is delivered with a standard factory setting. Concentrates, which are
individually composed and applied in dialysis centres, can differ from these
standard values.

The delivery rates of KP and BICP must be calibrated correctly prior to

determining the actual ratio.

1. Check Bicarbonate Check the conductivity of all concentrates in the therapy main menu,
according to the prerequisites of the customer (setting of ENDLF ratio and
BICLF ratio). If necessary change END/BICLF ratio.

1. Select the Haemodialysis key in Therapy Selection. Machine switches to

Preparation.
2. Select the Parameter key, a parameter window is opened.
3. Select Bicarbonate key and activate bicarbonate mode.
4. Connect the respective concentrate (bicarbonate/acid) after the request.
5. Select service overview to display the current RATIO values. Wait till
stable ratio values are reached. Use the mean value if there are slight
deviations.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 153

6. Connect and check all concentrates in succession and note the BICLF
ratio and ENDLF ratio values.
7. Change the treatment mode to Acetate and connect only acetate
concentrates if Acetate mode is performed in that dialysis centre.
8. Wait for the conductivity to be stabilized and read the actual ENDLF ratio
from the service overview.
9. Switch off the Dialog and set service switch S1 to position 2 TSM service
program.
10. Switch on Dialog.
11. Select the Manual Test & Calibration key.
12. Select LL Manual Calibration key and activate 2.10 BICLF Ratio & ENDLF
Ratio.
For bicarbonate therapy with BICLF ratio values near the limits or out of the
default setting of 25 ±7.

11. If necessary enter the value for BICLF ratio (mean value of all
bicarbonates) in BICLF Ratio Desired Setting Controller 25 key (default
value 25).
12. Confirm and save the entered value with the Calibration key.

To prevent alarms during therapy in bicarbonate mode the value of the ENDLF
Ratio must be less than the set ENDLF Ratio e.g. <31.
To prevent alarms during therapy in acetate mode the value of the ENDLF
Ratio must be more than the set ENDLF Ratio, e.g. >31.
13. If necessary select ENDLF Ratio - Desired Setting Controller - 31 (limit
Value 31) and enter the value for the ENDLF ratio (between highest value
for all acidic concentrates and lowest value for all acetate concentrates).
14. Save the entered limit value.
15. Switch off Dialog and set service switch S1 to position 0 therapy.
2. Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder Option The option must be activated, set and checked in the TSM service program.
After the activation a ratio value must be set for the BICLF Cart Ratio. Check
the ratio value in therapy (service overview) and adjust if necessary.
Setting Range: 25 to 50
Limits: Setting ± 10

1. Enter 35 in Desired Setting Controller for the BICLF Cart Ratio.

2. Save the entered value with the Calibration key.
3. Check the bicarbonate ratio value in therapy.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 154

4.8.3.14 Calibration Load Cell

Not applicable.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 155

4.8.3.15 Calibration PV Alarm Window, PA

Low Limit

1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with

the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the PV Alarm Window, PA Low Limit
menu by pressing on the line Calibration 2.12
PV Alarm Window, PA Low Limit. The following
menu is displayed.

400
PV Alarm Window PV Alarm Window
(default 100 mmHg) You can set the window values for the alarm
350
(set range 40 ... 200 mmHg) limits of the PV monitoring for therapy.
300
PV Low Limit Pos. PV Low Limit Position
250
PV 200
You can set the low limit position and window
values for the alarm limits of the PV monitoring
mmHg for therapy.
150

100

50

0
PV abs. Low Limit
(default 20 mmHg)
-50 (set range -50 .... 100 mmHg)
Fig.: PV Settings

For all Limit Settings (PA and PV)

PV Absolute Low Limit

If any setting values are changed these must be in agreement with the
user, because any value can be used as a possible indication for "bleeding"
(e.g. if the venous access to the patient is disconnected). Furthermore
please note that the LLS limit value is 10 mmHg under the PV Abs. Low
Limit (protection system).

You can set the absolute low limit for PV and the window values for the alarm
size and position of the PV monitoring for therapy.
The supervisor uses a tolerance of 10 mmHg for monitoring the PV limit values
to prevent double alarms.
PA Absolute Low Limit The set PA Absolute Low Limit value (-200 mmHg) is used as limit in therapy
and TSM service program/system configuration.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 156

4.8.3.16 Calibration Flow Rate of BPA and BPV/OSP

The tube constants can be directly entered or calculated via a comparison measurement.
BPA and BPV/OSP (option HDF online substitution pump) can be activated with the
START Calibration key. The delivered volume is measured in ml and entered as reference
value. The pressure conditions for the tube system during measurement must be
identical with the pressure conditions in therapy.

1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with

the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Flow of BPA and BPV/OSP menu
by pressing on the line Calibration 2.13 Flow of
BPA and BPV/OSP. The following menu is
displayed.

Tube Constant
1. Press the Tube Constant key to activate the
menu Calibration 2.13.1 Tube Constants of BPA
and BPV. The following menu is displayed.
The following tube constants must be entered for
the applied tubing system.
8 x 12 Tubing System
BPA: 12306 µl/head rotation
BPV: 12306 µl/head rotation

7 x 10 Tubing System
BPA: 9293 µl/head rotation
BPV: 9296 µl/head rotation

Pump Head
1. Press the Pump Head key to activate the menu
Pump Head Selection. The following menu is
displayed.
You can select the pump head roller type used in
the blood pumps.
• Pump head 8 x 12
• Pump head 7 x 10 (option)

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 157

4.8.3.17 Infusion Density Substitution Pump

Not applicable.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 158

4.8.3.18 Stroke Value HDF Online Substitution Pump OSP

1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with

the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the HDF Online Substitution Pump
OSP menu by pressing on the line Calibration
2.15 HDF Online Substitution Pump OSP. The
following menu is displayed.

Stroke Value The stroke value must be set to 8300 (for pump head 8 x 12).
HDF Online Substitution Pump OSP

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 159

4.8.3.19 Level Regulation

1. Activate the LL Manual Calibration menu with

the LL Manual Calibration key in the Manual
Test and Calibration menu.
2. Activate the Level Regulation menu by
pressing on the line Calibration 2.16 Level
regulation. The following menu is displayed.

Level Regulation The speed of the level regulation pump (LRP = PPR) can be set for the slow
mode and for the fast mode.
The settings are (see default table in chapter 3):
• 60 % for the slow mode
• 100 % for the fast mode

The default settings should not be changed, unless instructed otherwise.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 160

4.8.3.20 Calibration Inlet Flow Pump

Nonreturn Valve RVFPE
You can calibrate the inlet flow pump nonreturn valve RVFPE.

Fig.: Calibration RVFPE/Loop-In Point

Loop-In Point
for Calibration

FBK1
Fig.: UF Sub-Rack with FBK1

KP UFP

RVFPE

Fig.: DF Sub-Rack with RVFPE

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 161

• Manometer 0 to 4 bar (art. no. 7701357 or equivalent)

• Flow meter (art. no. 770085A or equivalent)
• Allen key 3 mm
• Size 7 spanner

Please ensure that the manometer and connection tubing are at the same
level as the nonreturn valve during calibration.

1. Connect manometer and flow meter between flow pump FPE and FBK1.
2. Select Test 1.20 Water Part (Overview) in TSM.
3. Increase slowly the speed of FPA, until a flow of 500 ml/min is reached.
4. Set temperature TSD to 37 oC and wait until temperature is reached.
5. Clamp tubing between manometer and FBK1.
6. Loosen lock nut on RVFPE adjustment screw.
7. Set a pressure of 975 mmHg (1300 mbar) with the adjustment screw of
RVFPE.
• 975 mmHg ±37 mmHg
• 1300 mbar ±50 mbar
8. Tighten lock nut again.
9. Remove manometer and flow meter.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 162

4.8.3.21 Calibration Dialysate Nonreturn

Valve RVDA
You can calibrate the dialysate nonreturn valve RVDA.

Loop-In Point
for Calibration
RVFPE DDE

8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1

FPE
FBK1
VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1

VDEBK2 VABK2

VEBK2 VDABK2
MSBK2 FBK2

RVDA BK2

VZ
Fig.: Calibration RVDA/Loop-In Point

Loop-In Point
for Calibration

FBK1
Fig.: UF Sub-Rack with FBK1

WAB
EP

RVDA FEP

Fig.: Water Sub-Rack with RVDA

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 163

• Manometer 0 to 4 bar (art. no. 7701357 or equivalent)

• Flow meter (art. no. 770085A or equivalent)
• Allen key 3 mm

Please ensure that the manometer and connection tubing are at the same
level as the balance chamber/rinsing bridge and dialyser during calibration.

1. Remove lower front cover.

2. Connect manometer and flow meter between flow pump FPE and FBK1.
3. Select Test 1.20 Water Part (Overview) in TSM.
4. Increase slowly the speed of FPA, until a flow of 500 ml/min is reached.
5. Set temperature TSD to 37 oC and wait until temperature is reached.
6. Loosen lock nut on RVDA adjustment screw.
7. Set a pressure of 300 mmHg/400 mbar (HDF online 375 mmHg/500 mbar)
with the adjustment screw of RVDA.
• 300 mmHg ±37 mmHg
• 400 mbar ±50 mbar
HDF Online
• 375 mmHg ±37 mmHg
• 500 mbar ±50 mbar
8. Tighten lock nut again.
9. Remove manometer and flow meter.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 164

4.8.3.22 Calibration Outlet Flow Pump

Nonreturn Valve RVFPA
You can calibrate the outlet flow pump nonreturn valve RVFPA.
BK1 VABK1
VBP

VDABK1 Loop-In Point

MSBK1 for Calibration
VABK2 VLA

LAFS
MSBK2
VDABK2 FBK2
8
FPA LA VDA
BK2

RVUFP UFP
RVFPA

Fig.: Calibration RVFPA/Loop-In Point

Loop-In Point
for Calibration

FBK2

RVFPA
Fig.: UF Sub-Rack with FBK2 and RVFPA

• Manometer 0 to 4 bar (art. no. 7701357)

• Flow meter (art. no. 770085A or equivalent)
• Allen key 3 mm
• Size 7 spanner
Please ensure that the manometer and connection tubing are at the same
level as the nonreturn valve during calibration.

1. Connect manometer and flow meter between flow pump FPA and FBK2.
2. Immerge both dialyser couplings into a vessel filled with warm water (30
to 40 °C). Thus uncontrolled pressure conditions are prevented.
3. Select Test 1.20 Water Part (Overview) in TSM.
4. Increase slowly the speed of FPA, until a flow of 500 ml/min is reached.
5. Set temperature TSD to 37 oC and wait for the temperature reached.
6. Clamp tubing between manometer and FBK2.
7. Loosen lock nut on RVFPA adjustment screw.
8. Set a pressure of 975 mmHg (1300 mbar) with the adjustment screw of
RVFPA.
• 975 mmHg ±37 mmHg
• 1300 mbar ±50 mbar
9. Tighten lock nut again.
10. Remove manometer and flow meter.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 165

4.8.3.23 Calibration Dialyser Inlet

Throttle Valve DDE
You can calibrate the dialyser inlet throttle valve DDE.

Loop-In Point
for Calibration
DDE

VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1

VBP
FBK1
VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1

VDEBK2 VABK2 VLA

LAFS
VEBK2 VDABK2
MSBK2 FBK2
8
FPA LA VDA
BK2
RVFPA
RVUFP UFP

Fig.: Calibration DDE/Loop-In Point

DDE
Loop-In Point
for Calibration

LA

Fig.: UF Sub-Rack with DDE

• Manometer 0 to 4 bar (art. no. 770135A or equivalent)

• Flow meter (art. no. 7700857 or equivalent)
• Allen key3 mm
• Size 7 spanner
Please ensure that the manometer and connection tubing are at the same
level as the throttle during calibration.

1. Connect manometer and flow meter between VDEBK1/2 and dialysate

inlet throttle DDE.
2. Immerge both dialysate couplings into a vessel filled with water warm
water (30 to 40 °C). Thus uncontrolled pressure conditions are prevented.
3. Select Test 1.20 Water Part (Overview) in TSM.
4. Increase slowly the speed of FPA, until a flow of 500 ml/min is reached.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 166

5. Set temperature TSD to 37 oC and wait for the temperature reached.

Note for machines equipped with DF filter:
The DF filter and the tubings going to the DF filter must be free of air before
the DDE can be adjusted. Therefore the machine must be switched into Bypass
for a few minutes to purge the air. Switch off the bypass for the calibration of
DDE as it has to be done in mainflow.

6. Loosen lock nut on DDE adjustment screw.

7. Set a pressure of 300 mmHg/400 mbar with the adjustment screw of DDE.
• 300 mmHg ±37 mmHg
• 400 mbar ±50 mbar
8. Tighten lock nut again.
9. Remove manometer and flow meter.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 167

4.8.3.24 Calibration Pressure Reducer

Valve DMV
You can calibrate the pressure reducer valve DMV.

DMV VLA
RVDA
VVBE SKBS
DBK*

NSVB
H
T
TSE TSBIC
EK VB WT
WAB
VBICP*

T
PE TSH
A
D
TSHE T
VBKO*

FEP
VEB
EP VVB*
8 RVBO*
VBKS

Fig.: Calibration DMV

VVBE

Locking Screw for

Manometer

DMV

Fig.: Water Sub-Rack with DMV

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 168

• Manometer 0 to 2.5 bar (art. no. 34511571 or equivalent)

The calibration of DMV is performed in the dynamic operating mode (FPE

running, level in the upline tank is controlled).

1. Disconnect water inlet hose from wall connection (close water tap if
necessary).
2. Start briefly the unit to achieve a pressure free condition in the water
inlet part to avoid water spraying.
3. Remove locking screw from DMV and screw in the manometer (if
necessary use teflon tape to prevent leakages).
4. Connect water tubing and open the water tap.
5. Open the following menus in the TSM service program: Manual Test and
Calibration, LL Manual Test and 1.9 Water Inlet, Upline Tank and Flow
Pump FPE.
6. Set FPE to approx. 1400 rpm (approx. 1200 ml/min) and open VVBE (the
level in the upline tank must be controlled between medium and high
level).
7. Pull up the adjustment knob to unlock pressure reducer valve DMV and
set pressure to approx. 0.9 ±0.1 bar with the adjustment knob.
8. Close water tap.
9. Press down the adjustment knob to lock pressure reducer valve DMV.
10. Switch off Dialog.
11. Disassemble manometer.
12. Reassemble locking screw.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 169

4.8.3.25 Gap Arterial Tubing Clamp SAKA/Venous

Tubing Clamp Currentless Closed SAKV-SG

You can calibrate the gap for the arterial tubing clamp SAKA and
the venous tubing clamp currentless closed SAKV-SG.

• Calibration template 1.4/1.5 (art. no. 7702493)

1. Remove cap C (e.g. use a sharp knife to lift out).

2. Close the respective tubing clamp in Manual Test and
Calibration, LL Manual Test, Test 1.5 Tubing Clamps.

A B
C C

Fig.: Tubing Clamp SAKV-SG Fig.: Tubing Clamp SAKA

Set gap G to 1.4 mm with 1.4 mm template.

3. Loosen screw F.
4. Push 1.4 mm template between clamp D and eccentric cam E.

E 5.
6.
Rotate eccentric cam E until 1.4 mm is set.
Tighten again screw F

D Note
The 1.4 mm template fits through the gap.
7. Check wit the 1.5 mm template.
Note
The 1.5 mm template must not fit through the gap.
8. Reassemble cap C.

G F

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 170

4.8.3.26 Arterial Tubing Clamp SAKA/Venous Tubing

Clamp Currentless Closed SAKV-SG

A C

B D

SAKA SAKV-SG

SAKA You can check the soft stoppers A on the V-stopper/stopper B of the
arterial tubing clamp SAKA.

• Soft stoppers art. no. 34570675

1. Open front door.

2. Check the soft stoppers A on the V-stopper/stopper B.
Replace if soft stoppers show any damages (tears/ruptures/
brittleness).

SAKV-SG You can check the o-rings C on the V-stopper/stopper D of the

venous tubing clamp currentless closed SAKV-SG.

• O-ring 7 x 1.5 art. no. 34570624

3. Check the o-rings C on the V-stopper/stopper D

Replace if o-rings show any damages (tears/ruptures/
brittleness).
4. Close front door.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 171

4.8.3.27 Setting Servomotor for

Disinfection Valve VD

A Basic Position Disinfection Valve VD

The servomotor and the servomotor board must only be replaced

together, because they are a calibrated unit.
The position tag C of the servomotor B must be seated in the light
barrier D when assembled (see figure).
This basic position must be guaranteed if the servomotor is
disassembled and assembled again on the disinfection valve (rinsing
bridge). Thus the correct operation of VD is guaranteed, i.e.
B C switching from the air line to the disinfection line.
In basic position the disinfection valve VD:
• is open to the air line, i.e. disinfectants can not be drawn in.

D
Fig.: Disinfection Valve VD/Rinsing Bridge
1. Open front door of Dialog.
2. Pull off the connector A from the disinfection valve board.
3. Disassemble servomotor B.
4. Prior to the assembly of the new servomotor B: pay attention to
E the position of the bevel E on the eccentric axle. The bevel E
must be in upper position (see figure).

G Do not pull off the bow G from the control disc H, because its
position is set ex works.

5. The bow G on the control disc H must be seated in the groove

H F of the eccentric axle.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 172

6. Assemble servomotor B.
The position tag C of the servomotor B is
B seated in the light barrier D. The bow G
(not visible) is seated in the groove F of
the eccentric axle.
H 7. Plug in connector to disinfection valve
board matching with the motor.
8. Check function of the disinfection valve

C (position tag C in light barrier D).

B Servomotor
C Position tag
B H E/F D
E
Light barrier
Bevel on eccentric axle
F groove
G Bow (only partly visible, is
seated in the eccentric
groove)
H Control disc
I Rinsing bridge

DCG

Draw-Up of
Disinfectant

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 173

4.9 Production Report

Dialog + The delivery data of the Dialog are displayed in the menu, i.e. must be entered
Hersteller /
B.Braun Avitum AG
34209 Melsungen, Germany during the commissioning of the machine, e.g.:
SN 10xxxx • Type = REF (see type plate)
VA 2500
• Ser-No. = SN (see type plate)
REF 710xxx
V 230~ Options can be activated in the following menus:
Hz 50/60
IP 21 0123
Not to be used in presence of
flammable anaesthetic gases
Icons
For example: bioLogic RR, card reader or K*t/V-UV (Adimea)
Low Level Options (see 4.9.2)
Fig.: Type Plate on Rear Door For example: Double pump or BIC cartridge holder

Activate the Production Report menu with the

Production Report key in TSM Main Menu.
Options assembled in the machine must be
activated. Further options present in the Dialog
must also be activated in this menu or in the Low
Level Options menu (see 4.9.2).
The following options can be activated:
• ABPM
• bioLogic RR (icon available if installed)
• Low Level Options
• Card reader
• DCI (Data Communication Interface
• K*t/V
• K*t/V-UV (Adimea)
• HCT (Crit-Line interface)

ABPM Automatic Blood If the ABPM option is assembled in the machine or the option is retrofitted it
Pressure Measurement must be selected and saved to activate the option.

bioLogic RR Automatic Blood The bioLogic RR icon is displayed after the installation software was installed
Pressure Stabilisation for the bioLogic RR option. The bioLogic RR must be selected and saved to
activate the option.

Card Reader If the card reader option is present in the machine, it must be selected and
saved to activate the option.

DCI Data Communication The DCI option communicates with the Dialog machine via an RS 232
Interface interface. The communication is performed via a DIANET protocol.

K*t/V The KT/V option must be selected and saved to activate the option.

Adimea (K*t/V-UV) If an Adimea option is present in the machine, it must be selected and saved to
(Accurate dialysis measurement) activate the option.

HCT Crit-Line If a Dialog Serial Interface DSI is present in the machine, it must be selected
and saved to activate the option.
Note
• The activation of the HCT Crit-Line option enables a window in therapy.
This window allows the data exchange and display of measurement values
to a connected HemaMetrics™ Crit-Line device.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 174

4.9.1 Dialog Version Number

The Dialog Version Number menu is selected with

the Dialog Version Number window in Production
Report. The current software/firmware versions and
hardware versions are displayed. This menu can also
be selected in the TSM Main Menu.
The various software versions for top level,
controller, supervisor, etc. are displayed and can be
checked. These versions depend on the installed
Dialog software version. The following software and
hardware statuses can be checked:

Component SW Versions
The versions for the installed software/firmware are
displayed.
• Top Level Controller Software TLC SW
• System Configuration
(displays the system configuration version
number for the haemodialysis machine)
• Low Level Controller Software LLC SW
• Low Level Controller Firmware LLC FW
• Low Level Supervisor Software LLS SW
• Low Level Supervisor Firmware LLS FW
• Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement ABPM
(firmware for the ABPM module is displayed)
Language Versions
The installed languages are displayed.
Treatment
• 044 - English
• 049 - German
• or further therapy languages
TSM
• 044 – English
• 049 – German
Low Level Hardware Versions
The boards are displayed with the respective
hardware versions, e.g. a HDF online machine. The
displayed HW versions depend on the assembled
boards in the machine.
• Basic Board BB
• Analog Board AB
• Power Board Motors BPM
• Power Board Valves BPV
• HDF Online Board HOB
• Digital Board DB

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 175

4.9.2 Low Level Options

Press the Low Level Options key in the Production Report menu to open the
Low Level Options menu.

Options assembled in the machine must be

activated. Further options present in the Dialog
must also be activated in this menu or in the
Production Report menu (see 4.9).
The following options can be activated:
Low Level Options
• Double Pump
• Holder for BIC Cartridge
• DF Filter
• HDF Online
• Battery (Emergency Supply)
• Nexadia-BSL (DBI)
• WAN-BSL (DBI)

Double Pump If Double Pump is selected and saved, cross-over and the PBS pressure sensor
are automatically activated.
Holder for BIC Cartridge If the option BIC cartridge holder is assembled or the option is retrofitted, it
must be selected and saved to activate the option.
DF Filter If the option DF Filter (dialysate fluid filter) is assembled or the option is
retrofitted, it must be selected and saved to activate the option.
HDF Online HDF Online must be selected and saved for HDF online machines.
Battery If the emergency supply (battery) option is assembled or the option is
retrofitted, it must be selected and saved to activate the option.
Networking Note
Dialog + Enter the serial number (see SN on type plate) in the menu Production Report,
Hersteller /
B.Braun Avitum AG
34209 Melsungen, Germany if the Dialog is networked. This serial number is required and used (query) as
SN 10xxxx the identification number (ID) of the machine if networked (e.g. Nexadia
2500
VA network).
REF 710xxx
V 230~
50/60
• Ser-No. = SN (see type plate)
Hz
Not to be used in presence of
IP 21 0123 flammable anaesthetic gases
Detailed information for networking (DBI) with Dialog machines are available
in the technical information for Nexadia-BSL/WAN-BSL networks.

Nexadia-BSL (DBI) The Dialog can be integrated in a computer network with a Nexadia-BSL
module. If the option is assembled or the option is retrofitted, it must be
BSL = Bedside Link selected and saved to activate the option.
DBI = Dialog Bedside Link Interface
WAN-BSL (DBI) The Dialog can be integrated in a computer network with a WAN-BSL module.
If the option is assembled or the option is retrofitted, it must be selected and
WAN = Wide Area Network saved to activate the option.
BSL = Bedside Link
DBI = Dialog Bedside Link Interface

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 4. TSM Service Program 1/2010 4 - 176

4.10 Service Reports

The Operation Mode Report can be selected in the

Service Reports menu.

Operation Mode Report

The switching from therapy mode to TSM mode
and back to the therapy mode is documented with
date and time.

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 4-3-1_1_2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5-1

Copyright This document is the property of B. Braun Avitum AG with all rights reserved.

Service Only trained personnel must service the Dialog+, i.e. repair, maintenance, software installation,
firmware update, retrofitting and commissioning of the Dialog+.
Servicing must only be performed with proper tools, calibration equipment and be in accordance
with the most recent revision of this service manual/technical information, which must be
clearly and thoroughly understood.

Prevent Electrical Shock Hazard Switch off the Dialog+ and disconnect unit from mains if you have to open the machine for
servicing. Do not touch any exposed wiring or conductive surfaces while the Dialog+ is opened.
The voltages present when electrical power is connected to the Dialog+ can cause serious injury
or death.

ESD Information Pay attention to ESD information, because electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic
discharges.

High Voltage If a battery option is present in the machine:

in TFT Monitor High voltage can be present at the backlight inverter board BIB in the TFT monitor, even if the
! machine has been disconnected from mains. Pull out the battery compartment in the base
platform and switch off the battery voltage (remove fuse) before opening the machine.

Protective Conductor in TFT Housing If the TFT housing had to be opened during a service job, the tight seat of the protective
conductors in the TFT housing must be checked.

TSM Service Program Only activate the TSM service program for service activities. It is prohibited to connect a patient
to the Dialog+ and to run a therapy if the TSM service program is activated in the Dialog+. If
the TSM service program is activated the complete alarm system is disabled. The TSM service
program is started in the service mode: digital board, service switch S1, position 2.

Software The software is installed in the software mode: digital board, service switch S1, position 3.

Therapy Mode After completion of all procedures switch back to the therapy mode: digital board, service
switch S1, position 0.

Calibration Only perform a calibration after the Dialog+ has reached working temperature, and the machine
was disinfected and decalcified. You should save the calibration data to the hard disk drive
before you exit the TSM service program: TSM Main Menu, File Operations, Save Calibration
Data.

Connection and Operation Service Board The service board must only be operated in the TSM service program. If the service board is
connected to the Dialog+ it is prohibited to connect a patient to the Dialog+ and to run a
therapy.

Prevent Chemical Burns and Scalding During servicing on running machines: prevent chemical burns and scalding of the skin due to
the penetration of disinfectant or hot liquid.

Contaminated Machines Protective gear should be worn in case of servicing of assumed contaminated machines.

Cover in Rear Door Servicing of mechanical assembly groups (components in contact with fluid): the cover in the
rear door must be assembled during servicing because it serves as a spray protection for the
assembled SMPS-MC.

Tubing Tubing must be replaced only by the same tubing type/length and identical installation manner.

Make sure that the tubings in the machine are not kinked or twisted after servicing (e.g. if sub-
racks are pulled out and inserted again). The tubing must not touch moving/rotating
components (e.g. motors of gear pumps).

Wiring Wiring must be replaced only by the same cable type/length and identical installation manner.
The cables must not touch moving/rotating components (e.g. motors of gear pumps).

Fuses If fuses are replaced they must exactly match the type and rating specified by the manufacturer
in the spare parts list/technical information. Where applicable: fuses must be approved by
UL/CSA.

Spare Parts Only use original spare parts manufactured and sold by B. Braun Avitum AG.

Ambient Temperature Before the Dialog+ is switched on the machine must have room temperature (see operating
manual, chapter 15).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5-2

Table of Contents Page

5.1 Check List for Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive 5-3
Maintenance
5.1.1 Measurement Circuits for the Measurement of the Electrical 5-7
Safety According to EN 62353/60601-1
5.2 Inspection Protocol for Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement 5-8
ABPM together with the Dialog+
5.2.1 Execution Procedure for Measurement Inspection ABPM 5-9

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5-3

5.1 Check List for Technical Safety Inspection

and Preventive Maintenance
For Dialog+ SW 9.xx The technical safety inspection shall be performed and documented every 12 months, according to
the specified check list and with reference to the service manual and instructions for use.
The preventive maintenance is recommended every 12 months, according to the specified check
list and with reference to the service manual and instructions for use and shall be documented.

REF {Type/Typ}: ........................................ SN {Serien-No./Nr.}: .................................................

Year of Purchase: ................... Responsible Organisation (User): .................................................

..................................................................................................................................................................

Operating Hours: ................................... h Inventory No.: ..............................................................

SW Version: ...............................................
Manufacturer: B. Braun Avitum AG
34209 Melsungen, Germany

Check List (S = Technical Safety Inspection Points; M = Preventive Maintenance Points)

S M NO YES OK
Note: Text in { } brackets is information for the execution of the check list!
Technical Safety Inspection 
Technical Safety Inspection with Preventive Maintenance 

1. Disinfection/decalcification was performed   

M

2. Visual Inspection with Maintenance Procedures

S 2.1 Visual Inspection   
{Machine: clean/complete; no damages/moisture influences (protection covers) or loose assemblies; no moveable parts
touching tubings or wires; casters are moveable; type plate legible}
M 2.2 Clean interior space and exterior surfaces   
M 2.3 Suction tubing for disinfection and concentrate exchanged    
M 2.4 O-rings at suction rod exchanged    
M 2.5 Balance chamber – no visible leakages   
S 2.6 Check tight seat and damages of mains supply (power supply cord, strain relief), potential equalisation cable, staff call/data   
lines (if present) and connectors
M 2.7 Tubing connectors , clamps and couplings (internal/external) are assembled correctly   
M 2.8 Membranes, o-rings and tubings at the dialyser couplings exchanged    
M 2.9 HDF Online Option present   
2.9.1 O-rings {12.37 x 2.62} and membranes {for HDF filter with couplings} exchanged    
2.9.2 Hydrophobic filter HFB exchanged    
2.9.3 Filter FSU {between PSABF and VSAA} exchanged    
M 2.10 DF Filter Option present   
2.10.1 Membranes exchanged    
M 2.11 Tight seat of boards and connectors (incl. mains connection in switch mode power supply)   
2.12 Exchange dust filter of fan (rear door)    
M 2.13 Filter (FVD, FB, FK, FBK1/2, FBIC, FEP) exchanged    
M 2.14 Filter level regulation module (HFA, HFV, HFE (HFS if present)) exchanged    
M 2.15 BIC Cartridge Holder Option present   
2.15.1 O-rings exchanged    
M 2.16 Battery on PC motherboard exchanged (after operating period of 4 years)   
{Battery is not included in the maintenance kit, if necessary order separately.}
M 2.17 Monitor: no restriction of motion of rotation; touch membrane/keyboard membrane not damaged   
M 2.18 Check non-return valve RVDA (400 mbar ±50 mbar or 300 mmHg ±37 mmHg) and set if necessary   
(for HDF Online: 500 mbar ±50 mbar or 375 mmHg ±37 mmHg)
M 2.19 Check non-return valve DDE (400 mbar ±50 mbar or 300 mmHg ±37 mmHg) and set if necessary   
M 2.20 Check non-return valve RVFPE (1,300 mbar ±50 mbar or 975 mmHg ±37 mmHg) and set if necessary   
M 2.21 Check non-return valve RVFPA (1,300 mbar ±50 mbar or 975 mmHg ±37 mmHg) and set if necessary   

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5-4

Check List (S = Technical Safety Inspection Points; M = Preventive Maintenance Points)

S M NO YES OK
Note: Text in { } brackets is information for the execution of the check list!
M 2.22 Conductivity Sensors
2.22.1 ENDLF sensor: Visual inspection ‰ ‰ ‰
2.22.2 BICLF sensor: Visual inspection ‰ ‰ ‰
M 2.23 Piston Pumps
2.23.1 BIC piston pump: Visual inspection ‰ ‰ ‰
2.23.2 KP piston pump: Visual inspection ‰ ‰ ‰
M 2.23.3 UF piston pump: Visual inspection ‰ ‰ ‰
M 2.24 Blood leak detector (BLD) test passed ‰ ‰ ‰
2.24.1 Check blood leak detector and calibrate if necessary n ‰ ‰ ‰
M 2.25 Degassing Pressure Sensor PE (permissible tolerance ±13 [mbar])

- Comparison measurement (at approx. -530): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ......................... [mbar] ‰

- Comparison measurement (at approx. -130): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ......................... [mbar] ‰
M 2.26 Dialysate Outlet Pressure Sensor PDA (permissible tolerance ±13 [mbar])

- Comparison measurement (at approx. -530): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ......................... [mbar] ‰

- Comparison measurement (at approx. 0): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ......................... [mbar] ‰

- Comparison measurement (at approx. +530): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ......................... [mbar] ‰
M 2.27 Heparin Pump

2.27.1 Position (80 mm ± 15 mm) {Drive fast forward to end position with 30 ml syringe. Check display position in mm.} ......................... [mm] ‰
M 2.28 Set summer/winter time {TSM, Treatment Support, System Configuration, if applicable in this country} ‰ ‰ ‰

3. Function Inspection (Document Measurement Values)

S 3.1 Blood Pump: - Check function, moveability, noise rating ‰
3.1.1 - Check roller/one-way bearing; clean and lubricate shaft slightly if necessary ‰
3.1.2 - Alarm cover switch ‰
S 3.2 Single-Needle Pump: Option present ‰ ‰ ‰
3.2.1 - Check function, moveability, noise rating ‰
3.2.2 - Check roller/one-way bearing; clean and lubricate shaft slightly if necessary ‰
3.2.3 - Alarm cover switch ‰
S 3.3 Venous Tubing Clamp SAKV: - Function/gap checked, set gap 1.4 (+0.1 mm) if necessary ‰
S 3.4 Arterial Tubing Clamp SAKA: Option present ‰ ‰ ‰
3.4.1 - Function/gap checked, set gap 1.4 (+0.1 mm) if necessary ‰
S 3.5 Arterial Pressure PA: (permissible. tolerance ±10 [mmHg])

Comparison measurement (at approx. -400): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ...................... [mmHg] ‰

Comparison measurement (at approx. 0): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ...................... [mmHg] ‰
S 3.6 Inlet Pressure PBE: (permissible. tolerance ±10 [mmHg])

Comparison measurement (at approx. 0): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ...................... [mmHg] ‰

Comparison measurement (at approx. +400): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ...................... [mmHg] ‰
S 3.7 Venous Pressure PV: (permissible. tolerance ±10 [mmHg])

- Comparison measurement (at approx. 0): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ...................... [mmHg] ‰

Comparison measurement (at approx. +400): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ...................... [mmHg] ‰
S 3.8 Single-Needle Pressure PBS: (permissible. tolerance ±10 [mmHg]) Option present ‰ ‰ ‰

- Comparison measurement (at approx. 0): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ...................... [mmHg] ‰

- Comparison measurement (at approx. +400): Measurement instrument: ......................... Display on machine: ...................... [mmHg] ‰

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5-5

Check List (S = Technical Safety Inspection Points; M = Preventive Maintenance Points)

S M NO YES OK
Note: Text in { } brackets is information for the execution of the check list!
S 3.9 Staff Call: Option present ‰ ‰ ‰
3.9.1 - Function or contact continuity passed ‰ ‰ ‰
S 3.10 Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement ABPM: Option present ‰ ‰ ‰
3.10.1 - ABPM inspection protocol performed {see separate ABPM inspection protocol, paragraph 5.2} ‰ ‰ ‰

4. Electrical Safety Check According to EN 62353/EN 60601-1

S 4.1 Protective Earth Resistance:
< 0.3 [Ω] {note highest value}: ....................... [Ω] ‰
{(Machine incl. power supply cord. Move the power supply cord during the check. Thus possible loose connections can be detected. Data lines
and potential equalisation cable must not be connected during the check of the protective earth resistance (see figure 1)}
{Measurement points:}
{Exterior: Potential equalisation bolt, rinsing bridge (dialyser inlet and outlet)}
{Interior: Heater body (top), rear door (top left corner), frame (rear), housing cover (top left), front door (top left)}
{Monitor: Monitor (one of the screws in the front panel/housing}
S 4.2 Equipment Leakage Current:
{All water connections and data lines must be connected during the check (see figure 2) of the equipment leakage current.}

≤ 0.5 [mA]: - During heat-up phase {change mains polarity and note highest value}: .................... [mA] ‰
S 4.3 Patient Leakage Current:
{All water connections and data lines must be connected during the check (see figure 3) of the patient leakage current.}
≤ 10 [µA] DC: - Under normal conditions {at dialyser coupling}, conductivity at 13 - 15 mS/cm: ...................... [µA] ‰
≤ 10 [µA] AC: - Under normal conditions {at dialyser coupling}, conductivity at 13 - 15 mS/cm: ...................... [µA] ‰

5. Setting into Service According to Instructions for Use

S 5.1 Applied Accessories/Disposables: Applied line system:
Name: ........................................................................................................................................
S 5.2 Switch on machine: - Self-test passed ‰

S 5.3 Power Fail Function:

{Activate buzzer in power supply, i.e. switch on machine for approx. 5 minutes and then disconnect mains plug.}
- Check function, duration of a constant audible alarm > 1 minute ‰

S 5.4 Temperature: - Comparison measurement {at dialyser coupling}, at 37 oC (-1.5; +0.5): ............................ [oC] ‰

S 5.5 Conductivity: - Comparison measurement {at dialyser coupling, e.g. 14.3 mS/cm (±0.2)}: .................. [mS/cm] ‰

S 5.6 Safety Air Detector (SAD): - Test alarm function (visual/audible) passed ‰

S 5.7 Monitor
5.7.1 Function of the keys, display illumination, OSDs (for Dialog+) and touch screen OK ‰
5.7.2 Image display OK ‰
S 5.8 Ultrafiltration:
{see chapter 3 Measures after Repair, paragraph 3.8.2.5 Test Run UF Comparison Measurement}
- Comparison measurement at 15 min with UF rate 500 ml/h (125 ml UF volume ±15 ml) :

Display on machine: ................................. Meas. instrument: ........................................... [ml] ‰

S 5.9 Battery Option: Option present ‰ ‰ ‰
5.9.1 - Activate audible alarm ‰ ‰ ‰
{The machine must be in therapy mode. Disconnect mains plug: The buzzer from the SMPS-MC gives three signalling tones as
an indication that the machine is running in battery mode.}
M 5.10 Disinfection: - Perform by responsible organisation {user} ‰ ‰ ‰
{inform responsible organisation}
- Performed by service technician ‰ ‰ ‰

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5-6

Check List (S = Technical Safety Inspection Points; M = Preventive Maintenance Points)

S M NO YES OK
Note: Text in { } brackets is information for the execution of the check list!

Applied Measurement Equipment:

Electrical Safety: ...................................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Conductivity: ............................................................................................. * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Temperature: ............................................................................................. * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Pressure: ..................................................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Flow: ............................................................................................................ * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Balance: ...................................................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Pressure Manometer: ............................................................................. * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Template 1.4/1.5: ..................................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

Other Measurement Device: ................................................................. * ID/Serial No.: .................................

....................................................................................................................... * ID/Serial No.: .................................

* If applicable, please enter the type and identification number of the equipment used

CHECK RESULTS:
Customer specific parts or information on the machine (e.g. stickers/labels) were removed during the technical
safety inspection/preventive maintenance or repair: ‰ ‰ ‰
New labelling must be performed by responsible organisation (user): ‰ ‰ ‰

Results of Test and Evaluation: 2‰ 1‰ 0‰ ‰

0 = no deficiencies; 1 = minor deficiencies; 2 = deficiencies requiring repair

Comments:
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The technical safety inspection/technical safety inspection with preventive maintenance was passed: ‰ ‰ ‰

Next Inspection Date: ................................................................................................................................................................

The technical safety inspection/technical Name Service Technician/Company:
safety inspection with preventive ................................................................................................................................................................
maintenance was performed correctly.
................................................................................................................................................................
Date / Signature

{n Maintenance Kit}
{A maintenance kit can be ordered for the technical safety {Art. No. Description}
inspection with preventive maintenance of a Dialog machine. All
parts are included which are recommended for exchange during a {3451893D Maintenance Kit}
preventive maintenance.}

{o Maintenance Kit/Supplement HDF Online}

{A second maintenance kit can be ordered for the technical {Art. No. Description}
safety inspection with preventive maintenance. As a supplement
this kit includes all parts recommended for exchange during a {34560686 Maintenance Kit/Supplement HDF Online}
preventive maintenance of a HDF online machine.}

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5-7

5.1.1 Measurement Circuits for Measurement of Electrical

Safety According to IEC 62353/60601-1
Protective earth (ground)

L, N Supply mains terminals PE Protective earth terminal

MP Mains part AP Applied part

Measuring device M Residual current meter with frequency

MD response as MD

Resistance measurement equipment

Part of enclosure not protectively earthed Connection to accessible conductive parts

Table 1: Legend of Abbreviations and Symbols

Protective Earth Resistance

MP AP
L Test current: ≥ 200 mA
The test current must be measured in both
N directions.
PE

Fig. 1: Protective Earth Resistance

M Equipment Leakage Current:

L(N) MP AP
• Differential Measurement
L

N
N(L)

PE
Fig. 2: Equipment Leakage Current

Patient Leakage Current

L MP AP

N
PE

MD
Fig. 3: Patient Leakage Current

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5-8

5.2 Inspection Protocol for Automatic Blood Pressure

Measurement ABPM
Measurement Inspection The measurement inspection is recommended every 12 months and should be
documented. The measuring methods are described in the execution procedures.

Dialysis Machine Dialog REF {Type/Typ}: ........................................... SN {Serien-No./Nr.} .............................................

Automatic Blood Pressure ABPM Module M2009/2010

Measurement ABPM

Manufacturer B. Braun Avitum AG, 34209 Melsungen, Germany

Responsible Organisation (User) Address: ..............................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................................................

1. Visual Inspection - Tight seat of all connectors : ----------------------------------------------- OK ‰

- No damages which could affect the function or the safety
(incl. tubing and cuff): ------------------------------------------------------OK ‰
2. Limits of Error of the Pressure Admit a static pressure to the machine.
Indication
Pressure [mmHg] Measurement Values Deviation
Dialog Reference [mmHg]
290
200
100
50
0
The permissible tolerance for each measurement is:
ABPM Module: ------------------------------------------------- ± 3 mmHg: OK ‰

3. Air Leakage
Initial Pressure Final Pressure Air Leakage
[mmHg] [mmHg] [mmHg]

Pressure drop ABPM Module: ------------------------- ≤ 18 mmHg in 3 min: OK ‰

4. Rapid Exhaust - Time for pressure reduction from >260 mmHg to <15 mmHg max. 10 s: ....... s OK ‰
- Trigger of rapid exhaust between 300 mmHg and 330 mmHg: --------------- OK ‰
5. Function Inspection The results of a measurement on a test person are plausible ------------------- OK ‰
6. Result of Inspection The blood pressure measurement module has passed the
measurement inspection: -------------------------------------------- No ‰ Yes ‰

Comments: ........................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................................................

The measurement inspection was Name Service Technician:

performed correctly. ................................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................................................
Date / Signature

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5-9

5.2.1 Execution Procedure for Measurement

Inspection ABPM
• Reference pressure instrument (accuracy ≤ 0.8 mmHg)
• Measurement chamber with 500 ml volume (rigid metal
vessel, e.g. art. no. 7703090)
• Syringe 50 ml (for pressure build-up)
• Stopcock system incl. tubing (e.g. art. no. 770203A)
• Pressure tubing
Activate the ABPM Maintenance menu with the ABPM
Maintenance key in TSM Service Program, TL Manual Test and
Calibration.
The ABPM Maintenance menu is used for the function test of
the Dialog automatic blood pressure measurement ABPM option.

To Point 2: Limits of Error of the Pressure Indication Measurement according to EN 1060-1:1995 and EN 1060-
3:1997.

Reference Instrument 1. Connect all components according to figure (set stopcock

system according to figure).

Measurement 2. Switch on Dialog in TSM service program.

Chamber
3. Select in TSM Manual Test and Calibration, TTL Manual Test
ABPM and Calibration and then ABPM Maintenance.
500 ml

4. Press button.
Wait until a pressure build-up of approx. 170 mmHg (start of
pressure retention phase).
Pressure Tube
5. Increase the test pressure to 290 mmHg (± 10 mmHg) with
1 2 3 4 the syringe. Read the value displayed on the Dialog and close
50 ml
stopcock 4 immediately. Now read the value on the reference
Stopcock System 50 ml Syringe
instrument and enter in table.
Fig.: Inspection Set-up for Compliance of Error Limits of the
Measurement Display 6. Decrease pressure according to test points and enter values in
table.
7. Enter deviations in table.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 5. Technical Safety Inspection and Preventive Maintenance 1/2010 5 - 10

To Point 3: Air Leakage

1. Set-up and connect ABPM according to figure.
Measurement
Chamber
ABPM 2. Press button.
A test pressure of approx. 200 mmHg is automatically built
up (test duration 4 minutes).
500 ml
3. Enter values in table after test is expired.
The values are displayed after the time has elapsed:
The Initial Pressure, Final Pressure and Leakage are displayed
in the ABPM Maintenance menu point 4.
Pressure Tube Pressure drop ABPM module:----------------------- ≤ 18 mmHg
Fig.: Inspection Set-Up for Inspection of Air Leakage

To Point 4: Rapid Exhaust

Reference Instrument

1. Press button.
Measurement Wait until a pressure build-up of approx. 290 mmHg (start of
Chamber pressure retention phase).
ABPM 2. Increase slowly pressure to > 300 mmHg with the syringe
500 ml
until valve opens for rapid exhaust.
3. The valve for rapid exhaust must open between 300 and 330
mmHg. The indicated time for the pressure drop must not be
exceeded.
Pressure Tube Pressure reduction from >260 mmHg to <15 mmHg: ---- max. 10 s

1 2 3 4
50 ml

Stopcock System 50 ml Syringe

Fig.: Inspection Set-up for Rapid Exhaust

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 5-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx
e
6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-1

Table of Contents Page

6.1 Flow Diagrams 6-2

6.1.1 Legend Flow Diagrams 6-2
6.1.2 Flow Diagram Dialog+ 6-4
6.1.3 Flow Diagram Dialog+ BIC/DF Option 6-5
6.1.4 Flow Diagram Dialog+ HDF-Online 6-6

6.2 Wiring Diagrams Dialog+ 6-7

6.2.1 Legend Wiring Diagram 6-7
6.2.2 Wiring Diagram Front Door Single Pump 6-8
6.2.3 Wiring Diagram Front Door Double Pump 6-9
6.2.4 Wiring Diagram Front Door HDF Online 6-10
6.2.5 Wiring DiagramWiring Diagram Housing 6-11
6.2.3 Colour Coding Solenoid Valves 6-12
6.2.3.1 Solenoid Valves UF Sub-Rack 6-12
6.2.3.2 Solenoid Valves Water Sub-Rack 6-12

6.3 Tubing Diagrams 6-13

6.3.1 Tubing Diagram Housing 6-13
6.3.2 Tubing Diagram UF Sub-Rack 6-14
6.3.3 Tubing Diagram DF Sub-Rack 6-15
6.3.4 Tubing Diagram Water Sub-Rack 6-16
6.3.5 Tubing Diagram BIC Cartridge Holder 6-17
6.3.6 Tubing Diagram Housing HDF Online 6-18
6.3.7 Tubing Diagram UF Sub-Rack HDF Online 6-19

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-2

6.1 Flow Diagrams

6.1.1 Legend Flow Diagrams

Symbol Abbreviation Description

BICLF Bicarbonate conductivity sensor

ENDLF End conductivity sensor
ENDLF-S End conductivity sensor supervisor

BICP Bicarbonate pump

KP Concentrate pump
UFP Ultrafiltration pump
BPA Arterial blood pump
BPV Venous blood pump

LA Air separator
LAFS Air separator level sensors

BL Blood leak detector

DDE Dialyser Inlet throttle

RVDA Dialysate nonreturn valve
RVFPA Flow pump outlet nonreturn valve
RVFPE Flow pump inlet nonreturn valve

RVB Bicarbonate nonreturn valve

RVK Concentrate nonreturn valve
DBK Throttle BIC cartridge

BVA Bicarbonate supply connection

KVA Concentrate supply connection

EP Degassing pump
8 FPA
FPE
Outlet flow pump
Inlet flow pump

BK1 Balance chamber 1

BK2 Balance chamber 2
MSBK1 Membrane position sensor balance chamber 1
MSBK2 Membrane position sensor balance chamber 2

FBK1 Filter balance chamber (inlet)

FBK2 Filter balance chamber (outlet)
FVD Filter from dialysate
FB Filter bicarbonate
FK Filter concentrate

KtV-UV KtV-UV sensor (option Adimea)

WAB Water block with degassing chamber, upline tank,

heat exchanger, level sensor, double-stage heater

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-3

DMV Pressure reducer valve

VD Dialyser coupling (from dialysate)

ZD Dialyser coupling (to dialysate)

BICSS Bicarbonate rinsing connection sensor

KSS Concentrate rinsing connection sensor
LVD Light barrier valve disinfection
SBS1 Rinsing connection sensor 1
SBS2 Rinsing connection sensor 2

VABK1 Outlet balance chamber valve 1

VABK2 Outlet balance chamber valve 2
VBP Bypass valve
VD Disinfection valve
VDA Dialyser outlet valve
VDABK1 Dialyser outlet balance chamber valve 1
VDABK2 Dialyser outlet balance chamber valve 2
VDE Dialyser inlet valve
VDEBK1 Dialyser inlet balance chamber valve 1
VDEBK2 Dialyser inlet balance chamber valve 2
VEBK1 Inlet balance chamber valve 1
VEBK2 Inlet balance chamber valve 2
VLA Air separator valve
VVBE Upline tank inlet valve
VZ Circulation valve
VEB Degassing bypass valve

SPA Rinsing adapter

RVB BIC nonreturn valve

RVBO Top BIC nonreturn valve
RVBU Bottom BIC nonreturn valve
PEV Sample valve

PA Arterial pressure sensor

PBE Blood inlet pressure sensor
PBS Blood control pressure sensor
PDA Dialysate outlet pressure sensor
PE Degassing pressure sensor
PV Venous pressure sensor

TSBIC Bicarbonate temperature sensor

TSD Dialysate temperature sensor
T TSD-S Dialysate temperature sensor supervisor
TSE Degassing temperature sensor
TSH Heater temperature sensor
TSHE Heater inlet temperature sensor
TSDE Dialyser inlet temperature sensor

UFP Ultrafiltration pump

RVUFP Ultrafiltration pump nonreturn valve

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-4
6.1.2 Flow Diagram Dialog+

Water Inlet Dialysate Outlet

Water Sub-Rack DF Sub-Rack UF Sub-Rack Rinsing Bridge

DMV

VVBE
A V
T
RVFPE PEV*
DDE TSDE VDE
NSVB

Balance Chamber
H TSD TSD-S
T
TSE T T T 8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
EK VB WT TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
WAB FBK1 Z.D.
RVB RVK VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1 Dialyser
T A B C D VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2 V.D.
PE TSH BICP KP
A LAFS FVD
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
D MSBK2 FBK2
8
T FPA LA VDA
RVDA BK2
TSHE
Air SBS1 SB1
C B VD M
FEP VZ
UFP RVFPA
VEB SKBS SKKS RVUFP
LVD
SBS2 SB2
EP
8 BIC
SS KSS

BVA FB FK KVA
BE KE
Central Bicarbonate Central Concentrate
Supply Supply

BE KE

FD
(Unit Rear)
KSB KSK Disinfectant
BIC Concentrate Acid Concentrate

Water Dialysate Flow 2 Blood Venous

Bicarbonate Dialysate Disinfectant

Concentrate Air Housing

Dialysate Flow 1 Blood Arterial

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-5
6.1.3 Flow Diagram Dialog+ BIC/DF Option

Water Inlet Dialysate Outlet

Water Sub-Rack DF Sub-Rack UF Sub-Rack Rear Door Rinsing Bridge

DMV

VVBE
DBK*
RVFPE DDE DF Filter * TSDE A V
NSVB

Balance Chamber T
H TSD TSD-S
T
VDE PEV*
TSE T T T 8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
EK VB WT TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
WAB FBK1 Z.D.
RVB RVK VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1 Dialyser
T A B C D VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2 V.D.
PE TSH BICP KP
A LAFS FVD
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
D VBICP* MSBK2 FBK2
8
T FPA LA VDA
Kt/V-UV* RVDA BK2
TSHE VBKO*
Air SBS1 SB1
C B VD M
FEP VZ
UFP RVFPA
VEB VVB* FBIC VBKS SKBS SKKS RVUFP
LVD
SBS2 SB2
EP
8 BIC
SS KSS

RVBO* BVA FB FK KVA

BE KE
Central Bicarbonate Central Concentrate
Supply Supply

SPA BE KE

FD
BKUS (Unit Rear)
KSB KSK Disinfectant
RVBU BIC Concentrate Acid Concentrate

Water Dialysate Flow 2 Blood Venous

Bicarbonate Dialysate Disinfectant

Concentrate Air Housing

*

Dialysate Flow 1 Blood Arterial Options

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-6
6.1.4 Flow Diagram Dialog+ HDF-Online

HFB
Water Inlet Dialysate Outlet VBE

VSB VSAE
Water Sub-Rack DF Sub-Rack UF Sub-Rack Rear Door
Front Door

HDF Filter PSAUS

DF Filter PSABF
DMV FSU

VSAA
VVBE DDE
Rinsing Bridge
DBK*
RVFPE A V
NSVB

Balance Chamber TSDE

H TSD TSD-S T
T VDFF
VDE PEV*
TSE T T T 8 VDEBK1 BK1 VABK1
VBP
EK VB WT TSBIC BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S FPE
WAB FBK1 Z.D.
RVB RVK VEBK1 VDABK1
MSBK1 Dialyser
T A B C D VLA
VDEBK2 VABK2 V.D.
PE TSH BICP KP
A LAFS FVD
VEBK2 VDABK2 BL PDA
D VBICP* MSBK2 FBK2
8
T FPA LA VDA
Kt/V-UV* RVDA BK2
TSHE VBKO*
Air SBS1 SB1
C B VD M
VZ RVUFP
FEP UFP RVFPA
VEB VVB* FBIC VBKS SKBS SKKS
LVD
SBS2 SB2
EP
8 BIC
SS KSS

RVBO* BVA FB FK KVA

BE KE
Central Bicarbonate Central Concentrate
Supply Supply

SPA BE KE

FD
BKUS (Unit Rear)
KSB KSK Disinfectant
RVBU BIC Concentrate Acid Concentrate

Water Dialysate Flow 2 Blood Venous

Bicarbonate Dialysate Disinfectant

Concentrate Air Housing

*

Dialysate Flow 1 Blood Arterial Options

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-7

6.2 Wiring Diagrams Dialog+

6.2.1 Legend Wiring Diagram
Symbol Description

Cable connection from basic board to front door:

2 - Single pump
- Double pump
- HDF online
Cable connection from basic board to front door:
3 - Single pump
- Double pump
- HDF online
Cable connection from basic board to front door:
8 - Double pump
- HDF online

9 Cable connection from basic board to front door:

- Double pump
- HDF online

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-8

6.2.2 Wiring Diagram Front Door Single Pump

19 Motor Heparin pump

LR
601 603 PA LR
S
2 39
PV
PBE

26
39:
DZ/DR, 38
16
Cover
BPA
3 604 SAD
10
27

SAKV

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-9

6.2.3 Wiring Diagram Front Door Double Pump

19 Motor Heparin pump

LR
42 PA LR
28 S PV
2/8 PBE, PBS

41:
DZ/DR,
16 16
Cover
BPV BPA
3/9 SAD
10
27

27 SAKA SAKV

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-10

6.2.4 Wiring Diagram Front Door HDF Online

19 Motor Heparin pump

LR
PA LR
S PV
8 PBE, PBS

16 16
BPV BPA
3/9 97 SAD
16 16
SS

FS
AU

AB

10
PS

PS

SAKA SAKV

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

 6.2.5
TFT Monitor Option Card Reader
BIB 122

OSD
OSD
910
TCB 94

121
801
SW9.xx

801
25 87 Option BSL

Battery LED2 14
BIB
FPB
LPT FPB LSS
24
24 123
87
Loudspeaker 124
Wiring Diagram Housing

Option DCI 91 25 JUMPER:

JCFSET1
15 PS2 2-4: uDOC
JUMPER: 4-6: CFC 57
WriteProtect
1-2: Disable writeprotect 302 90
COM2 (DIABUS) 2-3: Enable writeprotect

COM3 (ABPM) LX800

93 92 COM4(TCB) VGA COM4 (TCB)
MFC USB8
Motherboard MB_USB-
MB_USB1 - USBService SW/FSU Cardreader
121 USB7 JUMPER:
JUMPER: JLVDSPWR
JBAT CMOS TFT Power
304 USB6 Normal CMOS 1-2 1-2: 3,3V
Clear CMOS2-3 (Samsung) 102

AKKU LED2
PWR TIB/FPB
Interface COM1 3-4: 5,0V
(Philips)

LPT(FPB)
MB_USB- DSI USB5 MB_USB- Adimea
FPB USB4 USB2 Speaker
RS232 PC
196 USB3 USB1 13579
124 Type A

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd

DVI
122
PWR
6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams

23
Mains Switch SAKA

3 9 82 ABPM
Option Crit-Line 81
Fan
Option
Interface DZ/DR
BPA
Staff Call
SAKV
DZ/DR
BPV

DSI 22 FPA UFP 6

VD
EP KP
BPA BPV FPE
27 Valves (+BIC) HDFO/ HDF VCH
20,21,602 LR BICP SAD
111
PS1
BSL-PWR

95 196
98 PERS-R
NT

PS2 FPB
46
BIC-K
Basic Board
DIABUS

SBS

Digital Board Digital Board

TSDE MSBK

57
BKUS
HEP

Analog Board Analog Board

NSVB

TSHE TSBIC BICLF

5 PE PDA 7
ENDLF+S

Connector Assignments BLD PBLOOD LAFS TSE TSD TSD-S

LX800 Motherboard
1
COM2: DIABUS
COM3: ABPM HDFO
COM4: Touch Screen (TCB)

USB1: USBService SW/FSU

USB2: uDOC
Rear Door 19 97
USB3: NA
USB4: CardReader
USB5: DSI
HDFO Valves
& Sensors

USB6: Adimea
USB7: NA FEHDFS
USB8: NA

IDE: Flash Card UF Sub-Rack

16
VSAE VSAA
30
VLA
VABK1
Rinsing Bridge VDFF*
VEBK1 VDABK2
LAFS VEBK2
TSDE T
VD
VBP*
M
2 PDA VDEBK2
VDE 16 VDA
BLD VDEBK1
VABK2
SBS1 SBS2 40 VBE
37 36 VDABK1
3 VSB
MSBK1 MSBK2
32 17
Concentrate Rinsing
Connector Sensors
16
KSS DF Sub-Rack
8 BICP UFP KP
53 44,45,47
BICSS TSBIC T
16 34 TSD
54 50
TSD-S
9 BICC
Option BIC
27
T T
FEDFFS 48
FPE
56 55
BKUS
16 FPA
43
BICLF ENDLF ENDLF-S
16 9
1
10 10 TSE 51
HDF
H T
99 31 TSHE
Online
94 T
Earth Housing NSVB Water Block
Central Earth 52
PWR Adimea

27
Option BIC

XP12 VBKO 6
VBKS

XP10 19 VVBE VBICP VVB

23 EP

XP4
SMPS-MC 10
27
VZ VEP
1/2010

21 33
XP5 86 External Earth PE Water Sub-Rack 102 95
Batt-
Batt+
20
XP9XP7 XP8 Option Battery
22 XP14 XP11 10 Fuse
Battery 1
XP2

XP2
602 H2 PE PE 100
H1 N Option Adimea
L NPE

81 86
Fan
Mains Plug Battery 2
99
6-11

95
B. Braun Avitum AG
 + SW 9.xx 6 . F l o w , W i r i n g a n d T u b i n g D i a g r a m s
Dialog
6.2.3 Colour Coding Solenoid Valves
1/2010 6-12

6.2.3.1 Solenoid Valves UF Sub-Rack

gn rd
VSAE wh
VSAA wh

rd wh Balance Chamber

VLA vi
gn vi VDABK2
VDFF* wh
LAFS bk VABK1 gr gn
VEBK2
bk gr gn
br
VBP* VEBK1 br
rd
br
VDEBK2
MSBK1
gr
VDA bl wh MSBK2
wh
bl VDEBK1
VBE bl
wh
bl
VABK2
bk gr
wh VDABK1
VSB wh

6.2.3.2 Solenoid Valves Water Sub-Rack

TSE
H T
TSHE
T
NSVB Water Block

Option BIC

bk br gn
VVBE wh
VBKS ye VBKO wh

VBICP
wh
VVB
bl
8 EP

bl ye

bk black
gn gr bl blue
VZ VEB br brown
wh wh gn green
gr grey
rd red
PE vi violet
wh white
ye yellow

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-13
6.3 Tubing Diagrams
6.3.1 Tubing Diagram Housing Silicone Tubing 6x3

Silicone Water Sub-Rack Silicone Tubing 2.9x3

Tubing
5x3 SNP4
T Reduction

SNP6 Silicone Tubing 6x3

WAB Silicone
Tubing
5x3
VVBE VZ VEB Silicone
Tubing
6x3
EP Silicone SNP6
Tubing
RVDA Rinsing Bridge 6x3
FEP VD PDA DF Sub-Rack
DMV PE Silicone
Tubing
6x3 FPE ENDLF BICLF
FPA
Single VDE
Ear
Clamp
13.3 Silicone TSDE
Tubing SNP6
Silicone 6x3 BL
Tubing KP
6x1.75 Y1
red UFP
VLA FBK1 BICP
SNP6
Silicone
Water Sub-Rack Tubing
6x3
Y3
Silicone
Tubing VBP
6x3 VDA
Silicone
NSVB Tubing
2.9x3
H
WT

SNP1.5 SNP4 Cable SNP1.5

Tie
Silicone
Tubing
VEB VVBE 2.9x3
VZ red
WAB
TSHE

EP

FEP
RVDA UF Sub-Rack
blue
DMV

Silicone Tubing 6x3

Rinsing Chambers
Concentrate Suction Rods
Water
Inlet

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-14
6.3.2 Tubing Diagram UF Sub-Rack

UF Sub-Rack
BL Top RVDA TSDE WA Block

Silicone
Tubing SNP6
6x3
Y-Tubing
VDA Connector
8 mm
VDA SNP6
VLA
VLA Silicone
Tubing
6x3
Silicone LA
Tubing
6x3 Y-Tubing
Connector
8 mm LA
SNP6 (3x) RVFPA
Y-Tubing
Connector
8 mm Silicone
Silicone Tubing 6x3
Tubing 6x3 VBP
VEBK1
VBP
SNP6
SNP6 DDE
SNP6
VDEBK1 FBK2
VDABK1 SNP6 SNP6
SNP6
SNP6 (3x) SNP6 Silicone Silicone
Silicone Silicone
Tubing 6x3 Tubing Tubing
Tubing 6x3 6x3 6x3
Y-Tubing
SNP6 Connector
8 mm

SNP6 Disposable Filter

Silicone SNP6 (2x)
Tubing FBK2
6x3
Silicone
SNP6 (3x) Tubing 6x3
Y-Tubing
Connector
8 mm
VABK2
VDEBK2

FBK1
VEBK2
UFP
FPA
FPA
FPE

SNP6
Silicone SNP6 SNP6 Disposable
Tubing 6x3 Filter

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-15
6.3.3 Tubing Diagram DF Sub-Rack

DF Sub-Rack DF Sub-Rack from WA Block

Silicone
Tubing
5x3

to TSHE
(WA Block)
from WA Block

Y-Tubing
Connector
8 mm
Y-Tubing
Connector
8 mm
Silicone SNP6
Tubing Silicone
6x3 Tubing T Reduction
6x3
SNP6 Silicone SNP1.5 Silicone Silicone SNP4 SNP1.5 Return
Tubing Tubing Tubing Valve
6x3 2.9x3 6x3
SNP4
from LA to FBK1 (UF) DF Sub-Rack Silicone
Tubing
2.9x3
Silicone
Tubing
6x3

to T Reduction
(UF Sub-Rack)
FPE

BICP
Silicone Silicone
from Tubing Tubing
WA Block 2.9x3 6x3
FPA UFP

KP

to BIC
Suction Rod
T Reduction
on UF Sub-Rack

to LA (UF) to Concentrate
to TSHE/VEB Suction Rod
(WA Block)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-16
6.3.4 Tubing Diagram Water Sub-Rack

Water Sub-Rack
NSVB
H from Silicone
WT T Reduction Tubing
SNP4 5x3
SNP4 Silicone
Silicone Tubing
Tubing TSE 5x3
5x3
H TSE
WAB SNP4
Silicone
Silicone Tubing SNP4 SNP4
SNP4 Tubing 5x3
5x3 to Concentrate VZ
VZ VEB EP Suctions Rods Silicone EP
VVBE VZ VVBE Tubing VVBE
6x1.75 TSHE
(red)
FEP
Silicone FEP Silicone
SNP4 Tubing SNP4 Tubing
5x3 Silicone 6x1.75
Tubing (red)
SNP4 5x3
PE DMV SNP4 DMV
DMV SNP4

Silicone
NSVB Tubing
5x3
WT
Water Water Water
Inlet from Piston Inlet Inlet
Pump Rinsing H
WA-Block from VLA

Silicone
to DF Tubing
Processing VEB 8x2
Silicone TSE
Tubing
5x3
SNP4
EP
TSHE

RVDA
FEP

Silicone
Tubing
5x3

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-17
6.3.5 Tubing Diagram BIC Cartridge Holder

BIC Cartridge Holder

T Reduction
Silicone Tubing 2.9x3
DF Sub-Rack
SNP4

DF Block Silicone Tubing 6x3 Silicone Tubing 5x3

Silicone
Tubing
5x3

DBK
Silicone Tubing 6x3
VBKS VBKO
SNP6
RVB BICP
VBICP VVB Silicone
Tubing
VEB 6x3
VZ
Disposable
Filter
Y-Tubing Silicone
Silicone Tubing 2x3 Connector
8 mm Tubing
5x3
Silicone SNP1.5
Tubing
2.9x3
Silicone Tubing 2.9x3
Silicone Tubing 2.9x3
Silicone Tubing 5x3 Water Sub-Rack
Y-Tubing Connector 4-6-4
SNP6 Silicone Tubing 5x3

SNP6 Reduction Piece SNP4

BKUS
Silicone Tubing
2.9x3 Silicone Tubing 5x3
DBK
TSE
SNP6

Silicone Tubing 5x3 VBKO VBKS SNP1.5

VVB VBICP

Water
Silicone Tubing 5x3 Block

RVDA

Water Sub-Rack

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-18
6.3.6 Tubing Diagram Housing HDF Online

Water Sub-Rack UF Sub-Rack Air Separator

VLA
SNP6
Silicone Silicone
DBK Tubing Tubing VDFF
2.9x3 6x3
VBKS Concentrate Rod (blue)
SNP4

TSHE VVBE
EP
VABK2 VDABK1 VSB
SNP1.5
DMV VBE
Silicone VDEBK1
Tubing SNP6 VDEBK2
SNP4 6x3 HFB Silicone
Silicone Silicone SNP6 (2x) Tubing
Tubing Tubing VBP VDA 6x3
6x3 6x3 VEBK1 Rinsing Bridge
Dialysate VDABK2
Outlet SNP1.5 T Reduction VEBK2 VABK1
SNP6 (2x) Silicone VD
Silicone VDFF Tubing VDE
Silicone Silicone Tubing 6x3
Silicone SNP1.5 Tubing
2.9x3
Tubing 6x3 VLA SNP6
SNP4 6x3 Y7 LA Y1
Tubing VSAE BL
Silicone Y5
5x3 Tubing FPA
6x3 SNP6
VSAA TSDE
FPE DDE PDA
SNP4 Silicone Silicone
Tubing Tubing
DBK
RVFPA
SNP6 6x3 SNP6 (2x) 6x3
BIC
SNP6 Cartridge
SNP6
VBKS VBKO KP UFP Silicone Holder
VVB Tubing
VBICP BICP 6x3
VVBE
EP
VZ VEB Substitution
Port
SNP4
DMV PE SNP1.5
DF Sub-Rack SNP4 Cable Tie
Single
Ear
Clamp
13.3 SNP6
Silicone Silicone
Tubing SNP6 Tubing SNP1.5 (2x)
6x1.75 6x3 Silicone
red Tubing VBKS Silicone
2.9x3 Tubing
Water 6x3
Inlet Water Sub-Rack

BKUS
red

blue

Rinsing Chambers
Concentrate Suction Rods

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 6. Flow, Wiring and Tubing Diagrams 1/2010 6-19
6.3.7 Tubing Diagram UF Sub-Rack HDF Online

UF Sub-Rack HDF Online

DF HDF/DF HDF HDF HDF DF

WAB/VB
Filter Filter Filter Filter BL Filter Filter
(bottom) Top (top) (top)

WAB/VB
RVDA
Y-Tubing
Connector
Silicone 8 mm
Tubing VDA Silicone Silicone
6x3 Tubing Tubing
SNP6 Silicone 6x3 6x3
(3x) Tubing 6x3 Y3
SNP6
VLA
SNP6
Y1
VBP Y2
SNP6
VSB Y2
SNP6 SNP6 Silicone
Tubing
6x3
Y-Tubing
Connector LA VLA
SNP6 VBE 8 mm
LA
SNP6 VBP Silicone RVFPA VDFF
HFP Tubing
6x3
Silicone
Tubing Y4
SNP6 6x3 SNP6 VDFF
(3x) (3x)
Y5 SNP6
Y-Tubing DDE
Connector
8 mm SNP6
VDEBK1 SNP6
(3x) Y6 SNP6
Silicone SNP6 SNP6
Y-Tubing Tubing
Connector 6x3
VDABK1 8 mm

FBK2
Silicone VABK1 Silicone
Tubing Tubing
6x3 SNP6 6x3
(3x)
SNP6
(3x) Y3 VSAE SNP6
SNP6 SNP6 Y-Tubing
Connector
8 mm
Y-Tubing
Connector SNP6
Substitution
8 mm Port
Y7
Silicone
VDABK2 Tubing SNP6 Silicone Silicone
6x3 VSAA Tubing Tubing
Silicone 6x3 6x3
VABK2 Tubing
FBK1 6x3
VDEBK2 Silicone
Tubing 6x1.75

Y8 SNP6
VEBK2 (3x)
SNP6
Silicone
Tubing 6x1.75 Y-Tubing
FPA
FPA

Connector
FPE

8 mm

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 6_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7-1

Contact your Local

B. Braun Representative
for Service Support

Spare Parts List The spare parts list (edition 1-2010, edition date March 2010)
is valid with immediate effect.

Refurbished Spare Parts Conditions for Delivery of Refurbished Spare Parts (depending
on availability):
Defective spare parts must be sent back with the
accompanying documents (Material Return Form) to B. Braun
Avitum AG via the representative of the respective country for
the ability to supply refurbished spare parts. The condition and
the version of the defective spare parts must allow a qualified
refurbishment.

Backward Compatibility New spare parts always have article numbers with numeric
of Spare Parts characters and are backward compatible unless otherwise
specified in the spare parts list. If a spare part is modified the last
digit of the article number changes to an alphabetic character
with the initial index A. These spare parts are in principle
backward compatible to the previous article number (numeric or
alphanumeric - with or without an index).

B. Braun Avitum AG Tel. No.: +49 5661 713662

34209 Melsungen E-Mail: [email protected]
Germany

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7-2

Material Return Form

B. Braun Avitum AG Reason for returning the part (please tick !):
Wareneingang - Service Warranty return (replacement to be ordered separately) ---------------- "
Defective part for refurbishment -------------------------------------- "
Schwarzenberger Weg 73-79 Wrong shipment ----------------------------------------------------- "
Complaint sample (use complaint form for details) --------------------- "
D-34212 Melsungen Spare part returned for investigation ---------------------------------- "
Germany Spare part returned for disposal by B. Braun Avitum AG----------------- "

Sender: Name of Company: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................... City: ...............................................................................................................

Country: .............................................................................................................. Name of responsible person: ..................................................................

Customer number: ........................................................................................... Telephone/e-mail: .....................................................................................

Returned part: Article number: ................................................................. Part serial number: ...................................................................................

Part description: .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description of the defect: ........................................................................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

From machine type: .................................................. Serial number: ................................................. Working hours: .......................................

Software Version: ......................................................... Description of the problem on the machine: ....................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The described defect appears: Intermittently " Permanently " (please tick !)
Cleaned/disinfected: Cleaned " yes Disinfected " yes (please tick !)
Disinfectant: ......................................................................................................................................................................

Disposal and Taking Back of Spare Parts

Dispose spare parts (e.g. boards or batteries) according to local disposal guidelines or send back to B. Braun Avitum AG
free of charge.
Cleaning and Disinfection of Spare Parts Used in Dialog Machines
All spare parts sent by the customer to the B. Braun representative for repair, complaint, refurbishment, technical analysis or
warranty must be cleaned and disinfected (exception: boards). Spare parts considerably contaminated, damaged or not disinfected
are scrapped.
Packaging Notice
Each returned part must be properly packed to prevent any damage during transportation due to mechanical impact or
due to electrostatic discharge. The safest way to prevent damage is by using the packaging material from the new spare
part and by packing the returned part exactly in the same way.
Returned parts containing electronic components (electrostatic sensitive devices) must be packed in special ESD packaging
material. Only shielded bags or antistatic bags may be used. Unprotected electronic parts (e.g. wrapped in normal plastic bags or
parts padded with Styrofoam) are assumed to be damaged by electrostatic discharge and will be scrapped.

This form must be attached to every spare part sent back to your B. Braun representative!
Spare parts without this form are scraped.
Please Copy!
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7-3

Table of Contents Page

7.1 Sub-Racks 7-6
7.2 Solenoid Valves 7-7
7.3 Water Sub-Rack 7-8
7.3.1 Gear Pump for EP 7-10
7.4 DF Sub-Rack 7-11
7.4.1 DF Block 7-12
7.4.1.1 Gear Pump for FPE/FPA 7-14
7.4.2 Piston Pumps 7-15
7.5 UF Sub-Rack 7-16
7.5.1 Balance Chamber 2 7-17
7.5.2 Air Separator Assembly Group 7-18
7.6 Top Level Sub-Rack 7-19
7.6.1 LX800 Motherboard 7-20
7.6.2 Settings for TFT Display/CFC 7-21
7.7 Rear Door 7-22
7.7.1 Mains Cord 7-24
7.7.1.1 Connection Mains Cord to SMPS-MC 7-27
7.7.2 Compatibility Table for Boards 7-28
7.7.3 Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC 7-29
7.7.3.1 Compatibility Table SMPS-MC 7-30
7.8 Front Door 7-31
7.8.1 Manometer Connection 7-33
7.8.2 Heparin Pump 7-33
7.8.3 Blood Pump 7-34
7.8.4 Safety Air Detector SAD 7-35
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7-4

Page
7.8.5 Level Regulation Module 7-36
7.9 Basic Housing 7-37
7.9.1 Concentrate Suction Rods 7-39
7.9.2 Rinsing Chambers for Concentrate Suction Rods 7-40
7.9.3 Central Concentrate Supply (Option) 7-41
7.9.4 Rinsing Bridge 4 7-43
7.10 TFT Monitor 7-46
7.11 Test and Calibration Equipment and Tools 7-48
7.12 Service Kits 7-50
7.13 Software 7-51
7.13.1 Compatibility Table Software 7-52
7.14 Miscellaneous 7-53
7.16 Staff Call (Option) 7-55
7.17 Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder (Option) 7-56
7.17.1 Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder 7-56
7.17.2 Solenoid Valves and Throttle 7-57
7.18 HDF Online (Option) 7-58
7.18.1 Substitution Port 7-59
7.18.2 UF Sub-Rack HDF Online 7-60
7.18.3 Valve Block HDF Online 7-61
7.18.4 Board HDF Online 7-62
7.18.5 DF/HDF Filter Holder HDF Online 7-63
7.19 Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement ABPM Module M2009 7-64
7.19.1 Compatibility Table ABPM Module M2009 7-65

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7-5

Page
7.20 Emergency Power Supply (Option) 7-66
7.20.1 Battery Sub-Rack 7-67
7.21 Nexadia-/WAN-BSL (Option) 7-68
7.22 Card Reader (Option) 7-69
7.23 Adimea Option (Option) 7-70

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7-6
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.1 Sub-Racks 4

1
4 1 4 1
1 - Top level sub-rack see paragraph 7.6 for
single parts

2 - UF sub-rack see paragraph 7.5 for

single parts

3 - DF sub-rack see paragraph 7.4 for

single parts

4 - Water sub-rack see paragraph 7.3 for

single parts

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7-7
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.2 Solenoid Valves
1 2 1 3451902C 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/flange (AKM)
A (pay attention to bottom notes)

2 3451906C 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/connector (AKM)

B C 3 34560270 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/flange (DPP)

4 34560289 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/connector (DPP)

3 4 i 1
ii
iii
Notes for Solenoid Valve 3451902C
Self-Locking Nut A
Do not readjust the self-locking nut A, because the nut
is assembled with a defined torque (1.3 Nm ± 10 %).
i 1 x Screw M4
The position of the magnet coil can be adapted to the ii 2 x Spring Washer 4.2
assembly location, i.e. the coil can be carefully turned (B or
C) without loosening the self-locking nut A. The procedure
iii 1 x Washer 4.2
is only permissible if the coil can be turned without much
effort. iv 1 x Screw 40x10
v 1 x Washer 4.2
iv
v 2

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7-8
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.3 Water Sub-Rack
1a 1b 2 34 5 6,7 1a 34560718
1b 34560319
1 Motor for gear pump (SW 1.7.4) see separate figure
version 2 for EP only
NSVB 1 Gear pump (Micropump version 2) is shown without motor cover
with magnet, without motor
WT
1 34770950 20 O-ring 8.0 x 1.6
H 2 34560386 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way with bypass
3 34561315 1 Water block without lid
4 34561323 1 Lid for waterblock
5 3456021A 1 Heater element 120 V/2x900 W incl. two seals

TSE 5 3456020A 1 Heater element 240 V/2x900 W incl. two seals

WAB 8 6 34560459 1 Level sensor complete with float ball

7 34560246 1 Float ball incl. o-ring

8 3451614B 1 Temperature sensor without connector
VEB TSHE 8 34570730 1 Housing complete for temperature sensor
9 3451727B 1 Throttle 0.4 bar
10 3451664B 1 Throttle 1.3 bar für HDF-Online

11 34517782 5 Disposable filter

RVDA
9 6 7
EP FEP

10

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7-9
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
Water Sub-Rack
11 34561242 1 Pressure sensor
6,7 5 2 1 11 34773762 10 O-ring 9.25 x 1.78
NSVB 12 34516069 1 Throttle 0 - 4 bar
H 13 34517243 1 Tubing connector ∅ 7 x 1/8" stainless steel

WT 14 34560289 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/connector (DPP)

WAB

VZ VEB
VVBE EP

DMV PE

14 13 11

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 10
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.3.1 Gear Pump for EP
1a 34560718 1 Motor for gear pump (SW 1.7.4)
Micropump Version 2 for EP only
1b 34560319 1 Gear pump (Micropump version 2) (see A in figure)
with magnet, without motor

1a 1b

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 11
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.4 DF Sub-Rack
1 - - Gear pumps see separate figure for
single parts, paragraph 7.4.1

2 - - DF block see separate figure for

single parts, paragraph 7.4.1

3 - - Piston pumps see separate figure for

1 2 3 single parts, paragraph 7.4.2

BICLF
RVB
BICP
RVK UFP
ENDLF TSDS KP

FPE
FPA

RVFPE

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 12
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.4.1 DF Block
1a 1b 2 3 4 56 6 6 1a 34560718 1 Motor for gear pump (SW 1.7.4) see separate figue

1b 34515330 1 Gear pump (Micropump version 1) version 1 for FPA/FPE only

is shown without motor cover
with magnet, without motor
BICLF
RVB
1 34770950 20 O-ring 8.0 x 1.6
BICP
RVK UFP 1 34771140 20 O-ring 3.1 x 1.6
ENDLF TSDS KP 2 34561030 1 END conductivity sensor version 2 with temperature sensor

3 34561021 1 Bicarbonate conductivity sensor version 2 with temperature sensor

FPE
FPA 4a 34770925 5 Plug
4b 34770852 5 O-ring 11.1 x 1.6
RVFPE
4c 34771050 10 Pressure spring 500 mmHg
4d 34772928 3 Centre disc
4e 34771085 5 Seal
5a 34570373 10 Plug (long)
5b 3451614B 1 Temperature sensor without connector
4b,10 4b,9 8 7
5c 3477104A 10 O-ring 8.3 x 2.4
6 - - Piston pumps see paragraph 7.4.2

RVB 7 34514988 1 Return valve, incl. 2 x tubing clamps, return valve RV necessary
2 x cable ties for standard UFP

8 3451664B 1 Druckregler 1,3 bar

8 34570683 10 O-Ring 4,47 x 1,78
9 3477103A 2 Tubing connector ∅ 3.5 x 1/8" plastic

10 3451916A 5 Tubing connector ∅ 8 x 1/8" plastic

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 13
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
DF Block
6 6 6 1a/b 1a/b 4a 34770925 5 Plug
4b 34770852 5 O-ring 11.1 x 1.6

KP
4c 34771050 10 Pressure spring 500 mmHg

UFP
4d 34772928 3 Centre disc
BICP 4e 34771085 5 Seal
5a 34570373 10 Plug (long)
5b 3451614B 1 Temperature sensor without connector
ENDLF
RVK 5c 3477104A 10 O-ring 8.3 x 2.4
BICLF

RVB

TSBIC

FPE FPA
TSD

4 4b,10 3 5 2 5 4a
4b
5a
4c
5b

4d
4e
5c
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 14
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.4.1.1 Gear Pump for FPE/FPA
1a 34560718 1 Motor for gear pump (SW 1.7.4)
1b 34515330 1 Gear pump (Micropump version 1) Micropump Version 2 for FPA/FPE only
(see B in figure)
with magnet, without motor

1a 1b

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 15
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.4.2 Piston Pumps
1 3451749E 1 Piston pump for UF/BICP/KP piston pump. Return valve additionally
necessary for standard UF piston pump.
2 34519246 1 Reed sensor complete
3 34514988 1 Return valve, incl. 2 x tubing clamps, return valve RV necessary for
standard UFP
2 x cable ties
4 34560556 1 Motor for piston pump
5 34560572 1 Bell joint for piston pump
6 34560602 1 Pump body for piston pump
- 7703848 1 Assembly jig (motor piston pump) required for motor assembly

1 1 1

5
2

2 32
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 16
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.5 UF Sub-Rack
1 - - Air separator complete see separate figure
1 2
2 - - Balance chamber 2 see separate figure

RVFPA DDE

LA

VLA

VBP
VABK1 VDABK2
K2
VEB

VEB VDEBK2
K 1

VDA

VDEBK1
BK1/2

VDABK1 VABK2

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 17
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.5.1 Balance Chamber 2
1 2 1 3 4 1 3451902C 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way manuf. AKM only, connector/flange

1 34770852 5 O-ring 11.1 x 1.6

VDEBK1 VDA 2 3451665A 2 Membrane position sensor board exchange as pair only
VLA 3 3451906C 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way manuf. AKM only, connector/connector
VEBK1 4 34560270 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/flange (DPP)
LA 5/6/7 - - - see next page
VABK2 VBP DDE 8 3451909A 1 Coil
VDEBK2 8 34770976 10 O-ring 15.6 x 1.78
MSBK2 VABK1 5 9 3451897A 1 Repair kit balance for complete replacement of both membranes, incl. all

VDABK2 6 chamber o-rings/assembly parts (self-locking nuts, screws, springs

etc.)
RVFPA 9 3451615A 2 Membrane for balance chamber
VEBK2 - 34570195 20 Tubing clamp SNP-1.5 ∅ 7-8 mm plastic

- 34570209 20 Tubing clamp SNP-4 ∅ 10-11 mm plastic

8 3 7 3 1 8 9 21
VDEBK2

o
180 VABK1

VDEBK1
VABK2
VDABK1

VEBK1

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 18
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.5.2 Air Separator Assembly Group
7 4 5 6 4 34560270
4/7 34770852
1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way
5 O-ring 11.1 x 1.6
connector/flange (DPP)

VLA
5 3451727B 1 Throttle 0.4 bar
LA 5/6 34570683 10 O-ring 4.47 x 1.78
6 3451664B 1 Throttle 1.3 bar
7 3451916A 5 Tubing connector ∅ 8 x 1/8" plastic
VBP
DDE

RVFPA

o 6 5 4 7
180
LA
DDE

RVFPA VLA
VBP

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 19
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.6 Top Level Sub-Rack
1,2,3 4 56 7 8 9 1 34560610 1 LX800 motherboard see 7.6.1

2 34519327 1 Battery BR2032, 3V see 7.6.1

3 34560882 1 Compact flash card 1 GB see 7.6.1

4 34560726 1 Basic board

Motherboard
5 34560769 1 Power board (valves)
6 34560740 1 Digital board
Power Board
Valves 7 34560866 1 HDF online board
8 34560750 1 Power board (Motors)
Digital Board
9 34560734 1 Analog board
Power Board Motors assemble temperature switch on TL sub-rack
10 34561277 1 Temperature switch
Basic Board Analog Board with heat sink paste
HDF Online Board

10

Motherboard
Power Board Valves

HDF Online Board

Basic Board

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 20
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.6.1 LX800 Motherboard
1 34560882 1 Compact flash card 1 GB The SW for the machine has to be installed
again after replacing the CFC.

2 34560610 1 LX800 Motherboard

3 34519327 1 Battery BR2032, 3V
1 2 3

Motherboard

CFC

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 21
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.6.2 Settings for TFT Display/CFC

LX800 Motherboard

JLVDSPWR TFT Power

3.3 V: BoeHydis/Samsung

2 4 6

1 35

CFC JCFSET1
CFC

6 5
4 3
2 1

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 22
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.7 Rear Door 1 2 34
1 34560220 1 Switch mode power supply microcontroller
SMPS-MC, 110/240V, version 5
2 34561307 1 Fan 92 x 92 mm with connector
2 34570284 5 Dust filter
3 3451059A 1 Mains switch
3 34770003 5 Protection cap for mains switch
4 - - Mains cord see separate figure
(paragraph 7.7.1)

SMPS-MC

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 23
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
Rear Door
4 5 4 34518029 1 Strain relief
5 3451441A 1 Tubing holder/fan cover compatible to crank 5a/5b

5a 34518355 1 Crank for blood pump

5b 34560157 1 Crank for blood pump

5a

5b

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 24
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.7.1 Mains Cord
1 1 34561218 1 Mains cord (Brazil) mains cord with mains plug

2 2 34561145 1 Mains cord (Cekon) mains cord with mains plug

3 3 34561226 1 Mains cord (China) mains cord with mains plug

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 25
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments

4 4 34561200 1 Mains cord (Israel) mains cord with mains plug

5 5 34561170 1 Mains cord (Philipines) mains cord with mains plug

6 6 34561153 1 Mains cord (Schuko) mains cord with mains plug

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 26
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments

7 7 34561196 1 Mains cord (South Africa/India) mains cord with mains plug

8 8 34561234 1 Mains cord (Thailand) mains cord with mains plug

9 9 34561188 1 Mains cord (UK) mains cord with mains plug

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 27
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments

10 10 34561161 1 Mains cord (USA) mains cord with mains plug

7.7.1.1 Connection Mains Cord to SMPS-MC

SMPS-MC F2 Central Earth

F5B F5A F1
30

Cable Gland with

- +2

70

Lock Nut F6
+5 0

Rear Door
A/B Cable Ties A
Fe
rri
te

A LH1LH2 N PE1 L N PE PE Ferrite

X1.6

X1.7

X1.1

X1.3
X1.2
X1.5

X1.4

X1.8
Ferrite Ferrite
A A A
+5

B B Brown Blue Green/Yellow

0
70

Ferrite

Ferrite
Mains Cord
te
rri
2

with Mains Plug

-+

Fe
30

A
50+50
Mains Cord
50 +- 2 90+50 Ferrite
450 +- 5

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 28
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.7.2 Compatibility Table for Boards
Art. No. Dialog+ SW 9.xx Dialog+ SW 9.xx
SMPS-MC SMPS-MC
HDF Online
Power Board Valves BPV 34560769 X X
(38108644)
Power Board Motors BPM 34560750 X X
(38108643)
Basic Board BB 34560726 X X
(38108640)
Digital Board DB 34560740 X X
(38108642)
After the replacement of a digital board: the LLS and LLC software must be reinstalled if the LLS or LLC
software does not match with the software version in the machine. The digital board is always delivered with
the latest LLS/LLC software versions!
Analog Board AB 34560734 X X
(38108641)
HDF Online Board HOB 34560866 - X
(38108647)
MSBK Board 3451665A X X
(3810671X)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 29
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.7.3 Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC
1 34560220 1 Switch mode power supply microcontroller see table 7.7.3.1
1 SMPS-MC, 110/240V, version 5
F1/F2 34570462 10 Fuse T6.25 A (6.3 x 32 mm)
P12 H401 F401
H104
+12VD / T3.15A TR5 H401 F401
F1 T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.1: L)
F2 T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.1: L)
F5A 110/120V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.6: HZG1-L)
H303 F303
- + +5VD / T3.15A TR5 H303 F303
230V: T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.6: HZG1-L)
F5B 110/120V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.7: HZG2-L)
F5/F6 34771328 10 Fuse F12 A (6.3 x 32 mm) for 230 V
H301 F301 230V: T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.7: HZG2-L)
P10 H302 F302
H300
+5VD / T3.15A TR5

+5VD / T5.00A TR5

H301

H302
F301

H300
F6 110/120V: F20A 6.3x32 (X1.5: HZG-N)
230V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.5: HZG-N)
F301 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD1)
F5/F6 34570187 10 Fuse M20 A (6.3 x 32 mm) for 110/120 V
F302
F302 T5.0A TR5 (+5VD2)
H304

H601
F304
F303 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD3) F301 34570160 10 Fuse T3.15 A (TR5)
F601 +5VD / T3.15A TR5 H304 F304 F304 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD4)
P4 H602

H402
F602
K3
+24VGB / T3.15A TR5 H601
F601
F401 T3.15A TR5 (+12VD1)
F402 T5.00A TR5 (+12VD2)
F403 T1.25A TR5 (+12VA)
F302 34570470 10 Fuse T5 A (TR5)
F402 F600 M10.00A 6.3x32 (+24VL)
+24 VGD / T3.15A TR5
F600
H602 F602 F601 T3.15A TR5 (+24VGB)
F303 34570160 10 Fuse T3.15 A (TR5)
P5 H403 F403 H600

+12VD / T5.00A TR5

H402
F402
F602 T3.15A TR5 (+24VGD)

XP3.2 GNDAKKU K4 F403

F600 F304 34570160 10 Fuse T3.15 A (TR5)
+12VAN / T1.25A TR5 H403
XP3.1 +24VAKKU +24VL / M10.00A TR5 H600

P6 X104 F401 34570160 10 Fuse T3.15 A (TR5)

X103
P9 P7 P8 BENNING XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
Netzgerät/Power Supply F402 34570470 10 Fuse T5 A (TR5)
NT-Dialog-MC F2
XXXXXXXX
P14 P11 SN/SNo: XXXXXXX Bj/Year: XX/XX
TN /Item-No:XXXXXX.5 Ver/SW: Rev 1.15
Opt.: Art/mode: XX/xx
F5B F5A F1 F403 34518819 10 Fuse T1.25 A (TR5)
X101 C115 Eingang/Input Ausgang/Output F6
P2 + - Art/Kind AC
Hz 50-60
V 110/120/230/240
DC
F600 34570179 10 Fuse M10 A (6.3 x 32 mm)
H900 A 5/2,3
C114
+ - F601 34570160 10 Fuse T3.15 A (TR5)
X1.6

X1.7

X1.3
X1.1

X1.2
X1.5

X1.4

X1.8
X903 X100
LH1 LH2 N PE1 L N PE PE F602 34570160 10 Fuse T3.15 A (TR5)
K3/K4 34514775 2 Relay (12 V) for 24 V

C114/C115 34519912 2 Capacitor 1F

H104 34560580 1 Buzzer
- 34560416 10 Plug for buzzer

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 30
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
Switch Mode Power Supply Microcontroller SMPS-MC

P12 H401 F401

H104
+12VD / T3.15A TR5 H401 F401
F1 T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.1: L)
F2 T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.1: L)
F5A 110/120V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.6: HZG1-L)
230V: T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.6: HZG1-L)
H303 F303
- + +5VD / T3.15A TR5 H303 F303
F5B 110/120V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.7: HZG2-L)
H301 F301 230V: T6.25A 6.3x32 (X1.7: HZG2-L)
P10 H302 F302
H300
+5VD / T3.15A TR5 H301 F301

H300
F6 110/120V: F20A 6.3x32 (X1.5: HZG-N)
230V: F12A 6.3x32 (X1.5: HZG-N)
F301 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD1)
+5VD / T5.00A TR5 H302 F302
H304 F304 F302 T5.0A TR5 (+5VD2)
F303 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD3)

P4
H601
F601
K3
+5VD / T3.15A TR5 H304 F304 F304 T3.15A TR5 (+5VD4)
F401 T3.15A TR5 (+12VD1) BENNING XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
H602 F602 +24VGB / T3.15A TR5 H601 F402 T5.00A TR5 (+12VD2)
H402
F402
F601
F403 T1.25A TR5 (+12VA)
F600 M10.00A 6.3x32 (+24VL)
Netzgerät/Power Supply
F600 +24 VGD / T3.15A TR5 H602 F602 F601 T3.15A TR5 (+24VGB)
NT-Dialog-MC
P5 H403 F403 H600

+12VD / T5.00A TR5

H402
F402
F602 T3.15A TR5 (+24VGD)
XXXXXXXX
F600
K4
XP3.2

XP3.1
GNDAKKU
+24VAKKU
+12VAN / T1.25A TR5 H403
+24VL / M10.00A TR5
F403
H600
SN/SNo: XXXXXXX Bj/Year: XX/XX
P6 X104
TN /Item-No:XXXXXX.5 Ver/SW: Rev 1.15
X103
P9 P7 P8 BENNING XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
Netzgerät/Power Supply
Opt.: Art/mode: XX/xx
NT-Dialog-MC F2
XXXXXXXX
P14 P11 SN/SNo: XXXXXXX Bj/Year: XX/XX
TN /Item-No:XXXXXX.5 Ver/SW: Rev 1.15
Opt.: Art/mode: XX/xx
F5B F5A F1 Eingang/Input Ausgang/Output
P2
X101
+
C115
-
Eingang/Input
Art/Kind AC
Ausgang/Output
DC
F6 Art/Kind AC DC
H900
Hz 50-60
V 110/120/230/240
A 5/2,3
Hz 50-60
C114
+ - V 110/120/230/240
X1.6

X1.7
A 5/2,3

X1.3
X1.1

X1.2
X1.5

X1.4

X1.8
X903 X100
LH1 LH2 N PE1 L N PE PE

7.7.3.1 Compatibility Table SMPS-MC

SMPS-MC Type Plate Version Number SMPS-MC SW Version Dialog+ SW 9.xx
(TN/Item-No) (Ver/SW)
34560220 (version 5) XXXXXX.5 Rev. 1.15 X
ex works

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 31
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.8 Front Door
1 34516352 1 Pressure sensor see also position 24

1,2 5 1,2 2 3457058A 5 Manometer connection (white), for PBS/SN with plastic nut A and

2 3451833A 5 Manometer connection (red), for PA/PBE safety disc B (pay attention to
2 3451884A 5 Manometer connection (blue), for PV correct assembly, see left figure)
HP 5 3451432B 1 Heparin pump Compact
5 34560785 1 Housing with seal
5 34514732 1 Syringe holder
PV PA PBS/SN PBE 5 34570640 5 Dummy plug
6,7 5 34570667 1 Clamp
SN SN
8 5 34570659 1 Unlocking lever set
6 34570535 1 Single tubing holder ∅ 6.8 mm
16 PBA PBV
7 34570543 1 Double tubing holder ∅ 6.8 mm
15 8 34570527 1 Single holder, small
9 9 34560793 1 Blood pump without roller see separate figure

9 34561331 1 Pump head with cover

9 34560947 1 Drive unit for blood pump (SW 1.7.4)
x
8 6,7 9 34560807 1 Roller 8x12 for blood pump
10 9 34570616 5 Latch
without hinge pin (see separate figure)
9 3451669E 1 Cover for blood pump
14 9 34560025 1 Magnet ∅ 5 mm for cover
SAD
9 34560033 1 Metal disc ∅ 10 mm for cover
11
13 9 34519823 1 Hinge pin with interior thread hinge pin

9 34516670 1 Seal for blood pump

12
SAKV-SG SAKA

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 32
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
Front Door
10 34570560 1 Single tubing holder ∅ 6 mm
11
5 12
3451415A 1 Cover complete
for SAKA
3456000A 1 Rotary magnet
12 34570578 1 Cover with tubing holder for SAKA

18 LRP HP 12a 34570675 10 Soft stopper for SAKA, set for 10 rotary magnets,
with 20 x 4 mm, 10 x 3 mm
13 34514107 1 Rotary magnet (currentless closed) for SAKV-SG
13 34514317 1 Cover with tubing holder for SAKV-SG

17 PBE
PBS/SN
PA PV
13a 34570624 9 O-ring 7.0 x 1.5 for SAKV-SG

LRM
14 3456005C 1 SAD version 3 with red detector see separate figure (paragraph 7.8.4)
9 15 34570551 1 Double holder, big
16 34570519 1 Single holder, big
17 34560815 1 Valve block level regulation see separate figure (paragraph 7.8.5)
(single pump)
17 34560831 1 Valve block level regulation see separate figure (paragraph 7.8.5)
(double pump)
PBV
18 34560823 1 Diaphragm pump with assembly elbow
PBA

SAD
14 20a
11 3 mm
13
12 4 mm 19a
4 mm
SAKA SAKV-SG

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 33
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.8.1 Manometer Connection
2 3457058A 5 Manometer connection (white), for PBS/SN with plastic nut A and
B 2 2 3451833A 5 Manometer connection (red), for PA/PBE safety disc B (pay attention to
A 2 3451884A 5 Manometer connection (blue), for PV correct assembly, see left figure)

7.8.2 Heparin Pump

5 3451432B 1 Heparin pump Compact
5 5
5a
34560785
34514732
1
1
Housing with seal
Syringe holder
5b 34570640 5 Dummy plug
5c 34570667 1 Clamp
HP
5d 34570659 1 Unlocking lever set

5a 5b 5c 5d
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 34
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.8.3 Blood Pump
1 34560033 1 Metal disc ∅ 10 mm for cover, use Loctite 406

2 34560025 1 Magnet ∅ 5 mm for cover, use Loctite 406

3 3451669E 1 Cover for blood pump without hinge pin (see separate figure)

4 34560947 1 Drive unit for blood pump (SW 1.7.4)

1 5
6
34519823
34570616
1
5
Hinge pin with interior thread
Latch
hinge pin

2 7
8
34560807
34561331
1
1
Roller 8x12 for blood pump
Pump head with cover without drive unit

3 8
9
34560793
34561358
1
1
Blood pump without roller
Direction of rotation board for blood pump
complete with drive unit and cover

10 34517138 1 Reed sensor with contacts and o-ring 3.68 x 1.78

- 34516670 1 Seal for blood pump
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ - 7703708 1 Grease SKD 4002 100 g tube (to lubricate the shaft of the blood pump)

4
8
5 9
6
7
8 4
10

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 35
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.8.4 Safety Air Detector SAD
14 3456005C 1 SAD version 3 with SAD with board; do not tamper,
exchange only complete
red detector If cover for SAD is present: a ball head allen key 2.5/3 is
required for bottom screw behind rotary magnet.

B
A
SAD

14
SAKA SAKV-SG

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 36
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.8.5 Level Regulation Module
24 34560823 1 Diaphragm pump LRP with assembly elbow
24 25 34560815 1 Valve block level regulation complete with 3 pressure sensors (for
PA, PV, PBE), 6 valves, incl.
(single pump) filter and tubing

LRP 25 34560831 1 Valve block level regulation

(double pump)
complete with 4 pressure sensors (for
PA, PV, PBE, PBS), 6 valves, incl.
filter and tubing

26 34516409 1 Filter pay attention to the assembly position of the filter:

transparent side towards the block

27 34565205 5m PUR tubing 3.6 x 1.1 (5 m) for manometer connection (filter)

26 27 26 27 25 26 27
P1

HFS P2 P3

HFE VPE V
PD
VPU
VPV V
PA V
BT
PBE PBS HFV
LRP HFP
HFA
PV PA
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 37
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.9 Basic Housing
1
1 3451962A 1 IV pole version 2 height adjustable

2 3451439A 1 Holder, top

3 34514929 1 Loudspeaker
2
10 4 3451438A 1 Holder, bottom

9 3 5 34517804 1 Front panel, bottom

6 34561269 1 Base platform
6 34519564 1 Silicone profile
7 3451489A 1 Swivel caster
8 3451490A 1 Swivel caster with brake
9 34560548 1 Card-Reader-Board see 7.22 for details

10 3451487C 1 ABPM module M2009 with filter see 7.19 for details

7,8
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 38
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
Basic Housing
7 3451489A 1 Swivel caster
8 3451490A 1 Swivel caster with brake
12 34518029 1 Strain relief
13 34560122 1 Double tubing connector 11xM12 stainless steel, for water inlet

14 34560130 1 Double tubing connector 11xM12 plastic, for dialysate outlet

- 34770852 5 O-ring 11.1 x 1.6

- 34771271 10 Tubing clamp 15/9
12 - 39234126 1 Tubing clamp 12-20 mm
- 34565140 50m PVC tubing 10 x 3, red for water inlet

- 3456517A 1 PVC tubing 10 x 3 / red (3 m), for water inlet

with two single ear clamps 19.5
- 34565159 50m PVC tubing 10 x 3, black for dialysate outlet

8 - 3456518A 1 PVC tubing 10 x 3 / black (3 m), for dialysate outlet

7 with a single ear clamps 19.5 and a
tubing clamp 12-20 mm
- 34565167 3m Silicone tubing 8 x 3.2 / red (3 m), external high temperature tubing
8 7
with two single ear clamps 17.5
- 39224538 1 Single ear clamp 17.5 for external high temperature tubing

13
14

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 39
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.9.1 Concentrate Suction Rods
1 1 3451726A 1 Feed-through connector
2 34565213 10m Silicone tubing 2.9 x 3 (10 m)
3 34517782 5 Disposable filter

2 4 34565248 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 1.5 / blue (10 m)

5 34565230 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 1.5 / red (10 m)
6 3451475A 1 Male connector (blue) with o-rings

3 7 3451476A
8 34570004
1 Male connector (red) with o-rings
5 O-ring 9.3 x 2.4
9 34565280 3m Silicone tubing 3.2 x 1.6 (3 m)
4 10 3451728A 1 PE tube 4 x 1 with silicone tubing

6
7
8
9
10
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 40
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.9.2 Rinsing Chambers for Concentrate Suction Rods
1 34565345 1m Silicone tubing 12 x 2.5 (1 m)
2 34560777 1 Retainer tubes (blue) for suction rods 1 x 260 mm and 1 x 280 mm

3 34514120 1 Retainer for suction rods

4 34517138 1 Reed sensor with contacts Pay attention to the assembly position of
the reed sensors (red left/grey right)
and o-ring 3.68 x 1.78
5 3451476A 1 Male connector (red) with o-rings
6 3451475A 1 Male connector (blue) with o-rings
7 34517782 5 Disposable filter

1 2 3 45 6 7

grey
red

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 41
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.9.3 Central Concentrate Supply (Option)
1 3451467A 1 Connection nipple
5 2 3451459A 1 Suction coupling

3 2 34570438 5 O-ring 8.0 x 1.25

3 34565248 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 1.5 / blue (10 m)
4 39239829 m Tubing, white per meter

5 34565230 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 1.5 / red (10 m)

6 3451728A 1 PE tube 4 x 1 with silicone tubing

7 34565280 3m Silicone tubing 3.2 x 1.6 (3 m)

1 8 34570004 5 O-ring 9.3 x 2.4
9 3451465A 2 Suction nipple with o-rings 9.3 x 2.4
9
8 2
7
3
6 4
5

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 42
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
Central Concentrate Supply (Option)
3 34565248 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 1.5 / blue (10 m)
5 34565230 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 1.5 / red (10 m)

1 5
3
5 3

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 43
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.9.4 Rinsing Bridge 4
1 3451445A 1 Dialyser coupling, red

1,2 2,3 4 5 6 7,8 9 2 34990445 5 O-ring 12.37 x 2.62 for dialyser coupling

3 3451446A 1 Dialyser coupling, blue

4 34773550 20 Membrane for dialyser coupling
5 34565191 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 3 (10 m)
6 34517782 5 Disposable filter
7 34560270 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/flange (DPP)

8 34770852 5 O-ring 11.1 x 1.6

9 3451908C 1 Blood leak detector 3 replaces version 2

10 34773762 10 O-ring 9.25 x 1.78

11 34517251 1 Tubing connector ∅ 3.5 x 1/8" stainless steel

12 34517294 1 Suction set with tubing, suction port and for disinfection
VD black lid
VDE
12 34514562 1 Suction set with tubing, suction port and for disinfection
yellow lid
BL 12 34565272 10m PVC tubing 3.5 x 1 (10 m) for disinfection

12 34512675 1 Suction port for suction tubing

13 34511792 1 Tubing coupling

14 34517138 1 Reed sensor with contacts and o-ring 3.68 x 1.78

15,14,13 12,11,8 10 15 34771255 20 O-ring 14 x 1.5

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 44
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
Rinsing Bridge 4
- 3451898B 1 Repair kit disinfection valve for the complete replacement of all
small parts in the disinfection valve
consisting of:
2 x O-ring 2.7 x 1.5
1 2 3 456 7 8 2 x O-ring 5 x 1.6
3 x O-ring 6.4 x 1.3
2 x Cover
4 x Countersunk screw M3x8
2 x Valve tappet
2 x Pressure spring
1 x Eccecntric roller
1 x Eccecntric shaft

1 34570012 10 O-ring 2.7 x 1.5 for valve tappet

2 34517332 2 Pressure spring for valve tappet

3 3477106A 5 O-ring 6.4 x 1.3 for cover valve tappet

4 34517324 2 Valve tappet for VD

5 34570457 10 O-ring 5.0 x 1.6 for eccecntric shaft

6 34560858 1 Eccecntric roller

7 34560840 1 Eccecntric shaft
8 3451659D 1 Servomotor with board for VD,
servomotor and board must be
12 3 4 exchanged together

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 45
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
Rinsing Bridge 4
1 2,3 4,5 6,7,8,9,10,11 12 3,13 12 1 3451908C 1 Blood leak detector 3 replaces version 2

2 34560270 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/flange (DPP)

3 34770852 5 O-ring 11.1 x 1.6

VDE 4 34561242 1 Pressure sensor
5 34773762 10 O-ring 9.25 x 1.78
PDA 6 34570012 10 O-ring 2.7 x 1.5 for valve tappet
VD
BL 7 34517332 2 Pressure spring for valve tappet

TSDE 8 3477106A 5 O-ring 6.4 x 1.3 for cover valve tappet

9 34517324 2 Valve tappet for VD

10 34570457 10 O-ring 5.0 x 1.6 for eccecntric shaft

11 3451659D 1 Servomotor with board for VD

17 16,3 15 14
12 34517138 1 Reed sensor with contacts and o-ring 3.68 x 1.78 without housing

13 3477103A 2 Tubing connector ∅ 3.5 x 1/8"

12 6,7,8,9,10,11 4,5 2,3 1 14 34514627 1 Rinsing bridge housing, version 4
15 34516603 1 Fork light barrier for servomotor
VD 16 34517251 1 Tubing connector ∅ 3.5 x 1/8"
PDA VDE 17 3451614B 1 Temperature sensor with shrinking tube, without connector/housing

17 34570730 1 Housing complete for temperature sensor

BL 18 34773762 10 O-ring 9.25 x 1.78
19 34511792 1 Tubing coupling
20 34771255 20 O-ring 14 x 1.5

13 20,19 18

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 46
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.10 TFT Monitor
1 34514260 1 Touch screen for TFT
2 34570691 2 OSD cover complete with seal and screws

3 34561285 1 Membrane
4 34561366 1 Membrane for Adimea option

1
2

3 Dialog+ + -
start
stop
3
4
Dialog+ start
4
+ - stop

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 47
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
TFT Monitor
5 3451428A 1 Front panel board FPB

5 6 3451429A
7 34514686
1 Optical status display board OSD
1 Backlight inverter board BIB for Boe Hydis TFT
8 3451463B 1 TFT display 15“ (Boe Hydis or Samsung)
9 3451460A 1 Touch controller board TCB version 3
- 34560912 1 Ribbon cable 12 pin FPB - OSD
- 34560971 1 Ribbon cable FPB - BIB

6 9 8 7 6

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 48
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.11 Test and Calibration Equipment and Tools
Inspection for Calibration Equipment
# Calibration equipment is subject to inspection and
must be checked and calibrated in regular intervals.
# 7701357 1 Manometer 0-4 bar
# 34511571 1 Manometer 2.5 bar
- 770085A 1 Flow meter 1.1 l/min
- 7700911 1 Reference solution (red) for calibration blood leak detector

# 7702493 1 Template 1.4/1.5 for tubing clamp

# - * Dialysis measurement for temperature, conductivity,

flow and pressure measurement
instrument HDM 99XP
For example manufacturer: for details contact manufacturer directly
IBP Instruments GmbH
Internet: www:ibpmt.com
- - - Crossover cable RS 232 for HDM 99 RS 232 interface
for details contact IBP directly

# - * SecuLife ST for electrical safety check according to

IEC 62353/EN 60601-1/IEC 601-1
For example manufacturer:
GMC Instruments Group for details contact manufacturer
Internet: www:gossenmetrawatt.com directly

- - * Balance (e.g. Pocket Balance) for calibration of UFP, BICP and KP

For example manufacturer: for details contact manufacturer
Kern & Sohn GmbH directly
Internet: www:kern-sohn.com
* not in the product range of B. Braun Avitum AG

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 49
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
Test and Calibration Equipment and Tools
- 7701756 1 Extraction tool set (AMP)
- 770203A 1 Stopcock system with five for the combined calibration of the
pressure sensors (5 x original Perfusor
stopcocks, incl. lines lines 50 cm
- 7703090 1 Measurement chamber 500 ml for function test ABPM module
and LRP
- 7701497 1 Special socket spanner ∅ 18 mm for assembly of MFC socket

- 7703589 1 Crossover cable RJ45 for network

- 7703597 1 Coupling (female/female) RJ45 for network

- 7703635 1 Extension cable D-sub 9 pin (male/female) for network

- 7703643 1 Chip card for BSL-Nexadia for network

- 7703473 1 Test plug RS 232 for network

- 7703856 1 Chip card for card reader

- 7703805 1 Male to male connector Adapter to connect both dialyser
couplings for the measurement of the
patient leakage current
- 770284A 1 DCI cable, external
- 7703848 1 Assembly jig (motor for piston pump) required for motor assembly

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 50
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.12 Service Kits
- 3451897A 1 Repair kit balance chamber for the complete replacement of
both membranes, incl. all o-rings
and assembly parts (self-locking
nuts, screws, springs etc.)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 51
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.13 Software
- 770902 1 Software 9.02 USB-Stick with TLC/LLS/LLC

- 7703554 1 CD Remote Bedside Link List ReBeLL, for network

version 1.5.13
- 7703562 1 CD WAN-BSL, firmware version 1.0.4.8 for WAN-BSL only

- 7703864 1 Field service utility FSU, version 2.00

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 52
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.13.1 Software Compatibility Table

Software (ex Works) BIOS Dialog Dialog Dialog Dialog+ Dialog+

Advanced Advanced ≤SW 8.XX SW 9.XX
POS-460 GX1LCD POS-460 GX1LCD GX1LCD *GX1LCD LX800
(ex Works) # LX800

Software 3.46 (QNX2) - X - - - - - -

Software 3.48 (QNX2) 1.8 - X - - - - -
Software 5.35 (QNX2) - - - X - - - -
Software 5.36 (QNX2) 1.8 - - - X - - -
Software 6.XX (QNX4) 1.8 - - - - X - -
Software 7.21 bis 7.53 (QNX4) - - - - - X -
Software-Update 7.53 (Linux) *1.8/1.9 - - - - - X -
Diskettes with TLC/LLS SW only #1.01/
if SW 7.52 is present 1.04
Software 7.58 (Linux) - - - - - X -
Software 7.59 (Linux) - - - - - X -
*1.9 - - - - - X -
Software-Update 7.59 (Linux)
USB Stick with TLC/LLS SW only #1.01/
if SW 7.52 is present 1.04
Software ≥ 8.20 (Linux) - - - - - X -
Software 9.02 (Linux) 1.04 - - - - - - X

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 53
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.14 Miscellaneous
- 34565329 1m Tubing 12 x 2 / RAL 9001 (1 m)
Note: See also chapter 6 (Tubing Diagrams) - 34565337 2m Silicone tubing 8 x 2 (2 m)
- 34565221 10m Silicone tubing 6 x 3 (10 m)
- 34565256 2m Silicone tubing 6 x 1.75 / red (2m) internal high temperature tubing

- 39238032 1 Single ear clamp 13.3 for internal high temperature tubing

- 34565167 1 Silicone tubing 8 x 3,2 / red (3 m), external high temperature tubing

with two single ear clamps 17.5

- 39224538 1 Single ear clamp 17.5 for external high temperature tubing

- 34565264 2m Silicone tubing 6 x 1.75 (2 m)

- 34565191 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 3 (10 m)
- 34565248 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 1.5 / blue (10 m)
- 34565230 10m Silicone tubing 5 x 1.5 / red (10 m)
- 34565205 5m PUR tubing 3.6 x 1.1 (5 m)

AxB - 34565272 10m PVC tubing 3.5 x 1 (10 m)

- 34565213 10m Silicone tubing 2.9 x 3 (10 m)

A x B Tubing - 34565280
- 34565299
3m Silicone tubing 3.2 1.6 (3 m)
3m Silicone tubing 2 x 3 (3 m) transparent

- 34565302 5m Silicone tubing 2 x 1.5 (5 m)

- 34565140 50m PVC tubing 10 x 3 / red (50 m) for water inlet

- 3456517A 1 PVC tubing 10 x 3 / red (3 m), with two single for water inlet
ear clamps 19.5
- 34565159 50m PVC tubing 10 x 3 / black (50 m) for dialysate outlet

- 3456518A 1 PVC tubing 10 x 3 / black, (3 m), with a single for dialysate outlet
ear clamp 19.5 and a tubing clamp 12-20 mm
- 39234126 1 Tubing clamp 12-20 mm
- 34565345 1m Silicone tubing 12 x 2.5 (1 m)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 54
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
- 34570195 20 Tubing clamp SNP-1.5 ∅ 7-8 mm plastic

- 34570209 20 Tubing clamp SNP-4 ∅ 10-11 mm plastic

- 34570365 20 Tubing clamp SNP-6 ∅ 11.4-13 mm plastic

- 34517766 10 Canister lid, red with retainer for suction rod

- 34517774 10 Canister lid, blue with retainer for suction rod

- 3399 0492 m Spiral band per meter

- 34773770 5 Y-Tubing connector 6 mm

- 34570705 5 Y-Tubing connector 8 mm
- 7703619 1 Touch-up pen pale green
- 7703627 1 Touch-up pen light grey
- 7702345 1 Silicone grease 410 (Renolit) 100 g tube

- 7702353 1 Silicone rubber adhesive (white) RTV 162

1 - 7702388 1 Silicone rubber adhesive (transparent)
RTV 118
must no be used for
electronic components

1 34570322 10 Grounding for sub-racks pay attention to correct

a consisting of:
screw a, terminal b, tooth lock washer c, washer d,
spring washer e, nut f
assembly sequence!

cb - 7703708 1 Grease SKD 4002 100 g tube

(to lubricate the shaft of the blood pump)

de
f

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 55
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.16 Staff Call (Option)
1 34517685 1 Staff call board

STAT (Default)
DYN

DYNAUS

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 56
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.17 Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder (Option)
7.17.1 Bicarbonate Cartridge Holder
1 3451439A 1 Holder, top
2 3456008A 1 Valve with piercing spike version 2
complete with o-ring
1 3 3451437A 1 Housing, top incl. thread forming screws 22 x 12

4 34514422 1Cover for top housing incl. thread forming screws 22 x 12

5 34519866 1Slide ring

6 34560092 1Swivel arm version 2
7 34570594 10O-ring 9.2 x 2.7
7 34570241 5O-ring 9.19 x 2.62 alternative

8 34570420 5Rotary spring

9 34514430 1 Housing, bottom incl. thread forming screws 22 x 12

2 3 4 5 6 2 10 34514449 1Cover for bottom housing incl. thread forming screws 22 x 12

11 34517138 1Reed sensor with contacts and o-ring bottom BIC cartridge holder
3.68 x 1.78
- 34517782 5 Disposable filter filter FBIC

7
8 11 2
6
7
9
10
2

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 57
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments

7.17.2 Solenoid Valves and Throttle

1 34560289 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/connector (DPP)

1 2,3,4,5 3,6 2 34770925 5 Plug

3 34770852 5 O-ring 11.1 x 1.6
4 34771050 10 Pressure spring 500 mmHg
5 34771352 3 Centre disc
6 3451916A 5 Tubing connector ∅ 8 x 1/8" plastic

VBKS VBKO

VBICP VVB DBK

VZ VEB 2
3

4
PE
5

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 58
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.18 HDF Online (Option)
1 - - Substitution port see separate figure

- - - UF sub-rack see separate figure

HP

PV PA PBS/SN PBE

SN SN

PBA PBV

SAD

SAKV-SG SAKA

1
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 59
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.18.1 Substitution Port
1 3451448A 1 Substitution port complete
1 2 34570349 5 Pressure spring ∅ 4.6 x 14 mm
2 3 3457035A 2 Quadring 12.37 x 2.62 incl. spacer
4 34560017 1 Substitution connector stainless steel, without o-ring
3 5 3477106A 5 O-ring 6.4 x 1.3
4,5 6 34517138 1 Reed sensor with contacts and o-ring 3.68 x 1.78

4,5
A or A+B (A=Quadring; B=Spacer)

A A
B B

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 60
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.18.2 UF Sub-Rack HDF Online
1 - - Valve block see separate figure

1 23 4 2 3 2 34560289 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way connector/connector (DPP)

RVFPA DDE 3 3451906C 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way manuf. AKM only, connector/connector
VSAA VSAE
4 3451902C 1 Solenoid valve 2/2 way manuf. AKM only, connector/flange
LA
4 34770852 5 O-ring 11.1 x 1.6

VLA

VBP
VDABK2
VABK1 K 2
VEB

VEB VDEBK2
K1

VDA VBP

VDEBK1 BK1/2

VBE
VDABK1 VABK2
VSB
2

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 61
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.18.3 Valve Block HDF Online
1 34560661 1 Hydrophobic filter with tubing adapter

1 2 2 3451900A 1 Solenoid valve 3/2 way

HFB
VBE

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 62
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.18.4 Board HDF Online
1 34560866 1 HDF online board

Motherboard
HDF Online
Board

Power Board Valves

Digital Board

Power Board
Motors
Basic Board Analog Board

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 63
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.18.5 DF/HDF Filter Holder HDF Online
1 3456004A 1 Filter holder complete version 2
2 34517138 1 Reed sensor with contacts and o-ring 3.68 x 1.78
Blue 3 3451445A 1 Dialyser coupling (red)
3 Red 3 3451446A 1 Dialyser coupling (blue)
3 34990445 5 O-ring 12.37 x 2.62
3 34773550 20 Membrane for dialyser coupling

3 Red
Blue

2
3 Red
Blue

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 64
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.19 Automatic Blood Pressure Measurement ABPM Module M2009
1 34560955 1 Filter (ABPM module M2009)
2 3451487C 1 ABPM module M2009 firmware version of ABPM module on sticker:
Version Y (FW):X.X
with filter

1 2

Version YX.X

Version YX.X

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 65
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.19.1 Compatibility Table ABPM Module M2009

DIL Switch: Default LX800 (ex Works) Position of DIL Switch for
LX800 Motherboard

1
1
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6
P2
P1 OFF
DIL Switch
DIL
DIL Switch
Version YX.X 1 2 3 4 5 6
LX800

OFF
OFF

OFF
ON

ON
ON
(default)

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 66
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.20 Emergency Power Supply (Option)
The battery (rechargeable) contains diluted sulfric acid, a very toxic substance.
If the battery leaks and the liquid inside spills on the skin or clothing,
immediately wash it off with plenty of clean water.
If the liquid splashes into the eyes, immediately flush the eyes with plenty of
clean water and consult a doctor. Sulfric acid in the eyes may cause loss of
eyesight and acid on the skin will cause burns.
Pay attention to the included documentation of the battery supplier!

1 - - Battery sub-rack see separate figure

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 67
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments
7.20.1 Battery Sub-Rack
If a battery must be replaced exchange the complete battery set!
Prevent shorts in the battery compartment during disassembly and assembly:
Please pay attention to the correct disassembly/assembly sequence during the connection and
brown
SMPS-MC disconnection of the batteries.
XP3 Connection
1. Connect (+) terminal (brown).
Disconnection
1. Disconnect (-) terminal (blue) abziehen.
blue 2. Connect (-) terminal (blau). 2. Disconnect ground terminal (green/yellow).
3. Connect ground terminal (green/yellow). 3. Disconnect (+) terminal (brown).

Central 1 34561250 1 Battery (rechargeable) set 2 x battery (rechargeable) 12 V/7 Ah

green/yellow
12 V/7 Ah, incl. cable ties
Earth
2 34570721 10 Fuse T10 A (5 x 20 mm)
SMPS-MC

Central Earth
P12 H401 F401

H303 F303

1 P10
H301 F301

H302 F302

H304 F304

H601
F601
brown brown blue
P4
CAUTION: See service manual before
Fuse: T 10 A, IR UL 1500A / 150 VDC
7Ah, 24 Volt
Valve Regulated Lead-Acid Battery:

H602 F602
battery or fuse replacement.

H402
F402

brown green/yellow
blue
green/yellow P5 H403 F403

blue Ferrite XP3.2 GNDAKKU

brown brown Ferrite XP3.1 +24VAKKU
XP3
2 P6

P9 P7
BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG
Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 68
Pos. Art. No. Qty. Description Comments

7.21 Nexadia-BSL/WAN-BSL (Option)

1 34514554 1 Bedside link board (BSL board) without firmware

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 69
Art. No. Qty. Description
7.22 Card Reader (Option)
1 34560548 1 Card reader board

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 7. Spare Parts List 1/2010 7 - 70
Art. No. Qty. Description
7.23 Adimea Option
1 3456063A 1 Kt/V-UV board with housing and tubing

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 7_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8-1

8.1 ESD/EMC Information 8-2

8.1.1 Electrostatic Discharge ESD 8-2
8.1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 8-4

8.2 Technical Information TI -

- -
- -

8.3 Assembly Instructions AI -

- -
- -

8.4 Field Service Information FSI -

- -
- -

8.5 Instruction Leaflets IL -

- -
- -

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8-2

8.1 ESD/EMC Information

8.1.1 Electrostatic Discharge ESD
Prevent a direct contact of body parts with ground potential!
Electrical shock hazard - do not touch any live components!

ESD Electrostatic discharge ESD is a static energy, which causes a sudden flow of
electricity between two objects at different electrical potentials. ESD is the
primary cause for damage or failure of integrated circuits.
The following information should help service technicians to prevent static
discharge during servicing.
ESD Protection Precautions must be made when working on internal components of a system
to prevent accidental static discharges to the components.
At any time the human body can hold a large static voltage charge that can
easily damage components in a system. If this charge suddenly flows from one
device to another through logic circuits these components can be damaged.
ESD Service Workstations Service workstations should be adequately equipped with ESD devices to
establish an area which meets static charge requirements to prevent damage
of electronic components on pcb's.
Each service workstation should have a work surface with a conductive/
dissipative material. The work surface and soldering iron should be connected
to ground potential via protective resistors.
Personnel should wear a conducting wristband connected to the work surface,
via a protective resistor cable. If possible personnel should wear cotton
clothing to prevent static charging. Shoes should also be antistatic.
If applicable chairs, floors and mats in this area should be antistatic.
ESD Service Ket
Use ESD service kits to equalize charges between you and any of the system
components. Portable service kits are designed to prevent static charge of
electronic systems during field service.
In general these service kits contain a wrist band and mat, with ground
bonding cable for attachment to the system frame or an earth bonding point
mains plug.

Fig. : ESD Service Kit Fig. : Mains Plugs with Earth Bonding Point

Mat Material In general the mats are made of sturdy two layer material and have reinforced
edges and corners. The work surface is static dissipative (> 100 MΩ), the
other side is conductive (> 100 kΩ).

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8-3

Wrist Bands
In general the wrist band is a stainless steel expandable link style band. The
outer coating and edges are insulated. The wrist bands are available in
different sizes. Adjustable wrist bands with clip-on links are also available. The
ground bonding cable for the wrist band is coiled. The cable incorporates a
high-value resistance (> 1 MΩ).

Abb. : Handgelenkband

Earth Cable The common point straight earth cable has a snap fastener and a crocodile
clip. The cable incorporates a high-value resistor (> 1 MΩ).

Storage, Transport and Delivery The storage, transport and delivery of pcb's and assembly groups sensitive to
of Boards and Assembly Groups static charge should only be carried out in original packaging. Only use correct
packaging material, i.e. conductive bags, conductive bubble bags, shielding
bags, pcb cartons with low density conductive foam. The original packaging is
specially designed to meet the following specifications:
- provides physical and static protection
- prevents electrostatic charging
- prevents static induced damages
- prevents discharging of batteries equipped on pcb's
Do not send any boards or assembly groups sensitive to static charge in
packaging material unfit for shipment, e.g. normal plastic bags, bubble bags,
cartons, etc..

Packaging Notice
Each returned part must be properly packed to prevent any damage during
transportation due to mechanical impact or due to electrostatic discharge. The
safest way to prevent damage is by using the packaging material from the
new spare part and by packing the returned part exactly in the same way.
Returned parts containing electronic components (electrostatic sensitive
devices) must be packed in special ESD packaging material. Only shielded bags
or antistatic bags may be used. Unprotected electronic parts (e.g. wrapped in
normal plastic film or parts padded with foam material) are assumed to be
damaged by electrostatic discharge and will be scrapped.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8-4

8.1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EMC means that medical electrical equipment has the capability to work
satisfactory in an electromagnetic environment, without causing electromagnetic emissions, which would be
unacceptable for all other medical electrical equipment in this environment.
The following tables 201, 202 and 204 are guidelines from the IEC 60601-1-2 and must be observed.
Electromagnetic Emissions, Table 201

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions

The Dialog+ machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the Dialog+ machine should assure that it is used in such an
environment.

Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment – guidance

RF emissions acc. to CISPR 11 Group 1 The Dialog+ machine uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not
likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.

RF emissions acc. to CISPR 11 Class B The Dialog+ machine is suitable for use in all establishments, including domestic establishments and those directly
connected to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.

Harmonic emissions acc. to IEC Class A The Dialog+ machine is suitable for use in all establishments, including domestic establishments and those directly
61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.

Voltage fluctuations/flicker Complies The Dialog+ machine is suitable for use in all establishments, including domestic establishments and those directly
emissions acc. to IEC 61000-3-11 connected to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
and DIN EN 60601-1-2:1993 If the network impedance of the supply network has a max. impedance of Z = (0.250 + j 0.150) Ω or the machine is
connected to a public low-voltage power supply network with a rated power supply of 230 V, measured between life L and
neutral N, connected to a one or three phase public power supply with a constant current load of the power supply ≥ 100
A per phase, then it is also valid for the Dialog+ machine with the switch mode power supply microcontroller SMPS-MC.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8-5

Electromagnetic Immunity, Table 202

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

The Dialog+ machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the Dialog+ machine should assure that it is used in such an
environment.

Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment – guidance

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) acc. ± 6 kV contact ± 6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile. If floors are covered with synthetic material, the
to IEC 61000-4-2 relative humidity should be at least 30 %.
± 8 kV air ± 8 kV air

Electrical fast transient/burst acc. ± 2 kV for power supply ± 2 kV for power supply Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment.
to IEC 61000-4-4 lines lines
± 1 kV for input/output for ± 1 kV for input/output for
lines lines
Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 ± 1 kV line(s) to line(s) ± 1 kV differential mode Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment.
± 2 kV line(s) to earth ± 2 kV common mode

Voltage dips, short interruptions < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment. If the user of
and voltage variations on power (> 95 % dip in UT) (> 95 % dip in UT) the Dialog+ machine requires continued operation during power mains interruptions, it is
supply input lines acc. to IEC for 0.5 cycle) for 0.5 cycle) recommended that the Dialog+ machine be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or a
61000-4-11 battery.
40 % UT 40 % UT
(60 % dip in UT) (60 % dip in UT)
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles
70 % UT 70% UT
(30% dip in UT) (30% dip in UT)
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT
(>95 % dip in UT) (>95 % dip in UT)
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency (50/60 Hz) 3 A/m 3 A/m The power frequency magnetic field should be measured in the intended installation location to
magnetic field acc. to IEC 61000- assure that it is sufficiently low.
4-8

NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8-6

Electromagnetic Immunity, Table 204

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

The Dialog+ machine is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the Dialog+ machine should assure that it is used in such an
electromagnetic environment.

Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment – guidance

Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the Dialog+ machine,
including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the
frequency of the transmitter.1.2
Recommended separation distance:
Conducted RF 3 Veff 3 Veff d =1.2 P
acc. to IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d =1.2 P for 80 MHz to 800 MHz Note:
acc. to IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz The recommended distances are specified in the operating
3 V/m instructions (for software ≥ 9.xx), chapter 15.
80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
d = 2.33 P for 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in metres (m).
a
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, should be less than
b
the compliance level in each frequency range.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot
be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field
strength in the location in which the Dialog+ machine is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the Dialog+ machine should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the Dialog+ machine.
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8-7

8.2 Technical Information TI

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8-8

8.3 Assembly Instructions AI

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8-9

8.4 Field Service Information FSI

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 8. Appendix 1/2010 8 - 10

8.5 Instruction Leaflets IL

BA-TE-DE08C M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_sm_Chapter 8_1-2010.doc/pdf <100329> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG

Dialog+ SW 9.xx 9. Edition/Updates 1/2010 9-1

Edition Updates
Number Edition/Chapter/Paragraph Page Date
(yyyy-mm-dd)

0.1/2009 FAT Edition Dialog+ SW 9.xx Service Manual (English) 2009-09-09

1/2010 First Edition for Series, Dialog+ SW 9.xx Service Manual (English) 2010-03-29
1-1_1/2010 Revision Chapter 1 Commissioning 2011-03-01
4-1-1_1/2010 Revision Chapter 4 TSM Service Program 2011-03-01
4-2-1_1/2010
4-3-1_1/2010
5-1_1/2010 Revision Chapter 5 Technical Safety Inpsection and Preventive Maintenance 2011-03-01
9-1_1/2010 Revision Chapter 9 Edition/Updates 2011-03-01

BA-TE-DE08W M.KAY - Dialog+ SW9xx_SM_Chapter 9-1_1-2010.doc/pdf <110301> yymmdd B. Braun Avitum AG